AIR MONITORING FOR HAZARDOUS  MATERIALS

                                       (165.4)

                                        5 Days
This course instructs participants in the  practices and  procedures for monitoring  and sampling
airborne hazardous materials.  It is designed for personnel who evaluate releases of airborne
hazardous  materials at hazardous waste sites or accidental hazardous material releases.

Topics that are discussed include air monitoring and sampling programs, air monitoring and sampling
techniques, air monitoring and sampling equipment, instrument calibration, exposure guidelines, air
dispersion modeling, and health  and safety considerations.  The course will include operating
procedures for  specific air monitoring and sampling equipment, as well as strategies  for air
monitoring and sampling at abandoned hazardous waste sites and for accidental releases of hazardous
chemicals.

Instructional methods include a combination of lectures, group discussions, problem-solving sessions,
and laboratory and field exercises with hands-on use of instruments.

After completing the course, participants will be able to:

       •      Properly use the following types of air monitoring and sampling equipment:

                    Combustible gas indicators
                    Oxygen monitors
                    Detector tubes
                    Toxic gas monitors
                    Photoionization detectors
                    Flame  ionization detectors
                    Gas chromatographs
                    Sampling pumps
                    Direct-reading aerosol monitors.

       •      Identify the operational parameters, limitations, and data interpretation requirements
             for the instruments listed above.

       •      Identify  the factors to be considered  in the development  of  air monitoring  and
             sampling plans.

       •      Discuss  the use of air monitoring data for the establishment of personnel  and
             operations  health and safety requirements.
                        U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
                     Office of  Emergency and Remedial Response
                            Environmental Response Team

-------
                                    CONTENTS


                                                                               Section

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies	1

Exposure Limits and Action Levels	;	2

Oxygen Monitors, Combustible Gas Indicators, and
Specific Chemical Monitors	3

Total Vapor Survey Instruments	4

Air Sample Collection  	5

Introduction to Gas Chromatography  	6

Air Dispersion Modeling During Emergency Response	7

References  	8

Manufacturers and Suppliers of Air Monitoring Equipment	9

Workbook: Air Monitoring for Hazardous Materials	 10
10/93                                     v                                   Contents

-------
                     ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
ACGIH      American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
AID         argon ionization detector
AIHA        American Industrial Hygiene Association
ALOHA      areal locations of hazardous atmospheres
ANSI        American National Standards Institute
ASTM       American Society for Testing and Materials

BEI          biological exposure indices

C            ceiling (precedes exposure limit)
cc/min       cubic centimeters per minute
cfrn          cubic feet per minute
CFR         Code of Federal Regulations
CGI         combustible gas indicator
Cl           chlorine
CO          carbon monoxide

DNPH       2,4-dinitrophenylhydrazine
DQO        data quality objective

BCD         electron capture detector
EPA         U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
ERT         Environmental Response Team (EPA)
eV           electron volt

FID          flame ionization detector
FM          Factory Mutual Research Corporation

GC          gas chromatography

HC1          hydrogen chloride

ICS          incident command system
IDLH        immediately dangerous to life or health
IP           ionization potential

KOH        potassium hydroxide

LCD         liquid crystal display
LED         light-emitting diode
LEL         lower explosive limit
LFL         lower flammable limit
1pm          liters per minute
10/93
Acronyms and Abbreviations

-------
MACs        maximum allowable concentrations
MAKs        maximum concentrations at the workplace (Federal Republic of Germany)
MCE         mixed cellulose ester
mg/m3        milligrams per cubic meter
ml            milliliter
mm           millimeter
MOS         metal-oxide semiconductor
MSDS        material safety data sheets
MSHA        Mine Safety and Health Administration

NaOH        sodium hydroxide
NEC         National Electrical Code
NFPA        National Fire Protection Association
NIOSH        National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
NRC         Nuclear Regulatory Commission

OH           hydroxide
OSHA        Occupational Safety and Health Administration
OVA         organic vapor analyzer (Foxboro®)
OVM         organic vapor meter

PAH         polycyclic (or polynuclear) aromatic hydrocarbon
PBK          playback
PCS          polychlorinated biphenyl
PEL          permissible exposure limit
PID           photoionization detector
ppb           parts per billion
PPE          personal protective equipment
ppm          parts per million
ppt           parts per trillion
PDF          polyurethane foam
PVC          polyvinyl chloride

REL          recommended exposure limits

SA           shift average
SCBA        self-contained breathing apparatus
SEI           Safety Equipment Institute
SOP          standard operating procedure
SOSG        Standard Operating Safety Guides
SS            chemical-specific sensor
STEL        short-term exposure limit

TCD         thermal conductivity detector
TLV          threshold limit values
TWA         time-weighted average
Acronyms and Abbreviations                  2                                       10/93

-------
UEL          upper explosive limit
UL           Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc.
UV           ultraviolet light

VDC          volts DC

WEEL®       workplace environmental exposure level
JO/93                                     3                  Acronyms and Abbreviations

-------
   AIR MONITORING  PLANS
         AND STRATEGIES
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•    List six objectives of air monitoring specified by the EPA
     Standard Operating Safety Guides

•    Identify the OSHA standard and EPA standard that cover
     hazardous waste site operations and emergency response

•    List four situations that initial entry monitoring is designed
     to detect

•    Differentiate between  "personal  monitoring"  and "area
     monitoring"

•    Define, per  1910.120, when  personnel  monitoring is
     required

•    List documents that EPA has developed as guidance for
     compliance with 1910.120

•    Given the Personal Air Sampling  and Air Monitoring
     Requirements Under 29 CFR 1910.120 fact sheet, define air
     monitoring and air sampling

•    List three  uses of meteorological data.

-------
                                                 NOTES
  AIR MONITORING PLANS
      AND STRATEGIES
        AIR MONITORING
         EPA Objectives
 • Identify and quantify airborne
   contaminants onsite and offsite

 • Track changes in air contaminants that
   occur over the lifetime of the incident

 • Ensure proper selection of work practices
   and engineering controls

 Source: EPASOSGs
        AIR MONITORING
          EPA Objectives
  • Determine the level of worker protection
    needed

  • Assist in defining work zones

  • Identify additional medical monitoring
    needs in any given area of the site.
 Source: EPA SOSGs
10/93
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
     NOTES
                           WORKER PROTECTION
                            STANDARDS (OSHA)

                           29 CFR 1910.120 (HAZWOPER)

                           Applies to
                           - Federal employees
                           - Private industry employees
                           - State and local employees in
                             OSHA states
                           WORKER PROTECTION
                             STANDARDS (EPA)


                          40 CFR Part 311

                          Applies to state and local employees
                          in non-OSHA states

                          Wording same as 1910.120
                              MONITORING
                             REQUIREMENTS
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
           INITIAL ENTRY
   Monitoring for:

   •  Immediately dangerous to life or
     health (IDLH) conditions

   •  Exposures over permissible
     exposure limits (PELs) or published
     exposure levels
          INITIAL ENTRY
   Monitoring for:

   • Exposure over a radioactive
     material's dose limits

   • Other dangerous conditions
     - Flammable atmospheres
     - Oxygen-deficient environments
     PERIODIC MONITORING
  "Periodic monitoring (shall) be done
  when the possibility of a dangerous
  condition has developed or when there
  is reason to believe that exposures
  may have risen above PELs since prior
  monitoring was conducted."
 Source: EPA SOSGs
4194
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
      NOTES
                                 PERSONAL MONITORING


                                Required

                                •  During actual cleanup phase

                                •  To evaluate high-risk employees
                                  (i.e., employees likely to have
                                  highest exposures)

                                •  Evaluation of other employees
                                  needed if high-risk employees exceed
                                  exposure limits

                             Source: 19W.120(h)(4)
                                 PERSONAL MONITORING
                                   AREA MONITORING
                                         S = Area samplers
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                                 NOTES
        SITE SAFETY AND
          HEALTH PLAN
   Minimum requirement

   "Frequency and types of air monitoring,
   personnel monitoring, and environmental
   sampling techniques and instrumentation
   to be used, including methods of
   maintenance and calibration of monitoring
   and sampling equipment to be used."

 Source: 1910.120(b)(4)(ii)(E)
    GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS
    	OSHA	


      • Technical manual

      • Analytical methods manual
     GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS
   	EPA	

    EPA-ERT Standard Operating Safety
    Guides (SOSGs), Publication
    9285.1-03, June 1992

    Personal Air Sampling and Air
    Monitoring Requirements (PASAMR)
    Under 29 CFR 1910.120 fact sheet,
    Publication 9360.8-17FS, May 1993
4/94
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
      NOTES
                                   AIR MONITORING vs.
                                       AIR SAMPLING

                                Air monitoring refers to the use of
                                direct-reading instruments producing
                                instantaneous data

                                Air sampling refers to the use of a
                                sampling pump and collection media
                                that produce samples that must be
                                sent to a laboratory for analysis
                                     AIR MONITORING
                                          Features
                                  "Real time" (direct reading)

                                  Rapid response

                                  Generally not compound specific

                                  Limited detection levels

                                  May not detect certain classes of
                                  compounds
                                      AIR SAMPLING
                                          Features
                                Compound or class specific

                                Greater accuracy

                                Requires more time for results

                                Requires additional pumps, media,
                                and analytical support
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                                 NOTES
  PERSONNEL AIR SAMPLING
  Elements in Sampling Strategy

        • Employee sampled

        • Tasks performed

        • Duration

        • Hazardous substances

        • Equipment to be used
 Source: PASAMR fact sheet
        AREA SAMPLING
            Locations
      Upwind
      - Establish background

      Support zone
      - Ensure support area is clean
        and remains clean
Source; EPASOSGs
        AREA SAMPLING
             Locations
 •  Contamination reduction zone
   - Ensure that personnel in zone are
     properly protected
   - Ensure that onsite workers are not
     removing PPE in a contaminated area
 Source: EPA SOSGs
10/93
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
      NOTES
                                     AREA SAMPLING
                                          Locations
                               • Exclusion zone
                                - Represents greatest risk of exposure
                                - Requires most sampling
                                - Use data to set boundaries
                                - Use data to select proper levels of
                                  PPE
                                - Provide a record of air contaminants

                              Source: EPA SOSGs
                                      AREA SAMPLING
                                          Locations
                                Fenceline/downwind
                                -  Determine whether air contaminants
                                   are migrating from site
                              Source: EPASOSGs
                                     AREA SAMPLING
                              Elements in Sampling Strategy

                              • Locations where air sampling will be
                                performed

                              • Hazardous substances that will be
                                sampled during the task

                              • Duration of the sample

                             Source: PASAMR fact sheet
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                              NOTES
        AREA SAMPLING
  Elements in Sampling Strategy
   Equipment that will be used to sample
   for the different hazardous substances

   Collection of meteorological data
 Source; PASAMR fact sheet
      METEOROLOGICAL
       CONSIDERATIONS
    • Data needed
      - Wind speed and direction
      - Temperature
      - Barometric pressure
      - Humidity
       METEOROLOGICAL
       CONSIDERATIONS
   • Data uses
    -  Placement of samplers
    -  Input for air models
    -  Calibration adjustments

   • Data sources
    -  Onsite meteorological stations
    -  Government or private
       organizations
10/93
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
     NOTES
                               AIR DISPERSION MODELS
                                 Public exposure assessment

                                 Air monitoring and air modeling
                                 should interact
                             LONG-TERM AIR MONITORING
                                      PROGRAMS
                                   Considerations
                                     Type of equipment
                                     Cost
                                     Personnel
                                     Accuracy of analysis
                                     Time to obtain results
                                     Availability of analytical
                                     laboratories
                            Source: EPA SOSGs
                            LONG-TERM AIR MONITORING
                                      PROGRAMS
                              ERT Approach

                              • Use total vapor survey instruments
                                for organic vapors and gases
                                -  Initial detection
                                -  Periodic site surveys
                                -  Area monitors to track changes

                            Source: EPA SOSGs
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
 LONG-TERM AIR MONITORING
 	PROGRAMS	

    ERT Approach

    •  Collect air samples
      -  Analyze with field gas
         chromatographs
      -  Send selected samples to
         laboratories
    •  Use survey instruments or gas
      chromatographs to screen samples
      for laboratory analysis
 Source: EPASOSGs
 LONG-TERM AIR MONITORING

 	PROGRAMS	

    ERT Approach

    •  When they are known to be present
      or when there are indications that
      they may be a problem, sample for
      - Particulates
      - Inorganic acids
      - Aromatic amines
      - Halogenated pesticides

 Source: EPASOSGs
      ADDITIONAL READING
   Air/Superfund Technical Guidance Study
   Series
   - Volume IV - Guidance for Ambient Air
     Monitoring at Superfund Sites (revised),
     EPA-451/R-93-007, May 1993
   - Compilation of Information on Real-Time
     Monitoring for Use at Superfund Sites,
     EPA-451/R-93-008, May 1993
10/93
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
      NOTES
                                     INSTRUMENT
                                 CHARACTERISTICS
                                       SELECTIVITY
                             • Selectivity is an instrument's ability to
                               differentiate a chemical from others in
                               a mixture

                             • Chemicals that affect an instrument's
                               selectivity are called interferences
                                      SENSITIVITY
                                Sensitivity is the least change in
                                concentration that will register an
                                altered reading of the instrument
                            Source: Air Sampling and Analysis for Contaminants: An
                            Overview
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
10/93

-------
                                                     NOTES
   ACCURACY AND  PRECISION

  • Accuracy refers to the difference
    between the instrument reading and
    the true or correct value.

  • Precision is the grouping of the data
    points around a calculated average.
    Precision measures the repeatability
    of data.
  ACCURACY AND PRECISION
   Accurate and Precise
        ©
Precise but Inaccurate
         x
     ©
   Accurate but Imprecise     Inaccurate and Imprecise


 Source: The Industrial Environment • Its Evaluation and Control
       RELATIVE RESPONSE

    Relative response is the relationship
    between an instrument's reading and
    the actual concentration
    Calculation
     Relative Response =
Instrument Reading

Actual Concentration
JO/93
                      Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
       NOTES
                                          CALIBRATION
                                   Process of checking an instrument to
                                   see if it gives the proper response
                                   and making any necessary
                                   adjustments.

                                   Direct-reading instruments generally
                                   are calibrated to one chemical (the
                                   standard).
                                         RESPONSE TIME
                                  • Response time is the time between
                                    initial sample contact and readout
                                    of the full chemical concentration
                                    (usually seconds to minutes)

                                  • Turnaround time is the time from
                                    sample collection to receipt of
                                    results (days to weeks)
                                            MOBILITY
                                 • Portable
                                   - Handheld
                                   - No external power supply

                                 • Fieldable
                                   - Particularly rugged
                                   - Easily transported by vehicle
                                   - Limited external power supply

                                 • Mobile
                                   - Small  enough to carry in a mobile lab
                                Source: Field Screening Methods Catalog, EPAI540/2-88I005,
                                September 1888
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
4/94

-------
                                                       NOTES
       EASE OF OPERATION
  • How easy is it to operate the
    controls?
  • How easy is it to learn to operate?
  • How many steps must be performed
    before an answer is obtained?
  • How easy is it to repair?
        INHERENT SAFETY
                            32L6
                           LISTED
       APPROVED
      INTRINSICALLY SAFE COMBINATION
      COMBUSTIBLE GAS AND OXYGEN INDICATING
      DETECTOR FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS
      CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS A, B, C & D

 Source; Scott Model S-105 Certification Label
10/93
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
                AIR  MONITORING PLANS  AND STRATEGIES
INTRODUCTION

Airborne contaminants present at a hazardous waste site or a hazardous materials release can present
a risk to human health and the environment. One way to assess that risk is to identify and quantify
these contaminants by air monitoring.  The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's (EPA) Standard
Operating Safety  Guides  (SOSGs) state  that the objectives of air monitoring during response
operations are to:

       •      Identify and quantify airborne contaminants onsite and offsite

       •      Track changes in air contaminants that occur over the lifetime of the incident

       •      Ensure proper selection of work practices and engineering controls

       •      Determine the level of worker protection needed

       •      Assist in defining work zones

       •      Identify additional medical monitoring needs in any given area of the  site.

Several questions should be addressed when you develop an air monitoring plan.  Why is  the air
monitoring being done? How will the monitoring be done?  Who will do the monitoring? When and
where will the  air monitoring be done?  What equipment will be used?

The above list gives several reasons why air monitoring is done. Some organizations have developed
guidelines on the why, how, who, where, when, and what of air monitoring.  Some organizations
have procedures that are legal requirements.  These organizations will be discussed.  Also, general
equipment characteristics will be covered in the latter part of this section.


STANDARDS AND GUIDELINES


U.S.  Department  of Labor - Occupational Safety and Health Administration  (OSHA)

Since 1971,  OSHA  has regulated  exposure to chemicals  in industry.  29 CFR Part  1910.1000
specifies limits on exposure to airborne concentrations of chemicals.  See the section on Exposure
Limits and Action Levels for further information.

On March 6, 1990, OSHA's Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response standard (29
CFR Part 1910.120) went into effect.  This standard addressed the legal requirements for protecting
workers  involved  with hazardous  waste  or  emergency responses to hazardous  materials.  Air
monitoring is one of the many activities regulated by  this standard.
10/93                                      1           Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
The standard requires the site- specific safety and health plan to address:

       Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and environmental
       sampling  techniques and instrumentation  to  be  used,  including  methods  of
       maintenance  and calibration  of monitoring and  sampling equipment to be used.
Under section (c) Site characterization and analysis is:

       (6) Monitoring.  The following monitoring shall be conducted during initial site entry
       when the site evaluation produces information that shows the potential for ionizing
       radiation or IDLH (Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health) conditions, or when
       the site information is not sufficient reasonably to eliminate these possible conditions:

              (i)  Monitoring with direct-reading  instruments for hazardous levels
              of radiation.

              (ii) Monitoring the air with appropriate direct-reading test equipment
              (e.g., combustible  gas meter,  detector tubes)  for  IDLH and other
              conditions that may cause death or  serious harm (combustible or
              explosive atmospheres, oxygen deficiency, toxic substances).

              (Hi) Visually observing for signs of actual or potential IDLH or other
              dangerous conditions.

              (iv)  An  ongoing  air  monitoring  program  in  accordance  with
              paragraph (h)  of  this  section  shall  be implemented  after  site
              characterization  has determined the  site is safe for the  startup of
              operations.

This section states when monitoring should  be done (site entry), why it is done (to identify IDLH
conditions), and what kind of equipment to  use.   Additional requirements are  found  under (h)
Monitoring.

       (1) General

              (i)  Monitoring shall be performed in accordance with this paragraph
              where there may be a question of  employee exposure to hazardous
              concentrations of hazardous substances in order  to assure proper
              selection  of engineering  controls,  work practices and personal
              protective equipment  so that employees are not  exposed to levels
              which exceed permissible exposure limits or published exposure levels
              for hazardous substances.

              (ii) Air monitoring shall  be used to identify and quantify airborne
              levels of hazardous substances and safety and health hazards in order
              to determine the appropriate level of employee protection needed on
              site.


Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies            2                                        10/93

-------
Here the purpose (why) is to identify and  quantify hazardous substances  so that proper exposure
controls are used.   The substances are identified and quantified so that the concentrations can be
compared to an exposure limit.  See the Exposure Limits and Action  Levels section for further
information on exposure limits.

       (2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, representative air monitoring shall be conducted
       to identify  any  IDLH  condition, exposure over permissible  exposure  limits  or
       published exposure levels, exposure over a radioactive material's dose limits or other
       dangerous condition such as the presence of flammable atmospheres or oxygen-
       deficient environments.

This paragraph expands on site characterization and analysis paragraph (c)(6) by including exposure
limits along with IDLH conditions to monitor.

       (3) Periodic monitoring.  Periodic monitoring shall be conducted when the possibility
       of an IDLH condition or flammable atmosphere has developed or when there  is
       indication that exposures  may  have  risen  over permissible  exposure  limits  or
       published exposure levels  since  prior monitoring.   Situations  where it shall  be
       considered whether the possibility that exposures have risen are as follows:

               ft) When work begins on a different portion of the site.

               (ii)  When contaminants other than those previously identified are
              being handled.

               (in)   When a different type  of  operation is initiated  (e.g.,  drum
              opening as opposed to exploratory well drilling).

               (iv)  When employees are handling leaking drums or containers  or
              working in areas with obvious liquid contamination (e.g., a spill  or
              lagoon).

Again, where, when, and  why are covered.

       (4)  Monitoring of high-risk employees.   After  the  actual cleanup phase  of any
       hazardous waste operation commences; for example, when soil, surface water,  or
       containers are moved or disturbed; the employer shall monitor those employees likely
       to have the highest exposure to hazardous substances and health hazards likely to be
       present above permissible  exposure limits or published exposure levels by using
       personal sampling frequently enough to  characterize employee  exposures.  If the
       employees likely to have the highest exposure are over permissible exposure limits
       or  published  exposure  limits,  then  monitoring  shall  continue to determine  all
       employees likely to be above those limits. The employer may utilize a representative
       sampling approach by documenting that the employees and chemical chosen for
       monitoring are based on the criteria stated above.

       Note to (h):  It is not required to monitor employees engaged in site characterization
       operations covered by paragraph (c) of this section.


10/93                                        3            Air Monitoring  Plans  and Strategies

-------
These paragraphs state that personal monitoring (how) must be done on high-risk employees (who)
during cleanup activities (when).

Section (q) of 1910.120 addresses emergency responses to hazardous substance releases.  It states
in (q)(3)(ii) that

       the individual in charge of the ICS (Incident Command System) shall identify, to the
       extent possible, all hazardous substances or conditions present and shall address as
       appropriate site analysis, use of engineering controls,  maximum exposure limits,
       hazardous substances handling procedures, and use of any new technologies.

Air monitoring is not specifically mentioned in section (q), but would be a useful, if not necessary,
tool for assessment.

29 CFR 1910.120 is a federal regulation. In states where there is an approved state OSHA (state-
plan state), requirements at least as stringent as 1910.120 must be developed.  Thus, in some states
the air monitoring requirements may be more detailed.
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

On June 23,  1989, EPA adopted 40 CFR Part 311,  Worker Protection Standards for Hazardous
Waste Operations and Emergency  Response.   This  standard  is a duplicate  of 1910.120.  The
difference in the standards is to whom they apply.  The OSHA standard applies to federal agencies,
private industries, and public employees in OSHA state-plan states.  The EPA standard applies to
public employees in states that have no OSHA state-plan.

As noted in the previous  paragraph, EPA has regulations for monitoring for worker protection.
There are also requirements for monitoring for public  protection.  However, this subject will not be
discussed here in detail. Additional information is mentioned in this manual in the Exposure Limits
and Action Levels section.

EPA  has published guidelines  for hazardous material operations  which include air monitoring
procedures. General guidelines can be found in the SOSGs.  The following topics are discussed in
the SOSGs:

       1.     Objectives  of air monitoring
       2.     Identifying airborne contaminants
       3,     Air sampling equipment and media
       4.     Sample collection and analysis
       5.     General monitoring practices
       6.     Meteorological considerations
       7.     Long-term air monitoring programs
       8.     Variables in hazardous waste  site air monitoring
       9.     Using  vapor/gas concentrations to determine level of protection.
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies            4                                        10/93        ^

-------
Other EPA guidance documents are:

•      Personal Air Sampling and Air Monitoring Requirements Under 29 CFR 1910.120 fact sheet
•      Guidance for Ambient Air Monitoring at Superfund Sites, Volume IV in the Air/Superfund
       National Technical Guidance Series
•      Compilation of Information on Real-Time Monitoring for use at Superfund Sites
•      Removal Program Representative Sampling:  Air
•      A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods.

EPA's Environmental Response Team (ERT) has developed standard operating procedures for their
air monitoring equipment and strategies.  These documents provide information on the why, how,
when,  where, and what of air monitoring.  Because EPA is concerned with offsite migration  and
public exposure along with worker protection, their sampling requirements are broader than OSHA's.
Air monitoring is done  onsite to  determine the type and quantity of chemicals  being released.
Downwind monitoring is done to determine offsite migration. Upwind sampling is done to determine
what background concentrations may be  contributing to the downwind and onsite measurements.
This helps determine what the site is contributing to the environment.

Some of the methods use air monitoring equipment to monitor for the presence of chemicals in media
other than air (e.g., soil  gas sampling and water headspace).
Other Organizations

The National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the American Conference of
Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA),
and the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) have publications about air monitoring
strategies.  See the References section of this manual for more information.
CHARACTERISTICS OF AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS

The selection of equipment to be used must be part of the air monitoring plan.  There are many
factors to consider when determining the proper equipment to use.  Specific instrument characteristics
related to the following factors can be found in later sections of this manual.
Hazard

The proper equipment must be selected to monitor the hazard or chemical at hand.


Selectivity

Selectivity  is the  ability of an instrument to detect  and  measure a specific  chemical.   If other
chemicals  are detected, they are called interferences.  Interferences can affect the accuracy of the
instrument reading. In some situations, an instrument (like the combustible gas indicator [CGI]) that



JO/93                                       5            Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
responds to more than one chemical  is desired.  Again, the purpose of the monitoring must be
considered.
Sensitivity

Sensitivity is important when slight concentration changes can be dangerous. Sensitivity is defined
as the ability of an instrument to accurately measure changes in concentration. Therefore, 'sensitive"
instruments can detect small changes in concentration.
Accuracy

Accuracy is the measure of how close readings are to true values.  It is expressed as % bias.  For
example,  if  an  instrument is tested  and the  average  results are  15% higher  than the true
concentration, ihen the  instrument is said to  have a bias of +15%.  NIOSH recommends that a
portable direct-reading instrument be within 25% of the true value 95% of the time.
Precision

Precision is the grouping of the data points. It is a quantitative measure of the variability of a group
of measurements compared to their average value.  It is defined  by the standard deviation.  This
value is a ± qualifier when a value is reported  (e.g.,  10+1 ppm).

Accuracy and precision  are affected by factors such as the  instrument's calibration and relative
response,
Calibration

An instrument must be properly calibrated, prior to use, in order to function properly in the field.
Calibration  is the process of adjusting the instrument readout so that  it corresponds to an actual
concentration.  Calibration involves checking the instrument results with a known concentration of
a gas or vapor to see that the instrument gives the proper response.  For example, if a combustible
gas meter is checked with a calibration gas that is 20% of the lower explosive limit (LEL), then the
instrument should read 20% of the LEL.  If it does not read accurately, it is out of calibration and
should be adjusted until an accurate reading is obtained.

Although an instrument  is calibrated to give a  one-to-one  response for a specific chemical  (the
calibration gas), its response to other chemicals is usually different (see Relative Response below).
If the calibration is changed for an instrument,  its  relative responses will also  change.   Also, the
instrument may  not give a  one-to-one response to the chemical  for the  full range of detection  (see
detection range).

Instruments come from  the manufacturer calibrated to  a specific chemical.   The manufacturer
supplies information about how to  maintain  that  calibration.   If the  user wants  to  change the
calibration gas,  the manufacturer can supply information on how to do  so.


Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies            5                .                         10/93

-------
Relative Response

Whereas some instruments may detect more than one chemical, equal concentrations may not give
equal response. The relationship between the instrument's response and the actual concentration of
the chemical is termed the "relative response."  Relative response can be calculated by using  the
following formula:

         Relative Response  =   Instrument ^ading  (x m% far %  ^^ Response)
                             Actual Concentration


For example, if an instrument reading for a 100 ppm concentration of acetone is 63, then the relative
response for that instrument and  acetone is 0.63 or 63%.   Table 1  gives  relative response
information for a particular CGI.

                 TABLE 1. RELATIVE RESPONSE OF SELECTED CHEMICALS
                           FOR A CGI CALIBRATED TO PENTANE
Concentration
Chemical {% LED
Methane
Acetylene
Pentane
1,4-Dioxane
Xylene
50
50
50
50
50
Meter Response
(% LEU
85
60
50
37
27
Relative Response
(%)
170
120
100
74
54
             Source: Portable Gas Indicator, Model 250 and 260, Response Curves,
             Mine Safety Appliances Company, Pittsburgh, PA.

Relative responses vary with chemical  and instrument.  The same chemical  may have a relative
response of 63% for one instrument and 120% response for another. Calibration also affects relative
response.

Instruments come from the manufacturer calibrated to a specific chemical.  If the instrument is being
used for a chemical  that is  not the calibration standard, then  it may  be possible to look at the
manufacturer's information to get the relative response of that instrument for the chemical.  Then
the actual concentration can  be calculated.  For example, if the instrument's relative response for
xylene is 0.27 (27%) and the reading is 100 ppm (parts per million), then the actual concentration
is 370 ppm (0.27 x actual concentration = 100 ppm; actual concentration  = 100/0.27 = 370 ppm).

If there is no relative response data for the chemical in  question, it may be possible to recalibrate
the instrument.  If the instrument has adjustable settings and a known concentration is available, the
instrument may  be adjusted to read directly for the chemical.  Because recalibration takes time, this
is usually done  only  if the instrument is going to be used for many measurements  of the special
chemical.
10/93                                       7            Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
Detection Range

The operating range is the lower and upper use limits of the instrument.  It is defined by the lower
detection limit at one end and the saturation concentration at the other end. The lower detection limit
is the lowest concentration to which an instrument will respond.  It is important to use an instrument
with an operating range that will accurately measure the concentration in the range of concern.  For
example, a CGI could be used to monitor for methane because methane is combustible.  However,
the upper limit of the CGI is the lower  explosive limit (LEL) of the chemical.   LEL is the lowest
concentration of gas or vapor (in air) that will burn or explode if an ignition source is present at
ambient temperatures. In this case, that  would be 5% methane.  If higher concentrations of methane
need to be quantified,  another type of instrument would be needed.  Also, most CGIs are  not
sensitive to ppm concentrations.  A different instrument would be needed to measure that range.

Some instruments may respond to the chemical for a range of concentrations but not give a consistent
response throughout the range.   The linear  range is the range of concentrations over which  the
instrument gives response proportional to the chemical concentration.
Response Time

Response time is the time between initial  sample contact  and readout  of the  full chemical
concentration. In direct-reading instruments, a rapid response time is desired.  Response time for
direct-reading instruments can be from seconds to minutes.  The HNU PI-101 gives 90% of full-scale
concentration in 3 seconds.  Some hydrogen cyanide detectors may take 90 seconds to give a full
concentration reading.   Factors that affect  response time are temperature,  type of detector, and
sample hose length.

For methods  that  require air sample collection and analysis,  the response time is referred to as the
turnaround time.  In other words, how long was the period of time between collection of the  sample
and receipt of results from the laboratory?
Mobility

EPA's Field Screening Methods Catalog uses the following terms:

       •      Portable—Hand-held devices that can be easily carried by one person and require no
              external power source.

       •      Fieldable—Easily transported in a van, pick-up, or four-wheel drive.  Particularly
              rugged and limited external power required.

       •      Mobile—Small enough to carry in a mobile lab.  Power consideration may limit the
              use of many instruments in mobile laboratories. (Size, durability, and power supply
              are the main considerations in determining the mobility of an instrument.)
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies            8                                        10/93

-------
Ease of Operation

Because many of these instruments were designed for industrial use, allowances may not have been
made for using the instrument while wearing protective equipment.  One must consider how easy it
is to use the instrument while wearing gloves or how difficult it is to read the meter while wearing
a respirator.  Also, how quickly  a user can learn to  operate the  instrument correctly should be
considered.

Preparation time for use of the instrument should be short.  Rapid warm-up, easy attachment of
accessories,  and quick instrument  checks shorten preparation time.
Direct-Reading vs. Sample Analysis

Direct-reading instruments are those that give a response to a chemical within seconds or minutes
of contact.  They are also meant to be taken to the location that is to be evaluated. Sample analysis,
however, involves collecting an air sample on a media or in a container and then sending it to an
analytical laboratory.  This type of analysis involves much more time—sometimes days longer—than
using a direct-reading instrument.
Personal vs. Area Monitor/Sampler

A personal monitor/sampler is one that can be worn by the worker with the intent of obtaining the
exposure for the wearer.  An area monitor/sampler obtains information for the area in which it is
placed.  A personal monitor/sampler must be small enough to be worn by the worker and also must
have a battery supply if it is electronic.  A personal monitor/sampler is the ultimate in portability.
They  range in size from  pocket size to a size that can be  clipped to a belt without hindering the
wearer. Area samplers can be much larger and can use AC power. Many of the personal monitors
are equipped with warning alarms and with dataloggers to store and calculate exposures.
Inherent Safety

Many of the instruments used for air monitoring will be used in the atmosphere being monitored.
Therefore, they must be safe to use in that environment.  Electrical devices, including instruments,
must be constructed to prevent the ignition of a combustible atmosphere.  The sources of this ignition
could be an arc generated by the power source itself or the associated electronics, or a flame or heat
source necessary for function of the instrument.  The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
publishes the National Electrical  Code (NEC), which spells out types of areas in which hazardous
atmospheres can be generated and the types of materials that generate these atmospheres. It also lists
design safeguards acceptable for  use in hazardous atmospheres.
10/93                                        9            Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
Hazardous Atmospheres

The term "hazardous atmosphere" causes response workers, depending on their backgrounds, to
imagine  situations ranging from  toxic air contaminants  to  flammable  atmospheres.   For NEC
purposes, an atmosphere is hazardous if it meets the following criteria:

       •      It is a mixture of any flammable material  in air whose concentration is within the
              material's flammable range (i.e., between the material's  lower flammable limit and
              its upper flammable limit).

       •      There is  the potential for an ignition source to be present.

       •      The resulting exothermic reaction could propagate beyond where it started.

To adequately describe hazardous atmospheres, the NEC categorizes them according to their class, group,
and division.  Class is a category describing the type of flammable material  that produces the hazardous
atmosphere:

       •      Class I is flammable vapors and gases, such as gasoline and hydrogen. Class I is further
              divided into Groups A, B, C, and D on the basis of similar flammability characteristics
              (Table 2).

       •      Class II consists of combustible dusts like coal or grain and  is divided into groups E, F,
              and G (Table 3).

       •      Class III  is ignitable fibers such as those produced by cotton milling.

                    TABLE 2. SELECTED CLASS I CHEMICALS BY GROUP
  Group
               Examples of Chemicals Within Group
  Group A Atmospheres   acetylene

  Group B Atmospheres   1,3-butadiene

  Group C Atmospheres   carbon monoxide
                         diethyl ether
                         dicyclopentadiene
                         ethyl mercaptan
                     ethylene oxide

                     ethylene
                     hydrazine
                     hydrogen sulfide
                     methyl ether
                        hydrogen

                        nitropropane
                        tetrahydrofuran
                        tetramethyl lead
                        triethylamine
  Group D Atmospheres
acetone
ammonia
benzene
ethanol
fuel oils
gasoline
liquified petroleum gas
methane
methyl ethyl ketone
propane
vinyl chloride
xylenes
   Source:  NFPA.  1991.  Classification of Gases, Vapors, and Dusts for Electrical Equipment in
   Hazardous (classified) Locations.  National Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA 497M.
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
                   10
                                        10/93

-------
                    TABLE 3. SELECTED CLASS II CHEMICALS BY GROUP
   Group                         Characteristics of Group
   Group E Conductive Dusts       Atmospheres containing metal dusts, including aluminum,
                                  magnesium, and their commercial alloys, and other metals
                                  of similarly hazardous characteristics
   Group F Semivolatile Dusts      Atmospheres containing carbon black, coal, or coke dust
                                  with more than 8% volatile material
   Group G Nonconductive Dusts   Atmospheres containing flour, starch, grain, carbonaceous,
                                  chemical thermoplastic, thermosetting and molding
                                  compounds.

   Source: NFPA.  1991.  Classification of Gases,  Vapors, and Dusts for Electrical Equipment
   in Hazardous (classified) Locations.   National  Fire Protection Association, ANSI/NFPA
   497M.

Division is the term  describing the "location" of generation and release of the flammable material.

       •      Division 1 is a location where the generation and release are continuous, intermittent,
              or periodic  into an open, unconfmed area under  normal conditions.  Instruments
              certified for Division  1 locations are also called "intrinsically safe."

       •      Division 2 is a location where the generation and release  are only from ruptures,
              leaks, or other failures from closed systems or containers.

Using this system, a hazardous atmosphere can be routinely and adequately defined. As an example,
an abandoned waste  site containing intact closed drums of methyl ethyl ketone, toluene and xylene
would be considered a Class I, Division 2, Group D environment. However, when transfer of the
flammable liquids takes place at the  site, or if releases of flammable gases/vapors are  considered
normal, those areas would be considered Class I, Division 1.
Certification

If a device is certified for a given class, division, and group, and it is used, maintained, and serviced
according to the manufacturer's instructions, it will not contribute  to ignition.  The device is not,
however, certified for use in atmospheres other than those indicated.  All certified devices  must be
marked to show  class,  division,  and group  (Figure  1).  Any manufacturer wishing to have an
electrical device certified must submit a prototype to a recognized laboratory for testing.  If the unit
passes, it is certified as submitted. However, the manufacturer agrees to allow the testing laboratory
to randomly check the manufacturing plant at any time, as well as any marketed units. Furthermore,
any change in the unit requires the manufacturer to notify the test laboratory, which can continue the
certification or withdraw it until the modified unit can be retested.  NFPA does not do certification
testing.  Testing and certification  is done by such organizations as  Underwriters' Laboratory, Inc.
(UL) or Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FM).
10/93                                        n            Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------
                                                                 32L6

                                                             LISTED
                   APPROVED

                INTRINSICALLY SAFE COMBINATION

                COMBUSTIBLE  GAS AND OXYGEN  INDICATING

                DETECTOR FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

                CLASS I, DIVISION 1, GROUPS A, B, C &  D
               FIGURE 1. CERTIFICATION LABEL FROM SCOTT® MODEL S-105
                          COMBUSTIBLE GAS AND 02 INDICATOR

To ensure personnel safety, only approved instruments can be used onsite and only in atmospheres
for which they have been  certified.  When investigating incidents involving unknown hazards, the
monitoring instruments should be rated for use in the most hazardous locations.  The following points
will assist in selection of equipment that will not contribute to ignition of a hazardous atmosphere:

       •      The mention of a certifying group in the manufacturer's equipment literature does not
              guarantee certification.

       •      Some organizations test and certify instruments for locations different from the NEC
              classifications.    The Mine  Safety  and  Health  Administration  (MSHA) tests
              instruments only for use in methane-air atmospheres and in atmospheres containing
              coal dust.

       •      In  an area designated Division 1, there is a greater probability of generating a
              hazardous  atmosphere than in Division 2.    Therefore, the  test protocols for
              Division 1  certification are more stringent than those for Division 2. Thus, a device
              approved for Division 1  is also permitted for use in Division 2,  but not vice versa.
              For most response work, this means that devices approved for Class 1 (vapors and
              gases), Division 1 (areas of ignitable concentrations), Groups A, B, C, and D should
              be  chosen whenever possible. At a minimum, an instrument should be approved for
              use in Division 2 locations.

       •      There are so many groups, classes, and divisions that it may not be possible to certify
              an  all-inclusive  instrument.  Therefore, select a certified  device based on the
              chemicals  and conditions  most likely to be encountered.  For  example, a device
              certified for a Class II,  Division 1, Group  E  (combustible metal dust) would offer
              little protection around a flammable vapor or gas.
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
12
10/93

-------
Accessories or Options

Many manufacturers offer accessories or options for their instruments.  A useful option is an alarm
to alert the user that a concentration level has been exceeded.  This is  a common feature on CGIs
and oxygen meters.

A recent addition to instruments are microprocessors/dataloggers.  This combination can help the
operator calibrate the instrument, store calibration information, make adjustments to the instrument,
store readings so that a readout of concentrations at specific locations or times can be made at the
end of a monitoring period, and report the data.  Some units may even do time-weighted averaging
of the concentrations. Some instruments can transfer this information into an external computer for
storage and data manipulation.

Other accessories and options include special  sample probes, special carrying cases, and the ability
to change detectors in an instrument.
DATA QUALITY

The Characteristics of Air Monitoring Instruments section discussed instrument characteristics (e.g.,
accuracy, selectivity, and sensitivity) that  affect the quality  of the data from the air monitoring
instruments.  Data quality is a concern and EPA has published a document entitled Data Quality
Objectives for Remedial Response Activities (U.S. EPA 1987) that discusses how to address this
concern.

The data quality objectives (DQOs) basically state that the desired quality of data determines the
amount of time and effort needed to produce the result. There are different levels of data quality.
Table 4 illustrates this point.  The  higher the analytical level,  the better the quality of data.
However, higher analytical levels usually require more time and money.
CONCLUSION

The desired air monitoring instrument is  one that is portable, direct-reading,  easy to  use,  and
accurate and precise.  The instrument should also respond quickly, be capable of detecting ppb and
% concentrations, be inherently  safe, identify and give concentrations of all the chemicals  and
hazards in an  atmosphere,  and do its job while the operator is sitting at a safe  distance  from the
hazardous material site or spill. Unfortunately, no  instrument meets these criteria.  Thus, a variety
of instruments are needed depending on the air monitoring plan.

When preparing an air monitoring plan, the operator must determine why, how,  when, and where
the monitoring is to be done and what equipment  is necessary.   In addition, there  are legal
requirements to comply with.  Guidance documents are available to assist in complying with these
requirements.   Other factors must also be considered when selecting the monitoring equipment.
Additional information on why to sample, or what to  sample for, will be covered in the Exposure
Limits and Action Levels section of the course.  Characteristics of the various types of equipment will
also be  discussed in later sections.
JO/93                                        13           Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies

-------















V)
LU
: z
3 £ H °
CC t 0 i=
fegS5
2 Q t£ —
,IZ°i
S: < 0 S




0
ii
£1
W D
sg
£2°M
2i§
1 § 1
|!ci
? Z 0
'



u
• TOTAL ORGANIC/INORGANI
VAPOR DETECTION USING
PORTABLE INSTRUMENTS
- FIELD TEST KITS




_j
>
UJ








Z
O
S o
M 2 Z
£§°
£§S
0 0 £
< 2 5
< CC S
i o S
0 5 5!
UJ Z  *** 2
O Q v 5
z S! -"5
^ >- — 1 ^
0 o < £
i- a! y z
z | o. g
oS fco
f S 28
O. uj ^" W
*" >- < -»
Q w o ?




en
V-
z
2 o v
K K <
l£t
= ^°«-
t II§
f IS!*
z o 5 =;
UI LU ^ O
H h- 2 >




j3
> a
m • - u >- >
3$ t 55
Is 1 I?
°1 B' 11
o S « §2
v cc 2 o 2 o
£ 0 5 E j- J
as ? o as
CC .. u. z ij K O
< o tc a a. ui £
> O X K 
UJ






(ft
i
^
(-
<
2E 5
II
S H Z 0
|5i|g
a u. ^ 3 p
j: o D o <
0 z 0 (5 H
5 0 2 2 £
S p u: c 3
^§ai?§
0 3 ? 50!
!^
« 3 S




uj u.
5 °
S 2»
s 2£
9 g|g
> |5>-
52 o:22
is H>
K (J U 
UJ






V)
>
H
rf
z ^
o i
_s§5i!g
5 P 7f < ; "j
*0 ° 3 2 t ol
S|P<|oS
E o. 5) uj £ 5




z
o
z
*:
S °
O o
< 3
< °
0 «>
at o
a!3 5
35 0
a a cc



CO
O UJ
S a
z cc <
£!s is
ii 2|
p 5 So
S< 5§
9i 5&
UJ (ft UJ 5
> I 5 9
S z P ^
<0 u,>
z z S cc
UJ u- O O
HO W u.





>
UJ






C/l
>
^
t-
<

z
cc
z§5!
li°°
sISl
yj vjj )_ CC
^fc
>
UJ










1- °
11
M i
(/i £
2fc
* 0
«cc
S £














co
8
f~.
oo
/540/G-!
S
01
.8
.***
>
'6
X
%j
S
o
for Remedial Resp
2
•5
*-*
0
*>
'rs>
§
>.
O
1 &
Olg
« W)
a<
s§
Ssl
O\ O
w > >^
-<£
. —
< s
a. c
r^ rt 1
C
^1
D -c
>
a) UJ
S w
S 00
•r^ i
c^D
Air Monitoring Plans and Strategies
14
10/93

-------
    EXPOSURE  LIMITS AND
           ACTION  LEVELS
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•    Identify the three sources of exposure  limits specified in
     OSHA's 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and
     Emergency Response standard

•    Define the terms "time-weighted  average  (TWA) limit,"
     "short-term exposure limit," and "ceiling limit"

•    Given the identity and concentration of a chemical exposure,
     determine whether an exposure limit is exceeded

•    Calculate an 8-hour TWA exposure when given a chemical's
     exposure concentration and the duration of the exposure

•    List the three uses  mentioned in  1910.120 for exposure
     limits

•    List three of the five applications for which the American
     Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists states the
     threshold limit values should not be used

•    List EPA's action levels for oxygen, combustible gas,  and
     radiation and the actions associated with each level.

-------
                                            NOTES
 EXPOSURE LIMITS AND
      ACTION LEVELS
      EXPOSURE LIMITS
    (29 CFR Part 1910.120)
  Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs)
  - 29CFRPart1910,SubpartsG
     and Z, Occupational Safety and
     Health Administration (OSHA)
      EXPOSURE LIMITS
    (29 CFR Part 1910.120)
   Published Exposure Levels
   - NIOSH Recommendations for
     Occupational Health Standards,
     1986
   - American Conference of
     Governmental Industrial Hygienists1
     (ACGIH) Threshold Limit values
     (TLVs) and Biological Exposure
     Indices (BEIs) for 1987-1988
10/93
Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
     NOTES
                                 EXPOSURE LIMITS
                                       Sources
                             OSHA
                             -  PELs
                             -  Legal requirements
                             -  1968 TLVs and American National
                                Standards Institute (ANSI)
                             -  29 CFR 1910.1000 (tables)
                             -  Specific standards - benzene
                                 EXPOSURE LIMITS
                                       Sources
                              National Institute for Occupational
                              Safety and Health (NIOSH)
                              - Recommended exposure limits
                                (RELs)
                              - May be legal (1910.120)
                              - Rationale in criteria documents
                              - Immediately dangerous to life or
                                health (IDLH)
                                 EXPOSURE LIMITS
                                       Sources
                                 ACGIH
                                 - TLVs
                                 - Recommendations
                                 - May be legal (1910.120)
                                 - Yearly booklet
                                 - Documentation
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
10/93

-------
                                              NOTES
   EXPOSURE GUIDELINES
            Sources
     American Industrial Hygiene
     Association (AIHA)
     - Workplace environmental
        exposure levels (WEELs)
     - Recommendations
     - Yearly updates
     - Documentation
   EXPOSURE GUIDELINES
            Sources
   Other
   -  U.S. Army and U.S. Air Force
   -  Mine Safety and Health
      Administration (MSHA)
   -  Other countries (e.g., Federal
      Republic of Germany maximum
      concentration values in the
      workplace (MAKs))
      TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE
              (TWA)
     c
     o
    Q)
    O
    C
    o
    O
       750
                         TWA-EL
        6AM
10AM

Time
                         3PM
10/93
                     Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
      NOTES
                                  TIME-WEIGHTED AVERAGE CALCULATION
                                     Exposures:  1500 ppm for 1 hour
                                             500 ppm for 3 hours
                                             200 ppm for 4 hours
                                     (1 hr)(1500 ppm) + (3 hrs)(500 ppm) + (4 hrs)(200 ppm)
                                                  8hrs
                                     1500 ppm -I- 1500 ppm + 800 ppm

                                             8
                   475 ppm
                                      SHORT-TERM EXPOSURE LIMIT
                                                 (STEL)
                                     c
                                     o
                                     w
                                     2
                                     -*-»
                                     0)
                                     o
                                     c
                                     0
                                     O
                                        1000
750 -
                                                               STEL
                       TWA-EL
                                           6AM
                                                               3PM
                                                 STEL
                                    Excursions to the STEL

                                    •  Should not be longer than 15
                                       minutes in duration (OSHA, NIOSH,
                                       ACGIH)

                                    •  Should be at least 60 minutes
                                       apart (ACGIH)

                                    •  Should not be repeated more than
                                       4 times per day (ACGIH)

                                    •  Supplement TWA
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                            10/93

-------
                                                          NOTES
                 CEILING
                   (C)
                               Ceiling
                                3PM
               CEILING
 The exposure that shall not be exceeded
 during any part of the work day. If
 instantaneous monitoring is not feasible,
 the ceiling shall be assessed as a 15-minute
 TWA exposure (unless otherwise specified)
 that shall not be exceeded at any time
 during a work day
Source: NIOSH Recommendations for Occupational Safety and Health. 1092.
COMPARISON OF EXPOSURE LIMITS
Chemical
Acetone
Benzene
Lead (mg/m8)
Benzaldehyde
OSHA NIOSH
1000* 250
1/5 0.1 /C1
0.05 <0.1
NA NA
ACGIH
750/1000
10 (0.1)
0.15 (0.05)
NA
Note: * units are ppm; TWA/STH
( ) indicates intended change
4/94
Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
       NOTES
                                    	IDLH	

                                     "...means an atmospheric concentration
                                     of any toxic, corrosive, or asphyxiant
                                     substance that poses an immediate threat
                                     to life or would cause irreversible or
                                     delayed adverse health effects or would
                                     interfere with an individual's ability to
                                     escape from a dangerous atmosphere."
                                   Source' 29 CFR 1910 120(e)
                                                    IDLH
                                   IDLH concentrations represent the maximum
                                   concentration from which, in the event of
                                   respirator failure, one could escape within
                                   30 minutes without a respirator  and without
                                   experiencing any escape-impairing or
                                   irreversible health effects.

                                   Note: IDLH level defined by the Standards
                                        Completion Program - NIOSH/OSHA -
                                        only for purposes of respirator selection
                                                IDLH VALUES
                                                  Examples
                                      Chemical
IDLH
                                      Acetone
                                      Benzene
                                      Lead
                                      Tetraethyl lead
                                      Benzaldehyde

                                  Source: NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards. 1990.
20,000 ppm (LEL?)
Ca (3000 ppm)
700 mg/m3
40 mg/m3
Not available
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                  10/93

-------
  EVALUATION OF A MIXTURE
      = C/L1+C2/L2  +... Cn/Ln
   Em = the equivalent exposure for the mixture

   C  = the concentration of a particular contaminant

   L = the exposure limit for that contaminant
   EVALUATION OF A MIXTURE
              Example
   Chemical A C = 500 ppm  L = 750 ppm (TWA)
   Chemical B C = 200 ppm  L = 500 ppm (TWA)
   Chemical C C = 50 ppm  L = 200 ppm (TWA)
     Em = (500/750) + (200/500) + (50/200)
     Em = 0.67 + 0.40 + 0.25
  EVALUATION OF A MIXTURE
   Em should not exceed 1
   •m
  The calculation applies to chemicals
  where the effects are the same and
  are additive

  Do not mix TWAs, STELs, or ceilings
                                                   NOTES
10/93
Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
      NOTES
                                       EXPOSURE LIMITS
                                    Used to determine:

                                    •  Site characterization

                                    •  Medical surveillance

                                    •  Exposure controls
                                      - Engineered controls
                                      - Work practices
                                      - Personal protective equipment
                                         (PPE)
                                Source: 29 CFR 1910.120
                                  THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES
                                  Not intended for use:

                                  •  As a relative index of toxicity

                                  •  In the evaluation or control of
                                     community air pollution nuisances

                                  •  In estimating the toxic potential of
                                     continuous, uninterrupted exposures
                                     or other extended work periods

                               Source: ACGIH TLVs and BEIs for 1993-1994
                                  THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES
                                 Not intended for use:

                                 •  As proof or disproof of an existing
                                    disease or condition

                                 •  For adoption by countries whose
                                    working conditions differ from those
                                    in the United States of America and
                                    where substances and processes differ
                               Source: ACGIH TLVs and BEIs for 1993-1994
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
10/93

-------
                                                    NOTES
        ENVIRONMENTAL
        EXPOSURE LIMITS
     U.S. EPA
     -  National Ambient Air Quality
        Standards Program (NAAQS)

     State/Local
     -  NAAQS
     -  Modified TLVs
     -  Risk assessment
         ACTION GUIDE
 • The chemical concentration or instrument
  reading at which a specific action should
  be taken

 • Sources:
  -  EPA Standard Operating Safety
     Guides (SOSGs)
  -  OSHA standards for specific chemicals
     may require an  action (e.g., medical
     monitoring) if one-half the PEL is
     reached (action level)
         EPA ACTION GUIDES
      Combustible Gas Indicator
         Level
                 Action
         <10%LEL

         <<5*)*


         10-25% LEL
         >25% LEL
Continue monitoring

with caution


Continue monitoring,

but with extreme

caution


Explosion hazard!

Withdraw from area

immediately.
 Confined space
4/94
                           Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
        NOTES
                                                 EPA ACTION GUIDES
                                                 Oxygen Concentration
                                                 Level
Action
                                                 <1fi.5%   Monitor wearing SCBA.

                                                 10.5-25%  Continue monitoring
                                                         with caution.  SCBA
                                                         not needed based only
                                                         on oxygen content

                                                 >25%    Discontinue monitoring.
                                                         Fire potential!
                                                         Consult specialist
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                        4/94

-------
                  EXPOSURE  LIMITS AND  ACTION LEVELS
INTRODUCTION

It is necessary, for response activities involving hazardous materials, to acknowledge and plan that
response personnel may become exposed. Most hazardous materials have levels of exposure that can
be tolerated without adverse health effects.  However, it is imperative to determine:

       •      The identity of materials involved

       •      The type and extent of exposure

       •      The possible health effects from overexposure

       •      The exposure limits and/or action levels considered safe for each hazardous material
             encountered.


SOURCES FOR EXPOSURE LIMITS FOR AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS

Several organizations have proposed exposure  limits for  chemicals  and other  hazards.   The
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) is one such organization.  It is charged with
protecting the health and safety of workers.  In 29 CFR 1910.120, the Hazardous Waste Operations
and Emergency Response standard, OSHA specifies the use of certain exposure limits. The exposure
limits that are specified are OSHA's permissible exposure limits (PELs) and "published exposure
levels."  The published exposure levels  are used when no PEL exists.  A published exposure level
is defined as:

       the exposure limits published in "N1OSH Recommendations for Occupational Health
       Standards" dated 1986 incorporated  by reference. If  none is specified, the exposure
       limits  published  in the standards specified  by the  American  Conference of
       Governmental Industrial Hygienists  in their publication "Threshold Limit Values and
       Biological Exposure Indices for 1987-88" dated  1987  incorporated by reference. (29
       CFR 1910.120 (a)(3))

Organizations that have developed exposure limits are discussed below.  Not all of these groups are
specifically mentioned in 1910.120.  Many  of the following organizations have exposure guidelines
for exposures to hazards other than airborne contaminants  (e.g. heat stress, noise, radiation).  This
part will deal only with airborne chemical exposures.


Occupational  Safety and Health Administration

In 1971,  the OSHA promulgated PELs.   These limits were extracted from the 1968 American
Conference of  Governmental Industrial Hygienists'  (ACGIH) threshold limit values  (TLVs), the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards, and  other federal standards. The PELs are
found in  29 CFR 1910.1000.  Since then, additional  PELs have been adopted  and a few of the

10/93                                      \             Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
originals have been changed.  These initial changes have been incorporated into specific standards
for chemicals (e.g., 29 CFR 1910.1028 - benzene).  There are also standards for 13 carcinogens for
which there is no allowable inhalation exposure.

OSHA is a regulatory agency.  Therefore, its PELs are legally enforceable standards and apply to
all private industries  and federal agencies.  Depending on state or local laws, the PELs may also
apply to state and local employees.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

NIOSH was formed  at the same time as OSHA.   NIOSH  conducts  scientific research  and
recommends occupational safety and health standards.  The exposure levels NIOSH has researched
have been used to develop new OSHA standards.  However, many recommended exposure limits
(RELs) have not been adopted by OSHA.  Unless OSHA adopts NIOSH RELs into a standard (like
1910.120), they  are only recommendations.  The RELs are found in the NIOSH Recommendations
for Occupational Health Standards.

NIOSH also publishes criteria documents that provide information on handling specific chemicals.
These  documents also provide  rationale for the chemical's exposure limit.  Additionally, NIOSH
publishes immediately dangerous to life or health (IDLH) values in its Pocket Guide to  Chemical
Hazards.  IDLHs will be discussed later.
 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

 One of the first groups to develop exposure limits was ACGIH.   In 1941, ACGIH suggested the
 development of maximum allowable  concentrations (MACs) for use by industry.  A list of MACs
 was compiled by ACGIH  and  published in 1946.  In the early  1960s,  ACGIH revised those
 recommendations and renamed them TLVs.

 "Threshold Limit Values (TLVs) refer to  airborne concentrations of substances and represent
 conditions under which it  is believed that nearly all workers may be repeatedly exposed day after day
 without adverse health effects."  (Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical
 Agents and Biological Exposure Indices, ACGIH). The publication further states that the TLVs "are
 developed as guidelines  to assist in the control  of health  hazards.  These recommendations or
 guidelines are intended for use in the practice of industrial  hygiene, to be interpreted and applied
 only by a person trained in this discipline." (Policy Statement on the Uses of TLVs and BEIs).

 Along with the TLVs, ACGIH publishes biological exposure indices (BEIs).  BEIs are to be used
 as guides for evaluation of exposure where inhalation is not the  only possible  route of exposure.
 Because the TLVs are for inhalation  only, they may not be protective if the  chemical is ingested or
 absorbed through the skin.  Biological  monitoring (e.g., urine samples and  breath analysis) can be
 used to assess the overall  exposure.  This procedure uses information about what occurs in the body
 (e.g., metabolism of benzene to  phenol) to determine if there has been an unsafe exposure. The
 BEIs serve as  a reference for biological monitoring just as  TLVs serve  as  a reference for  air
 monitoring.
 Exposure Limits and Action Levels             2                                       10/93

-------
The TLVs are reviewed yearly and are published in ACGIH's Threshold Limit Values for Chemical
Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure Indices.
American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)

The AIHA has provided guidance for industrial hygienists for many  years.  In  1984,  AIHA
developed exposure guidelines that it calls Workplace Environmental Exposure Level Guides
(WEELs®).  These are reviewed and updated each year.  Although the list is not as large as others,
AIHA has chosen chemicals for which other groups have not developed exposure limits.  Thus, they
are providing information to fill the gaps in information sources.
Other Organizations

In the United States, the Army and Air Force have also developed exposure limits for their purposes.
The Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA) has health standards for air contaminants that
may be encountered during mining activities.

Other countries have also developed  exposure limits.  An example are  the Federal  Republic of
Germany's  maximum concentrations at the workplace (MAKs).  They can be found in ACGIH's
Guide to  Occupational Exposure Values along with PELs, RELs, and TLVs.

Even though the other organizations are not part of the list of published exposure limits in 1910.120,
they  are  sources that may be useful.  1910.120 (g)  suggests looking at published literature and
material safety data sheets (MSDS) if PELs or published exposure limits do not exist.
TYPES OF EXPOSURE GUIDELINES

Although there are different organizations that develop exposure guidelines, the types of guidelines
they produce are similar.
Time-Weighted Average (TWA)

A TWA exposure limit is the average concentration of a chemical most workers can be exposed to
during a 40-hour work week and a  normal 8-hour work day without showing any  toxic effects.
Some TWA exposure limits (e.g., NIOSH) can also be used to evaluate exposures up to 10 hours.
The  TWA permits  exposure to concentrations above the  limit, provided these excursions  are
compensated by equivalent exposure  below the TWA.  Figure 1 shows an example that illustrates
this point for a chemical  (e.g., acetone) with a TWA exposure limit of 750 ppm.

A TWA exposure is determined by averaging the concentrations during the different exposure periods
over an 8-hour period with each concentration weighted  based on the duration of exposure.  For
example, an exposure to acetone at the following concentrations and durations would have an 8-hour
TWA exposure of:
10/93                                      3             Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
             1500 ppm for 1 hour
             500 ppm for 3 hours
             200 ppm for 4 hours
                (1 ftr)(1500 ppm) + (3 M(500 ppm) * (4 hrs)(2W ppm)
                                        8 hrs
1500
                                + 1500 /y?m  + 800 ppm  _
                                     8
This exposure would be compared to an 8-hour TWA exposure limit.
               c
               o
              •J5   750
               CD
               o
               c
               O
              O
                                                            TWA-EL
                                                           3PM
       FIGURE 1. EXAMPLE OF AN EXPOSURE COMPARED TO A TWA EXPOSURE LIMIT
Short-Term Exposure Limit (STEL)

The excursions allowed by the TWA exposure could involve very high concentrations.  This might
cause an adverse effect but still be within the allowable average. Therefore, some organizations felt
there was a need to limit these excursions. OSHA,  NIOSH, and ACGIH define the STEL as a 15-
minute TWA exposure limit.  ACGIH has the additional stipulation that excursions to the STEL
should not be longer than 15 minutes in duration, should be at least 60 minutes apart, and should not
be repeated more than 4 times per day. Figure 2 illustrates an exposure that does not exceed the
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                                                           10/93

-------
15-minute limit for an STEL of 1000 ppm (note that in the previous example of an 8-hour TWA
calculation, the acetone STEL was exceeded but the TWA was not).

The STEL supplements the TWA and does not replace it. Both exposure limits should be used.  The
STEL reflects an exposure limit protecting against acute effects from a substance which primarily
exhibits chronic toxic effects.   This concentration is  set at a level  to protect workers against
irritation, narcosis, and irreversible tissue damage.

AIHA has some short-term TWAs that are similar to the STELs. The times used vary from 1 to 30
minutes.  These short-term TWAs are used in conjunction with, or in place of, the 8-hour TWA.
There is no limitation on the number of these excursions or the rest period between each excursion.
             c
             o
            '•§
            •f-1
             0
             o
             c
             o
            o
                                                                  STEL
        TWA-EL
                        6AM
                                                                3PM
         FIGURE 2. EXAMPLE OF AN EXPOSURE COMPARED TO AN STEL AND A TWA
Ceiling (C)

Ceiling values exist for substances for which exposure could result in a rapid and specific response.
The ceiling is that concentration that should not be exceeded during any part of the work day.  If
instantaneous monitoring is not feasible, the ceiling shall be assessed as a 15-minute TWA exposure
(unless otherwise specified) that shall not be excluded at any time during a work day.  A ceiling
value is denoted by a "C" preceding the exposure limit.

Figure 3 illustrates an exposure that exceeds a ceiling value of 5  ppm.
10/93
Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
            c
            o
           '2
           •4—•
            c
            CD
            O
            C
            o
           O
                 0
                                                                Ceiling
                  6AM
 10AM
Time
3PM
      FIGURE 3.  EXAMPLE OF AN EXPOSURE COMPARED TO A CEILING EXPOSURE LIMIT
Peaks

"Acceptable maximum peak" concentrations can be  found in  OSHA's  1910.1000 Table  7.-1.
Table ~L-1 contains exposure limits that OSHA had adopted from ANSI.  This peak exposure  is an
allowable  excursion above the ceiling values for the chemicals.   The duration  and number of
exposures at this  peak value is  limited.   For example, for those industries not  incorporated in
1910.1028, OSHA allows the 25-ppm ceiling value for benzene to be exceeded to 50 ppm, but only
for 10 minutes during  an 8-hour period.
Skin Notation

Whereas these exposure guidelines are based on exposure to airborne concentrations of chemicals,
the organizations recognize that there are other routes of exposure in the workplace.  In particular,
there can be a contribution  to the overall exposure from skin contact with chemicals that can be
absorbed through the skin.  Unfortunately, there are few data available that quantify the amount of
allowable skin contact.

Some organizations provide qualitative information  about  skin-absorbable  chemicals.  When a
chemical has the potential to contribute to the overall  exposure by direct contact with  the skin,
mucous membranes, or eyes, it is given a "skin"  notation.

This skin notation not only points out chemicals that are readily absorbed through the skin, but also
notes that if there is skin  contact, the exposure limit for  inhalation  may  not provide adequate
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                                          10/93

-------
protection.   The  inhalation exposure  limit is designed for exposures only from  inhalation.  If
additional routes  of exposure are added, there  can be detrimental effects  even if the inhalation
exposure limit is not exceeded.
Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH)

As defined in the NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards, "IDLH concentrations represent the
maximum concentration from which, in the event of respirator failure, one could escape within 30
minutes without  a respirator and without experiencing any escape-impairing or irreversible health
effects." Although 30 minutes is stated in the definition, this is not a 30 minute allowable exposure
limit. NIOSH's  purpose in developing this IDLH was for respirator selection.

Other organizations, such as ANSI, OSHA, and MSHA, have similar definitions for IDLH, but not
always the same  application.  It is accepted by all of these groups that IDLH conditions include 1)
toxic concentrations of contaminants, 2) oxygen-deficient atmospheres, and 3) explosive, or near-
explosive  (above, at, or near the lower explosive limits), environments.

Guidelines for potentially explosive, oxygen-deficient, or radioactive environments can be found in
the EPA's Standard Operating Safety Guides and the NIOSH/OSHA/USCG/EPA publication entitled
Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities.

At hazardous material incidents,  IDLH  concentrations should be assumed to represent concentrations
above which only workers wearing respirators that provide the maximum protection (i.e., a positive-
pressure,  full-facepiece,  self-contained breathing  apparatus [SCBA] or  a combination positive-
pressure, full-facepiece, supplied-air respirator with positive-pressure escape SCBA) are permitted.
Specific IDLH concentration values for many substances can be  found in the NIOSH Pocket Guide
to Chemical  Hazards.   For  some  chemicals, NIOSH gives a  "Ca" designation along with a
concentration for IDLH.  Ca denotes those chemicals  that NIOSH considers to be potential human
carcinogens.  NIOSH recommends the highest level of respiratory protection for exposure to these
substances, even  below IDLH. However, carcinogenic effects were not considered when developing
the IDLH concentrations.
MIXTURES

The exposure limits that have been discussed are based on exposure to  single chemicals.  Because
many exposures include more than one chemical, values are adjusted to account for the combination.
When the effects of the exposure are considered to be additive, a formula can be used to determine
whether total exposure exceeds the limits.  The following calculation is  used:

              Em = (C,-L,)  + (C^l^)  +  . .  . (Cn-Ln)

where:

        Em    =   the equivalent exposure for the mixture
         C    =   the concentration of a particular contaminant
         L    =   the exposure limit for that substance.


10/93                                       7             Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
The value of Em should not exceed unity (1).

An example using this calculation would be as follows:

       Chemical A   C  = 500 ppm; L = 750 ppm (TWA)
       Chemical B   C  = 200 ppm; L = 500 ppm (TWA)
       Chemical C   C  =  50 ppm; L = 200 ppm (TWA)

        Em   =   (500+750) + (200+500) + (50+200)
        Em   =   0.67 + 0.40 + 0.25
        Em   =   1.3

Because Em exceeds unity, the exposure combination may be a problem.  The next step should be
to determine whether exposure limits are based  on similar effects.  This calculation applies to
chemicals where the effects are the same and are  additive.  If the combination is not additive, the
calculation is not appropriate.  Also, mixing TWA, STEL, and ceiling limits in this equation is not
appropriate.


APPLICATION OF  EXPOSURE GUIDELINES

OSHA's Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response standard specifies uses for exposure
limits.


Site Characterization

29 CFR 1910.120 (c) (3) requires identification of IDLH conditions during site characterization.
29 CFR  1910.120 (h) (3) requires air monitoring upon initial  entry to identify IDLH conditions,
other dangerous conditions, and exposures over the exposure limits.


Medical Surveillance

29 CFR 1910.120 (0 (2) (i) requires a  medical surveillance program for all employees exposed to
substances or hazards above the PEL for 30 or more days per year.  If there is no PEL, then the
published exposure levels are used for evaluation.  The exposures are considered even if a respirator
was being used  at the time of exposure.


Exposure Controls


Engineered Controls and Work Practices

29 CFR 1910.120 (g) (1) (i) states "Engineering  controls and work practices shall be instituted to
reduce and maintain employee exposure to or  below the permissible exposure limits for substances
regulated by 29 CFR Part 1910, to the extent required by Subpart Z, except to the extent that such


Exposure Limits and Action Levels            8                                      10/93

-------
controls and practices are not feasible." [emphasis added] Whenever engineering controls and work
practices are not feasible, personal  protective  equipment shall be used to  reduce and maintain
exposures.

For those substances or hazards where there is no  PEL, the published exposure levels are used. If
there are no PELs or published exposure limits, published literature  and MSDS may be used for
evaluation.   In these circumstances, a combination of engineering controls, work practices,  and
personal protective equipment (PPE)  shall be used to reduce and maintain exposures.
Personal Protective Equipment

Because the selection of PPE must be based on the hazards present at the site, the exposure limits
are used to evaluate the appropriate PPE.  Comparing the actual or expected exposure to the PEL
or other exposure limits gives the wearer information on selection of the proper PPE.
LIMITATIONS AND RESTRICTIONS OF USE

The exposure guidelines discussed in this section are based on industrial experience, experimental
human studies, experimental animal studies, or a combination of the three.  The guidelines were
developed for workers in the industrial environment.  Thus, they are not meant to be used for other
purposes. ACGIH in its Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices states:

       These limits are intended for use in the  practice of industrial hygiene as guidelines
       or recommendations in the control of potential health hazards and  for no other use,
       e.g., in the evaluation or control  of community air pollution nuisances; in estimating
       the toxic potential  of continuous, uninterrupted exposures or other extended work
       periods; as proof or disproof of an existing disease or physical condition; or adoption
       by countries  whose working conditions differ from those in the  United States of
       America and  where substances and processes differ.  These  limits are not fine lines
       between safe  and dangerous concentration  nor are they a relative index of toxicity.
       They should not be used by anyone untrained  in the discipline of industrial hygiene.

As  can be seen from this  qualifier, these exposure limits are not intended as exposure limits for
exposure to the public.

There is the limitation on the use  of the  exposure guideline as a relative index of toxicity.  This is
because the exposure limits are based on different effects for different chemicals.  For example, the
TLV-TWA for acetone is chosen to prevent irritation to the eyes and respiratory system. The TLV-
TWA for acrylonitrile is chosen to reduce the risk to cancer.  Exposures to these chemicals at other
concentration  levels  could lead to  other effects.   Thus, when evaluating the risk  of  chemical
exposure, consult the documentation for  the exposure limit along with other toxicological data.
10/93                                        9             Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
NON-OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE LIMITS

As mentioned earlier, the occupational exposure limits are not intended for use in evaluating public
health hazards.  However, they are often used because there may not be anything else available.  In
other situations, a group may feel that the exposure may be for a short duration and the occupational
exposure limits are adequate.  For example, many  computer air dispersion models for emergency
response use the TLVs as action levels.

Some agencies have applied modifiers to the occupational exposure limits to adjust them for public
health use.  These modifiers may include adjustments for exposure time (168 hours for the public
compared to 40 hours  for occupational situations)  and safety factors for  sensitive populations
(dividing the exposure limit by 10). While groups like ACGIH discourage this  application of their
data, the users argue that modification of human data is preferred to extrapolation of animal data.

In some cases, ambient air quality standards or guidelines have been developed for application to
public exposure.  The federal government and  many  states have developed them.  They are based
on modification of occupational exposure limits, risk assessment data,  or both. EPA has developed
national ambient air  quality standards in response to the Clean Air Act.  The  current list is very
limited and only some chemicals (e.g., lead and particulates) are applicable to waste sites.

In the risk assessment approach for chemical exposure, it is recognized that the public exposure to
a chemical may involve more than one route of exposure. With this approach, it is not appropriate
to use just an inhalation exposure limit.  Results from air sampling are combined with other sample
results (e.g., drinking water and soil) to determine  total exposure and risk.
ACTION LEVELS

Action levels can be developed for specific chemicals, hazards, or situations.  The concept of an
action level is that if the action level is not exceeded, then there is little probability that a hazardous
exposure will occur.

In some of its  specific  standards, OSHA uses  an  action level that  is one-half of  the PEL.  For
example, the action level  for benzene is 0.5  ppm  calculated as an 8-hour TWA.  If this  level  is
exceeded, continual air monitoring and medical  surveillance can be required.

EPA  in its Standard Operating Safety  Guides gives actions to take  if certain instrument readings
(levels) are obtained during monitoring. These  are listed in Table 1.

In some situations, site-specific action levels for  direct-reading instruments may be developed. This
is done by using knowledge about what  chemicals are present on the site and the instrument's
response to the chemicals.   Whereas  this may not be as accurate as using  special monitoring
equipment and  laboratory  analysis, it allows rapid response to a potentially hazardous situation.
Exposure Limits and Action Levels             10                                       10/93

-------
CONCLUSION

There are many sources for exposure limits and action levels. Some of these are legal requirements;
some are guidelines. The goal is to use these numbers to protect personnel working with hazardous
materials.
10/93                                     11            Exposure Limits and Action Levels

-------
                    TABLE 1. ATMOSPHERIC HAZARD ACTION GUIDES
       Monitoring
       Equipment
Atmospheric
  Hazard'
   Level
Action
   Combustible gas
   indicator
  Explosive      <10%LEL    Continue monitoring with caution.

               10-25% LEL   Continue monitoring, but with
                             extreme caution, especially as higher
                             levels are encountered.

                >25% LEL    Explosion hazard! Withdraw from
                             area immediately.

                 <19.5%     Monitor wearing SCBA.  Note:
                             Combustible gas readings not valid in
                             atmospheres with less than 19.5%
                             oxygen.

                19.5-25%    Continue monitoring with caution.
                             SCBA not needed based only on
                             oxygen content.

                  >25%      Discontinue monitoring.  Fire
                             potential!  Consult specialist.
    Oxygen
    concentration
    Radiation survey
    instrument
  Gamma
  radiation
   Above
background:

  <1mR/hr
                                                    Continue monitoring.  Consult a
                                                    Health Physicist.

Colorimetric
tubes
Photoionization
detector
Flame ionization
detector

Organic and
inorganic
vapors/gases
Organic
vapors/gases
Organic
vapors/gases
>1 mR/hr
Depends on
chemical
Depends on
chemical
Depends on
chemical
Withdraw. Continue monitoring only
upon the advice of a Health Physicist.
Consult reference manuals for air
concentration vs. PEL/TLV and
toxicity data.
Consult reference manuals for air
concentration vs. PEL/TLV and
toxicity data.
Consult reference manuals for air
concentration vs. PEL/TLV and
toxicity data.
• Hazard classes are general and not all compounds in these classes can be measured by realtime
instruments.

Note:  The correct interpretation of any instrument readout is difficult.  If the instrument operator
is uncertain of the significance of a reading, especially  if conditions could be unsafe, a technical
specialist should immediately be consulted.  Consideration should be given to withdrawing personnel
from the area until approval by the safety officer is given to continue operations.
Exposure Limits and Action Levels
                      12
                                               10/93
                           i

-------
                          3. Role of Audit Team Members


3.1    Audit Team Composition

      An EPA audit team consists primarily of EPA employees, and other designated
representatives, including contractors and the American Association of Retired Persons
(AARP) enrollees.  The participation of other federal, state, and local government
personnel, particularly SERC and LEPC representatives, is encouraged, but they should
be made aware that they will be entering and accessing information from a facility under
their own authorities.  Section 3.3 of this Manual further discusses the participation of
non-EPA audit team personnel.

      The audit team can vary in size, depending upon the level  of detail of the audit
(e.g., number of chemicals and/or processes under investigation; national significance).
At a minimum, however, there must be two technical experts on a team for collection
and verification of technical findings and observations. [Required Activity]

      The following list represents suggested roles, responsibilities, associated
disciplinary backgrounds, and other parameters for composing a team.  This list is
provided as guidance and in no way is a  required format for forming an audit team.  In
many cases, your team composition may require you to combine or divide roles.

Team Leader

             Must be EPA employee; [Required Activity]

             Coordinates audit logistics, makes  team assignments, coordinates initial
             liaison with facility personnel, and  coordinates preparation and distribution
             of final site visit report; and

             Provides any needed follow-up information.

Deputy  Team  Leader

             Must be EPA employee or designated  representative; [Required Activity]

             Provides logistical support, as directed  by Team Leader; and

            Assumes other responsibilities delegated by Team Leader.

Chemical Process Hazards Reviewer

            Must be EPA employee or designated  representative;

            Responsible for collection and verification of process-related information;


                                         11

-------
             Primary liaison with facility technical personnel; and

             Requires technical knowledge of chemical hazards, process engineering,
             and maintenance procedures.

Chemical Accident Prevention Reviewer

             Must be EPA employee or designated representative;

             Responsible for collection and verification of facility information;

             Liaison with appropriate facility technical personnel;

             Requires technical knowledge of chemical accident prevention, including
             hazard evaluation and modeling techniques and release
             prevention/mitigation systems.

Safety and Training Reviewer

             Must be EPA employee or designated representative;

             Responsible for collection and verification of facility information;

             Primary liaison with facility health and safety personnel;                       .

             Requires knowledge of operator, safety, and worker right-to-know training
             programs.

Emergency Planning and Response Reviewer

             Must be EPA employee or designated representative;

             Responsible for collection and verification of facility information;

             Primary liaison with appropriate facility personnel responsible for planning
             and response;

             Requires knowledge of emergency planning and response requirements.

      Technical expertise for  the chemical safety audit program refers to knowledge,
experience, and disciplinary training in plant process  design,  engineering, operations,
training, and emergency planning.  Example disciplines include:

             Chemical, civil, industrial/safety, and environmental engineering,
             Plant process experience,
             Environmental science,                                                     ^


                                         12

-------
             Industrial hygiene,
             Geology, and
             Environmental and emergency management and planning.

Personnel with the appropriate expertise can be found in the following regional program
offices:  media (e.g., air, water, radiation);  RCRA;  TSCA; Superfund (e.g., emergency
preparedness and response, removal, health, and safety); and Research and
Development.

      In selecting team members, the  skill base of the team must accommodate the
need for coverage of the major audit elements:

             Process and safety system technologies;
             Operating procedures;
             Training programs;
             Emergency planning activities; and
             Management activities.

Specific tasks should be  assigned to each team member.  Each member should know
his/her respective role in all facets of the facility audit. Certain members may be
assigned the lead on one or more facets of the audit, and the other team members,
because of their  individual skills and experiences, should be prepared to contribute to the
completion of that facet of the audit.

      In summary, an EPA audit team can consist of EPA employees, EPA contractors
(e.g., Technical Assistance Team), AARP enrollees, and  representatives from federal,
state, and local governments.  Two basic restrictions apply  to the "team;" one, the Team
Leader must be an EPA employee, and two, the Chemical Process Hazards Reviewer
must be an EPA employee or designated representative (i.e., EPA employee, contractor,
or AARP enrollee). [Required Activity]  This last restriction is required to  ensure
continuity in communicating the audit scope and intent.

      The following provides an overview of the anticipated roles and responsibilities for
EPA employees, contractors/TAT personnel,  and AARP enrollees:

             EPA employees coordinate audit program and lead the audit team.

             Contractors/TAT personnel provide technical support as defined by EPA.

             AARP enrollees:

                   Provide support role in audits;

                  Apply professional expertise and experience in chemical engineering
                   or other technical  or industrial fields for reviewing process safety
                  technologies at facilities;


                                        13

-------
                   Apply other expertise in such areas as safety management or
                   training for involvement in other aspects of the audit (i.e., reviewing
                   emergency plans, training manuals, and emergency notification
                   procedures and/or systems);

                   Participate in report preparation, including observations and
                   recommendations from the audit;

                   Identify facilities for potential audits,  using information sources such
                   as Accidental Release Information Program (ARIP) data, and
                   coordinate with regional response centers; and

                   Are limited to field  activities that do  not stress physical limitations.
3.2   Training and Safety Requirements

      Field activities for EPA employees are subject to the training requirements
embodied in EPA Order 1440.2, Health and Safety Requirements for Employees
Engaged in Field Activities.  The Order establishes policies, responsibilities, and
mandatory requirements for  occupational health and safety training and certification, and
occupational medical monitoring.

      EPA Order 1440.2 requires that a Site Safety Plan be developed for EPA
employees conducting a chemical safety audit at a facility handling hazardous substances.
EPA regional offices can either use the model site safety plan (see Attachment 3), or
develop their own program that complies with EPA Order  1440 and the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration's worker protection standards codified at 29 CFR 1910
and 1926. The plan should include a description of the proposed audit scope, facility
health hazards, necessary protective equipment, contractor  participation, and
decontamination procedures, and must be completed and approved by the EPA project
coordinator, branch chief, on-scene supervisor, and health and safety manager.  Under
certain circumstances, a more extensive plan may also be required.  For more
information, contact the safety and health office in your region.

      Audit team members  should dress  appropriately, including steel-toed boots, safety
glasses, and hard hats.  Team members should provide their own safety equipment, and
should not rely on the facility.

      Prior to participating  in an audit, all  EPA team members, which include EPA
employees, contractors, and  AARP enrollees, must have completed the following training
courses:
                                         14

-------
             Training in occupational health and safety procedures under EPA Order
             1440.2. Attending a 24-hour or 40-hour health and safety course that is
             approved and sponsored by EPA and conducted by EPA or its contracted
             agents fulfills the requirement of this Order; [Required Activity]  and

             EPA Chemical Safety Audit Training Course.  (Course attendance
             flexibility is discussed below.)

In addition to the listed training, annual medical monitoring is required. [Required
Activity]

      In some audits, a specialized technical expert  (i.e., contractor or other EPA
program personnel) who normally does not participate in CSA program activities will
assist in conducting the audit. Under these circumstances, it will be difficult for such an
individual to have taken the EPA CSA course.  Consequently, the requirement for the
CSA course is flexible depending upon the situation. The health and safety training
requirements and medical monitoring, however, are not flexible.  [Required Activity]
This requirement should not pose any problems, since it would be rare for a technically
qualified contractor or EPA employee not to have had this training.

      Suggested topics for additional, but not required, training include:

             Handling of confidential business information;

             Interviewing techniques;

             Hazard evaluation techniques;

             Chemical processing techniques;

             Negotiating techniques; and

             Technical writing.


3.3   Non-EPA Personnel Participation on Audit Team

      Non-EPA team members may include representatives of other federal agencies
and departments, states/SERCs, local officials/LEPCs, and any other group not previously
identified as an EPA team member.  The regions are encouraged to invite participation
by non-EPA personnel  in audits, but entry into the facility must be authorized pursuant
to authorities other than  CERCLA.  Participation of non-EPA personnel must be in a
support role as defined by the Team Leader. In addition, non-EPA personnel cannot
serve in the capacity of Team Leader or Chemical Process Hazards Reviewer.  [Required
Activity]
                                        15

-------
       SERC and LEPC participation is encouraged to enhance their knowledge of
chemical hazards and process safety for use in planning activities under SARA Title III
and in future Clean Air Act Amendments Risk Management Program activities. SERCs,
LEPCs, and other federal  agencies also serve as a valuable source of information in
preparing for the audit.

       It is important to inform these representatives of the required health and safety
training that EPA employees and representatives undergo prior to audit participation.
As discussed in the next section, non-EPA participants require their own liability
coverage.
3.4   Liability

      Liability associated with conducting audits is described in the following sections for
each group potentially represented on an audit team.

      3.4.1  Federal Employees

      Under the Federal Employees Liability Reform and Tort Compensation Act of
1988, a suit can no longer be maintained against a Federal employee in his or her
individual capacity for any act (discretionary or non-discretionary) performed within the
scope of the employee's employment.  All such suits must now be brought against the
United States government. If named in a  suit in his or her individual capacity,  employees
should promptly notify the Office of Regional Counsel and the Office of General
Counsel.

      The legislation does not change the potential liability of a Federal employee in his
or her individual capacity for grossly negligent actions (usually taking the action out from
under the scope of the employee's employment), for Constitutional violations, and for a
violation of a statute "for which a claim is  otherwise authorized." All audit participants
should have audit responsibilities clearly delineated in their job description.

      3.4.2  AARP Enrollees

      There are no provisions for indemnifying AARP enrollees from personal liability
under the cooperative agreement between AARP and EPA.  Since AARP enrollees serve
only in support roles in all aspects of CSA program implementation, the Regional
Chemical Emergency Preparedness and Prevention Coordinators and their staff are
responsible for ensuring that enrollees are not placed in situations that could result in
job-related personal liability.
                                         16

-------
       3.4.3 Technical Assistance Team Contractors

       The Federal Employees Liability Reform and Tort Compensation Act of 1988
only covers TAT contractors when responding to a CERCLA hazardous substance
release or performing a clean-up/removal related to such release.  Audit activities for
TAT contractors are not covered under this Act, since the contractor is not specifically
handling hazardous substances, pollutants, or contaminants.  TAT contractors must
investigate liability coverage with their respective employer.

       3.4.4 Federal, State/SERC and Local/LEPC Government Personnel

       All non-EPA personnel will be entering a facility under their own authorities and
would  require their own liability coverage.
3.5    Conflict of Interest

       Conflict of interest refers to any person (i.e., EPA employee, contractor, AARP
enrollee, non-EPA personnel) who has a financial interest associated with the facility
being audited, has been previously employed with the facility, or a facility subsidiary,
and/or has been a consultant for the facility.  Persons with conflict of interest should not
participate in any activities, either on-site or off-site, associated with the facility audit.
[Required Activity]  In addition, such persons must identify themselves to the Team
Leader and excuse themselves from the audit of that facility. [Required Activity]
                                         17

-------
                              4. Preparing for the Audit
4,1    Facility Selection
       At present, there are no established procedures for selecting a facility for an audit.
Each region has flexibility in identifying facilities.  A variety of options useful to
identifying a facility are discussed below.  Although there is  substantial flexibility in
facility selection, there are two important requirements:

             A release of a CERCLA hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant
             must have occurred, or there must be "reason to believe" that a threat of
             such a release exists at the facility; [Required Activity] and

             The Office  of Regional Counsel and the SERC of the state  where the
             audited facility is located must be consulted to identify any legal actions
             currently being pursued or anticipated. [Required Activity]  It is advised
             that regional media programs also be consulted.

       The following list provides a variety of options to consider when selecting a
facility. Information sources to be used in evaluating these options include federal, state,
and local  release notification reports and follow-up reports,  OSC reports,  Regional
Response Centers, ARIP, ERNS, and other sources (see Attachment 4 and chart in
section 4.3).

             Previous release history of the facility;

             SERC and/or LEPC referral;

             Proximity to sensitive population(s);

             Public sensitivity;

             Opportunity for sharing new technology;

             Population  density; and

             Concentration of industry in the area.

       In  addition, the region may wish to select facilities for a chemical safety audit as
part of a larger regional initiative, such as an evaluation of facilities using a specific
chemical or located near  a particularly sensitive environment.  For example, during fiscal
year 1992 a number of facilities that produce and use hydrogen fluoride were examined
by audit teams nationally, while Region 5 conducted all of its audits in coordination with
its Great Lakes Basin pollution  prevention initiative.
                                          19

-------
4.2    Facility Notification

       Once a facility has been selected, the process of notifying the facility and               (
scheduling the audit can be initiated. Although each region will invariably establish its
own procedures for notifying a facility and coordinating the audit, the following
suggestions and  tools should be integrated into that process. These suggestions are
designed to help establish a constructive rapport with the facility and to ensure the
correct use of statutory authorities and other legal requirements.

       The Team Leader should  make  an initial  phone call to  the facility owner/operator.
The purpose of  this call is to identify a "contact" at the facility for all correspondences, to
communicate/explain the purpose and intent of the audit, and  to schedule dates for
conducting the audit. In some instances, it may be useful to schedule a pre-audit meeting
with the facility  to obtain further information.

       The phone call should be  followed by a letter to the facility contact that
summarizes the  initial conversation and confirms any decisions made during the call.  In
addition, the letter serves to confirm audit statutory authority,  provide the facility an
opportunity to claim confidential information, and to identify the contractor, if a
contractor is participating. As previously stated in section 2.2.3 of this Manual, the
contractor must  be identified by contractor name and contract number in  order to have
access to confidential information.

       Attachment 5 is  a sample  letter  designed to fulfill the above  goals.  While
language may be added to the letter, such as a summary of a phone conversation, the         A
legal aspects of  the letter as contained  in the attachment should not be  materially             "
altered. [Required Activity] It is suggested that  all correspondence with the facility be
reviewed by the  Office  of Regional Counsel (ORC).

       Unfortunately, not all efforts to  schedule and coordinate an audit based upon the
voluntary consent of the facility will be successful.  After receiving either the facility's
written or verbal denial of EPA's request to conduct the audit, a letter must be sent to
the facility (1) confirming this denial; and (2) invoking use of the CERCLA 104(b) and
104(e) authorities for entry. [Required  Activity]  Attachment 6 contains a sample letter
specifically designed for this situation.  Preparation of this letter must be coordinated
with your Office of Regional Counsel. [Required Activity]  The suggested letter states
that continued refusal of facility access can result in EPA issuing an order requesting
entry and/or initiating an enforcement action. Any further activities and contact with the
facility should be pursued in coordination with the Office of Regional Counsel.
                                          20

-------
4.3    Facility Background Information

       Preliminary preparation is an important factor in conducting an organized audit.
The team may find it useful to collect the facility background information several weeks
in advance of the audit.  This will require contact with the facility and state and local
officials to arrange delivery of these materials.  The audit team can then review this
information and become more familiar  with the facility prior to the audit.  Using this
technique, the team will be able to prepare a detailed list of topics and questions to help
organize their activities during the facility visit. The following list is a sampling of the
types and sources of information that will assist a team in preparing for the audit:
Type of Information
Release History
Regulatory History
Hazardous Chemicals
(Hazards, Amounts,
and Locations)
Chemical Processes
Community Involvement
Sources of Information
OSC reports; ARIP questionnaires; ERNS; SARA
Title III sections 304 and 305(b) reports; state
release files
Local, state, and federal air, water, and waste
permits; SARA Title III sections 302, 304, 311, 312,
and 313 submissions
SARA Title III sections 311 and 312 submissions;
OSHA hazard communication and process safety
management standard documents; hazards analysis;
NIOSH Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards
Industry standards and processing techniques from
trade and professional groups (e.g., AIChE, ASSE,
and the Chlorine Institute); process flow diagrams
and piping and instrumentation diagrams
CAER; LEPC; and SERC
       The "Audit Protocol/Report Preparation Guidance" as presented in section 6.0 of
this Manual provides further detail on the types of information that may be requested
from the facility prior to conducting the audit.  Attachment 4 contains further
information on these listed sources.
4.4    Preparing for the Site Visit

       Prior to conducting the on-site audit, a pre-visit meeting should be conducted with
the entire audit team, including any non-EPA personnel who will be visiting the facility.
This meeting should be held as close to the date of the site visit as possible to keep the
important points  being emphasized fresh in everyone's mind.  By this time, the audit
team should already be operating as a unit; all team members should be familiar with the
audit protocol, the information previously collected by the team should have been
                                         21

-------
reviewed, additional information to be obtained at the facility should have been
identified, and the team members  should have  developed individual agendas.  The pre-
visit meeting serves to reinforce what already is in place  and should cover the following
items:

             Clearly  establish the responsibility and authority of the team leader;

             Review highlights of the audit's objectives and note any specific team
             member responsibilities;

             Review any personal health and safety issues that may be present at the
             site for  the team to prepare for and avoid  (see section 3.2);

             Review information  about key personnel and operations at the site;

             Establish objectives and an agenda  for each day of the site visit;

             Caver logistical matters such as a nightly team meeting to discuss results
             and plan the next day's activity; and

             Cover any other topics that the Team Leader identifies.
                                         22

-------
                               5.  Conducting the Audit


      The on-site chemical safety audit will consist of the following four phases:

                    Entry;

                    Opening Meeting;

                    On-site Activities; and

                    Exit Briefing.
5.1    Entry

       The audit team should arrive at the facility during normal working hours at a time
and date pre-determined with the facility.  At the facility entrance office, the facility may
provide a blank sign-in sheet, log, or visitor register. It is acceptable for the audit team
members to sign it.  EPA employees and authorized representatives, however, must not
sign any type of "waiver" or "visitor release" which would relieve the facility of
responsibility for injury, or which would limit the rights of the Agency to use the data
obtained from the facility. [Required Activity]  When such a waiver or release is
presented, the Team Leader should politely explain that such a document cannot be
signed, and a blank sign-in sheet should be requested.  If the team is refused entry
because they do not sign such a release, the Team Leader  must report all pertinent facts
to the ORC, and leave the facility if the matter cannot be resolved. [Required Activity]
All events surrounding the refused entry must be fully  documented including the name of
the person(s) refusing entry. [Required Activity]  Procedures described  in section 4.2 of
this Manual concerning refusal of entry must then be followed. [Required Activity]
5.2    Opening Meeting

       The entire audit team will meet with the plant manager and his/her key staff, and
will likely discuss the entire audit.  The staff of the plant manager could include
superintendents  of safety and operations, a lawyer, and corporate representation. The
team should be very clear about its purpose and should be prepared to discuss the audit
starting with an explanation of the CSA program, facility selection, the audit purpose and
scope,  the background research performed,  the specific objectives for the  site visit, and
the report that will be  written.

       During the meeting, the audit team should outline its specific on-site agenda and
the cooperation  needed to accomplish that agenda.  In addition, the meeting provides a
good opportunity for the facility to provide the audit team with an overview of its
                                         23

-------
operations and safety programs and may include a general tour of the whole facility (as
appropriate).  This meeting typically requires at least a half day.
5.3   On-Site Activities

      Once past the opening meeting, the audit team may split up into smaller groups to
take a plant tour and interview other operations and management personnel.  The plant
tour should include specific tours of the chemical handling and process areas.  The team
should interview personnel involved in such areas as process safety, process operations,
technical support, personnel, emergency planning and response, and environmental
management.

      During these tours and  interviews,  individual team members should  be obtaining
information and making observations that fulfill the needs of their individual
responsibilities.  The questions and prompts for discussion contained in the annotated
audit protocol can  be helpful.

      During this  or any other part of the site visit, it is possible that an observation will
be made or that information will be obtained that should be of significance to the audit
team, but that is beyond the scope of the facility audit.  In this event, the Team Leader
should be notified.


5.4   Exit Briefing                                                                      4

      In this final meeting, the entire audit team will meet with the plant manager and
his/her key staff to discuss the  results of the audit as it presently stands. The plant
manager may be accompanied by the same people who attended the opening meeting.
The facility will want to know about all significant team findings and, more importantly,
about the conclusions that have been drawn and the recommendations that will be made.

      Prior to the exit briefing, the audit team  should have a private meeting to
establish an agenda for this meeting. Significant observations and findings  should be
listed for discussion with the facility.  The team  should identify conclusions  based on this
information only to the extent  that a consensus  among team members can  be reached.  A
team consensus is also necessary for identifying  any recommendations to the facility at
this time.  In the absence of team consensus, it  is inappropriate to offer conclusions or
recommendations to the facility during the exit briefing.  This does not, however,
preclude drawing such conclusions or making any recommendations in the  audit report
that will be written later.
                                        24

-------
                    6.  Audit Protocol/Report Preparation Guidance
6.1    Purpose and Structure

       This protocol/report preparation guidance (see Exhibits 1 and 2) provides a
detailed topic outline to direct the scope and content of the audit and a structure for
preparation of the audit report.  The protocol and report format have been integrated to
accomplish the following goals:

             Provide detailed guidance on the types of information that should be
             reviewed during the audit and discussed in  the report;

             Ensure continuity in report preparation; and

             Provide an organized and detailed report format for easy access to specific
             lessons learned on chemical process safety management practices.

       Because of the scope of the audit or the resources and expertise of the audit
team, it may not need, or be able, to address all areas of the protocol.  However, all
areas of the protocol should be addressed in the audit report (e.g., state that the audit
team did not review the facility's hazard evaluation and modeling capabilities).

       By providing this Manual to facility personnel prior to conducting the audit,  the
facility will also have a more thorough  understanding of the audit scope and intent.  The
facility can prepare for the audit by assembling information and identifying personnel
with the required expertise to assist the audit team.

       This guidance is structured to address each of the  major elements of chemical
process safety management at the facility being audited.  These include:

             Facility Background Information;
             Chemical Hazards;
             Process Hazard Information;
             Chemical Accident Prevention;
             Accidental Release/Incident Investigation;
             Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities;
             Community Emergency Planning and Response Activities; and
             Public Alert and Notification Procedures.

       Preceding each of these sections in the  annotated protocol/report guidance
(Exhibit 2) is a brief overview of the purpose of this section with respect to the audit
scope.
                                         25

-------
                                    Exhibit 1

                  Outline of Protocol/Report Preparation Guidance


1.0    INTRODUCTION

2.0    SUMMARY OF FINDINGS/CONCLUSIONS

3.0    BACKGROUND

      3.1    General Facility and Audit Information
      3.2    Purpose of the Audit and Facility Selection Process
      3.3    Audit Methodology

4.0    FACILITY BACKGROUND INFORMATION

      4.1    Site and Surrounding Area Description

            4.1.1  Facility Profile
            4.1.2  Site Topography and Meteorological Conditions
            4.1.3  Site Access
            4.1.4  Special/Sensitive Populations and Environments
            4.1.5  Regional Demographics
            4.1.6  Identification of Vulnerable Zones                                    A

5.0    CHEMICAL HAZARDS

      5.1    Overview  of Hazards for Chemical(s) Being Audited
      5.2    Facility Management of Chemical Hazard Data

6.0    PROCESS INFORMATION FOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

      6.1    Storage and Handling

            6.1.1  Storage Systems
            6.1.2  Shipping/Receiving
            6.1.3  Material Transfer

      6.2    Process Description

            6.2.1  Overview of Processing Steps and Operating Procedures
            6.2.2  General Description of Process Equipment Capacity
            6.2.3  Back-ups  and Redundancy
            6.2.4  Process Parameter Monitoring
            6.2.5  Environmental Monitoring


                                       26

-------
      6.3    Process Hazards

7.0    CHEMICAL ACCIDENT PREVENTION

      7.1    Management Activities

            7.1.1 Corporate Role in Facility Process Safety Management
            7.1.2 Facility Role in Process Safety Management
            7.1.3 Audit Activities and Procedures

      7.2    Process Operation and Maintenance

            7.2.1 Standard Operating Procedures
            7.2.2 Training Practices
            7.2.3 Equipment Maintenance Procedures
            7.2.4 Instrument Maintenance

      7.3    Hazard Evaluation and Modeling

            7.3.1 Hazard Evaluation
            7.3.2 Modeling

      7.4    Release Prevention Systems

      7.5    Mitigation Systems

8.0    ACCIDENT RELEASE INCIDENT INVESTIGATION

      8.1    History of Accidental Releases/Incidents
      8.2    Facility Investigation Procedures

9.0    FACILITY EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND PLANNING ACTIVITIES

      9.1    Facility Emergency Response Plan
      9.2    Emergency Response Exercises  and Simulations
      9.3    Fire, Evacuation, and Rescue Corridors
      9.4    Emergency Equipment Provisions
      9.5    Emergency Response Chain of Authority
      9.6    Emergency Response Management Procedures
      9.7    Emergency Communication Network within the Facility
      9.8    Emergency Response Personnel Training Requirements
      9.9    Follow-up Release Procedures
                                      27

-------
10.0   COMMUNITY AND FACILITY EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLANNING
      ACTIVITIES

      10.1  Facility Planning and Outreach Activities with Community
      10.2  Local/Community Emergency Response Planning

11.0   PUBLIC ALERT AND NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES

      11.1  Procedures for Public Notification of Releases
      11.2  Schedule for Testing Procedures
      11.3  History of Notification Procedures and Evaluation
      11.4  Community and Facility Contacts
      11.5  Facility and Media Interaction

12.0   CONCLUSIONS

13.0   RECOMMENDATIONS

      APPENDICES
                                     28

-------
                                    Exhibit 2

                  Annotated Protocol/Report Preparation Guidance
STANDARD DISCLAIMER (see Attachment 7)
1.0  INTRODUCTION

            Purpose and scope of the audit program (Attachment 8 contains standard
            language to describe the purpose and scope of the program); and

            Paragraphs identifying facility name and location and why audited
2.0  SUMMARY OF FINDINGS/CONCLUSIONS

            Briefly summarize audit findings (both positive and negative)


3.0  BACKGROUND

      3.1    GENERAL FACILITY AND AUDIT INFORMATION

                   Facility name, location, principal activities;

                   Dates audit conducted; and

                   Listing of team members and their affiliation, areas of responsibility,
                   and expertise.

      3.2    PURPOSE OF THE AUDIT AND FACILITY SELECTION PROCESS

                   Briefly explain why facility was selected.  Audit could be  conducted
                   for a  number of reasons such as:

                        To follow up on an accidental release or series of releases
                        (include description of triggering incident);
                        To focus on particular technologies, processes, operations, or
                        chemicals;
                        Regional or headquarters initiatives;
                        At request of state and/or local officials; or
                        At facility invitation.
                                       29

-------
      3.3    AUDIT METHODOLOGY
                   Summary of the process areas and other locations that were
                   investigated and why they were selected; and

                   Important audit limitations (e.g., no comparison of safety systems
                   across several similar operations was performed).
4.0 FACILITY BACKGROUND INFORMATION

      A history of site activities and a description of the surrounding area provides
information on the potential risk that facility activities may pose to the surrounding
community and the environment in the event of an accidental chemical release.

      4.1    SITE AND SURROUNDING AREA DESCRIPTION

             4.1.1 Facility Profile

                          Facility history and principal activities (i.e., date built,
                          modifications and improvements, releases, etc.), size and
                          layout, and ancillary operations (e.g., power generation,
                          warehouse, distribution center,  laboratory, waste treatment,
                          etc.); and

                          Reference maps in appendix or use simple maps in text.

             4.1.2 Site Topography and Meteorological Conditions

                          Natural disaster potential (e.g., earthquake, flood);
                          Geology; and
                          Climate.

             4.1.3 Site Access

                          Transportation routes, including railroad and waterways;  and
                          Site security  (e.g., fencing and gates, security  guards, and
                          access by non-authorized persons).

             4.1.4 Special/Sensitive Populations and Environments

                          Hospitals, schools, and nursing homes; and
                          Wetlands, drinking water supply, etc.
                                         30

-------
            4.1.5  Regional Demographics

                         Economy, population, industrial and growth patterns

            4.1.6  Identification of Vulnerable Zones
5.0 CHEMICAL HAZARDS

      This section serves to not only focus briefly on the hazards associated with
particular substances, but to provide pertinent facts on the facility's understanding of
what are the chemical hazards for each substance.

      5.1    OVERVIEW OF HAZARDS FOR CHEMICAL(S) BEING AUDITED

                   Brief description of hazards; and

                   Reference detailed information in appendix (i.e., MSDS, etc.) -- do
                   not rewrite MSDS information.

      5.2    FACILITY MANAGEMENT OF CHEMICAL HAZARD DATA

                   What the facility recognizes as the hazards associated with the
                   chemical(s);

                   Documentation available on hazards associated with chemical(s)
                   (e.g., MSDS, corrosion rates, reactivity data, etc.);

                   Availability of such data to employees (e.g., OSHA Hazard
                   Communication Standard training);

                   Mechanism for reviewing and updating information;

                   Mechanism for documenting suspected acute and chronic toxic
                   effects (e.g., medical and industrial hygiene personnel); and

                   On-site availability of emergency medical care.
6.0    PROCESS INFORMATION FOR HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS

      A review of facility operations associated with the processing of the chemical(s)
being examined can reveal facility practices and techniques for handling process hazards,
as well as reveal facility understanding of the process hazards.  (Within each subsection,
the  report should address every chemical and process examined during the audit for
which observations, conclusions, and/or recommendations were noted.)


                                       31

-------
6.1    STORAGE AND HANDLING

      6.1.1 Storage Systems
                    Storage methods;
                    Capacity;
                    Location, including compatibility and spacing;
                    Hazard identification (placards and labelling);
                    Maintenance and housekeeping of area; and
                    Block diagrams to illustrate major process flows.
       6.1.2 Shipping/Receiving
                    Method(s) of receiving and shipping (e.g., tank trucks, rail
                    cars, pipelines, cylinders, barges, etc.);
                    Schedules and quantities of shipments;
                    Responsible personnel and level of training;
                    Coordination of transportation issues with the community
                    contingency plan; and
                    Transportation corridors used.
       6.1.3 Material Transfer
                    Transfer method(s) from storage to processing areas and
                    between different stages of process;
                    Pipe coding/labelling for flow direction and contents;
                    Other transfer systems (e.g., compressors, ejectors, pumps,
                    blowers, etc.);
                    Housing of transfer systems; and
                    Off-site accessibility.
6.2    PROCESS DESCRIPTION

       6.2.1 Overview of Processing Steps and Operating
                    Procedures
                    Listing different operations and process steps in chronological
                    order for hazardous chemical; can use block-type flow
                    diagram to illustrate steps;
                    Chemical production or use rates;
                    Chemical reaction(s) description (e.g., catalysts, activators,
                    inhibitors, exothermic, etc.);
                    Blending or separation steps;
                    Material incompatibilities;
                    Pressure and  temperature variations; and
                                   32

-------
                         Consequences of deviation:  what happens to chemicals
                         spilled, leaked, vented, etc.

             6.2.2 General Description of Process Equipment

                         Capacity and design conditions;
                         Construction material;
                         Flow rates;
                         Parameters  monitored, controlled,  and recorded (at
                         equipment or in control room);
                         Production or use rates for chemical;  and
                         Comparison of design limits and operating parameters.

Note: Attachment 9 contains further guidance on reviewing process operations.

             6.2.3 Back-ups and Redundancy

                         List systems with back-ups or automatic shutdowns;
                         Description of back-ups and how and why used;
                         Availability  of back-up power systems;
                         Method of detecting inoperative control equipment and
                         availability of back-ups; and
                         For facility with scrubbers or flares, their capacity for
                         handling accidental releases.

             6.2.4 Process Parameter Monitoring

                         Description of process parameters  for operations and
                         processes and why used;
                         Performance history at facility;
                         Monitoring  and recording procedures; and
                         Procedures for addressing unsafe parameter levels.

             6.2.5 Environmental Monitoring

                         Description of system(s) used to monitor hazardous chemical
                         levels within work areas and in the surrounding environment
                         (e.g., types,  location, etc.);
                         Connection  to alarm and communication systems; and
                         Performance history at facility.
                                        33

-------
      6.3    PROCESS HAZARDS
                   Hazards facility has identified for the process and determined to
                   present a significant risk to the facility and/or the surrounding
                   community (e.g., storage tank failure, pipeline leak, process vessel
                   overpressurization)
7.0   CHEMICAL ACCIDENT PREVENTION

      Practices and technological systems for controlling the process hazards presented
in section 6.0 of this protocol/report outline, are an important part of chemical process
safety management. This section is intended to describe mechanisms for implementing
and maintaining safe process systems.  Management directives are reviewed in this
section to identify goals and implemented activities, such as training  and equipment
maintenance procedures, that present the facility's perspective and commitment to safe
management of process hazards.

      7.1    MANAGEMENT ACTIVITIES

             7.1.1 Corporate Role in Facility Process Safety Management

                         Corporate safety policy, guidance, and directives; and
                         Technical  and financial assistance (e.g., process modifications,
                         information exchanges, and capital improvements).

             7.1.2 Facility Role  in Process Safety Management

                         Policy and directives;
                         Goals and objectives; and
                         Employee safety committees and incentive  programs.

             7.1.3 Audit Activities and Procedures

                         Frequency of facility audits;
                         Responsible department and involvement of external
                         personnel (e.g., corporate and private consultants);
                         Audit scope;
                         Audit procedures and time frame; and
                         Implementation of audit recommendations (e.g., policy and
                         procedures).
                                        34

-------
      7.2    PROCESS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

             7.2.1  Standard Operating Procedures

                         SOP manuals available (e.g., operating procedures manual,
                         supervisory operating manual, safety manual, accident and
                         fire prevention manual);
                         How procedures/manuals reviewed and approved;
                         Listing of personnel roles and responsibilities;
                         Applicability of manuals to tasks conducted during normal
                         and emergency situations;
                         Other process guides: operating logs, shift turnover
                         procedures,  overtime procedures, call out procedures during
                         emergencies, reporting procedures for unusual circumstances
                         or process deviations;
                         Experimental operating conditions for process changes, and
                         management of change; and
                         Startup, shutdown, and routine operation checklists.

Note: Attachment 10 contains a summary of the types of documentation and other
materials that the audit team may want  to review for more information on facility SOPs.

             7.2.2 Training Practices

                         Types of training available for operations and maintenance
                         personnel;
                         Methods and frequency of training;
                         Who performs training and qualifications;
                         Frequency and procedures for revising training;
                         Refresher courses and retraining;
                         Upset simulations and drills;
                         Use of process simulators;
                         Job duty qualifications/prerequisites;
                         Types and frequency of job qualification evaluations  (e.g.,
                         performance reviews, tests);
                         Employee turnover rate; and
                         Master qualification list.

             7.2.3  Equipment Maintenance Procedures

                         Work order  systems;
                         Maintenance and testing scheduling;
                         Preventive and predictive maintenance;
                         Equipment history records;
                         System for spare parts control;
                         Level of training;


                                        35

-------
                   Frequency and method of communication between
                   maintenance and operations personnel;
                   Prioritization of maintenance and inspections;
                   Securing equipment during  shift breaks;
                   Assuring proper repairs replacement; and
                   Management of change for  equipment (e.g., appropriateness
                   of materials of construction).
      7.2.4  Instrument Maintenance

                   Work order systems;
                   Frequency and testing of instrument calibration, sensor
                   inspections, and alarm and interlock inspections;
                   Instrument history records;
                   System for spare parts control;
                   Frequency and method of communication between
                   maintenance and operations personnel;
                   Number of employees and shift coverage;
                   Level of training;
                   Management of change for  instruments (e.g., appropriateness
                   of calibration settings); and
                   Error checking.

7.3  Hazard  Evaluation and Modeling                                               A

      7.3.1  Hazard Evaluation

                   Type(s) or method(s) used at facility (e.g., What If, Hazop,
                   etc.) and why selected;
                   Processes and operations evaluated;
                   Procedures for targeting/scheduling evaluation (e.g., new
                   procedures, process modification, incidents);
                   Frequency and basis for updating methods;
                   Who participates in and reviews evaluation(s) and the
                   qualifications of such personnel;
                   Use of results and methods of documentation;
                   Performance  of consequence analysis to understand impacts
                   of any potential release;
                   Implementation of results and recommendations; and
                   How is process change managed.
                                  36

-------
       7.3.2 Modeling

                   Uses and types of models for tracking releases into air,
                   surface water, and groundwater;
                   Processes, chemicals, and operations to which models have
                   been applied;
                   Goals of modeling activities (e.g. support for emergency
                   planning and emergency response);
                   Assumptions built in to the models (both by user and
                   developer) and facility perceptions of strengths and
                   limitations (e.g. dense gas releases, terrain effects, single-
                   phase versus multi-phase modeling capability);
                   Parameters  covered by surface  and groundwater models (e.g.
                   degradation, photolysis, volatization, geochemical processes,
                   local hydrology, adsorption, desorption);
                   Validate model against experimental measurements; and
                   Use during incidents and the results (e.g., improvements in
                   emergency response or planning).

7.4    Release Prevention Systems

             Facility activities related to preventing a release

                   Description of type(s) of systems in place;
                   Why used;
                   Performance history at facility;
                   Testing and inspections; and
                   Modifications performed.

Examples of activities to prevent chemical releases:

             Improvements in process and equipment  design;
             Reduction of inventories;
             Changes in siting of particular equipment;
             Increased  training and safety reviews;
             Improved  process controls;
             Installation of interlocks; and
             Failsafe design.

7.5    MITIGATION SYSTEMS

             Description of type(s) of system(s) in place;

             Why used;
                                  37

-------
                   Performance history at facility; and

                   Frequency of testing and inspections.

            Examples of release mitigation systems include:

                         Water sprays and sprinkler systems;
                         Foams;
                         Physical separation of buildings and equipment; and
                         Physical barriers, including dikes, curbing, raised doorways,
                         and containment walls).


8.0    ACCIDENTAL RELEASE INCIDENT INVESTIGATION

      Facility procedures for identifying the underlying causes of unplanned incidents,
including fires, explosions, or releases of hazardous chemicals, and for preventing similar
incidents from recurring serve as  an important step toward the actual prevention of
future incidents.

      8.1   HISTORY OF ACCIDENTAL RELEASES/INCIDENTS

                   Types (e.g., reportable, near miss);

                   Chronicle of releases;                                                1

                   Reporting history;  and

                   Community response and interaction.

      8.2   FACILITY INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES

                   Written procedures (e.g., guidelines, time frames);

                   Types of releases to be  investigated (e.g., near misses; or those
                   reportable under federal, state, or local law);

                   Personnel responsible for investigations;

                   Management involvement;

                   Actions taken resulting from investigation;  and

                   Use of reports to share results (e.g., through training programs and
                   lessons learned) and distribution scheme.
                                        38

-------
9.0    FACILITY EMERGENCY PREPAREDNESS AND PLANNING ACTIVITIES

      Emergency activities in preparing for and responding to accidental releases
illustrate facility knowledge, dedication, and practices for mitigating incidents.

      9.1     Facility Emergency Response Plan

                   Type and coverage of facility response plans (e.g., OSHA emergency
                   action plan, SPCC plan, corporate plan);

                   Update schedule and procedures (i.e., how often revised and by
                   whom); and

                   Key procedural areas covered (e.g., release notification, evacuation,
                   response and mitigation activities).

      9.2     Emergency Response Exercises and Simulations

                   Types, frequency, and groups involved; and

                   Uses of findings.

      9.3     Fire, Evacuation, and Rescue Corridors

                   Procedures for conducting evacuations;

                   Condition and accessibility of fire and rescue corridors; and

                   Detail and location of facility and community maps (Maps should be
                   referenced in appendix.).

      9.4     Emergency Equipment Provisions

                   Types;

                   Locations;

                   Inspection and maintenance policies, including testing; and

                   Sources of equipment (off-site versus on-site).

      9.5     Emergency Response Chain of Authority

                   Chain of command (e.g., designation of control during an
                   emergency); and
                                        39

-------
                   Coordination with off-site response personnel.

      9.6    Emergency Response Management Procedures

                   Management's role in response incident situations.

      9.7    Emergency Communication Network within the Facility

                   Types and accessibility of communication system(s) and backups,
                   including sirens, walkie-talkies, and phones;

                   Testing of communication system; and

                   Ability of personnel to interpret warning signals.

      9.8    Emergency Response Personnel Training Requirements

                   Categories of facility emergency response personnel;

                   Type of training available and frequency;

                   Who performs training; and

                   Refresher courses.

      9.9    Follow-up Release  Procedures

                   Incident clean-up  (e.g., self, private contractors); and

                   After-action review of response with all involved parties (e.g., public
                   and private organizations).


10.0  COMMUNITY AND FACILITY EMERGENCY RESPONSE PLANNING
      ACTIVITIES

      Communication to the community  about facility activities and coordination with
the community in developing emergency response plans indicate a level  of facility
commitment to safety, as well as  revealing unique outreach activities.

      10.1   Facility Planning and Outreach Activities with Community

                   Awareness and participation in LEPC activities;

                   Participation in CAER activities; and
                                        40

-------
                   Outreach activities, scholarship programs, open houses, joint
                   training, education, etc.

      10.2   Local/Community Emergency Response Planning

                   Community plan status;

                   Coordination between facility and community in plan preparation
                   and exercise;

                   Coordination with hospitals and emergency medical services on
                   treatment of chemical exposure victims;

                   Coordination with community response structures and procedures;
                   and

                   Mutual aid efforts and facility involvement in non-facility-related
                   community responses.


11.0  PUBLIC ALERT AND NOTIFICATION PROCEDURES

      Public alert and notification procedures identify unique procedures and facility
commitment to safety for the community.

      11.1   Procedures for Public Notification of Releases

                   Alarm systems (e.g.  sirens, air horns, whistles);

                   Communication networks (e.g., radio, television, phone);  and

                   Back-up systems.

      11.2   Schedule for Testing Procedures

                   Frequency of tests; and

                   Number and type of individuals notified.

      11.3   History of Notification Procedures and Evaluation

                   Type of incident;

                   Timeliness of public notification; and
                                        41

-------
                   Number of individuals notified and methods of public and private
                   emergency notification.
                                                                                       I
       11.4   Community and Facility Contacts

                   Alternate  contacts; and

                   Telephone number update procedures.

       11.5   Facility and Media Interaction

                   Direct communication links; and

                   History of past interaction.


12.0 CONCLUSIONS

       The conclusions highlight safety practices observed at the facility.  As described in
section 6.2.2, Tips for Writing the Report, the information should be presented in a factual
manner and should refrain from judgments of adequacy or inadequacy.  This section
summarizes facility practices that reflect the facility's understanding of and commitment
to chemical process safety management.


13.0 RECOMMENDATIONS

       If applicable, the audit team may wish to make one or more recommendations
regarding observed processes, practices, technologies, and so forth.  Any such
recommendations should be stated clearly, and be practical and technologically feasible at
the facility.  Recommendations are not required or mandatory actions that must be  taken
by the  facility. They should be presented as options that the facility may consider to
enhance their knowledge of and practices in chemical process safety management.


APPENDICES

       During the audit process, the team will gather a variety of materials relating  to the
operations  of the facility. Most of this material, however, while very helpful in
conducting the audit and preparing the audit report, does not belong in the  main  body of
the audit report  and should instead be placed in appendices or maintained in the  files of
the regional office  for future use.  Examples of the types of material that might be
included as appendices are:
                                        42

-------
      Sample facility memoranda, guidelines, SOPs, policy statements;




      Correspondence between the facility and the regional office; and




      Graphics such as photographs, maps, charts.




All materials should be labeled with the:




      Name of the facility;




      Date of the audit; and




      Other necessary identifying information.
                                  43

-------
6.2    Writing the Report

      6.2.1  Post-Visit Meeting                                                           I

      The entire audit team should reassemble as soon as possible after completion of
the  site visit.  This is important because the details of the site visit can become confused
and fade rapidly.  Certain items should be covered in this meeting:

             Require that team members immediately review and edit their notes from
             the  site visit to obtain clarity and completeness;

             Begin using the audit report outline as a basis  for organizing all audit
             information;

             Consider the major audit elements during the review and  analysis  process,
             the  initial stage in to the completion of the audit report:

                    Facility Background Information;
                    Chemical Hazards;
                    Process Hazard Information;
                    Chemical Accident  Prevention;
                    Accidental Release/Incident Investigation;
                    Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities;
                    Community and Facility Emergency Response Planning Activities;
                    and                                                                  m
                    Public Alert and  Notification.

             Review all  important observations and findings identified to this point in
             the  audit; and

             Determine  whether or not any particular conclusions can be drawn or
             recommendations made for inclusion in the report.

      6.2.2  Tips for Writing the Report

      There are  two main areas of consideration when preparing a report:

             Writing style; and

             Report format flexibility

      Writing style

      In many instances during report preparation, several individuals will be working on
separate sections  pertaining  to his/her role in conducting the audit.  Although several
different writing styles  may be presented in the report, it is very important that they all       —


                                         44

-------
have one common element of presentation style -- information is factual, relevant,
complete, objective, and clear.  The entire report, including the Conclusions and
Recommendations sections, should be presented in a factual manner and refrain from
judgments of adequacy or inadequacy.

       The Conclusions  section should highlight facility safety practices observed during
the audit, identifying unique facility practices that should be shared as well  as areas for
improvement. This summary should reflect the facility's understanding of, and
commitment to, chemical process safety management, and should refrain from judgments
of adequacy or inadequacy.  As an example of how to present conclusions,  consider the
following pair of statements:

       Incorrect. "The facility has adequate procedures to investigate and respond to the
       cause(s) of accidental chemical releases."

       Correct.  "The facility prepares follow-up reports for accidental releases of
       hazardous chemicals that occur both on- and off-site.  The report addresses the
       cause of the incident, recommended actions to prevent the release from
       reoccurring, and  a schedule and list of responsible individuals for implementing
       these actions." [If the facility uses a form for this practice, it could be referenced
       in an appendix.]

       The first  statement does not provide any information on the facility's follow-up
procedures; in addition, a judgement is made on the procedures, which may or may not
be valid. The latter illustrates procedures that the facility takes following an accidental
release of hazardous chemicals both on- and off-site.  Its style of presentation is factual
and provides clear information on what the facility does without commenting on the
adequacy or inadequacy of the procedures.

       The Recommendations section should provide clearly stated suggestions  and
include the factual basis for each recommendation.  The recommendations  should be
both practically and technologically feasible for the audited facility — they are  neither
mandatory nor required, and are simply being presented for consideration by the audit
team to the facility to enhance its chemical process  safety management. As an  example
of how to present recommendations, consider the following pair of statements:

       Incorrect. "The facility should implement a preventive maintenance program."

       Correct.  "The facility should evaluate the appropriateness  of its use of the
       periodic maintenance system for maintaining pressure relief valves.  This
       evaluation could  include, among other aspects, a review of alternative schemes,
       such as preventive maintenance and predictive maintenance."

       The first statement does not provide any information on the facility's existing
maintenance program and it does not specify the particular application for  the
recommended preventive maintenance.  The latter clearly describes the current status of


                                         45

-------
the element in question and provides alternatives for consideration. In addition, the style
of presentation is appropriate for the cooperative nature of the audit program. In both
the Conclusions and Recommendations  sections, all statements must address observations
that are presented in detail in the main body of the report.

      Report format flexibility

      The introduction to this section  of the Manual addresses the purpose and uses  of
the report protocol/outline.  One important purpose is  to ensure consistency in report
preparation.  This consistency will help to facilitate analysis of conclusions and
recommendations and will assist CEPPO in effectively identifying successful and
problematic practices and technologies, and in sharing information with the regions, other
program offices, other federal agencies, state and local governments, facilities, and other
involved parties.

      There are 13 major report sections (i.e., 1.0,  2.0, etc.), and when preparing the
report, each of these must be addressed. [Required Activity]  For some facilities,
however, information relevant to a major section may not exist, or the audit team may
not have been able to examine materials relevant to this element.  For example, the
facility may not have any system for alerting/warning the public that a release has
occurred (section 11.0), or this element may not have been reviewed by the audit team.
Rather than skip that section of the report, it should be stated that the facility does not
have a public alert/warning system, or that this element was not examined in the audit.

      6.2.3  Follow-up Information

      With almost any  audit, there is usually a need to contact the facility after the site
visit has occurred to clarify a point or to obtain more complete information.  A chemical
safety audit is no different. The preferred way to handle follow-up inquiries is for the
Team Leader to designate a person or persons to serve as the contact with the facility;
the facility may take a similar approach in making any  further responses to EPA. This
minimizes the opportunity for miscommunication and lends a credible appearance to the
conclusion of the audit.

      6.2.4  Standard Report Disclaimer

      A standard report disclaimer accompanies  all audit reports and is located after the
cover page.  [Required Activity]  Attachment 7 contains a sample disclaimer.  The report
disclaimer serves to describe  the scope and limitations  of the audit report  contents by
identifying the time frame in  which the audit was  conducted, and by clarifying the
facility's role in adopting or implementing any of the report contents.
                                         46

-------
6.3    Review and Finalization Procedures

       In preparing the final audit report, there are two considerations to keep in mind:

             Access of draft report information through the Freedom of Information Act
             (FOIA);  and

             Report inclusion of facility confidential information.

       6.3.1 Access of Draft  Information

       In order to ensure  that draft report information is not available to the public
through FOIA prior to report finalization, the EPA regional office can designate an EPA
official (e.g., Section, Division, or Branch Chief) to approve the report as "final." This
procedure is not mandatory, but highly recommended, since this process is cited under
the Deliberate Process Privilege Section, exemption 5 of FOIA  [5 USC 552(b)5].

       Additional actions can be taken to prevent draft information from being accessible
under FOIA.  For example, all draft materials can be stamped "DRAFT."  Draft
materials can include the following citation at the bottom of each page or on a cover
sheet:

               "Pre-decisional Document, Not  Disclosable Under FOIA"
                             " - Do Not Cite or Quote - "

       Please note that these actions do not have  legislative or regulatory authority, as
compared to the finalization process described above.

       6.3.2 Facility Confidential Information

       Another suggested  activity during the report finalization process is submission of
the draft report to the  facility to identify any confidential information. The facility should
be contacted to establish a deadline (e.g., two weeks) to avoid lengthy delays.  Any
information identified as confidential should be  treated as such. Comments on the report
that are provided by the facility can, but do not have to be taken into consideration as
the report is finalized.


6.4    Report  Distribution

       When the audit  report is final, standard distribution by the Regional Chemical
Emergency Preparedness and Prevention (CEPP)  Coordinator is required to the
following groups and organizations: [Required Activity]

            SERC and LEPC in which the facility is located;
                                         47

-------
             Facility owner/operator;

             Facility CEO;

             EPA Headquarters, Chemical Emergency Preparedness and Prevention
             Office; and

             Any other federal,  state, and local agencies or departments that assisted in
             conducting the audit.

The region should ensure that at least one unbound copy of the report suitable for
photocopying is provided to CEPPO.

      The Regional CEPP Coordinators should also consider distributing final audit
reports to other EPA offices; other federal, state, and local agencies or departments; and
other private and public sector organizations. Sharing the  report with regional media
offices is encouraged. EPA Headquarters will also circulate copies to interested
headquarters media offices, the Prevention Work Group, and  other federal programs.
Press releases of audit activities (e.g., facility visit, report finalization,  etc.) are also
discretionary for the Regional CEPP Coordinators and EPA Headquarters CEPPO staff.

      To help professionals conducting audits, EPA Headquarters is developing a
computerized database that contains profiles of all of the chemical safety audit reports.
The profiles are summaries of the audit reports organized  in a uniform format consistent
with  the CSA protocol.  The database has search capabilities that allow the user to          m
identify report profiles based  on  SIC code, specific chemical hazards, etc.  The
information contained in the database will be useful to the regions for a variety of
purposes, such as learning how a particular  industry operates (e.g., the types  of chemicals
and kinds of processes in use and the typical problems encountered), as well as
identifying field experts and comparing processes at  different facilities for the same
chemical. CEPPO will also be able to use the database to assemble and distribute
information on chemical process  safety management and chemical accident prevention
issues and to assess the implementation of the CSA program.
6.5   Preparing the Report Profile

      An audit report profile should be submitted to headquarters in conjunction with
the submission of the audit report for inclusion into the database. The  profile (see
Attachments 11 and 12) organizes the key information contained in the report, including
information on the facility and the audit team as well as report conclusions and
recommendations, in a format suitable for direct entry into the CSA database.  In
addition to providing the basis for the continued development of the CSA database, the
profile format can also assist  the audit team during the audit process. The profile can
serve as a method of organizing issues of interest and assigning areas of responsibility to
team members prior to the audit, monitoring the progress of the team during the audit


                                         48

-------
visit, and organizing the collected information during report writing. The specific
information that should be included in the CSA report profile is described in the
annotated profile in Attachment 12.  A hardcopy and an electronic version of the profile
should accompany the audit report when it is submitted to EPA headquarters to facilitate
entering the profile information into the database.
                                        49

-------
                            7.  Audit Follow-Up Activities

      As a supplement to the chemical safety audit and CSA report preparation, each
regional office should establish an audit follow-up program.  The follow-up program will
support EPA's efforts to evaluate the effectiveness of the CSA program in improving,  as
well as heightening awareness of the need for, chemical process safety among chemical
producers, distributors, and users.  In addition, it is hoped that the analysis of audit
results will provide a basis for amending the focus and  direction of the  CSA program to
better achieve its stated goals at the regional and headquarters level.

      Although the specific nature of the follow-up activities has been left to the
discretion of the regional offices, at a minimum the program should be designed  to track
audited facilities' implementation of CSA report recommendations.  This will allow
Headquarters to analyze trends in the implementation of CSA  recommendations as a
function of issue (e.g., employee training or instrument maintenance), level of effort (e.g.,
fixing a relief valve or replacing a storage tank), and  type and size of facility.  Within this
framework, the regional offices are  free to examine other audit issues (e.g., format,
relationship with state and local officials) at  their own discretion and to communicate
with the facility in writing  or in person.

      Optionally, some of the regions also may wish to develop a method to verify
whether the information received from the facility is accurate, to the extent that regional
resources  permit.  This may involve the  continued participation of state and/or local
officials in the audit process or another  facility visit by EPA or Technical Assistance
Team members.
7.1   Follow-Up Approaches

      Currently, some regional offices have already developed follow-up programs.
They have approached the follow-up process from a variety of angles, ranging from
mailing worksheets to returning to the facilities for a post-audit review.  For example:

      •      Region 6 conducted a comprehensive follow-up effort in FY 92 in which
             representatives from the region revisited 14 facilities that had been audited
             since 1989 to evaluate the implementation of audit team recommendations.
             Issues studied included the most effective audit format; facility attitudes
             toward the audit process; the role of facility size in implementing
             recommendations; and the level of expertise of the audit team. Region 6
             used the follow-up information to compile quantitative regional data, which
             was summarized in charts and graphs to  highlight key trends and  issues.
             The data indicated that 68 percent of the 173 recommendations were
             implemented at the  facilities involved in  the project, with a notably lower
             rate for the five facilities with greater than 1,000 employees (56%) and for
             recommendations that involved changes in process design  (40%),  and a
             notably higher rate for compliance-related recommendations (100%)


                                         51

-------
       •     Region 8 has sent questionnaires to facilities six and 12 months after the
             audits to check on the facility's progress in implementing the
             recommendations of the audit team.  The questionnaire lists each of the
             audit team's recommendation, and the facility indicates its response to the
             recommendations, including their future plans for implementing the
             recommendations.  For the questionnaires completed by facilities in 1991,
             the region identified an 80-85 percent response rate for facilities in
             implementing audit  recommendations.

Another possible follow-up option suggested by one regional office is to present audited
facilities with an evaluation form at the same time as the final audit report is distributed
to the facility.
7.2   Specific Information Required

      The follow-up program should begin with the facilities at which an audit has been
conducted in fiscal year 1993.  Regions also have the option of performing follow-up
efforts at facilities audited in previous years. For each audit, the regional office should
provide  EPA Headquarters with the following information:

      •     Full name and address of audited facility;

      •     List of recommendations made by the audit team as organized in the CSA
             report profile prepared by the region;

      •     Indication of how each recommendation has been or is planned  to be
             implemented and/or addressed by the facility with the date completed or a
             schedule  for implementation, as appropriate;

      •     Rationale for any recommendations that have not been implemented
             and/or addressed by the facility; and

      •     Audit implementation issues, including:

                   Facility attitude toward chemical safety audit, and

                   Successful and problematic audit practices.
                                         52

-------
Attachments

-------
             Attachment 1




Chemical Safety Audit Program Fact Sheet

-------
FACT SHEET
                                                                                  MARCH 1993
                                                 CHEMICAL SAFETY AUDIT PROGRAM
BACKGROUND

The Chemical  Safety Audit (CSA) program has evolved
from   the  efforts  of  the  U.S.   Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) under the Chemical Accident
Prevention (CAP) program.   The CAP  program emerged
from  concerns   raised  by  the release  of  methyl
isocyanate at Bhopal,  India,  and  of  aldicarb oxime
at  Institute,  West Virginia.    Awareness  of  the
critical threat to public safety posed by similar
incidents  led  to  an  emphasis on preparedness and
planning  for   response  to   chemical  accidents.
Simultaneous  with  the development of  preparedness
activities   by   EPA   was   the   passage   and
implementation  of  the  Emergency  Planning  and
Community Right-to-Know Act  --  Title  III  of  the
Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA)
by  Congress  in 1986.   Because  prevention  is  the
most  effective  form   of   preparedness,  the  CAP
program  promotes  an  effort  to enhance prevention
activities.   The  primary  objectives of  the CAP
program  are  to  identify  the causes of accidental
releases of hazardous substances and the means to
prevent  them from occurring,  to promote industry
initiatives in  these areas, and to share activities
with the community, industry,  and other groups.

Many of  the key concerns of the CAP program arise
from  the  SARA  Title  III  section  305(b)  study
entitled Review of Emergency Systems.  As part of
the information gathering efforts to prepare this
study, EPA personnel conducted a  number of facility
site visits to  learn about  chemical  process safety
management   practices.       The   study   covers
technologies,    techniques,   and   practices   for
preventing,  detecting,  and monitoring releases of
extremely hazardous substances,   and for  alerting
the public  to  such  releases.   One  of  the  key
recommendations resulting from the  study  was  the
continuation  and expansion of  the audit program.

As a follow-up  to  this national  prevention study,
EPA has  undertaken cooperative  initiatives  with
federal   agencies,   states,   industry   groups,
professional organizations, and trade associations,
as  well  as  environmental  groups  and  academia.
These   joint  efforts  will  serve  to  determine  and
implement a means to share information on release
prevention technology and practices,  and to enhance
the state  of  practice in  the   chemical  process
safety arena.

PROGRAM GOALS

The CSA  program  is part  of  this  broad initiative
and has been  designed to accomplish the following
chemical  accident  prevention goals:
        •  Visit facilities handling hazardous substances
           to gather information on  and learn about safety
           practices and technologies;

        •  Heighten awareness of the need  for, and promote,
           chemical  safety  among   facilities   handling
           hazardous substances, as  well as in communities
           where chemicals are  located;

        •  Build cooperation among  facilities,  EPA,  and
           other authorized parties by coordinating joint
           audits;  and

        •  Establish  a  database  for  the  assembly  and
           distribution   of    chemical   process   safety
           management   information   obtained   from   the
           facility audits.

        PROGRAM AUTHORITY

        The    Comprehensive,    Environmental    Response,
        Compensation    and  Liability  Act   (CERCLA   or
        Superfund)   was  enacted December  11,  1980,  and
        amended by  SARA  on  October  17,  1986.    CERCLA
        authorizes  the  federal  government  to respond where
        there is a  release or  a  substantial  threat of  a
        release into  the  environment  of  any  hazardous
        substance,   pollutant,  or  contaminant  that  may
        present danger  to  the public health or welfare  or
        to the environment.

        CERCLA Sections 104(b)  and  104(e), as amended  by
        SARA  in 1986, provide  authorities for entering  a
        facility and accessing  information  to conduct  a
        chemical  safety   audit  by  EPA.    While   CERCLA
        provides authority for states to use  statutory
        authorities  for entry  and  information gathering,
        such  authorities may only be  accessed pursuant to a
        contract or  cooperative agreement  with  the  federal
        government.   Since there is  no such  arrangement,
        states,  as  well  as local  governments,  must  use
        their own authorities for audit participation.

        As a  matter of EPA policy under  the CSA program,
        all  facilities  that will  receive  an audit  should
        have   experienced  a   release   of  a   hazardous
        substance,   pollutant,   or  contaminant,  or  there
        should be  reaion  to believe that there exists  a
        threat of such a release.   The audits  are intended
        to be nonconfrontational  and positive, such  that
        information  on safety  practices,   techniques,  and
        technologies can  be  identified and shared  between
        EPA  and the facility.    Involvement   in  the  CSA
        program by  Local   Emergency Planning Committees
        (LEPCs)  and State Emergency  Response  Commissions
        (SERCs)  formed  under SARA Title III is encouraged
        to enhance  the goals of  both of   these  programs.
        However,   as  stated   above,   state   and   local
        government participation in the audit,  itself, must
        be performed under state and local  authorities.

-------
AUDIT SCOPE
                                                          REPORT DISTRIBUTION
The  audit  consists  of  interviews  with  facility
personnel,  and on-site review of various aspects of
facility operations  related  to the prevention  of
accidental   chemical   releases.    Specific  topics
addressed include:

•  Awareness  of chemical and process hazards;
•  Process characteristics;
•  Emergency  planning  and preparedness;
•  Hazard   evaluation   and   release   detection
   techniques;
•  Operations and emergency response training;
•  Facility/corporate management structure;
•  Preventive maintenance and inspection programs;
   and
•  Community    notification     mechanisms    and
   techniques.

Observations  and  conclusions   from   audits  are
detailed in a report prepared by the  audit  team.
The   report   identifies  and   characterizes  the
strengths of specific Chemical  Accident Prevention
program areas  to allow the elements of particularly
effective programs to be recognized.  Copies of the
report are provided  to the facility so  that weak
and strong program  areas may be recognized.   The
audit is conducted  following the Guidance Manual
for EPA Chemical Safety Audit Team Members, issued
by  EPA  Headquarters.    This  guidance  contains
recommended   actions,    as   well   as   mandatory
procedures  that must  be followed  to ensure  the
health and safety of  program  auditors  and program
integrity.   Each  member of the  audit  team should
have a copy of the manual, and a copy of the manual
is transmitted to the audited facility.

AUDIT TEAM COMPOSITION

An  EPA  audit  team  primarily  consists  of  EPA
employees,   and other   designated  representatives
including contractors and the American Association
of  Retired   Persons   (AARP)   enrol lees.     Other
federal, state, and local government personnel may
also be team  members.   The audit  team can vary in
size, depending  upon the  level  of  detail of  the
audit (e.g.,  number  of  chemicals and/or  processes
under investigation;  national significance).

FACILITY SELECTION

At present,  there  are no established procedures for
selecting a facility for an audit.  Each EPA region
has flexibility in identifying facilities.  Options
to consider in selecting a facility include:
   Previous history of  the facility;
   SERC and/or  LEPC referral;
   Proximity  to sensitive population(s);
   Public  sensitivity;
   Regional accident prevention  initiatives;
   Opportunity  for sharing new technology;
   Population density;  and
   Concentration of industry  in  the area.
Standard distribution  by EPA regional  offices of
the audit report will be at a minimum to:

•  SERC and LEPC in which the facility is located;
•  Facility owner/operator and facility  CEO;
•  EPA Headquarters; and
•  Any othe^ federal, state, and local agencies or
   departments  that  assisted  in  conducting  the
   audit.

Distribution  is  available to  other  EPA offices,
other  federal,  state,   and   local   agencies  or
departments,  and other  private and  public  sector
organizations.

ACCOMPLISHMENTS

During the first four years of the CSA program, the
regions  have   conducted  audits   at   over   150
facilities in 46 states  and Puerto  Rico.  EPA has
analyzed the conclusions  and recommendations listed
in the audit reports to identify trends within and
across  industries,   processes,  and  chemicals  to
assist in  the  further  development of  the  CSA and
CAP  programs,   particularly   in   light   of   the
accidental  release provisions of section 112(r) of
the Clean  Air  Act.   At  the same  time,  follow-up
activities performed by  several  of  the regional
offices   indicate   that   the   majority   of   the
recommendations to improve chemical process safety
practices suggested  by  the audit teams  have  been
implemented or are scheduled  to  be implemented at
audited facilities.

CSA PROGRAM BENEFITS

•  Identification   of   effective,   field-proven
   chemical  accident prevention  technologies and
   practices.

•  Better  understanding  of  the  causes of chemical
   releases.

•  Greater  awareness  by  facilities  of  chemical
   safety    and   understanding    of   available
   techniques,   and   specific   suggestions   for
   improved programs.

•  Identification  of  problem  areas   in industry
   where more attention  is needed.

•  Cooperation and coordination of chemical safety
   programs with other  federal  and state agencies
   through joint audits  and training.
For more  information  on  the Chemical Safety Audit
program,    contact    the    Chemical    Emergency
Preparedness  Program  (CEPP)  office  in your  EPA
regional office.

-------
                                        Attachment 2

                     CERCLA Provisions Overview and CERCLA Statute


       Section 104(a) Removal and Other Remedial Actions

       This section provides the federal government with the authority to respond to releases or
threatened releases of hazardous substances, pollutants, or contaminants in certain situations.

       Section 104(a) authorizes  the EPA  Administrator "to act, consistent  with the national
contingency plan, to remove or arrange for the removal of, and provide for remedial action relating
to such hazardous substances, pollutants, or contaminants at any time, or take any other response
measure consistent with the national contingency plan which the Administrator deems necessary to
protect public health or welfare or the environment," where:

              Any hazardous substance is released;

              There is a substantial  threat that a hazardous substance will be released into the
              environment;

              Any pollutant or contaminant  is released into the environment "which may present
              an imminent and substantial danger to the public health or welfare;" or

              There is a substantial threat that a pollutant or contaminant may be released into the
              environment "which may present an imminent  and substantial danger to the  public
              health or welfare."

       Section 104(b) Investigatory Response

       Under Section  104(b), the Administrator is authorized to "undertake such investigations,
monitoring, surveys, testing, and other information gathering" that may be needed "to identify the
existence and extent of  the release or threat  thereof,  the source  and nature  of the hazardous
substances, pollutants or contaminants involved, and the extent of danger to the public  health or
welfare or to  the environment."   This investigatory  response can  be initiated whenever the
Administrator can  act under Section 104(a) when he has "reason to believe" that:

              A release has occurred;

              A release is about to occur; or

              "Illness, disease, or complaints  thereof may be attributed to exposure to a hazardous
              substance, pollutant, or contaminant and that  a release may  have occurred  or be
              occurring."

-------
       Section 104(e) Information Gathering and Access

       Under Section  104(e), a designated  representative of the President or a state or political
subdivision under a contract or cooperative agreement is authorized to obtain information and gain
access to sites and adjacent property "for the purposes of determining the need for response, or
choosing or taking" a response, or to enforce any provision of CERCLA.  The authority to enter a
site and to inspect and take samples from a site may only be exercised where "there is a reasonable
basis to believe there may be a release or threat of release of a hazardous substance or pollutant or
contaminant."

       Access to Information.  Section 104(e) authorizes any designated official, upon reasonable
notice, to require persons to provide relevant information or documents concerning:

              "Identification, nature and quantity of materials which have been or are generated,
              treated, stored, or disposed of at the facility;

              "The nature or extent of a release or threatened release of a hazardous substance or
              pollutant or contaminant at" the facility; and

              "Information relating to the ability of a person to pay or perform a cleanup."

       In addition, upon reasonable notice, Section 104(e) requires persons to grant access to a
facility to  inspect and copy  all documents or  records, or at their option to provide copies.

       Entry.  Designated  representatives are authorized to enter at reasonable times, any vessel,
facility, establishment, or other place or property:

              "Where any hazardous substance,  pollutant, or contaminant may  be or has been
              generated, stored, treated, disposed of, or transported from;"

              "From which or to which a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant has been
              or may have been released;" and

              "Where entry is  needed to determine the need  for  response  or  the appropriate
              response or  to effectuate a response action."

       Compliance Orders.  If  consent is not granted  for access to information,  entry onto the
facility, and inspection or sampling, Section 104(e)(5) authorizes EPA to:

              "Issue  an order  directing  compliance with the  request," after  such  notice  and
              opportunity  for consultation;

              Ask the Attorney General to commence  a civil action to compel compliance with a
              request or order; and

              Assess civil penalties up to $25,000/day for failure to comply with the order.

Section 104(e) also provides for the right to obtain  access or information in any other lawful manner,
which includes warrants.

-------
       Confidentiality of Information. Section 104(e)(7) provides that no person required to provide
information under CERCLA may claim that such information is entitled to protection unless such
person shows each of the following:

              The "person  has not described  the information to any other person, other than a
              member  of a local emergency planning committee under Title  III of SARA," an
              officer or employee of the U.S. or a state or local government, an employee of such
              person, or a person who is bound by a confidentiality agreement, and such person has
              taken reasonable measures to protect the  confidentiality of such information  and
              intends to continue to take such measures;"

              "The information is not required to be disclosed, or otherwise made available, to the
              public under  any other federal or state law;"

              "Disclosure of the information is likely to cause substantial harm  to the competitive
              position of such person;" and

              "The specific chemical identity, if sought to be protected, is  not readily discoverable
              through reverse engineering."

       The following information on hazardous substances is not entitled to protection:

              Trade name,  common name, or  generic class or category;

              Physical properties;

              Hazards to health  and the environment, including physical hazards (e.g., explosion)
              and potential acute and chronic health hazards;

              Potential routes of human exposure;

              Disposal  location of any waste stream;

              Monitoring data or analysis on disposal activities;

              Hydrogeologic or geologic data; and

              Groundwater monitoring data.

       Section 106(a) Abatement Action

       This section of CERCLA  provides the federal government with the authority to pursue
administrative and judicial action to require responsible parties to respond to actual or threatened
releases of hazardous substances.  If the Administrator "determines that there may be an imminent
and substantial endangerment to the public health or welfare or the environment,"  he has two options
under 106(a):

              Request the Attorney General to seek the necessary relief in  the federal district court
              where the threat occurs.  The district court is given jurisdiction to grant relief as the
              public interest and the equities of the case may require; or

-------
              After providing notice to the affected state, he may take other action, including, but
              not limited to the issuance of orders that may be necessary to protect public health
              and welfare and the environment.

Note: Statutory texts of these reviewed CERCLA sections follows.

-------
    COMPREHENSIVE ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE,
                   COMPENSATION  AND  LIABILITY
                                    (42 U.S.C.A. §§  9601  to 9675)
 CHAPTER 103—COMPREHENSIVE ENVI-
         RONMENTAL RESPONSE,
    COMPENSATION, AND LIABILITY

    SUBCHAPTER I—HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
      RELEASES, LIABILITY, COMPENSATION

Sec.
9601.   Definitions.
9602.   Designation of additional hazardous substances
         and establishment of reportable released quanti-
         ties; regulations.
9603.   Notification requirements respecting released sub-
         stances.
       (a) Notice to National Response Center upon re-
            lease from vessel or offshore or  onshore
            facility by person in charge;  conveyance of
            notice by Center.
       (b) Penalties for failure to notify;  use of notice
            or information pursuant to notice in crimi-
            nal case.
       (c) Notice to Administrator of EPA of existence
            of storage, etc., facility by owner or opera-
            tor;  exceptions; time, manner, and form of
            notice;  penalties for failure  to notify; use
            of notice or information pursuant to notice
            in criminal case.
       (d) Recordkeeping  requirements;  promulgation
            of rules and regulations by  Administrator
            of EPA; penalties for violations; waiver of
            retention requirements.
       (e) Applicability to registered pesticide product.
       (f) Exemptions  from notice and  penalty provi-
            sions for substances reported under other
            Federal law or is in continuous release, etc.
9604.   Response authorities.
       (a) Removal  and other remedial action by Presi-
            dent; applicability of national contingency
            plan;  response by potentially responsible
            parties; public health  threats;  limitations
            on response; exception.
       (b) Investigations, monitoring, etc., by President.
       (c) Criteria for  continuance of obligations from
            Fund over specified amount for response
            actions; consultation by President  with af-
            fected  States;  contracts  or  cooperative
            agreements by States with President prior
            to remedial actions;   cost-sharing agree-
            ments;   selection  by  President  of remedial
            actions; State credits:  granting of credit,
            expenses before  listing or agreement, re-
            sponse  actions  between   1978  and 1980,
            State expenses after December 11, 1980, in
            excess  of 10 percent of costs, item-by-item
            approval,  use  of credits;  operation and
Sec.
9604.   Response authorities—Cont'd
             maintenance; limitation on source of funds
             for 0 & M; recontracting; siting.
       (d)  Contracts or cooperative agreements by Presi-
             dent with States or political subdivisions or
             Indian tribes; State applications, terms and
             conditions;  reimbursements;  cost-sharing
             provisions; enforcement requirements and
             procedures.
       (e)  Information gathering and access;  action au-
             thorized, access to information,  entry,  in-
             spection  and samples; authority and sam-
             ples, compliance orders; issuance and com-
             pliance, other authority, confidentiality  of
             information; basis for withholding.
       (f)  Contracts for response action;  compliance
             with Federal health and safety standards.
       (g)  Rates for wages and labor standards applica-
             ble to covered work.
       (h)  Emergency procurement powers;  exercise  by
             President.
       (i)  Agency  for Toxic  Substances and Disease
             Registry;  establishment, functions, etc.
       (j)  Acquisition of property.
9605.   National contingency plan; preparation, contents,
         etc.
       (a)  Revision and republication.
       (b)  Revision of plan.
       (c)  Hazard ranking system.
           (1) Revision.
           (2) Health assessment  of water  contamina-
                tion risks.
           (3) Reevaluation not required.
           (4) New information.
       (d)  Petition for assessment of release.
       (e)  Releases from earlier sites.
       (f)  Minority contractors.
       (g)  Special study wastes.
           (1) Application.
           (2) Considerations  in  adding  facilities  to
                NPL.
           (3) Savings provisions.
           (4) Information gathering and analysis.
9606.   Abatement actions.
       (a)  Maintenance, jurisdiction, etc.
       (b)  Fines;  reimbursement.
       (c)  Guidelines  for  using imminent  hazard, en-
             forcement, and emergency response author-
             ities;   promulgation by Administrator  of
             EPA, scope, etc.
9607.   Liability.
       (a)  Covered  persons; scope; recoverable costs
             and  damages; interest rate;  "comparable
             maturity" date.
       (b)  Defenses.
       (c)  Determination of amounts.
                                                 467

-------
42 § 9601
FEDERAL ENVIRONMENTAL LAW
    SUBCHAPTER IV—POLLUTION INSURANCE
Sec.
9671.   Definitions.
          (1)  Insurance.
          (2)  Pollution liability.
          (3)  Risk retention group.
          (4)  Purchasing group.
          (5)  State.
9672.   State laws; scope of subchapter.
       (a) State laws.
       (b) Scope of title.
9673.   Risk retention groups.
       (a) Exemption.
       (b) Exceptions.
          (1)  State laws generally applicable.
          (2)  State regulations  not  subject to exemp-
                tion.
       (c) Application of exemptions.
       (d) Agents or brokers.
9674.   Purchasing groups.
       (a) Exemption.
       (b) Application of exemptions.
       (c) Agents or brokers.
9675.   Applicability of securities laws.
       (a) Ownership interests.
       (b) Investment Company Act.
       (c) Blue sky law.

               West's Federal Forms
Administrative  agency  decisions and orders, enforcement and re-
     view, see § 851 et seq.
Administrative  subpoenas, enforcement, see § 6004 et seq.
Depositions and discovery, see §§  3271 et seq., 3681 et seq.
Intervention, motion for leave, see § 3111 et seq.
Jurisdiction and venue in district courts, see § 1003 et seq.
Production of documents, motions and orders pertaining to,  see
     § 3551 et seq.
Sentence and fine, see § 7531 et seq.
Subpoenas, see §  3981  et seq.

          WESTLAW Electronic Research
  See WESTLAW guide following the  Explanation pages of this
pamphlet


 SUBCHAPTER I—HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
    RELEASES, LIABILITY, COMPENSATION

§  9601.   Definitions

  For purpose of this subchapter—

    (1) The term "act of  God" means an unantic-
  ipated grave natural  disaster or other  natural
  phenomenon of  an exceptional, inevitable, and ir-
  resistible character, the effects of which could not
  have been prevented or avoided by the exercise of
  due care or foresight.
    (2) The term "Administrator" means the Ad-
  ministrator  of the  United States Environmental
  Protection Agency.
    (3) The term  "barrel" means  forty-two United
  States gallons at sixty degrees Fahrenheit.
                        (4) The_term "claim" means a demand in writ-
                      ing for a sum certain.
                        (5) The term "claimant" means any person who
                      presents  a claim  for  compensation  under  this
                      chapter.
                        (6) The term "damages" means damages for
                      injury or loss of natural resources  as  set forth in
                      section 9607(a) or 9611(b) of this title.
                        (7) The term "drinking water supply" means
                      any raw or finished water  source  that is or may
                      be used by a public water  system (as defined in
                      the Safe  Drinking Water Act [42  U.S.C. 300f et
                      seq.]) or as drinking water by one or more indi-
                      viduals.
                        (8) The term "environment" means (A) the nav-
                      igable waters, the waters of the contiguous zone,
                      and the ocean waters  for  which the natural re-
                      sources are under the exclusive management au-
                      thority of the United States under the Magnuson
                      Fishery Conservation and  Management Act [16
                      U.S.C.  1801 et seq.], and (B) any other surface
                      water,  ground water, drinking water supply, land
                      surface or subsurface strata,  or ambient air with-
                      in the United States or under the jurisdiction of
                      the United States.
                        (9) The term "facility" means (A) any building,
                      structure, installation, equipment, pipe or pipeline
                      (including any pipe into a sewer or  publicly owned
                      treatment works), well, pit,  pond, lagoon, im-
                      poundment, ditch, landfill, storage container, mo-
                      tor vehicle, rolling stock, or  aircraft,  or (B) any
                      site or area  where a  hazardous  substance has
                      been deposited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
                      otherwise come to be  located; but does not in-
                      clude any consumer product  in consumer use or
                      any vessel.
                        (10)  The term  "federally  permitted  release"
                      means  (A) discharges in compliance with a permit
                      under  section 1342 of Title 33,  (B)  discharges
                      resulting from circumstances identified and re-
                      viewed and made part of the public record with
                      respect to  a  permit  issued  or modified  under
                      section 1342 of Title 33 and subject to a condition
                      of such permit, (C) continuous or anticipated inter-
                      mittent discharges from a point source, identified
                      in a  permit or permit application under section
                      1342 of  Title 33, which are caused  by events
                      occurring within the scope of relevant operating
                      or  treatment systems, (D) discharges in compli-
                      ance with a legally enforceable permit under sec-
                      tion 1344 of Title 33, (E) releases in compliance
                      with a  legally enforceable  final  permit  issued
                      pursuant to  section 3005(a)  through  (d) of the
                      Solid Waste Disposal Act [42 U.S.C. 6925(a) to (d)]
                      from a hazardous waste treatment,  storage, or
                      disposal  facility  when  such permit  specifically
                                                 472

-------
                             ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                   42 § 9601
identifies  the hazardous  substances and makes
such substances subject to a standard of practice,
control procedure or bioassay limitation or condi-
tion, or other control on the hazardous substances
in such releases, (F) any release  in compliance
with a legally enforceable permit issued under
section 1412 of Title 33 of1 section  1413 of Title
33, (G) any injection of fluids authorized under
Federal underground injection control programs
or State programs submitted for Federal approval
(and not disapproved by the Administrator of the
Environmental Protection Agency) pursuant to
part C of the Safe Drinking Water Act [42 U.S.C.
300h et seq.], (H) any emission into the air subject
to a permit or control regulation  under section
111 [42 U.S.C. 7411], section 112 [42 U.S.C. 7412],
Title I part C [42 U.S.C. 7470 et seq.], Title I part
D [42 U.S.C. 7501 et seq.], or  State implementa-
tion plans  submitted in accordance with section
110 of the Clean Air Act [42 U.S.C. 7410] (and not
disapproved by the administrator of the  Environ-
mental Protection  Agency), including any sched-
ule or waiver granted, promulgated, or approved
under these sections, (I) any injection of fluids or
other materials authorized under applicable  State
law (i) for the purpose of stimulating or treating
wells for the production of crude oil, natural gas,
or water,  (ii) for the purpose of secondary,  terti-
ary, or other enhanced recovery of crude oil or
natural  gas, or (iii) which are  brought to the
surface  in  conjunction with  the production of
crude oil or natural gas and which are reinjected,
(J) the introduction  of any pollutant into a public-
ly owned treatment works when such pollutant is
specified in  and in compliance  with applicable
pretreatment standards of section 1317(b) or (c) of
Title 33 and enforceable  requirements  in a pre-
treatment program submitted by a State or mu-
nicipality for Federal approval under section 1342
of Title 33, and (K) any release of source, special
nuclear, or byproduct material,  as those terms are
defined  in the Atomic  Energy Act of 1954 [42
U.S.C. 2011 et seq.], in compliance  with a legally
enforceable license, permit, regulation, or order
issued pursuant to  the  Atomic  Energy  Act of
1954.
  (11) The term "Fund" or "Trust Fund" means
the Hazardous Substance Super-fund established
by section 9507 of Title 26.
  (12) The term "ground  water" means water in
a saturated zone or stratum beneath the surface
of land or water.
  (13) The term "guarantor" means any person,
other than the owner or  operator,  who provides
evidence of financial responsibility  for an owner
or operator  under this  chapter.
  (14) The  term  "hazardous substance"  means
(A)^any substance designated pursuant to section
1321(b)(2)(A) of Title 33, (B) any element, com-
pound, mixture, solution, or substance designated
pursuant  to section  9602 of this  title, (C) any
hazardous waste having the characteristics identi-
fied under or listed pursuant to section 3001  of
the Solid Waste Disposal Act [42 U.S.C. 6921] (but
not including any waste the regulation of which
under the Solid Waste Disposal Act [42  U.S.C.
6901  et seq.] has been suspended by Act of Con-
gress), (D) any  toxic pollutant listed under section
1317(a) of Title 33, (E) any hazardous air pollutant
listed under section 112 of the Clean Air Act [42
U.S.C. 7412], and (F) any imminently hazardous
chemical  substance or  mixture with respect  to
which the Administrator has taken action  pursu-
ant to section 2606 of Title 15.  The term does not
include petroleum, including crude oil or any frac-
tion thereof which is not otherwise specifically
listed  or  designated  as a  hazardous  substance
under subparagraphs (A) through (F) of this para-
graph, and the  term does not include natural gas,
natural gas liquids, liquefied natural  gas, or syn-
thetic gas usable for  fuel (or mixtures of natural
gas and such synthetic  gas).
  (15) The term "navigable  waters" or "naviga-
ble waters of the United States" means the wa-
ters of the United States, including the territorial
seas.
  (16) The term "natural resources"  means land,
fish,  wildlife,  biota,  air, water, ground  water,
drinking water supplies, and other such resources
belonging to, managed by, held in trust by,  apper-
taining to, or otherwise controlled by the United
States (including the resources of the fishery con-
servation  zone established by the Magnuson Fish-
ery Conservation and Management Act [16  U.S.C.
1801 et seq.]) any State or local government, any
foreign government, any Indian tribe, or, if such
resources are  subject  to a  trust restriction on
alienation, any  member of an Indian tribe.
  (17) The  term "offshore facility"  means any
facility of any kind located in, on, or under,  any  of
the navigable waters of the  United  States, and
any facility of any kind which  is subject  to the
jurisdiction of the United States and is located in,
on, or under any other waters, other than a vessel
or a public vessel.
  (18) The  term  "onshore facility"  means  any
facility (including, but  not limited to, motor ve-
hicles and rolling stock)  of any kind located in, on,
or under,  any land or nonnavigable waters  within
the United States.
  (19) The term  "otherwise  subject to the juris-
diction of the United States" means subject to the
   Ssl.Env.Uw Stats. '87 Ed.—16
                                              473

-------
42 § 9601
FEDERAL ENVIRONMENTAL LAW
  jurisdiction of  the  United States by  virtue  of
  United States citizenship,  United States  vessel
  documentation or numbering,  or  as provided by
  international  agreement to  which  the United
  States is a party.

    (20XA) The term "owner or operator"  means
  (i) in  the case  of a vessel, any  person owning,
  operating, or chartering by demise, such vessel,
  (ii) in the case  of an  onshore facility or an off-
  shore facility, any  person owning or  operating
  such facility, and (iii)  in the case of any facility,
  title  or  control  of which was conveyed due  to
  bankruptcy, foreclosure, tax delinquency,  aban-
  donment, or similar means to a unit of State  or
  local government, any person who owned, operat-
  ed or otherwise controlled activities at such facili-
  ty immediately  beforehand.  Such term does not
  include a person, who,  without participating in the
  management of a vessel  or facility, holds indicia of
  ownership primarily to protect his security interest
  in the vessel or facility.
    (B) In the case of a hazardous substance which
  has been  accepted for transportation by a com-
  mon  or contract carrier  and except as provided in
  section 9607(a)(3) or (4)  of this title, (i) the term
  "owner  or operator"  shall mean such common
  carrier or other bona  fide for hire carrier acting
  as an independent contractor during such trans-
  portation, (ii) the shipper of such hazardous sub-
  stance shall not be considered to have  caused  or
  contributed to any release  during such transpor-
  tation which resulted solely  from circumstances
  or conditions beyond his control.
    (C) In the case of a hazardous substance which
  has been delivered by  a  common or contract carri-
  er to a disposal or treatment facility and except as
  provided in section 9607(a)(3) or (4) of this title (i)
  the term  "owner or operator" shall not include
  such  common or contract carrier,  and (ii) such
  common  or contract  carrier  shall not be con-
  sidered  to have caused or  contributed to any
  release at such  disposal or treatment facility re-
  sulting from circumstances or conditions beyond
  its control.
    (D) The term "owner or  operator"  does  not
  include a unit of State or local government which
  acquired  ownership  or  control  involuntarily
  through  bankruptcy,  tax delinquency,  abandon-
  ment, or other circumstances in which the govern-
  ment involuntarily acquires title  by virtue of  its
  function as sovereign.   The  exclusion provided
  under this paragraph  shall  not apply to any State
  or local government which has caused or contrib-
  uted  to  the  release or  threatened release  of a
  hazardous substance from the facility, and such a
  State or local government shall be subject to the
  provisions of this chapter in the same manner and
  to the same extent, both  procedurally and sub-
                      stantively, as any nongovernmental entity, includ-
                      ing liability under section 9607 of this title.
                        (21) The term "person" means  an individual,
                      firm, corporation, association, partnership, consor-
                      tium, joint  venture,  commercial  entity,  United
                      States Government, State, municipality, commis-
                      sion, political subdivision of a  State, or any inter-
                      state body.
                        (22) The term "release" means any spilling,
                      leaking,  pumping, pouring, emitting, emptying,
                      discharging, injecting, escaping, leaching, dump-
                      ing, or disposing into the environment (including
                      the abandonment or  discarding of barrels,  con-
                      tainers, and other closed receptacles containing
                      any hazardous substance or pollutant or contami-
                      nant), but excludes (A) any release which results
                      in exposure to persons solely within a workplace,
                      with respect to  a claim which such persons  may
                      assert against the employer of such persons, (B)
                      emissions from  the engine exhaust  of a  motor
                      vehicle, rolling stock,  aircraft, vessel, or pipeline
                      pumping station engine,  (C)  release of  source,
                      byproduct,  or special nuclear material from a
                      nuclear incident, as those terms are defined in the
                      Atomic Energy  Act of 1954  [42 U.S.C. 2011 et
                      seq.], if  such  release is  subject to requirements
                      with respect to financial protection established by
                      the Nuclear Regulatory Commission under  sec-
                      tion 170  of such Act [42 U.S.C. 2210], or, for the
                      purposes of section 9604 of this title or any other
                      response action,  any release of source byproduct,
                      or special nuclear material from any processing
                      site designated under section 7912(a)(l) or 7942(a)
                      of  this title, and (D) the  normal  application  of
                      fertilizer.
                        (23) The term "remove" or "removal" means
                      the  cleanup or  removal  of  released hazardous
                      substances from the environment, such actions as
                      may be  necessary2  taken in  the  event of  the
                      threat of release of hazardous substances into the
                      environment, such actions as may be necessary to
                      monitor, assess, and evaluate  the  release  or
                      threat or release of  hazardous substances,  the
                      disposal  of  removed  material, or  the taking of
                      such other actions  as may be necessary to  pre-
                      vent, minimize,  or mitigate damage to the public
                      health or welfare or  to the  environment, which
                      may otherwise result  from a release  or threat of
                      release.  The  term includes,  in addition, without
                      being limited  to, security fencing  or other mea-
                      sures to limit  access,  provision of alternative wa-
                      ter supplies, temporary evacuation and housing of
                      threatened individuals not otherwise provided for,
                      action taken under section 9604(b) of  this title,
                      and any emergency assistance which  may be pro-
                      vided under the Disaster Relief Ace  of 1974 [42
                      U.S.C. 5121 et seq.].
                        (24) The term "remedy" or "remedial  action"
                      means those actions  consistent with permanent
                                                474

-------
                             ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                   42  § 9601
remedy taken instead of or in addition to removal
actions in the event of a  release or threatened
release of a hazardous substance into ihe euvuon-
ment, to  prevent or minimize the release of haz-
ardous substances so that they do not migrate to
cause substantial danger  to  present  or future
public health or welfare or  the environment. The
term includes, but is not limited to,  such actions
at the location of the release as storage, confine-
ment, perimeter protection  using  dikes, trenches,
or ditches, clay  cover,  neutralization, cleanup of
released  hazardous substances or contaminated
materials, recycling or reuse, diversion, destruc-
tion, segregation of reactive wastes, dredging or
excavations, repair or replacement of leaking con-
tainers, collection of leachate and runoff, onsite
treatment or incineration, provision of alternative
water supplies,  and any monitoring reasonably
required  to  assure that such actions protect the
public health and welfare  and the environment.
The term includes the costs of permanent reloca-
tion of residents and businesses  and community
facilities  where  the President determines  that,
alone or in combination with other measures, such
relocation is more cost-effective than and environ-
mentally preferable  to the transportation,  stor-
age, treatment, destruction, or secure disposition
offsite of hazardous substances,  or may other-
wise be necessary to protect the public health or
welfare;  the term includes offsite transport and
offsite storage, treatment,  destruction,  or secure
disposition of hazardous substances and associat-
ed contaminated materials.
  (25) The term "respond" or "response" means
remove, removal, remedy, and remedial action, all
such terms  (including the  terms "removal" and
"remedial action") include  enforcement activities
related thereto.
  (26) The term "transport" or "transportation"
means the movement of a hazardous substance by
any mode, including pipeline (as defined in the
Pipeline Safety Act), and in the case of a  hazard-
ous substance which has been accepted for trans-
portation  by a  common or contract carrier, the
term "transport" or "transportation" shall include
any stoppage in transit which is temporary, inci-
dental to the transportation movement, and at the
ordinary  operating convenience of a common or
contract carrier, and any such stoppage shall be
considered as a  continuity  of movement and not
as the storage of a hazardous substance.
  (27) The terms "United States"  and  "State"
include the  several States  of  the  Unites  States,
the District of  Columbia,  the Commonwealth of
Puerto Rico, Guam, American Samoa, the United
States Virgin Islands, the Commonwealth of the
Northern  Marianas,  and any  other  territory  or
possession over which the United States has juris-
diction.
  (28) The term "vessel" means every description
of watercraft or other artificial contrivance used,
or capable of being used, as a means of transpor-
tation on water.
  (29) The terms "disposal", "hazardous waste",
and "treatment" shall have the meaning provided
in section 1004 of the Solid  Waste Disposal Act
[42 U.S.C. 6903].
  (30) The terms  "territorial sea" and "contig-
uous  zone" shall have  the  meaning  provided  in
section 1362 of Title 33.
  (31) The  term  "national  contingency  plan"
means the national contingency plan  published
under section 1321(c) of Title 33 or revised  pursu-
ant to section 9605 of this title.
  (32) The term "liable" or "liability" under this
subchapter shall be construed to be the standard
of liability which obtains under section 1321 of
Title 33.
  (33) The term "pollutant or contaminant" shall
include, but not be limited to, any'element,  sub-
stance, compound, or mixture, including disease-
causing agents, which after release into the envi-
ronment and upon exposure, ingestion, inhalation;
or assimilation into any organism, either directly
from  the  environment or indirectly by ingestion
through food chains, will or may reasonably be
anticipated to cause death, disease,  behavioral
abnormalities, cancer,  genetic mutation, physio-
logical malfunctions (including malfunctions in re-
production) or physical deformations, in such or-
ganisms or their offspring;  except that the term
"pollutant or contaminant"  shall not include pe-
troleum, including crude oil or any fraction there-
of which  is not otherwise  specifically listed or
designated as a  hazardous substance under  sub-
paragraphs (A) through (F) of paragraph (14) and
shall  not  include natural gas,  liquefied natural
gas, or synthetic gas of pipeline quality (or  mix-
tures  of natural gas  and  such synthetic gas).
  (34) The.term "alternative water supplies" in-
cludes, but is not limited  to, drinking water and
household water supplies.
  (35HA)  The term  "contractual  relationship",
for the purpose  of  section 9607(b)(3)  of this  title
includes, but is not  limited to, land contracts,
deeds or other instruments transferring title or
possession, unless the real property on which the
facility concerned is located was acquired by the
defendant after the disposal  or  placement  of the
hazardous substance on, in, or at the facility, and
one or more of the circumstances described  in
clause (i), (ii), or (iii) is also  established  uy the
defendant by a  preponderance  of  the evidence:
                                              475

-------
42 § 9601
FEDERAL  ENVIRONMENTAL iAW
      (i) At the time the defendant  acquired  the
    facility the defendant did not know and had no
    reason to know that  any hazardous substance
    which is the subject  of  the release or threat-
    ened release was disposed of on,  in, or at  the
    facility.
      (ii) The  defendant is  a  government entity
    which  acquired  the  facility  by  escheat,  or
    through  any other involuntary transfer or ac-
    quisition, or through the exercise of eminent
    domain authority by purchase or condemnation.
      (iii) The defendant acquired the  facility by
    inheritance or bequest.

In addition  to  establishing  the foregoing,  the  de-
fendant must establish that he has  satisfied  the
requirements of section 9607(b)(3)(a) and (b) of this
title.

    (B) To  establish that the  defendant  had  no
  reason to know, as provided in clause (i) of sub-
  paragraph  (A)  of  this paragraph, the defendant
  must have undertaken, at the time of acquisition,
  all appropriate inquiry  into the  previous owner-
  ship and  uses of the  property  consistent with
  good commercial or customary practice in an ef-
  fort  to minimize liability.   For purposes of  the
  preceding sentence the court shall  take into  ac-
  count any specialized knowledge or experience on
  the part of the defendant,  the relationship of  the
  purchase price to the  value  of  the property if
  uncontaminated, commonly known or reasonably
  ascertainable information about the  property,  the
  obviousness of the presence or likely presence of
  contamination at the property, and  the ability to
  detect such contamination  by appropriate inspec-
  tion.
    (C) Nothing in this  paragraph or in section
  9607(b)(3) of this title shall  diminish the liability of
  any previous owner or operator of  such facility
  who would otherwise be liable under this chapter.
  Notwithstanding this paragraph,  if the defendant
  obtained  actual  knowledge of  the release  or
  threatened release of a hazardous  substance at
  such facility  when the defendant owned the real
  property and then subsequently transferred own-
  ership of the property to another person without
  disclosing such knowledge, such defendant shall
  be treated as liable under section  9607(a)(l) of this
  title and no  defense  under section  9607(b)(3) of
  this  title  shall be available to  such  defendant.
    (D) Nothing in  this paragraph shall affect  the
  liability under this chapter  of a defendant who, by
  any act or omission, caused or contributed to  the
  release or threatened release of a hazardous sub-
  stance which is the subject of the action relating
  to the facility.
                         (36) The term "Indian tribe" means any Indian
                       tribe, band, nation, or other organized group or
                       community, including any  Alaska Native village
                       but not  including any Alaska Native regional or
                       village corporation, which is recognized as eligible
                       for the special programs and services provided by
                       the  United  States  to  Indians because  of their
                       status as Indians.
                         (37XA)  The  term  "service  station   dealer"
                       means any person—
                           (i)  who owns or operates  a motor vehicle
                         service station, filling station,  garage, or sim-
                         ilar retail establishment engaged in the busi-
                         ness  of selling, repairing, or servicing motor
                         vehicles, where a significant percentage of the
                         gross  revenue of the establishment is derived
                         from  the fueling, repairing,  or servicing of mo-
                         tor vehicles, and
                           (ii)  who accepts for collection, accumulation,
                         and delivery to an oil recycling facility, recycled
                         oil that (I) has been removed from the engine of
                         a light duty motor  vehicle or household appli-
                         ances  by  the  owner  of  such  vehicle  or  appli-
                         ances, and (II) is presented, by  such owner, to
                         such  person  for  collection,  accumulation, and
                         delivery to an oil recycling facility.
                         (B) For purposes of section 9614(c) of this title
                       the  term "service station dealer" shall,  notwith-
                       standing the provisions of subparagraph (A), in-
                       clude any government agency that establishes a
                       facility  solely for the purpose of accepting recy-
                       cled oil  that satisfies  the criteria  set  forth in
                       subclauses (I) and (II)  of subparagraph (A)(ii),
                       and, with respect to recycled oil that satisfies the
                       criteria set forth in subclauses (I) and (II), owners
                       or operators of refuse collection services who are
                       compelled by State law to collect, accumulate, and
                       deliver such oil to an oil recycling facility.
                         (C) The President shall promulgate regulations
                       regarding the determination of what constitutes a
                       significant percentage of the  gross revenues of
                       an establishment for purposes of this paragraph.
                         (38) The term "incineration vessel" means any
                       vessel which carries hazardous substances for the
                       purpose of  incineration of such  substances, so
                       long as  such substances or residues of such sub-
                       stances  are on board.
                     (Dec. 11, 1980, Pub.L. 96-510, Title I, § 101,  94 Stat. 2767;
                     Dec. 22, 1980, Pub.L. 96-561, Title  II,  § 238(b), 94 Stat.
                     3300: as amended Oct.  17, 1986, Pub.L. 99-499, Title I,
                     §§ 101, 114(b), 127(a), Title V, § 517(c)(2), 100 Stat. 1615,
                     1652, 1692,  1774.)
                      l So in original. Probably should be "or".
                      2 So in original. Probably should be "necessarily"
                                                 476

-------
                                ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                      42  §9604
(e) Applicability to registered pesticide product
  This section shall not apply to the application of a
pesticide product  registered under the  Federal In-
secticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide  Act [7 U.S.C.
136 et seq.] or to the handling and storage of such a
pesticide product by an  agricultural producer.
(f) Exemptions  from notice and penalty provisions for
     substances reported  under other Federal law or is
     in continuous release, etc.
  No notification shall be required under subsection
(a) or (b) of this section for any release of a hazard-
ous substance—
    (1) which is required to be reported (or specifi-
  cally exempted from a requirement  for reporting)
  under subtitle C of the Solid Waste Disposal Act
  [42 U.S.C. 6921  et seq.] or regulations thereunder
  and which  has been reported  to  the  National
  Response Center, or
    (2) which  is  a continuous  release,  stable in
  quantity and rate, and is—
      (A) from a  facility for which notification has
    been given under subsection (c) of this section,
    or
      (B) a release of which notification has been
    given under subsections (a) and (b) of this sec-
    tion  for a period   sufficient  to  establish the
    continuity, quantity, and regularity of such re-
    lease:
  Provided, That notification in  accordance  with
  subsections  (a) and (b) of this paragraph shall be
  given for releases subject to this paragraph annu-
  ally, or at such time as there is any  statistically
  significant increase in the quantity of any hazard-
  ous  substance  or  constituent  thereof released,
  above that previously reported or occurring.
(Dec. 11, 1980, Pub.L. 96-510, Title I, § 103, 94 Stat. 2772;
Dec.  22, 1980, Pub.L. 96-561, Title II, § 238(b), 94 Stat.
3300;  as amended Oct. 17, 1986, Pub.L. 99-499, Title I,
§§ 103, 109(aXD, (2), 100 Stat. 1617, 1632,  1633.)
                Library References
  Health and Environment «=25.5(10), 25.6(3),  (9), 25.7(3), (24).
  C.J.S. Health and Environment §§ 92, 103 et seq., 106,  113 et
   seq.

§  9604.  Response  authorities
(a) Removal and other remedial action by President;
     applicability  of national contingency plan;  re-
     sponse by potentially responsible parties;  public
     health threats; limitations on response: exception
  (1) Whenever (A) any hazardous substance  is re-
leased or there is a substantial  threat  of such a
release into the environment,  or (B) there is  a re-
lease or substantial threat of release  into the envi-
ronment of any pollutant or contaminant which may
present an imminent  and substantial danger to the
public health or welfare, the President is authorized
to act,  consistent with  the national  contingency
plan,  to remove or arrange for the removal of, and
provide for remedial action relating to such hazard-
ous  substance, pollutant,  or contaminant  at  any
time (including its removal from any contaminated
natural resource), or take any other  response mea-
sure consistent with  the  national contingency plan
which the President deems necessary to protect the
public health or welfare or the environment.  When
the President  determines that such  action will be
done properly and promptly by the owner or opera-
tor of the facility or vessel or by any other respon-
sible party, the President may allow  such person to
carry out the action, conduct the remedial investiga-
tion, or conduct the feasibility study in accordance
with section 9622 of this title.  No remedial investi-
gation or feasibility study (RI/FS) shall be autho-
rized  except on a determination  by  the President
that the party is qualified to conduct  the RI/FS and
only if the President contracts with or arranges for
a qualified person to assist the President in oversee-
ing and reviewing the conduct of such RI/FS and if
the responsible party agrees to reimburse the Fund
for any cost  incurred by  the President under, or in
connection with, the oversight contract or arrange-
ment.  In  no event shall a potentially  responsible
party be subject  to a  lesser standard  of  liability,
receive preferential treatment, or in any other way,
whether direct or indirect,  benefit from any such
arrangements as a response action contractor, or as
a person hired  or retained by such a response action
contractor, with respect to the release or facility in
question.   The  President shall give  primary atten-
tion  to  those releases  which the President  deems
may present a public health threat.
  (2) Removal action
    Any removal action  undertaken by  the Presi-
  dent under this subsection (or by  any other per-
  son  referred to in  section 9622  of  this  title)
  should, to the extent the President deems practi-
  cable, contribute to the efficient performance of
  any long term remedial action with respect to the
  release or threatened release concerned.
  (3) Limitations on response
    The President shall not provide for a removal or
  remedial action under this section in response to a
  release or threat of release—
    (A) of a  naturally occurring substance in  its
  unaltered form, or altered solely through natural-
  ly occurring processes or phenomena, from a loca-
  tion where it is naturally found;
    (B) from products  which are part of the struc-
  ture of, and  result in exposure within, residential
  buildings or business or  community  structures;
                                                 479

-------
42 § 9604
FEDERAL  ENVIRONMENTAL LAW
    (C) into public or private drinking water sup-
  plies due to deterioration of the system through
  ordinary use.
  (4) Exception to limitations
    Notwithstanding paragraph (3) of this subsec-
  tion, to the extent authorized by this section, the
  President may respond to any release or threat of
  release if in the President's discretion, it consti-
  tutes a public  health or environmental emergency
  and no  other person with the authority and capa-
  bility to respond to the  emergency will do so in a
  timely manner.
(b) Investigations, monitoring, etc., by President
  (1) Information;  studies and investigations
    Whenever the President is authorized to act
  pursuant to  subsection (a) of  this  section,  or
  whenever the  President has reason to believe that
  a release has occurred or  is about to occur, or
  that illness, disease, or complaints thereof may be
  attributable to  exposure  to a  hazardous  sub-
  stance, pollutant,  or contaminant and that a re-
  lease may have  occurred or be occurring, he may
  undertake such investigations, monitoring, sur-
  veys, testing,  and other information gathering as
  he may deem  necessary or appropriate to identify
  the existence  and extent of the release or threat
  thereof, the source and nature of the hazardous
  substances, pollutants or contaminants involved,
  and the extent of danger to the public health or
  welfare or to  the environment.  In addition, the
  President may  undertake  such  planning,  legal,
  fiscal,  economic, engineering, architectural,  and
  Other studies  or investigations as he may deem
  necessary or  appropriate to plan and  direct re-
  sponse  actions,  to recover the costs thereof,  and
  to enforce the provisions of this  chapter.
  (2) Coordination  of investigations
    The  President shall promptly notify the appro-
  priate Federal and State natural resource trustees
  of potential damages to natural resources result-
  ing from releases under investigation pursuant to
  this  section and shall  seek to coordinate  the as-
  sessments,  investigations,  and  planning  under
  this section with such Federal and State trustees.
(c) Criteria for continuance of obligations from Fund
     over specified amount for response actions; con-
     sultation by President with affected States; con-
     tracts or cooperative agreements by States with
     President prior to remedial actions; cost-sharing
     agreements;  selection by President of  remedial
     actions; State credits: granting of credit, expenses
     before listing or agreement, response actions be-
     tween 1978  and 1980.  State expenses after Decem-
     ber  11, 1980, in excess  of 10  percent of costs,
     item-by-item  approval, use of credits; operation
     and  maintenance; limitation on source  of funds
     for O&M; recontracting; siting
  (I) Unless (A) the President finds that (i) contin-
ued  response actions  are immediately required to
                     prevent, limit, or mitigate an emergency, (ii) there is
                     an immediate risk to public health or welfare or the
                     environment, and (iii) such assistance will not other-
                     wise be  provided  on  a timely  basis, or  (B)  the
                     President has determined the appropriate  remedial
                     actions pursuant to paragraph (2) of this subsection
                     and the State or States in which the source of the
                     release is located  have complied with the  require-
                     ments  of paragraph (3) of  this  subsection, or (C)
                     continued response action is otherwise appropriate
                     and consistent with the remedial action to be taken l
                     obligations from the Fund, other than those autho-
                     rized by subsection (b) of  this  section, shall  not
                     continue  after  $2,000,000 has been  obligated  for
                     response actions or 12 months has elapsed  from the
                     date of initial response to  a release  or  threatened
                     release of hazardous substances.
                       (2) The President shall consult with the affected
                     State or States before  determining any appropriate
                     remedial action to be taken pursuant to the authori-
                     ty granted  under  subsection  (a)  of  this  section.
                       (3) The President shall not provide any  remedial
                     actions pursuant to this section unless the  State in
                     which the release occurs first enters into a contract
                     or cooperative agreement with the President provid-
                     ing assurances deemed adequate by  the President
                     that (A) the State will assure all future maintenance
                     of the removal and remedial actions provided for the
                     expected life of such actions as determined by the
                     President; (B) the State will assure the  availability
                     of a hazardous  waste disposal facility acceptable to
                     the President and in compliance with the  require-
                     ments of subtitle C of the Solid Waste Disposal  Act
                     [42 U.S.C.A.  §  6921  et seq.] for any necessary  off-
                     site storage, destruction, treatment, or secure dispo-
                     sition of  the hazardous substances;  and  (C)  the
                     State will  pay or  assure  payment  of  (i) 10  per
                     centum of the costs of the remedial action, including
                     all future maintenance,  or (ii) 50 percent  (or such
                     greater amount as  the President may determine
                     appropriate, taking  into account the degree of re-
                     sponsibility of the State or political subdivision for
                     the release)  of  any sums expended in response to a
                     release at a facility,  that was operated by the State
                     or a political subdivision thereof, either directly or
                     through a contractual  relationship or otherwise, at
                     the time of any disposal of hazardous  substances
                     therein.  For the purpose of clause (ii) of  this sub-
                     paragraph, the  term "facility" does not include navi-
                     gable waters or the beds underlying those waters.
                     The President shall grant the State a credit against
                     the share of the costs for  which  it  is  responsible
                     under  this paragraph   for any documented direct
                     out-of-pocket non-Federal funds  expended or  obli-
                     gated by the State or a political subdivision thereof
                     after  January  1,  1978,  and before  December 11,
                     1980,  for cost-eligible  response actions  and claims
                                                 480

-------
                               ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                     42 § 9604
vene in any civi] action involving the enforcement of
such contract or subcontract.
  (4)  Where  iwo or more noncontiguous  facilities
are reasonably related on the basis of geography, or
on the basis of the threat, or potential threat to the
public health or  welfare  or the environment,  the
President may, in his discretion, treat these related
facilities  as one for purposes of this section.
(eV-Information gathering and  access;  action autho-
     rized, access to information, entry, inspection and
     samples; authority  and samples, compliance or-
     ders; issuance  and  compliance, other authority,
     confidentiality of information; basis for withhold-
     ing
  (1) Action authorized
    Any  officer,  employee, or  representative of the
  President, duly designated  by the President, is
  authorized to take action under paragraph (2), (3),
  or (4) (or  any combination  thereof) at a vessel,
  facility, establishment, place, property, or location
  or,  in the case of paragraph  (3) or (4), at any
  vessel,  facility,  establishment, place, property,  or
  location which is  adjacent to the vessel, facility,
  establishment,   place,  property,  or  location  re-
  ferred to in such  paragraph (3) or (4). Any duly
  designated officer, employee, or representative of
  a State or political subdivision under a contract or
  cooperative agreement under subsection (d)(l)  of
  this section is also authorized to take such action.
  The authority of  paragraphs (3)  and (4) may  be
  exercised only if there  is a reasonable  basis  to
  believe there may be a release or threat of release
  of a hazardous substance or pollutant or contami-
  nant.   The authority  of  this subsection may  be
  exercised only for the purposes of determining
  the  need for response, or choosing or taking any
  response action under this subchapter, or other-
  wise enforcing the provisions of this subchapter.
  (2) Access to information
    Any  officer,  employee, or  representative  de-
  scribed in paragraph (1) may require any person
  who has or may have  information relevant to any
  of the following to furnish,  upon reasonable  no-
  tice, information  or documents relating  to such
  matter:
      (A) The identification, nature,  and quantity
    of materials which have been or are generated,
    treated,  stored,  or  disposed of at a vessel  or
    facility or transported to  a vessel or facility.
      (B) The nature or extent of  a release  or
    threatened release of a hazardous substance  or
    pollutant or contaminant at or from a vessel  or
    facility.
      (C) Information relating to the ability of a
    person  to  pay  for  or to  perform a cleanup.
In addition,  upon reasonable  notice, such  person
either (i) shall grant any such officer, employee, or
representative access at all reasonable times to any
vessel,  facility,  establishment, place, property,  or
location  to  inspect  and  copy all  documents  or
records relating to such matters  or (ii) shall copy
and furnish to the officer,  employee, or representa-
tive all such documents or records, at the option and
expense of such person.
  (3) Entry
    Any officer, employee,  or representative  de-
  scribed in paragraph (1)  is authorized to enter at
  reasonable times  any of  the following:
      (A) Any  vessel, facility,  establishment,  or
    other place  or  property where  any hazardous
    substance or pollutant or contaminant may  be
    or has  been  generated, stored, treated, disposed
    of, or transported from.
      (B) Any  vessel, facility,  establishment,  or
    other place or property from which or to which
    a hazardous substance or pollutant or contami-
    nant has been or may  have been released.
      (C) Any  vessel, facility,  establishment,  or
    other place or property where such release is or
    may be threatened.
      (D) Any  vessel, facility,  establishment,  or
    other place  or property where entry  is needed
    to determine the need for response or the  ap-
    propriate response or  to effectuate a  response
    action under this subchapter.
  (4) Inspection and  samples
   (A) Authority
      Any  officer,  employee or representative  de-
    scribed in paragraph (1) is authorized to inspect
    and obtain  samples from  any vessel,  facility,
    establishment, or other  place  or property  re-
    ferred  to in  paragraph (3) or from any location
    of any  suspected hazardous substance or pollu-
    tant or contaminant. Any such officer, employ-
    ee,  or  representative  is authorized  to inspect
    and obtain samples of any containers  or label-
    ing for suspected hazardous substances  or pol-
    lutants or contaminants.  Each such inspection
    shall be completed with reasonable promptness.

   (B) Samples
      If the officer, employee,  or representative
    obtains any samples, before leaving the premis-
    es he shall give to the  owner, operator, tenant,
    or other person  in charge  of the place from
    which the samples  were obtained a receipt  de-
    scribing the  sample obtained and, if requested,
    a portion of each such sample.  A copy of the
    results of any analysis made of such samples
    shall be furnished promptly to the owner, oper-
                                                483

-------
42 §9604
FEDERAL ENVIRONMENTAL LAW
    ator, tenant, or other person in charge, if such
    person can be  located.

  (5) Compliance orders
    (A) Issuance
      If  consent is not granted regarding any re-
    quest made by an officer, employee, or repre-
    sentative under paragraph (2), (3), or (4),  the
    President may issue an order directing compli-
    ance with the  request.  The  order may  be is-
    sued after such notice and opportunity for con-
    sultation as is reasonably appropriate under the
    circumstances.

    (B) Compliance
      The President may ask the Attorney General
    to commence a civil action to compel compliance
    with a request or order referred to in subpara-
    graph (A).  Where there is a reasonable basis
    to believe there may be a release or threat of  a
    release of a hazardous substance  or pollutant
    or contaminant, the court shall take the follow-
    ing actions:

        (i) In the  case of  interference with  entry
      or inspection, the court shall enjoin such in-
      terference or direct compliance with orders to
      prohibit interference  with entry or inspection
      unless under the circumstances of the case
      the demand  for entry or inspection is arbi-
      trary and capricious,  an abuse of discretion,
      or otherwise not in accordance with law.
        (ii) In the case of information  or document
      requests or orders, the court shall enjoin in-
      terference with  such information or doc-
      ument requests or  orders  or direct compli-
      ance with the requests or orders to provide
      such information or documents unless  under
      the circumstances of the case the demand for
      information  or documents  is arbitrary  and
      capricious, an abuse  of discretion, or  other-
      wise not in accordance with law.
The court may assess a civil penalty not to exceed
$25,000 for each day of noncompliance against  any
person who unreasonably  fails to  comply with the
provisions of paragraph (2), (3), or (4) or an  order
issued pursuant to  subparagraph (A) of this para-
graph.
  (6) Other authority
    Nothing in this subsection shall preclude the
  President from securing access or obtaining infor-
  mation in any other lawful manner.
  (7) Confidentiality of information
    (A) Any records,  reports,  or  information ob-
  tained  from  any person under this section (includ-
                      ing records, reports,  or  information obtained by
                      representatives of the President) shall be avail-
                      able to the public, except that upon a  showing
                      satisfactory to the President (or the State, as the
                      case may be) by any person that records, reports,
                      or information, or particular part thereof (other
                      than health or safety effects data), to which the
                      President (or the State,  as the case  may be) or
                      any officer, employee, or representative  has  ac-
                      cess under this section if made public would di-
                      vulge information entitled to protection under sec-
                      tion 1905 of Title 18, such information or particu-
                      lar portion thereof shall be  considered confiden-
                      tial in accordance with the purposes of that sec-
                      tion, except that such record, report, document or
                      information may be disclosed  to other  officers,
                      employees, or authorized representatives of the
                      United States concerned with  carrying  out this
                      chapter,  or when relevant in any proceeding un-
                      der this chapter.
                        (B) Any person not subject to the provisions of
                      section 1905 of Title 18 who knowingly and will-
                      fully  divulges or discloses any information enti-
                      tled  to  protection  under  this  subsection shall,
                      upon  conviction, be subject to a fine of not more
                      than $5,000 or to imprisonment not to exceed one
                      year,  or  both.
                        (C) In submitting data  under this chapter, a
                      person required to provide such data may (i) des-
                      ignate the data which such person believes  is
                      entitled to protection under this subsection and (ii)
                      submit such designated data separately from oth-
                      er data submitted under this chapter.  A designa-
                      tion under this paragraph  shall be made  in writ-
                      ing and  in  such manner as the  President may
                      prescribe by regulation.
                        (D) Notwithstanding any  limitation contained
                      in this section or any other  provision of  law, all
                      information reported to or otherwise obtained by
                      the President (or any representative of the Presi-
                      dent) under this chapter shall be made available,
                      upon  written request of any duly authorized com-
                      mittee of the Congress, to such committee.
                        (E) No person required  to provide information
                      under this chapter may claim that the information
                      is entitled to protection under this paragraph  un-
                      less  such person  shows  each  of the following:
                          (i) Such person has not disclosed the infor-
                        mation to any other person, other than a mem-
                        ber of a  local emergency planning committee
                        established under title III of the Amendments
                        and Reauthorization Act of  1986 [42  U.S.C.A.
                        § 11001 et seq.],  an officer or employee of the
                        United States or a State or  local government,
                        an employee of such person,  or a person who is
                        bound  by a confidentiality agreement, and such
                                                484

-------
                                ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                     42 § 9604
    person has  taken reasonable measures to pro-
    tect the confidentiality of such information and
    intends to continue to take such measures.
      (ii) The  information is not  required to  be
    disclosed, or otherwise made available, to  the
    public under any other Federal or State  law.
      (iii) Disclosure of the information is likely to
    cause substantial harm to the competitive posi-
    tion of such person.
      (iv) The specific chemical identity, if sought
    to  be  protected, is  not  readily discoverable
    through reverse  engineering.
    (F) The following information  with respect to
  any hazardous substance at the facility or vessel
  shall not be entitled to protection under this para-
  graph:
      (i) The trade name, common name, or gener-
    ic class or category of the hazardous substance.
      (ii) The physical properties of the substance,
    including its boiling point, melting point, flash
    point, specific gravity, vapor density, solubility
    in water, and vapor pressure  at 20 degrees
    Celsius.
      (iii) The  hazards to health and the environ-
    ment posed  by the substance, including physical
    hazards (such as explosion) and potential acute
    and chronic health hazards.
      (iv) The potential routes of human exposure
    to the substance at the facility, establishment,
    place, or property being investigated, entered,
    or inspected under this subsection.
      (v)  The location of disposal  of any waste
    stream.
      (vi) Any monitoring data or analysis of moni-
    toring data  pertaining to disposal activities.
      (vii) Any hydrogeologic or geologic data.
      (viii)  Any groundwater  monitoring data.
(f) Contracts for  response action; compliance with Fed-
     eral health and safety standards
  In awarding contracts to any person engaged in
response actions, the President or the State, in any
case where it  is awarding contracts pursuant to a
contract entered into under subsection (d) of this
section, shall  require compliance   with  Federal
health and safety  standards established under sec-
tion 9651(f) of this title by contractors and subcon-
tractors as a condition of such contracts.
(g) Rates for wages and labor standards applicable to
     covered work
  (1)  All laborers  and mechanics employed by con-
tractors or subcontractors in  the performance  of
construction, repair,  or alteration work funded  in
whole or in part under  this section shall be paid
wages at rates not less than those prevailing  on
projects  of a character similar  in  the  locality  as
determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance
with the Davis-Bacon Act [40 U.S.C. 276a et seq.].
The President shall not approve any such funding
without first obtaining  adequate assurance that re-
quired labor standards  will be maintained upon the
construction work.
  (2) The Secretary of Labor shall have, with re-
spect to the labor standards specified in paragraph
(1), the authority and functions set forth in Reorga-
nization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950 (15 F.R. 3176;
64 Stat. 1267) and section 276c of Title 40.
(h) Emergency procurement powers; exercise by Presi-
     dent
  Notwithstanding any other provision of law, sub-
ject to the provisions of section 9611 of this title, the
President may authorize the use of such emergency
procurement powers as he deems necessary  to ef-
fect the purpose of this chapter.  Upon determina-
tion that such procedures are necessary, the  Presi-
dent shall promulgate  regulations prescribing the
circumstances under which such authority shall  be
used and the procedures governing the use of such
authority.
(i) Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry;
     establishment, functions, etc.
  (1) There is hereby established within the Public
Health  Service  an agency, to  be  known as the
Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry,
which  shall  report directly to the Surgeon General
of the United States.  The Administrator of said
Agency shall, with the  cooperation of the Adminis-
trator of the Environmental Protection Agency, the
Commissioner of the Food and  Drug  Administra-
tion, the Directors of the National Institute of Medi-
cine, National  Institute of Environmental Health
Sciences, National Institute of Occupational Safety
and Health,  Centers for Disease Control, the Admin-
istrator of the Occupational Safety and Health Ad-
ministration, the Administrator of the Social Securi-
ty Administration, the Secretary  of Transportation,
and appropriate State and local  health officials, ef-
fectuate and implement the health related authori-
ties of this chapter.  In addition, said Administrator
shall—
    (A) in cooperation with the  States, establish
  and  maintain  a national registry  of  serious dis-
  eases and illnesses  and  a  national  registry  of
  persons exposed to toxic substances;
    (B) establish and maintain inventory of litera-
  ture, research, and studies on  the health effects
  of toxic substances;
    (C) in cooperation  with the  States, and  other
  agencies of the  Federal Government, establish
                                                 485

-------
                               ENVIRONMENTAL RESPONSE, ETC.
                                     42  §9606
    health or the environment posed by the release
    of such hazardous constituents at such facility.
    This subparagraph refers only to available in-
    formation on  actual concentrations of hazard-
    ous substances and not on the total quantity of
    special study waste at such facility.
  (3) Savings provisions
    Nothing in this subsection shall be construed to
  limit the authority of the President to remove any
  facility  which as of October 17, 1986 is included
  on the National Priorities List from such list, or
  not to list any facility which  as of  such date is
  proposed for inclusion on such list.
  (4) Information Catherine and analysis
    Nothing in  this chapter shall be construed to
  preclude the  expenditure  of  monies   from the
  Fund  for gathering and analysis of information
  which will enable the Presidentr*to  consider the
  specific factors required  by paragraph (2).
(Dec. 11. 1980. Pub.L 96-510. Title I, § 105, 94 Sue 2779,
as amended Oct. 17,  1986, Pub.L 99-499, Title I, § 105,
100 Sue 1625.)

            Code of Federal Refutations
Oil and hazardous lubttuiec* pollution contingency  plan, M« iO
     CFR 300.1 et icq.

                Library Reference*
  Health and Environment «"25.6, 25.7.
  CJ.S. Health and Environment H 91 *t **q.. 106 *t MK).

§ 9606.  Abatement action*
(a) Maintenance, jurisdiction, etc.
  In addition to any other action taken by  a State or
local government, when the  President determines
that there may  be an imminent  and substantial
endangerment to the public health or welfare or the
environment because  of  an  actual or threatened
release of a hazardous subatance from a facility, he
may require the Attorney General of the United
States to secure such relief as may be necessary to
abate such danger or threat,  and the district court
of the United  States in the  district in  which  the
threat occurs shall have jurisdiction to grant such
relief as the public interest and  the equities of the
case may require.  The President may  also, after
notice to the affected StXte, take other action under
this  section  including,  but not  limited to, issuing
such orders as may be necessary to  protect public
health and welfare and the environment
order,  be fined not more than $25,000 for each day
in which such violation  occurs or such failure  to
comply continues.
  (2)(A)  Any person  who  receives  and complies
with the terms of any order issued under subsection
(a) of this section may, within 60 days after comple-
tion  of the  required  action,  petition  the President
for reimbursement from the Fund for the  reason-
able costs of such action, plus  interest  Any inter-
est payable under  this paragraph shall accrue on
the amounts expended from the date of expenditure
at the  same rate as specified for interest on  invest-
ments  of  the Hazardous Substance Superfund es-
tablished under subchapter A of chapter 98 of Title
26.
  (B)  If the President refuses to  grant all  or  part
of a petition made under this  paragraph, the  peti-
tioner  may within 30 days of  receipt of such refusal
file an action against the President in the appropri-
ate United States district court seeking reimburse-
ment from the Fund.
  (C)  Except as provided in subparagraph (D),  to
obtain reimbursement the petitioner shall establish
by a preponderance of the  evidence  that it is not
liable  for response costs under section 9€07(a)  of
this  title and that costs for which it  seeks reim-
bursement  are  reasonable  in  light of the  action
required by the relevant order.
  (D)  A petitioner who is liable for response costs
under  section 9€07(a) of this title  may also recover
its reasonable costs of response to the extent that it
can demonstrate, on the  administrative  record,  that
the  President's  decision in  selecting the response
action  ordered was arbitrary and capricious or was
otherwise not in accordance  with  law.  Reimburse-
ment  awarded under this subparagraph shall in-
clude all reasonable response costs incurred  by the
petitioner pursuant to the   portions of the order
found  to be arbitrary and capricious or otherwise
not in  accordance with law.
  (E)  Reimbursement awarded by a  court under
subparagraph (Q or (D) may include appropriate
costs,  fees,  and other expense* in accordance  with
subsections (a) and (d) of section 2412 of Title 28.
(b) Fine*:
  (1) Any person  who,  without sufficient cause,
willfully violates, or fails  or refuses to comply with,
any order of the President under subsection (a) of
this section may, in an action brought in the appro-
priate United States district court to enforce such
(c) Guideline* for using Imminent hazard, ea/orecawat,
     and  emergency  raponc*  authoriti**;  proaa mi-
     ration far Administrator of EPA. teosw. etc.
   Within one hundred and eighty days after Decem-
ber 11, 1980, the Administrator of the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency shall, after consultation with
die Attorney General, establish and publish guide-
lines  for using  the imminent hazard, enforcement
and emergency  response authorities of this section
and other  existing statutes  administered by the
Administrator   of  the  Environmental   Protection
Agency to  effectuate the responsibilities and pow-
                                                 493

-------
                 Attachment 3




Model Site Safety Plan for Chemical Safety Audits

-------
                        SITE SAFETY PLAN FOR
                      CHEMICAL SAFETY AUDITS
The OSHA Hazardous Waste Site Worker Standards (29 CFR 1910.120), the
EPA Safety Manual, Chapter 9, and other EPA protocols require certain safety
planning efforts prior to field activities.  The following format is aligned with
these requirements.  Extensive training and certifications, and further planning
in the form of a more  extensive Site Safety Plan, may be required in addition to
the following plan.

PROJECT:	
Project Coordinator:	   Date:	
Branch Chief:	   Date:	
On Scene Coordinator or
  Supervisor:	   Date:	
Health and Safety Manager
  Approval:	   Date:	

                       DESCRIPTION OF ACTIVITY

If any of the following information is unavailable, mark "UA"; if covered  in
project plan, mark "PP."

Site Name:	
Location and approximate size:	
Description of the response activity and/or the job tasks to be performed:
Duration of the Planned Employee Activity:
Proposed Date of Beginning the Investigation:
Site Topography:	
Site Accessibility by Air and Roads:

-------
    HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND HEALTH HAZARDS INVOLVED OR
                      SUSPECTED AT THE SITE
Fill in any information that is known or suspected

                            Chemical and         Identity of Substance
Areas of Concern           Physical Properties        and Precautions
Explosivity:
Radioactivity:
Oxygen Deficiency:
(e.g., Confined Spaces)
Toxic Gases:
Skin/Eye Contact
Hazards:
Heat Stress:
Pathways from site for hazardous substance dispersion: _




                     WORK PLAN INSTRUCTIONS

A.   Recommended Level of Protection: A	  B

     Cartridge Type, if Level C:	

-------
    Additional Safety Clothing/Equipment:
    Monitoring Equipment to be Used:
CONTRACTOR PERSONNEL:

    Number of Skills:
CONTRACTOR SAFETY CLOTHING/EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
    Have contractors received OSHA required training and certification?
(29CFR 1910.120)

(If "yes," copy of training certificate(s) must be obtained from contractor)

B.  Field Investigation and Decontamination Procedures:

Decontamination Procedures (contaminated protective clothing, instruments,
equipment, etc.):	

-------
Disposal Procedures (contaminated equipment, supplies, disposal items, wash-
water, etc.):	
                       EMERGENCY CONTACTS

Hospital Phone No.:

Hospital Location:
EMT/Ambulance Phone No.:

Police Phone No.:
Fire Assistance Phone No.:
Regional Health and Safety Manager:

-------
                                       Attachment 4

                                   Sources of Information
                         Concerning Hazardous Substance Releases
The Accidental Release Information Program (ARIP).  EPA established ARIP to promote safety
initiatives by industry and to develop a national  database on the causes of chemical  accidents, but
more importantly, to identify methods used to prevent recurrences.  The data collected in ARIP are
derived from questionnaires completed by selected facilities that have reported releases to the
National Response Center (NRC), as required by law.

       Facilities selected to receive an ARIP questionnaire have experienced a "triggered" release
exhibiting one or more of the following characteristics:

              Release quantities in excess of a multiple of the CERCLA reportable quantity for the
              chemical involved;

              Releases resulting in deaths or injuries;

              Releases that are part of a trend  of frequent releases from the same facility; or

              Releases involving extremely hazardous substances designated under SARA Title III.

State Emergency Response Commissions (SERCs) and Local Emergency Planning Committees
(LEPCs). SERCs and LEPCs established under SARA Title III receive Section 304 reports detailing
accidental releases of hazardous chemicals (those listed under the  OSHA Hazard Communication
Standard and CERCLA) and SERCs also received Section 313 reports recording annual releases,
routine and accidental,  of hazardous substances by manufacturing facilities.

The National Response Center  (NRC). The NRC receives notifications on accidental releases that
are subject to Reportable Quantity requirements  of CERCLA. The NRC has been notified of
thousands of hazardous substance  releases since  1978.

The Emergency Response Notification System (ERNS). ERNS is a recent effort of the Agency to
channel the state, regional, and  NRC reports on releases of oil and hazardous substances into one
central database.  ERNS is used  by  EPA for  enforcement tracking and  program management
purposes.

The Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). Both the national and regional offices of EPA receive
reports and notifications on accidental releases.

The Acute Hazardous Events  Data Base  (AHE/DB).   Designed by EPA, AHE/DB collects  a
representative sample of event reports from the  above and other sources into a form that is more
convenient for gaining perspective on accidental releases and drawing policy conclusions. Developed
in 1985, it was recently  updated  and expanded to 6,300 records.

The Section 305(b) Report to Congress on Emergency Systems. Mandated by SARA Title III, the
report was a three-stage process. Information on certain facilities with completed questionnaires  is
available.  The report and backup information provide a good technical understanding for detecting,
monitoring and preventing releases, as well as for public alert.

-------
The  Federal Emergency Management Agency  (FEMA).  FEMA keeps a record of all incidents
involving the participation of emergency management personnel.

The  Occupation  Safety and  Health Administration (OSHA)  and  the National  Institute  of
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). OSHA and NIOSH have records of accidents in the
workplace.

U.S.  Coast Guard Marine Safety Offices (MSO).  Local MSOs regularly conduct inspections of
waterfront facilities.  These inspection reports are available  from  the respective MSO, and can
provide useful facility information.

-------
                                       Attachment 5

                       Sample First Letter to Facility Owner/Operator
Dear (Facility Owner/Operator):

       Through the records retained by the National Response Center pursuant to Section 103(a)
of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability  Act of 1980, as
amended (CERCLA), the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has identified your facility as a site
where  a reportable release of a  CERCLA hazardous substance occurred.  The EPA is currently
conducting chemical safety audits of particular  facilities identified through the  Section 103(a)
reporting system for the purpose of identifying technological and managerial mechanisms that might
be implemented to prevent future threatened releases harmful to human health and the environment.
The audit includes an on-site visit during which a review of equipment, procedures, training,  and
management  techniques is conducted to learn about prevention of accidental chemical releases.

       Due to a report filed by the (facility name)  under Section 103(a) of CERCLA, (facility name)
has been chosen as a potential candidate for an EPA chemical safety audit. The Agency is requesting
your cooperation in an audit  of your facility under the authorities of Sections 104(b) and 104(e)
CERCLA, by (names and affiliation of audit team) on (date), or on a date convenient to you. Please
be assured that the audit team will make every effort to minimize any interference with your plant
operations during the actual safety audit.

       If  you wish to  assert  a business  confidentiality claim for part or all of the information
collected,  such  a claim must accompany the information when it is received by EPA,  or it may be
made available to the public without further notice to you.  Information covered by a confidentiality
claim will be disclosed by EPA only to the extent, and by means of the procedures, set forth in EPA
regulations at 40 CFR Part 2.  EPA has contracted with (contractor name and contract number) to
obtain  information pertinent to conducting the safety audit.  (Contractor name) has been designated
as an authorized representative  of  the Agency.   Therefore, (contractor name) is  subject to  the
provisions of Section  104(e) of CERCLA respecting confidentiality of methods or processes entitled
to protection as trade secrets.

       EPA would like to conduct this audit in a constructive and positive manner.  The EPA solicits
your prompt  response  to the above request.  If you have any questions  about  the audit or  the
Chemical Safety Audit program, please contact (regional contact) for further information.

                                                 Sincerely,

-------
                                       Attachment 6

               Sample Letter to Facility Owner/Operator who has not Responded
                                 or Consented to the Audit
Dear (Facility Owner/Operator):

       Through the records retained by the National Response Center pursuant to Section 103(a)
of the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, as amended
(CERCLA), the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency has identified your facility as a site where
a reportable release of a CERCLA hazardous substance occurred. The EPA is currently conducting
chemical safety audits of particular facilities identified through the Section 103(a) reporting system
for  the purpose of identifying technological and managerial mechanisms that might be implemented
to prevent future threatened releases harmful to human health and the environment.  The (facility
name) has been chosen for a chemical safety audit due to its reportable release(s) of (CERCLA
hazardous substance(s)) on (date of release). The audit includes an on-site visit in which a  review of
equipment, procedures, training and management techniques is conducted to learn about prevention
of accidental chemical releases.  We wish to assure you that we will make every effort to  minimize
any interference with your plant operations during the course of the audit.

       On (date) EPA sent you a letter requesting your voluntary cooperation in a chemical safety
audit of your facility.   [The Agency has not received a reply to that request.]   [(By letter dated
	,) (/Through a telephone conversation on	,) you indicated that you will not
extend your voluntary cooperation to an audit of your facility.]   You should be aware that Sections
104(b) and 104(e)(4)(A) of CERCLA specifically give EPA the right to access private property where
there is a reasonable basis to believe that there has been or may be a release or threat of release of
a hazardous substance or pollutant or contaminant.  Failure to grant such access  within	days
of receipt of this letter, or adequately to justify such failure to  grant such access,  can result in EPA
enforcing an order requesting  entry pursuant to  Section  104(e)(5) by seeking a warrant and/or
penalties for noncompliance with the entry order.  Section 104(e)(5)(B) of CERCLA permits EPA
to seek the imposition of up to twenty-five thousand dollars ($25,000) for each day that you fail to
grant access to EPA.  Please be further advised  that  provision  of false, fictitious, or fraudulent
statements or representations may subject you to criminal penalties under 18 U.S.C. Section 1001.

       If you wish to  assert a  business  confidentiality claim  for part or all of the information
collected, such a claim must accompany the information when  it is received by EPA, or it may be
made available to the public without further notice to you.          Information   covered  by   a
confidentiality claim will be disclosed by EPA only to the extent and by means  of the procedures set
forth in EPA regulations at 40 CFR Part 2.  EPA has contracted with (contractor name and contract
number) to obtain information pertinent to conducting the safety audit.  (Contractor name)  has been
designated as an authorized representative of the Agency.  Therefore,  (contractor name)  is subject
to the provisions of Section 104(e) of CERCLA respecting confidentiality of methods or processes
entitled to protection as trade secrets.

-------
       Due to the legal ramifications of your failure to grant access, EPA strongly encourages you
to give this matter your immediate attention and further consideration within the time specified.  If
you have any legal or technical questions relating to this matter, you may consult with the EPA prior
to the time specified above. Please direct legal questions to (Name of ORC Person) of the Office of
Regional Counsel at	. Technical questions should be directed to (Name of Program
Person), at the above address, or at	.

                                                 Sincerely,

-------
                                       Attachment 7

                                Standard Report Disclaimer
       The contents of this report reflect information concerning the (facility name) facility obtained
during a U.S. Environmental Protection Agency chemical safety audit and from records provided by
the (facility name) facility. The audit was conducted from (audit dates), and observations as presented
in this report provide a snapshot of conditions existing at the facility during the audit time frame.
They  do not represent planned or anticipated changes proposed or on-going  at the facility.  The
recommendations and other report observations contained in this report are not mandatory actions
that the facility must implement.  In addition, EPA makes no assurances that  if implemented, the
recommendations and other report observations contained in this report will prevent future chemical
accidents,  equipment failures, or unsafe management  practices, and/or provide protection from a
future enforcement action under any applicable law or regulation.

-------
                                       Attachment 8

                      Standard Language for Audit Report Introduction


       The Chemical  Safety Audit  (CSA)  program  has evolved from  the  efforts  of the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) under the Chemical Accident Prevention (CAP) program.
The primary objectives of the CAP program are to learn about the causes of accidental releases of
hazardous substances and the means to prevent such releases from occurring,  to promote industry
initiatives in these areas,  and to share activities with the community.

       The Chemical Safety Audit program is part of this broad initiative, and has been designed to
accomplish the following  chemical accident prevention goals:

              Visit facilities handling hazardous substances to gather information on safety practices
              and technologies;

              Heighten  awareness of the need for, and promote, chemical safety among  facilities
              handling hazardous substances, as well as in communities where chemicals are located;

              Build cooperation among facilities, EPA, and other authorized parties by coordinating
              joint audits;  and

              Establish  a database for the  assembly  and distribution of chemical  process safety
              management information obtained from the facility audits.

       The audit consists of interviews with facility personnel, and on-site review of various aspects
of facility operations related to the prevention of accidental chemical releases.  CERCLA sections
104(b) and 104(e), as amended by SARA in 1986, provide authorities for  entering a facility and
accessing information.  Specific topics addressed include:

              Awareness of chemical and process hazards;

              Process  characteristics;

              Emergency planning and preparedness activities;

              Hazard evaluation and release modelling efforts;

              Release detection and monitoring techniques;

              Training of operators and emergency response personnel;

              Facility and corporate management structure;

              Preventive maintenance  and inspection  programs; and

              Community notification mechanisms and techniques.

-------
       This report contains  observations and conclusions  and recommendations  from an audit
conducted at (facility name, city, and state) from (audit dates).  This report identifies and characterizes
the strengths of specific  chemical accident prevention program areas to allow the  elements of
particularly effective programs to be recognized.  Copies of the report are provided to the facility so
that weak and strong program areas may be recognized.
                                                                                                  i

-------
                                       Attachment 9

                       Documentation Pertaining to the Processes and
                          Operations Using Hazardous Substances
       The issues contained in sections 6.2.1 and 6.2.2 of the CSA protocol, Overview of Processing
Steps and Operating Procedures and General Description of Process Equipment, will require members
of the audit team to review processing and operating information. The team should  review facility
documentation on the equipment and operating procedures relevant to the audit. Before examining
current practices, the audit team may want to review available technical documentation supporting
the original selection of technology, process chemistry, equipment, and operating parameters for the
process(es) under study. Typical documentation available for current operations include Process Flow
Diagrams (PFDs) and Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams (PIDs).  The following  questions can
provide a framework for your evaluation of these documents:

              Does the facility have documentation on the design and operating parameters of the
              equipment and processes using the substance(s) of interest?

              Is the documentation for the process(es) complete, accurate, and legible?

              Are symbols used uniformly?

              Are items such as the location and sizes of nozzles for  connection of process lines,
              utility tie-ins, relief devices, controls,  drains, vents, and blinds included?

              Do pieces of equipment have assigned numbers and are descriptions provided?

              Are the equipment specifications and operating parameters (e.g., dimensions, capacity,
              surface area,  temperatures, pressures) specified?

              Are equipment spares shown?

              For piping, are the items such as rating, diameter, fluid flow direction, insulation and
              tracing requirements, and sloping requirements for expansion shown?

              For instrumentation, are  items such as control parameter,  indicating and  recording
              functions,  transmitter, signal  type, control valve size, and actuator type shown?

Other  issues  to  keep in  mind when  examining  process documentation  include materials  of
construction;  electrical area  classification; design of  relief,  safety, and ventilation systems; relevant
design codes and standards; and material and energy balances.

       PIDs indicate whether or not the crucial operating parameters are being monitored in order
for the operator to  be  able to respond to upsets in  a timely manner.  Therefore, the team should
review a PID for the following concerns:   monitoring of operating parameters, provisions for
automatic shutdown, presence of alarm systems, interlock systems, overpressure protection, disposal
method of relief stream, and similar information. The audit team may want to compare a portion of
the PID to the systems and equipment in existence at the facility to verify their accuracy.

-------
                                      Attachment 10

                   Descriptions of Standard Operating Procedure Manuals
       Section 7.2.1 of the CSA protocol, Standard Operating Procedures, lists several types of SOP
manuals that should be reviewed, as relevant, by the audit team.  In general, the audit team should
consider whether existing facility SOPs are complete  - do they  address initial and post-shutdown
startups, normal operations, temporary and emergency operations, normal and emergency shutdowns,
and maintenance.  The following descriptions provide a summary of the type of information  that
facility SOP manuals typically contain.

Supervisory Operating Manual

•      Feed and product specifications;
       PFDs;  PIDs; MSDSs;
•      Process parameters;
•      Intermediate stream normal operating guidelines;
•      List of alarms and interlocks;
•      Equipment and instrumentation settings;
•      Narrative description of start-up;
•      Testing practices;
•      Shutdown; and
•      Emergency situations.

Operating Procedures Manual

•      Detailed  valve-by-valve procedures for all operating tasks;
•      Schematic drawings;
•      Safety  instructions; and
•      Equipment and systems.

Safety Procedures Manual

•      Safety  systems and equipment;
•      Safety  procedures; and
•      Instructions.

In addition to comprehensiveness, the audit  team should determine whether  the SOP  manuals
accurately reflect current equipment and current practices and whether they are understood  and
implemented by operations personnel. Finally, the audit team should determine whether the manuals
are formally evaluated on a  regular basis, whether both operations and  management personnel
participate in the review and revision of SOPs, and how information on such changes is provided to
operations and supervisory personnel through training and drills.

       Beyond the manuals listed above, there are a  variety of other procedural documents (e.g.,
operating logs, shift turnover procedures, and maintenance guidelines) that the audit team may want
to examine, depending on the focus of the audit. Safety, health, and accident prevention topics  that
can be investigated through these sources include overtime practices, emergency callout procedures,
procedures for reporting unusual occurrences, and consistency of equipment handling procedures for
maintenance and operations personnel.

-------
     Attachment 11




Blank CSA Report Profile

-------
                  CHEMICAL SAFETY AUDIT PROFILE
Facility Name:



Facility Location:



Date(s) Audit Conducted:



Description of Facility:

     SIC Code(s):

     Location:

     Products manufactured,
     produced, or distributed:

     Proximity to
     sensitive populations:



Reason for Facility Selection:

     ARIP Reports:



Focus of Audit:

     Hazardous Substances(s)
     Examined:

     Physical Area(s) Examined:

     Storage and Handling

     •    Storage Systems

     •    Shipping/Receiving

     •    Material Transfer

     Process Area(s)

-------
Summary of Audit Findings and Recommendations:



     Conclusions:



     Facility Background Information
     Chemical Hazards
     Process Information
     Chemical Accident Prevention
     Accidental Release Incident Investigation
     Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities
     Community and Facility Emergency Response Planning Activities

-------
Public Alert and Notification Procedures
Recommendations:



Facility Background Information
Chemical Hazards
Process Information
Chemical Accident Prevention
Accidental Release Incident Investigation
Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities

-------
     Community and Facility Emergency Response Planning Activities
     Public Alert and Notification Procedures
Audit Team Member Composition:

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title                                                       |
Affiliation                                                          "
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

-------
Follow-up Activities:



     By the facility:



     By the Regional office:



     By State and local authorities;





Regional Contact:



Date:

-------
       Attachment 12




Annotated CSA Report Profile

-------
                  CHEMICAL SAFETY AUDIT PROFILE
Facility Name:
 [provide full name of facility
as   well   as   any  corporate
affiliation]
Facility Location:
[list city, state, and region]
Date(s) Audit Conducted:
 [list  actual  days  audit  team
was on site at facility]
Description of Facility:

     SIC Code(s):

     Location:
     Products manufactured,
     produced, or distributed:
     Proximity to
     sensitive populations:
[provide four-digit SIC code]

[describe nature of surrounding
area     (e.g.,    commercial,
industrial, rural, residential,
urban) and indicate direction
and distance  to nearest major
city]
[list   final
intended uses]
products   and
[indicate    direction    and
distance to schools, hospitals,
day   care   centers,   senior
centers,    parks,    lakes,
wetlands,  and  other sensitive
envi ronmen t s]
Reason for Facility Selection:
     ARIP Reports:
[list  all reasons,  including
past    releases,    ARIP
questionnaires,  requests  from
state  and   local   officials,
regional initiatives, interest
from facility, public concern,
chemical(s),   process(es),   or
system(s)  of interest]
[list    release   date
substance released]
           and

-------
Focus of Audit:

     Hazardous Substances(s)
     Examined:                     [list  only  CERCLA  hazardous
                                   substances   or    Title   III
                                   extremely hazardous substances
                                   examined and provide  Chemical
                                   Abstract Service (CAS) number]

     Physical Area(s) Examined:

     Storage and Handling

     •    Storage Systems

          [describe all storage systems  examined (e.g., rail cars,
          tanks,   containers,    cylinders) ,   including   design,
          capacity,  material  of  construction,   and  length  of
          storage]

     •    Shipping/Receiving

          [describe  all  shipping and receiving systems  examined
          (e.g., rail car,  tank truck, and barge loading/unloading
          areas,     pipelines),    including     frequency    of
          delivery/shipment,    design,    capacity,   and   general
          loading/unloading procedures]

     •    Material Transfer

          [describe all material transfer systems  examined  (e.g.,
          pipelines, conveyor belts, fork lifts, manual), including
          design, material of construction, capacity,  and general
          transfer procedures]

     Process Area(s)

          [describe  each  stage  in  all   process(es)  examined
          involving  the  hazardous  substances  (e.g.,  primary and
          secondary manufacturing,  recycling and reuse, waste and
          waste water  treatment  and  disposal,  power generation),
          including substances  and equipment involved and  a general
          description of each step in the process]

-------
Summary of Audit Findings and Recommendations:

     Conclusions:

     [state observations  and concerns  on facility  policies  and
     practices in a factual  manner  that  refrains from judgments of
     adequacy or inadequacy, and ensure that any concerns have been
     addressed appropriately in the recommendations section.]

     Facility Background Information
     Chemical Hazards
     Process Information
     Chemical Accident Prevention
     Accidental Release Incident Investigation
     Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities

-------
Community and Facility Emergency Response Planning Activities
Public Alert and Notification Procedures
Recommendations:

[clearly  state recommendations  for  facility policies  and
practices  (that  are  both  practical  and  technologically
feasible at the facility) in a manner that  reflects their non-
mandatory nature,  as  well  as the  observations  and concerns
outlined in the conclusions section.]

Facility Background Information
*
•
Chemical Hazards
Process Information
Chemical Accident Prevention

-------
     Accidental Release Incident Investigation
     Facility Emergency Preparedness and Planning Activities
     Community and Facility Emergency Response Planning Activities
     Public Alert and Notification Procedures
Audit Team Member Composition:

[list audit  team members  in the  following  order:    US  EPA team
leader,   other US  EPA  personnel,  AARP  enrollees,   TAT  members,
representatives  from  other  federal  agencies;  and  then  state,
tribal,  and local officials]
Name and Title


Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
[list  the full  name and  title  of  the
auditor]

[indicate the federal, state, tribal, or
local  government organization  that  the
auditor  is  representing  (e.g.,  US  EPA
regional  office;  Technical  Assistance
Team -- company name;  state department of
environmental protection;  county health
department)]

[indicate the  general subject matter(s)
with  which  the  auditor  was  involved
(e.g.,    equipment    and   process(es),
training, off-site impacts, occupational
health,  security,  emergency  planning,
observer)]

-------
Expertise                [characterize  the  education,  training,
                         and/or  professional  background  of  the
                         auditor (e.g.,  chemical engineer, public    ,
                         health    officer,     hazardous    waste
                         specialist,     emergency    responder,
                         emergency planner)]

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation                                                         I
Area of Responsibility
Expertise

Name and Title
Affiliation
Area of Responsibility
Expertise


Follow-up Activities:

     By the facility:

     [as appropriate, discuss short and long term plans of facility
     to address issues/implement recommendations raised during the
     audit]

     By the Regional office:

     [as appropriate, discuss short and long term plans to follow
     up with facility on issues and recommendations raised during
     the audit]

-------
     By State and local authorities:

     [as appropriate,  discuss  follow up  activities related  to
     issues and recommendations raised during the audit]


Regional Contact:             [list    contact    for    further
                              information]

Date:                         [indicate  date  that   profile  was
                              submitted]

-------
            OXYGEN MONITORS,
COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS, AND
     SPECIFIC CHEMICAL MONITORS
      PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES



      At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

      •   Identify the purpose for oxygen monitoring

      •   List the four factors that can affect oxygen monitor response

      •   Identify the purpose for combustible gas monitoring

      •   List the four factors that can affect combustible gas indicator
          response

      •   Identify the purpose of toxic atmosphere monitoring

      •   List three types of toxic atmosphere monitors

      •   List four types of specific chemical monitors

      •   List four factors that can affect the response of specific
          chemical monitors.

-------
                                            NOTES
      OXYGEN MONITORS,
COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS,
             AND
 SPECIFIC CHEMICAL MONITORS
           HAZARDS
   Oxygen-deficient atmospheres
   Combustible/explosive atmospheres
   Toxic atmospheres
   Radiation
    OXYGEN MONITORING
  Aid in determining:
  • Type of respirator needed
  • Flammability risk
  • Sufficient oxygen for combustible
    gas indicators (CGIs)
  • Presence of contaminants
10/93
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
 Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
     NOTES
                               OXYGEN SENSOR
4  ill8
                                              Membrane / Cover
                                               Electrode
                              OXYGEN MONITORS
                                 Considerations
                               • Life span
                               • Operating temperature
                               • Interfering gases
                               • Atmospheric pressure
                               ALTITUDE/OXYGEN
                                METER READING
                         Instrument calibrated
                            at sea level
Oxygen Monitors, CG/s, and
Specific Chemical Monitors
                  10/93

-------
                                           NOTES
         FLAMMABLE
 ATMOSPHERE MONITORING
  • Used to determine risk of fire or
    explosion

  • CGI readings are indicative of
    relatively high concentrations of
    contaminants
COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
        Catalytic Sensors
     KMM
    Filament
Bead
 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
    Wheatstone Bridge Circuit
                     Sensor
                     Compensating
                      Filament
10/93
                   Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
                    Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
      NOTES
                                 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
                                Instrument Reading vs Concentration
                                Concentration
                                0%
LEL   UEL
5%*  15%*
      100%
                                0%   100%
                                Meter Reading (% LEL)

                                Note: * = methane
                                    LEL = lower explosive limit
                                    UEL = upper explosive limit
                                 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
                                             Readouts
                                  UEL
                                                120
                                  COMPARISON OF LEL READINGS
                                  WITH ACTUAL CONCENTRATIONS
                                          HexaneLEL= 1.1%

                               For an instrument calibrated to hexane measuring hexane:

                                       100% =1.1%  (11,000ppm)
                                        50%  =0.55%  (5,500 ppm)
                                        25%  = 0.275% (2,750 ppm)
                                        10%  =0.11%  (1,100 ppm)
                                        1%  =0.011%  (110 ppm)
Oxygen Monitors, CGls, and
Specific Chemical Monitors
                            10/93

-------
                                              NOTES
COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
         Readout Ranges
   "Normal" units
   -  0-100%LEL
   -  0-10%LEL

   "Supersensitive" units
   -  Parts per million (ppm)
   -  Example: TLV Sniffer,
              Gastech Model 1314
 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
          Considerations
    • Oxygen requirements

    • Contaminants that foul sensor
     Temperature

     Relative response
 COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS
    Relative Response Curves
100,
               Methane
                      PvnUne
       o>
       3
       3
       "Z
         50
              Styrenc
Source: MSA 260
               50    100
             Percent LEL
JO/93
                                 Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
                                  Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
     NOTES
                                TOXIC ATMOSPHERE
                                    MONITORING
                              The purpose of monitoring is to:

                              •  Identify chemicals and their
                                 concentrations

                              •  Evaluate worker/public exposures

                              •  Evaluate protective equipment
                                 selection

                              •  Help develop exposure controls
                                TOXIC ATMOSPHERE
                                     MONITORS
                                • Specific chemical monitors

                                • Total vapor survey monitors

                                • Gas chromatographs

                                • Aerosol monitors
                                 SPECIFIC CHEMICAL
                                      MONITORS
                             Designed to respond to a specific
                             chemical

                             Common types include
                             - Electrochemical
                             - Metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)
                             - Colorimetric indicators
                             - Mercury detectors
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
Specific Chemical Monitors
4194

-------
                                               NOTES
          METAL-OXIDE
   SEMICONDUCTOR (MOS)
 • Metal-oxide coating on a ceramic substrate
  wrapped around a wire

 • Contaminant alters conductivity by
  removing oxygen

 • Change in current is proportional to the
  amount of contaminant present

 • Also called "solid-state" sensor
              MOS
         Considerations
   • Interferences

   • Saturation
     Temperature

     Minimum oxygen requirements
 COLORIMETRIC INDICATORS
 Contaminant reacts with a chemical on

 a tape, badge, or tube and causes a

 color change
10/93
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
 Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
     NOTES
                           COLORIMETRIC INDICATORS
                                  Considerations
                                    • Interferences

                                    • Humidity

                                    • Temperature
                              MERCURY DETECTORS
                            Ultraviolet light absorption
                            -  Mercury vapor absorbs a specific
                               wavelength of light

                            Gold film
                            -  Mercury reacts with film and
                               changes the electrical resistance
                               of the film
                              MERCURY DETECTORS
                                  Considerations
                             • Ultraviolet light
                              -  Interferences
                              -  Humidity

                             • Gold film
                              -  Factory calibration
                              -  AC power needed to "clean"
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
Specific Chemical Monitors
10/93

-------
        OXYGEN MONITORS,  COMBUSTIBLE  GAS INDICATORS,
                    AND SPECIFIC CHEMICAL MONITORS
INTRODUCTION

Many hazards may be present when responding to hazardous materials spills or uncontrolled waste
sites.   These include oxygen-deficient atmospheres,  combustible/explosive atmospheres,  toxic
atmospheres, and radiation.  There are several types of instrumentation for detecting hazardous
atmospheres.  This  section will discuss oxygen monitors, combustible  gas indicators (CGIs), and
monitors for specific chemicals.
OXYGEN MONITORS

Oxygen monitors are used to evaluate an atmosphere for:

       •      Oxygen content for respiratory purposes.   Normal  air contains 20.8% oxygen
             Generally, if the oxygen content decreases below 19.5%, it is considered oxygen-
             deficient  and special respiratory protection is needed.

       •      Increased risk of combustion. Generally, concentrations above 25% are considered
             oxygen enriched and increase the risk of combustion.

       •      Use of other instruments. Some instruments require sufficient oxygen for operation.
             For example, CGIs do not give reliable results at oxygen concentrations below 10%.
             Also, the inherent safety approvals for instruments are for normal atmospheres and
             not for oxygen-enriched ones.

       •      The  presence of contaminants.  A decrease in oxygen content can be due to the
             consumption (by  combustion or  a  reaction  such as rusting) of oxygen or the
             displacement of air by a chemical.  If it is due to consumption, then the concern is
             the lack of oxygen. If it is due to displacement, then there is something present that
             could be  flammable or toxic. Because oxygen makes up only  20.8% of air, a 1%
             drop in oxygen means that about 5%  air (air being 1 part  oxygen and 4 parts
             nitrogen) has been displaced.  This means that 5% or 50,000  ppm (1% = 10,000
             ppm) of "something"  could be there.

Most indicators have meters that display the oxygen concentration from 0 to 25%. There are also
oxygen monitors available that measure concentrations from 0 to 5% and from 0 to 100%. The most
useful range for hazardous material response is the 0-25 % oxygen content readout because decisions
involving air-supplying respirators and the use of CGIs fall into this range.

The oxygen sensor can be on the outside (external) or inside (internal) of the  instrument. Internal
sensors need a pump—battery operated or hand operated—to draw a sample to it. Units that combine
O2 meters and CGIs into one instrument are available from many manufacturers.  Also, flashing and
audible alarms can be  found on  many instruments.  These alarms go off at a preset oxygen

                                                             Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
10/93                                     i                  Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
concentration to alert the users even if they are not watching the meter.  A list of manufacturers of
oxygen monitors is  found  in this manual under Manufacturers and Suppliers of Air Monitoring
Equipment.
Principle of Operation

Oxygen monitors use an electrochemical sensor to determine the oxygen concentration in air.  A
typical sensor consists of two electrodes, a housing containing a basic electrolytic solution, and a
semipermeable Teflon* membrane (Figure 1).
           Display
                                                              Membrane / Cover
                                                                 Electrode
                                                                   Electrode
                                                                   Electrolyte
                        FIGURE 1.  SCHEMATIC OF OXYGEN SENSOR

       Source: Atmospheric Monitoring for Employee Safety, BioMarine Industries Inc.

Oxygen molecules (O2) diffuse through the membrane into the  solution.  Reactions between the
oxygen, the solution, and the electrodes produce a minute electrical current proportional to the
oxygen content.  The current passes through an electronic circuit which amplifies the signal.  The
resulting signal is shown as a needle deflection on a meter or as  a digital reading.

In some units, air is drawn into the oxygen detector with an aspirator bulb or pump; in other units,
the ambient air is allowed to diffuse to the sensor.
 Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
 Specific Chemical Monitors
10/93

-------
 Limitations and Considerations

 The operation of oxygen monitors depends on the absolute atmospheric pressure. The concentration
 of atmospheric oxygen is a function of the atmospheric pressure at a given altitude.  Whereas the
 actual percentage of oxygen does not change with altitude, at sea level the weight of the atmosphere
 above is greater,  and more O2 molecules (and the other components of air) are compressed into a
 given volume than at  higher elevations. As elevation increases, this compression decreases, resulting
 in fewer air molecules  being  "squeezed"  into a given volume.   Consequently,  an  O2 indicator
 calibrated at sea level and operated at an altitude of several thousand feet will falsely indicate an
 oxygen-deficient atmosphere because less oxygen is being "pushed" into the sensor.  Therefore, it
 is necessary to  calibrate at the  altitude the instrument is used.

 The reaction that produces the current in the sensor is nonreversible.  Thus, once the sensor  is
 exposed to oxygen, it begins to wear out. The normal life span of a sensor is 6 months to 1 year.
 Sensors are shipped in sealed packages that have been purged with nitrogen.  The packet should not
 be opened  until the sensor is to be  used.  Storing the sensor in an oxygen absent atmosphere after
 opening the package  can prolong the sensor life, but may not be practical.

 High concentrations of carbon  dioxide (CO2) may shorten the useful life  of the oxygen sensor. As
 a general rule, the unit can be used in atmospheres greater than 0.5% CO2 only with frequent
 replacing or rejuvenating of the sensor.  Lifetime in a normal atmosphere (0.04% CC^) can be from
 6 months to 1 year depending on the manufacturer's design. The service life of one sensor is 100
 days in  1% CO2 and  50  days in 5% CO2.

 Strong oxidizing chemicals, like ozone and chlorine, can cause increased  readings and  indicate high
 or normal 02 content when the actual content is normal or even low.

 Temperature can affect the response of oxygen indicators.  The normal operating range for them is
 between 32°F and 120°F.  Between O°F and 32°F the response of the unit  is  slower.  Below O°F
 the  solution may freeze and damage the sensor. High temperature can also shorten the sensor life.
 The instrument should be calibrated at the temperature  at which it will be used.
COMBUSTIBLE GAS INDICATORS

CGIs measure the concentration of a flammable vapor or gas in air,  indicating  the results as a
percentage of the lower explosive limit (LEL) of the calibration gas.  The LEL (or LFL - lower
flammable limit) of a combustible gas or vapor is the minimum concentration of the material in air
which will propagate flame on contact with an ignition source.  The upper explosive limit (UEL) is
the maximum concentration.  Below the LEL there is insufficient fuel to support combustion.  Above
the UEL, the mixture is too "rich" to support combustion, so ignition is not possible. Concentrations
between the LEL and UEL are considered flammable.

CGIs are available in many styles and configurations.  The combustible gas sensor can be on the
outside (external) or inside (internal) of the instrument.  Internal sensors need a pump—battery
operated or hand  operated—to draw a sample to it.  Many units are  "combination meters."  This
means they have an O2  meter  and a CGI (and sometimes one or  two  specific gas indicators)


                                                               Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
JO/93                                       3                   Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
combined in the same instrument.  Flashing and audible alarms are options on many units.  The
alarms go off at a preset concentration to warn the instrument operator of potentially hazardous
concentrations. Other options such as longer sampling lines, moisture traps, and dust filters are also
available.   Manufacturers of CGIs are listed in Manufacturers and Suppliers of Air Monitoring
Equipment.
Principle of Operation

CGIs use a combustion chamber containing a filament that combusts the flammable gas. To facilitate
combustion, the filament is heated or is coated with a catalyst (like platinum or palladium), or both.
The filament is part of a balanced resistor circuit called a Wheatstone bridge (Figure 2). The hot
filament combusts the gas on the immediate surface of the element, thus raising the temperature of
the filament.  As the temperature of the filament increases, so does its resistance.  This change in
resistance causes  an imbalance in the Wheatstone bridge.   This is  measured  as the ratio of
combustible vapor present compared to the total required to reach the LEL.  For example, if the
meter reads 50% (or 0.5, depending upon the readout), this means that 50% of the concentration of
combustible gas needed to reach a flammable or combustible situation is present. If the LEL for the
gas is 5%, then the meter would be  indicating that a 2.5%  concentration is present.  Thus, the
typical meter indicates concentration up to the LEL of the gas (Figure 3a).
                                                                Sensor
                                                                 Compensating
                                                                    Filament
                         FIGURE 2. WHEATSTONE BRIDGE CIRCUIT

       Source; Atmospheric Monitoring for Employee Safety, BioMarine Industries Inc.
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
Specific Chemical Monitors
10/93

-------
If a concentration greater than the LEL and lower than the UEL is present, then the meter needle
will stay beyond the 100% (1.0) level on the meter (Figure 3b).  This indicates that the ambient
atmosphere is readily combustible.  When the atmosphere has a gas concentration above the UEL,
the meter needle may rise above the 100% (1.0) mark and then return to zero (Figure 3c). This
occurs because the gas mixture in the combustion cell is too rich to burn. This permits the filament
to conduct a current just as if the atmosphere contained no combustibles at all.  Some  instruments
have a lock mechanism that prevents the needle from returning to zero when it has reached 100%.
This mechanism must be reset in an atmosphere below the LEL.
                 < LEL
LEL - UEL
> UEL
                                                            OVER
                                                                      n
                   (a)
    (b)
   (c)
                     FIGURE 3.  COMPARISON OF METER READINGS TO
                          COMBUSTIBLE GAS CONCENTRATIONS
Limitations and Considerations

The  instruments are  intended for use only in  normal oxygen  atmospheres.  Oxygen-deficient
atmospheres will produce lowered readings.  Also,  the safety guards that prevent the combustion
source from igniting a flammable atmosphere are not designed to operate in an oxygen-enriched
atmosphere.

Organic lead vapors (e.g., leaded gasoline), sulfur compounds, and silicone compounds will foul the
filament.  Acid gases (e.g., hydrogen chloride and hydrogen fluoride) can corrode the filament.
Most units have an optional filter that protects the sensor from leaded vapors.
10/93
                         Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
                          Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
The response of the instrument is temperature dependent. If the temperature at which the instrument
is zeroed differs from the sample  temperature, the accuracy  of the reading is affected.  Hotter
temperatures raise the temperature of the filament and produce a higher than actual reading.  Cooler
temperatures will reduce the reading. The instrument should be  calibrated and zeroed at the same
temperature that a  reading  will be taken.   Some instruments have  a compensating  filament
(Figure 2).  This filament is similar to the sensor and is exposed to the same atmosphere, but it does
not combust the atmosphere.  It compensates  for any temperature  changes not caused by  the
combustible gas.

There is no differentiation between petroleum vapors and combustible gases.  If the flammability of
the combined vapors and gases in an atmosphere is the concern, this is not a problem. However,
if  the  instrument is  being  used  to detect the presence of  a released  flammable  liquid—like
gasoline—in a sewer system where methane may be present, the operator cannot tell  whether  the
reading is the contaminant or the methane.  A prefilter can be used to remove the vapors, but it will
not remove the methane.  Thus, if readings are made with and without the filter, the user can
compare the readings and can conclude that differences  in the values indicate that a petroleum vapor
(i.e., the contaminant) is present.

Relative response is also a concern. If the CGI is used to monitor a gas/vapor that the unit  is not
calibrated to, it can give inaccurate results.  Figure 4 illustrates the effect of relative response.
TOXIC ATMOSPHERE MONITORS

Along with oxygen concentration and flammable gases or vapors, there is also a concern about
chemicals present at toxic concentrations.   This usually involves measurements at concentrations
lower than what would be indicated by oxygen indicators or CGIs.  There is a need to determine
whether toxic chemicals are present and identify them so the environmental concentration can be
compared to exposure guidelines.  Toxic atmosphere monitoring is done to:

       •      Identify airborne chemicals and their concentrations

       •      Evaluate the exposure of workers and the public

       •      Evaluate the need for and type of personal protective equipment

       •      Develop controls for exposure in the form of engineered safeguards, work practices,
              safety plans, and work zones.

Several different groups of instruments can be used for these functions. In this manual the following
types will be discussed:

       •      Specific chemical monitors are instruments designed to respond to a specific chemical.
              Common  types include  instruments that  use electrochemical cells  or metal-oxide
              semiconductors (MOS),  colorimetric indicators, and mercury detectors.
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
Specific Chemical Monitors                    5                                       10/93

-------
             Total vapor survey meters have detectors (e.g., photoionization detector [PID] or
             flame ionization detector [FID]) that respond to a variety of chemicals.  Additional
             information can be found in Total Vapor Survey Instruments.

             Gas  chromatographs are used  to help identify what chemicals are present in the
             atmosphere.    Additional  information   is  available  in  Introduction  to Gas
             Chromatography.
                      100
                                        Methane
                 D)
                 c
                T3
                 (0
                 0)
                DC
                 h_
                 Q)
50
                              7
                 7
                                     Pentane
                                     Styrene
                       0
                  50           100
             Percent LEL
        FIGURE 4.  EXAMPLES OF RELATIVE RESPONSE CURVES FOR MSA MODEL 260

Source:  Portable Gas Indicator, Model 250 and 260, Response Curves, Mine Safety Appliances
Company, Pittsburgh, PA.
SPECIFIC CHEMICAL MONITORS
Electrochemical Cells

Electrochemical  cells (Figure 1) contain a chemical solution and two or more electrodes.  The
chemical reacts with the solution or the electrodes.  The reaction can be a generation of electrical
current or a change in conductivity of the solution.  The change in signal is expressed as a needle
10/93
                                     Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
                                       Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
movement or a digital response on a meter.  The selectivity of the sensor depends on the selection
of the chemical solution and the electrodes.

In addition to the  previously mentioned oxygen monitors  (Figure  1), there are electrochemical
sensors for ammonia, carbon monoxide,  carbon dioxide, chlorine,  hydrogen chloride, hydrogen
cyanide, and  hydrogen sulfide.  Examples of these instruments are Compur's Monitox® Personal
Monitor Alarms,  MDA's  MSTox 8600 series, and National  Draeger's PAC series of personal
monitors.
Limitations and Considerations

Like the oxygen  sensor, these e'sctrochemical sensors  also can wear out and are affected  by
temperature and humidity.

Electrochemical cells are also affected by interferences.  For example, many of the carbon monoxide
sensors will also respond to hydrogen sulfide.  In fact, one manufacturer uses the same sensor for
both carbon monoxide and hydrogen sulfide detectors.  The user must inform the instrument which
chemical is being monitored so the readout is in the proper units.
Metal-Oxide Semiconductors

MOS detectors, also called  solid-state sensors, consist of a metal-oxide  film coating on heated
ceramic substrate fused or wrapped around a platinum wire coil. When a gas comes in contact with
the metal oxide, it replaces oxygen in the oxide and alters the conductivity of the semiconductor.
The change in conductivity can be expressed in a meter readout.  The substrate is heated to give a
constant baseline as oxygen in the air can combine with  the oxide. Selectivity can  be determined by
selecting specific metal  oxides and/or using specific temperatures from  the heater to prevent
chemicals from reacting.

There are MOS detectors for ammonia, carbon monoxide, hydrogen chloride, hydrogen cyanide,
hydrogen sulfide, methyl chloride, nitrogen oxides, and sulfur dioxide. Examples of instruments that
use an MOS to detect specific toxic compounds are the  Enmet Tritechtor® and Biosystem's Model
100 series.

Even though the choice of metal oxide and sensor temperature can make the detector somewhat
selective, interferences are a major problem.

Because the sensor reaction  is based  on presence (or absence) of oxygen in the  metal-oxide  film,
factors that affect oxygen concentration affect  meter response. The sensor needs a minimum 14%
ambient oxygen for operation. High concentrations can saturate the sensor, causing a slow recovery.

A minimum of 10% humidity is need for some sensors (check the manufacturer's specifications).
Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
Specific Chemical Monitors                    g                                       10/93

-------
Colorimetric Indicators

Colorimetric indicators use a chemical to react with the contaminant to produce a color change. The
chemical can be impregnated on a tape or a badge or put inside a glass tube.  The color change can
be read  by  the  human eye  or  by a  spectrophotometer to determine the concentration  of the
contaminant.

The chemicals are not always specific and can be affected by interfering chemicals.  Humidity can
act as an interference by producing a reaction.  Cold temperatures can slow the chemical reaction.
Hot temperatures may also cause the chemicals to indicate a reaction.

Examples of Colorimetric indicators are the Envirometrics, Inc. ACT™ cards  (badges),  MDA
Scientific's 7100 Series (tape), a  ' Draeger detector tubes.
Mercury Detectors

Mercury detectors use either ultraviolet light absorption or a gold film detector.  Mercury vapor
absorbs a certain wavelength of ultraviolet light.  The instrument draws a sample into a chamber and
exposes it to the ultraviolet light source.  The concentration of mercury vapor is measured by the
amount of light absorbed.

Some organic chemicals can absorb the ultraviolet light and act as an interference.  Water vapor also
absorbs ultraviolet light, but can be adjusted for if the instrument is zeroed in the same humidity as
the sample area.

The gold film detector has a gold film as part of a circuit.  Mercury reacts with the gold and changes
the resistance of the film.  The change  in resistance is used to determine concentration.

Because most operators do not have a mercury vapor standard, the gold film detector must be factory
calibrated.   After  long  exposures or high concentrations,  the  film needs to be "cleaned."   This
requires heating the film and using an AC power source.

An example of an ultraviolet absorption instrument is  the Bacharach Model MV-2.  An example of
a gold film instrument is the Jerome Instruments Model 411.
CONCLUSION

Many hazards can be present at a hazardous materials operation.   Instruments are available for
determining the presence of hazardous situations like combustible atmospheres,  oxygen-deficient
atmospheres, and toxic atmospheres.  The instruments discussed in this section can only identify
certain hazardous situations and should be selected and used accordingly.  Additional information
on identifying and evaluating toxic atmospheres will be discussed in the following sections.
                                                                Oxygen Monitors, CGIs, and
10/93                                        9                   Specific Chemical Monitors

-------
TOTAL VAPOR SURVEY INSTRUMENTS
         PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES
         At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

         •   Explain the  principle of detection  for  the PID, FID,
             supersensitive CGI, and metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)

         •   Determine  whether  a chemical  can  be  detected  by
             photoionization,  given the ionization potential  of  the
             chemical and the lamp energy of the photoionization detector

         •   Identify three considerations when using a PID

         •   Identify three considerations when using a FID

         •   Identify three consideration when using a supersensitive CGI

         •   Explain the difference between a CGI and a supersensitive
             CGI.

-------
      TOTAL VAPOR
 SURVEY INSTRUMENTS
   TOTAL VAPOR SURVEY
       INSTRUMENTS
 Instruments using detectors that
 respond to a wide variety of chemicals
 and give readings in the parts per
 million range
  WHAT ARE TOTAL VAPOR SURVEY
    INSTRUMENTS USED FOR?
     Site characterization
     Exposure monitoring
     Soil and water sample screening
     Soil gas monitoring
                                        NOTES
10/93
Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
      NOTES
TYPES OF TOTAL VAPOR
SURVEY INSTRUMENTS
• Photoionization detector (PID)
• Flame ionization detector (FID)
• Supersensitive CGI
• Metal-oxide semiconductor (MOS)

PHOTOIONIZATION
U A

••'8
' \
o
> ionizatic
(IP) of che
++ e" — > R
orbing UV
th energy
)n potential
mical
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
10/93

-------
                                              NOTES
PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR
              Amplifier
           Meter
       Sample Out


        Electrode
               UV
               Lamp
t
Electrode
               Sample In
10/93
                        Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
IONIZATION
POTENTIAL
Chemical
Carbon monoxide
Hydrogen cyanide
Methane
Hydrogen chloride
Water
Oxygen
Chlorine
Propane
Hydrogen sulfide
Hexane
Ammonia
Acetone
Trichloroethylene
Benzene
Triethylamine
^
IP (eV)
14.0
13.9
13.0
12.7
12.6
12.1
11.5
11.1
10.5
10.2
10.1
9.7
9.45
9.2
7.5
NOTES
   Total Vapor Survey Instruments                       .                 10/93

-------
                                             NOTES
 EXAMPLES OF LAMP ENERGIES
 AND DETECTABLE CHEMICALS
             Hilocvbons
             Wethanol
             Other single C compounds
                   Vinyl Ohio-ids
                   MEK
                   MIBK
                   TCE
                   Other 2-4 C compounds
                        Aromfttics
                        Large molecules
              Lamp
  SELECTIVE DETERMINATION
      OF VINYL CHLORIDE
        Compound
IP
        Carbon dioxide  13.8
        Propane       11.1
        Vinyl chloride    10.0
        Acetone        9.7
PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR
       11.7 vs. 10.2 Lamp
 • 11.7 wears out faster than 10.2
 • 11.7 is more susceptible to humidity
 • 10.2 provides better response to
  chemicals it can detect
10/93
                   Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
     NOTES
                              PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR
                                      Considerations
                                  • Lamp energy/chemical IP
                                  • Dust/humidity
                                  • Interferences
                                  • Electromagnetic interferences
                                  • Lamp aging
                                  • Relative response
                                  • High concentrations
PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR
Relative Response
Chemical
m-Xylene
Benzene
Phenol
Acetone
Isobutylene
Hexane
Ammonia
Relative
Response*
1.12
1.00
0.78
0.63
0.55
0.22
0.03
IP
8.56
9.25
8.69
9.69
9.25
10.18
10.15
* HNU PI-101 with 10.2 eV lamp calibrated to benzene
                              PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR
                                High Concentration Effects
                                O>
                                C 600 •
                                                Benzene
                                                (gain = 9.8)
                                     100   300   300  700  800
                                           ppm (by volume)
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
10/93

-------
  FLAME IONIZATION  DETECTOR
              Exhaust Vent
     Igniter and
     Electrode
    Hydrogen Inlet
                      Collector
                      Electrode
                     Sample (air) Inlet
         FLAME IONIZATION
RH
                                  H20
Note: This ionization process is destructive.
COMPOUNDS GIVING LITTLE OR
NO RESPONSE IN THE FID
He
Ar
02
H20
H2S
S02
N2
NO
N02
N20
NH3
HCN
HCHO (formaldehyde)
CO
C02
CS2
Ethanolamine

                                                      NOTES
10/93
                                              Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
      NOTES
                                    FLAME lONIZATION
                                      Considerations
                                  • Detects only organics
                                  • Detects methane
                                  • Hydrogen gas needed
                                  • Flame out
                                  • Electromagnetic interferences
                                  • Relative response
                                     FLAME lONIZATION
                                      Relative Response
                                 Chemical
% Relative Response*
                                 Benzene                185
                                 Toluene                126
                                 Methane                100
                                 Acetone                82
                                 Trichloroethylene           54
                                 Freon-12               13
                                 Carbon tetrachloride           8
                             * OVA-128 calibrated to methane
                                  SUPERSENSITIVE CGI
                               Detects combustible gases and
                               vapors
                               Detector is the same as a regular CGI,
                               but an amplifier is used to obtain ppm
                               readings
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
              10/93

-------
                                                NOTES
      SUPERSENSITIVE CGI
          Considerations
      • Detects only combustibles
      • Detects methane
      • Temperature
      • Chemicals that foul sensor
      • Minimum oxygen
      • Electromagnetic interference
      • Relative response
          METAL-OXIDE
   SEMICONDUCTOR (MOS)
• Metal-oxide coating on a ceramic substrate
  wrapped around a wire
• Contaminant alters conductivity by
  removing oxygen
• Change in current is proportional to the
  amount of contaminant present
• Also called "solid-state" sensor
              MOS
         Considerations
   • Saturation
   • Temperature
   • Minimum oxygen requirements
   • Relative response
10/93
Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
     NOTES
                                    CONCLUSION
                                    Considerations
                              • What the instrument can detect
                              • Survey, not identification
                              • Logistical factors
                              • Environmental factors
                              • Special features
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
10/93

-------
                   TOTAL VAPOR SURVEY INSTRUMENTS
INTRODUCTION
Total vapor survey instruments are designed to respond  to a wide  range  of gases and  vapors.
Although they lack selectivity, this broad response allows the operator to detect the presence of
chemicals with one instrument.  This allows the instrument to be used as a warning device during
survey operations.

If the identity of a chemical is known, the instruments can be calibrated to give a one-to-one response
for that chemical.  If there is a mixture present, the instrument gives a total vapor reading.  The
detectors themselves  cannot identify the components of an  atmosphere. The detectors can be used
in instruments, like the gas chromatograph (see Introduction to Gas Chromatography that are used
for identification.

This section will focus on total vapor survey  instruments that are used for parts per million (ppm)
concentrations.   It will discuss four types of toxic vapor survey instruments:  photoionization
detectors (PIDs), flame ionization detectors (FIDs), supersensitive combustible gas indicators  (CGIs),
and metal oxide semiconductors.
APPLICATIONS

Because of their ability to detect a wide range of chemicals, total vapor survey instruments are used
in site survey and characterization.  Although they cannot identify what chemicals are present, they
can indicate what areas may have higher concentrations (hot spots) than others and delineate work
areas based on levels of concentrations.

If the identities  of the contaminants are known, the instruments can  also be used in exposure
assessment.  The readings can give an approximate concentration and the information can be used
in selecting exposure controls.

The  instruments  are also used to screen water and soil samples to determine whether further, and
more complicated and expensive, analysis is needed.  Usually specific reading (or any response) is
used to determine which samples need further analysis.

Total vapor survey instruments are also  used in soil gas sampling as a screening tool  to indicate
"hits" and hot spots that need further sampling.
PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTORS

These instruments detect concentrations of gases and vapors in air by using an ultraviolet light source
to ionize the airborne contaminant. Once the gas or vapor is ionized in the instrument, it can be
detected and measured.
10/93                                       1                Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
Principle of Operation

The photoionization process can be illustrated as:

                                 R + hv -» R+ + e"
                                                      R
where R is an organic or inorganic molecule and hp represents a photon of ultraviolet (UV) light with
energy equal to or greater than the ionization potential (IP) of that particular chemical species.  R+
is the ionized molecule.

When a photon of ultraviolet radiation strikes a chemical compound, it ionizes the molecule  if the
energy of the radiation is equal to or greater than the IP of the compound.  Because ions are charged
particles, they may be collected  on a charged plate and produce a current.  The measured current
will be directly proportional to  the number of ionized molecules.  The  R in the  above equation
indicates that photoionization is nondestructive and the chemical exits the detector unchanged.

PIDs use a fan or a pump to draw air into the instrument's detector.  There  the contaminants  are
exposed to UV light and the resulting negatively charged particles (ions) are  collected and measured
(Figure 1).
                                       Amplifier
                      Sample Out


                       Electrode
                                             A         Electrode

                                          Sample In
                FIGURE 1. DIAGRAM OF PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR LAMP
                              AND COLLECTING ELECTRODES

The energy required to remove the outermost electron from the molecule is called the ionization
potential (IP) and is specific for any compound or atomic species (Table 1).  Ionization potentials
are measured in electron volts (eV).
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
                                                                                    10/93

-------
The ultraviolet light used to ionize the chemicals is emitted by a gaseous discharge lamp.  The lamps
contain low-pressure gas through which a high-potential current is passed.  A variety of lamps with
different ionization energies are made by varying the composition of the lamp gas.  The energy of
lamps available are 8.4, 9.5, 10.0, 10.2, 10.6, and 11.7 eV.  Not all lamps are available from a
single manufacturer.

The lamp  energy designation is for the predominant UV wavelength emitted  by  the lamp.  The
spectra from the lamp may have other wavelengths.  Wavelengths of less energy  do not have a major
impact because chemicals ionized by  those wavelengths will also be ionized by the predominant
wavelength.  The higher energy (but less photons) wavelengths will ionize the higher IP chemicals
but the response will be low. Thus, a 10.2 lamp may give a response (although a small one) for a
chemical with an IP of 10.9.
Photoionization Detector Considerations

Because the ability to detect a chemical depends on the ability to ionize it, the IP of a chemical to
be detected must be compared to the energy generated by the UV lamp of the instrument.  As
discussed earlier, it may be possible to detect a chemical even if the chemical's IP is slightly greater
than the lamp energy.  However, the response will be poor.

                TABLE 1.  IONIZATION POTENTIALS OF SELECTED CHEMICALS
                                                    Ionization Potential
Chemical
Carbon monoxide
Hydrogen cyanide
Methane
Hydrogen chloride
Water
Oxygen
Chlorine
Propane
Hydrogen sulfide
Hexane
Ammonia
Acetone
Trichloroethylene
Benzene
Triethyl amine
(eV)
14.0
13.9
13.0
12.7
12.6
12.1
11.5
11.1
10.5
10.2
10.1
9.7
9.45
9.2
8.0
10/93                                       3               Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
One use for the different lamps is for selective determination of chemicals.  For example, if a spill
of propane and vinyl chloride were to be monitored with a PID, the first check would be to see
whether the chemicals can be detected.  The IP of propane is 11.1 eV and the IP of vinyl chloride
is  10.0 eV.  To detect both, a lamp with an energy greater than 11.1 eV is needed (like a 11.7).
If vinyl chloride was the chemical of concern, then a lamp with an energy greater than 10.0 but less
than 11.1 (such as 10.2 or  10.6) could be used.  The propane would neither be ionized nor detected.
Thus, propane would not interfere with the vinyl  chloride readings.

The lamp window also affects response.  The two types of windows are magnesium fluoride and
lithium fluoride.  The former is used for the lower energy lamps and the latter is for the 11.7 eV
lamp.  The lithium fluoride is used to permit the higher energy photons to be emitted.  Lithium
fluoride has two disadvantages.  The first is that humidity and the high-energy photons degrade the
window.  This reduces the life span of the  lamp.  The 11.7 eV lamps are expected to have a life
expectancy one-tenth of that of 10.2 or 10.6 lamps.  The second disadvantage is that lithium fluoride
also limits the amount of photons being emitted. Thus,  if both a  10.2 and an 11.7 lamp have enough
energy to ionize a chemical (e.g., a chemical with an IP of 9.7), the 10.2 may give a higher response
because it is emitting more light.

The sample drawn into the instrument passes over the  lamp to be ionized.  Dust in the atmosphere
can collect on the lamp and block the transmission of UV light.  This  will cause a reduction in
instrument reading. The lamp should be cleaned regularly. Newer models of PIDs have dust filters.

Humidity can cause two problems. When a  cold instrument is taken into a warm moist atmosphere,
the moisture can condense on the lamp.  Like dust, this will reduce the available light.  Moisture in
the air can also reduce the readings.  It is thought that  the water molecules collide with the ionized
chemical and deactivate them.  This reduction in response has been reported to be as much as 50%
for a relative humidity of 90%.  As mentioned earlier,  the 11.7 lamp  window is especially sensitive
to moisture.

Because  an electric field  is generated in the  sample  chamber  of the instrument,  radio-frequency
interference from pulsed DC or AC  power lines,  transformers,  generators,  and radio wave
transmission may produce an error in response.

As the lamp ages, the intensity of the light decreases.   It will still have the same  ionization energy,
but the response will decline.  This will be detected during calibration and adjustments can be made.
However, the  lamp will eventually burn out.

Methane can act as an interference by absorbing the UV energy without ionization.  This reduces
the  ionization  of other  chemicals  present.   The net effect  is a  reading  lower than the true
concentration.

Although oxygen is not needed  for photoionization, a change  in oxygen will affect the response.
Thus, there are oxygen limits for their use.  The instruments  are  calibrated and used in normal
oxygen atmospheres.  The HNU PI-101  requires a minimum of 10% oxygen for reliable results.

Photoionization detectors are calibrated to a single chemical.  The instrument's response to chemicals
other than the calibration gas/vapor can vary.   Table 2 shows the relative responses of several
chemicals for a specific PID.


Total Vapor Survey Instruments                4                                       10/93

-------
In some cases, at high concentrations the instrument response can decrease. While the response may
be linear (i.e.,  1 to 1 response) from 1 to 400 ppm for an instrument, a concentration of 900 ppm
may only give a meter response of 700 (Figure 2).  Some instruments use a microprocessor to
compensate for this effect by storing calibration information for the high concentrations.

Manufacturers who make photoionization detectors can be found in this manual in the Manufacturers
and Suppliers of Air Monitoring Equipment section.

                      TABLE 2. RELATIVE RESPONSES FOR SELECTED
                       CHEMICALS USING THE HNU MODEL  PI 101
                      WITH  10.2 eV PROBE CALIBRATED TO BENZENE
Chemical
m-Xylene
Benzene
Acetone
Isobutylene
Vinyl chloride
Hexane
Phosphine
Ammonia
Relative Response
1.12
1.00
0.63
0.55
0.50
0.22
0.20
0.03
                  Source: Instruction Manual for Model PI 101, Portable
                  Photoionization Analyzer, HNU Systems, Inc., Newton,
                  MA, 1986.
Examples of Photoionization Detector Instruments
HNU Systems, Inc.

HNU Systems,  Inc., manufactures four models of photoionization detector survey instruments:
PI-101, IS-101,  HW-101, and the DL-101.
All four consist of two modules connected via a single power cord (Figure 3):

       •      A readout unit having an analog meter or digital display, a rechargeable battery, and
              power supplies for operation of the amplifier and the UV lamp

       •      A sensor unit consisting of the UV light source, pump, ionization chamber, and a
              preamplifier.
10/93                                      5               Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
The PI-101 has a fan instead of a pump and cannot draw a sample through a resistance (like a piece
of long tubing). The PI-101 is rated for Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, and D locations.

The IS-101 is similar to the PI-101 except it is intrinsically safe for Division 1 locations.

The HW-101 has  a pump instead  of a fan, so it can be used to draw a sample through tubing or
through a probe used for soil gas sampling.  The HW-101 also has a dust filter and is more moisture
resistant than the other  models.  It also has a light-emitting diode (LED) display on  the handle that
indicates concentration  changes.

The DL-101 has a pump and dust  filter like the HW-101.  However, it has many different fixtures
than other units. It has a pistol grip for holding the probe. There is a LED display on the handle.
The instrument has a datalogger to store calibration information and to record time  and location of
readings.  Information from the datalogger can be transferred  to a computer. It has a digital readout
instead of an analog meter.

These units have a separate  sensor unit because the lamps available - 9.5, 10.2 (standard), and 11.7
eV - require separate electronic circuits.  To change the energy of ionization, the whole sensor or
           O)
           c
           TJ
           (C
           0)
           tr
           H-*
           0)
600 -
400 -
               200 -
                                  Benzene
                                 (gain = 9.8)
                       100
                                300
                                          500
                                                   700
                                                            900
                                     ppm (by volume)
         FIGURE 2. TYPICAL CALIBRATION CURVE FOR PHOTOIONIZATION ANALYZER

 Source:  Instruction Manual for Model PI-101 Photoionization Detecwr, copyright 1975, HNU
 Systems, Inc.; reprinted with permission of publisher.
 Total Vapor Survey Instruments
                                                                       10/93

-------
probe has to be switched, not just the lamp. The exception is the DL-101. With the DL-101, lamps
can be interchanged and the datalogger/microprocessor makes the proper adjustments.  In all models
the lamps are replaceable.
                                  Lamp Power
                                     Supply
                                  Ion Chamber
                                     Bias
                                                                  Ion Chamber
                                                                        £ + SAMPLE
                                                          PROBE
                    FIGURE 3. PORTABLE PHOTOIONIZATION DETECTOR

Source:  Instruction Manual for Model PI-101 Photoionization Detector,  copyright 1975, HNU
Systems, Inc.; reprinted with permission of publisher.
Photo vac. Inc.

Photovac has three versions of its MicroTIP®.  All three have a microprocessor that is used to
calibrate the instrument and a datalogger to store data.   Information from the datalogger can be
transferred to a computer.  The standard lamp is 10.6 eV, but it can be easily replaced with a 8.4,
9.5, 10.2 or 11.7 eV lamp.  The readout is digital with a range of 0 to 2000.  They all have a dust
filter. The MP-1000 does not have a inherent safety  approval. The HL-2000 is approved for Class
I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, and D locations. The IS-3000 is intrinsically safe.
10/93
Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
Thermo Environmental Instruments

The Organic Vapor Meter (OVM) Model 580B is 5" by 5" by 10" with a handle in the center on
top.  It can use any of four different lamps - 9.6, 10.0, 10.6 and  11.8 eV.  The instrument has a
digital readout with a range of 0 to 2000.  It has a maximum hold feature so that you can get two
readings - the current concentration or the maximum concentration during the survey.  The meter
has a lock-out if the readout exceeds 2000 so that high concentrations are not missed.  It must be
reset in an area of low concentrations.  The instrument has a microprocessor  for assistance in
calibration and lamp changing.

The OVM-580S is similar to the 580B, but is intrinsically safe.

Both have connections and software for interfacing the unit with a personal computer.  They also
have a datalogger for recording readings at coded locations so that the readings can be looked at later
or downloaded into a computer.

Photoionization detectors are also used in gas chromatographs made by Photovac, HNU and Thermo
Environmental Instruments.  Gas chromatography will be discussed in a later section.
FLAME IONIZATION  DETECTOR

These units use a flame to ionize airborne contaminants. Once they are ionized, they can be detected
and measured.
Principle of Operation

FIDs use a hydrogen flame as the means to ionize organic vapors.  FIDs respond to virtually all
organic compounds; that is, compounds that contain carbon-hydrogen or carbon-carbon bonds. FIDs
will not respond to inorganic compounds.

Inside the detector chamber, the sample is exposed to a hydrogen flame which  ionizes the organic
vapors (Figure 4):

                           RH + O2 -* RH+ + e~ - CO2 -I- H2O

When most organic vapors burn, positively charged carbon-containing ions are produced.  These can
be collected by a negatively charged collecting electrode in the  detector chamber.  An electric field
exists between the conductors surrounding the flame and a collecting electrode. As the positive ions
are collected,  a current proportional  to  the hydrocarbon concentration is generated on the input
electrode. This current is measured with a preamplifier which  has an output signal proportional to
the ionization current.  A signal conducting amplifier  is used to  amplify the signal from the detector
and to  condition it for subsequent meter or external recorder display.

Flame  ionization detectors have a more generalized response  in detecting organic vapors.  This
generalized sensitivity is due to the breaking of chemical bonds which require a set amount of energy
and is a known reproducible event.   When this is  compared to photoionization  (PID),  a major


Total Vapor Survey  Instruments                g               ,                         10/93

-------
difference should be noted between the detectors.  PID detection is dependent upon the ionization
potential (in eV) and the ease in which an electron can be ionized (displaced) from a molecule.  This
mechanism is variable, highly dependent on the individual characteristics of a particular substance.
This results in a more variable response factor for the vast majority of organics that are ionizable.
Therefore,  in general, one does not see large sensitivity shifts between different substances when
using an FID  as compared to  a PID.  FIDs are the most sensitive for saturated hydrocarbons
(alkanes), unsaturated hydrocarbons (alkenes and alkynes), and aromatic hydrocarbons.  Substances
that contain substituted functional groups, such as hydroxide (OH) and chloride (Cl), tend to reduce
the detector's sensitivity.

Companies that manufacture FIDs are listed in the Manufacturers and Suppliers of Air Monitoring
Equipment  section. The Foxboro Century Organic Vapor Analyzer (OVA) will be discussed as an
example latef.
                                    Exhaust vent
                 Igniter and
                 electrode
              Hydrogen inlet
   Collector
  electrode
Sample (air) inlet
            FIGURE 4.  EXAMPLE OF A FLAME IONIZATION DETECTOR SCHEMATIC
Flame Ionization Detector Considerations

Flame ionization detectors respond only to organic compounds.  Thus, they do not detect inorganic
compounds like  chlorine, hydrogen cyanide, or ammonia.  There are  some carbon  containing
chemicals for which the FID gives little or no response also.  Table 3 illustrates this situation.
70/95
     Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
                  TABLE 3.  CHEMICALS GIVING LITTLE OR NO RESPONSE
                          WITH FLAME IONIZATION DETECTORS
                   He                N2             HCHO (formaldehyde)
                   Ar                NO                     CO
                   02                N02                    C02
                   H20                N20                    CS2
                   H2S                NH3                    TDI
                   S02               HCN                ethanol amine

             Source:   Relative Response Data Sheet for Organic Vapor Analyzer,
             January  16, 1989.  The Foxboro Company.

Flame  ionization, unlike  photoionization, is  a destructive  form of monitoring.   Typically, the
combustion products are carbon monoxide  and water.  However, substituted  hydrocarbons (e.g.
chlorinated compounds) may produce toxic or corrosive byproducts.

The FID responds very well to  methane.  Methane is  used as a calibration gas for many FIDs.
However, if monitoring is being done near  a landfill or in a sewer system, the methane can mask
the response to low concentrations of other  organics.

Hydrogen gas is used as fuel for the  flame.  This requires the extra logistics of maintaining a
hydrogen gas supply and recharging the instrument.  It also involves working with  a flammable
compressed gas.

Inadequate oxygen can cause the flame to go out.  High concentrations of organics can also cause
a flame out.  Without the flame, there is no detection.

Cold weather can also  cause the flame to extinguish or inhibit  startup  (ignition) of the instrument.

Because an amplifier is used to enhance the signal from the detector,  radio-frequency interference
from pulsed DC or AC power lines,  transformers, generators, and radio wave transmission may
produce an error in response.

As with all instruments,  flame  ionization  detectors respond  differently  to different compounds.
Table 4 is a list of the relative responses of the Foxboro  CENTURY OVA to some common organic
compounds.  Since that instrument is factory calibrated to  methane,  all  responses are relative to
methane and are given by percentage, with  methane at 100%.
 Total Vapor Survey Instruments               \Q                                      10/93

-------
                    TABLE 4. RELATIVE RESPONSES FOR SELECTED
                 CHEMICALS USING THE OVA CALIBRATED TO METHANE
Compound
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Acetylene
Benzene
Toluene
Acetone
Methanol
Isopropyl alcohol
Carbon tetrachloride
Freon-12
Trichloroethylene
Relative Response
(%)
100
77
70
225
185
126
82
12
65
8
13
54
                 Source: Product Literature, The Foxboro Company; used
                 with permission of The Foxboro Company.
Examples of Flame lonization Detector Instruments
Foxboro CENTURY Organic Vapor Analyzer (OVA)

One of the more common FID instruments is the Foxboro CENTURY OVA.  There are two models:
the OVA-128 and the OVA-108.  Both consist of two major parts (Figure 5):

      •     A 12-pound package containing the sampling pump, battery pack, support electronics,
            flame ionization detector, hydrogen gas cylinder, and an optional gas chromatography
            (GC) column.

      •     A hand-held meter/sampling probe assembly.
10/93                                   11              Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
        INTERNAL HYDROGEN
           CYLINDEP
    SIGNAL PROCESSOR
                                                                       SAMPLE
                   FIGURE 5.  ORGANIC VAPOR ANALYZER SCHEMATIC

Source:   Product Literature, The Foxboro  Company;  used with  permission  of The Foxboro
Company.

The OVA-128 has a range of 0-1000 ppm.  The OVA-108 reads  from 0-10,000.   Both are
intrinsically safe for Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C and D. Both models are factory calibrated
to methane, but can be calibrated to other chemicals.

Other FID units are the Sensidyne Portable  FID, Heath Consultants  Porta-FID II, and Summit
Industries SIP-1000. The Portable FID and the SIP-1000 have gas chromatograph options.
Combination P/D and FID

Foxboro also manufactures the TVA-1000.  The instrument can use a PID, an FID, or both.  The
instrument has datalogging capabilities and digital readouts on a probe and side pack,
Total Vapor Survey Instruments
12
10/93

-------
SUPERSENSITIVE COMBUSTIBLE  GAS INDICATORS

The CGI is a type of total vapor survey monitor.  However, the normal range for a CGI is in the
percent  LEL  concentration.  This range is too high for toxic concentration  monitoring.  Super-
sensitive combustible gas indicators  use the combustible gas sensor with  circuitry to amplify the
signal.  Instead of measuring per cent of the LEL, the readout is in part per million.  Because the
detection is based on combustion, the instruments can detect both organic and inorganic combustible
gases/vapors.

Some units—like the Bacharach TLV Sniffer—only  measure in the ppm range.  Other units (e.g.,
the Gas Tech Model  1314) can be switched from percent LEL to ppm readout.

These units have the same limitations and considerations as the regular combustible gas indicators.
In some cases, like  sensitivity io temperature changes, the effects are a bigger problem because of
the amplifier circuit. Because of the  amplifier, they  are more sensitive to electromagnetic radiation
than standard combustible gas indicators.
METAL-OXIDE SEMICONDUCTORS (MOS)

MOS,  also called solid-state sensors, consist of a metal  oxide film coating on  a heated ceramic
substrate fused or wrapped around a platinum wire coil. When a gas comes in contact with the metal
oxide,  it replaces oxygen in the oxide and alters the conductivity of the semiconductor.  The change
in conductivity can be expressed in a meter readout. The bead is heated to give a constant baseline
as oxygen in the air can combine with the oxide.  Oxygen can combine with the sensor to cause an
instrument response.

Selectivity can be determined by selecting specific metal oxides and/or using specific temperatures
from the heater to prevent chemicals reacting. To use as a toxic atmosphere survey monitor, the
sensor  should respond to a wide variety of chemicals.  Thus, the sensor  should be designed to be
nonselective.

Examples  of instruments using a MOS  for a total vapor  sensor are the  AIM 2000/3000 and the
Dynamation Model  CGM™.
CONCLUSION

This section has described several types of detectors used for monitoring the presence of a wide
range of gases and vapors.  While these are not the only types of detectors or monitors available,
they are the more commonly used devices for field surveys.
10/93                                       13                Total Vapor Survey Instruments

-------
  AIR SAMPLE  COLLECTION
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES






At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:




•   List four advantages to using air sample collection



•   List three sources of sampling and analysis methods



•   List three considerations when using liquid sorbent samplers



•   List three considerations when using solid sorbent samplers



•   List three considerations when using whole air samplers



•   Describe two methods of collecting whole air samplers.

-------
                                                 NOTES
         AIR  SAMPLE
        COLLECTION
DIRECT-READING INSTRUMENTS (DRI)
    vs. AIR SAMPLE COLLECTION
Features
Response time
Quantitative
Identification
Detection range

Cost
cai
Seconds to minutes
Yes
No
Parts per million (ppm)
to percent
Inexpensive
Air Sample Collection
Hours to days
Yes
Yes
Parts per trillion (ppt)
to parts per million (ppm)
Expensive
  AIR SAMPLE COLLECTION
               Uses
 •  Identify and quantify airborne
   chemicals onsite
 •  Evaluate personal exposures
 •  Evaluate releases from site
 •  Data for public health/ecological risk
   assessment
10/93
                                        Air Sample Collection

-------
     NOTES
                           AIR SAMPLE COLLECTION
                                   Components	
                                                  Laboratory
                                                   analysis
                            Contaminant
                                          Pump
                                COLLECTION AND
                             ANALYTICAL METHODS
                             EPA
                             -  Compendium of Methods for
                                Determination of Toxic Organic
                                Compounds in Ambient Air
                             -  Compendium of Methods for
                                Determination of Air Pollutants in
                                Indoor Air
                             -  Compendium of Methods for
                                Determination of Toxic Inorganic
                                Compounds in Ambient Air
                                COLLECTION AND
                             ANALYTICAL METHODS
                          • NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods

                          • OSHA Analytical Methods Manual

                          • American Society for Testing and
                           Materials

                          • Specialty methods
Air Sample Collection
10/93

-------
                                                 NOTES
       COLLECTION AND
    ANALYTICAL METHODS
   Air Methods Database
   -  Combines previous methods into
      a database
   -  Free from EPA
   -  See fact sheet
      COLLECTION  MEDIA
     Types of Contaminants
    Aerosols/particulates (nonvolatile)

    Gases and vapors (volatile)

    Combination (semivolatile)
          FILTER MEDIA
             Examples
  Filter Media

  0.8-micron (p)

  mixed cellulose ester (MCE)


  Glass fiber


  Polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
  Polytetrafluoroethylene
Application

Metals; asbestos



Pesticides


Total particulates;

hexavalent chromium


Alkaline dusts
10/93
                             Air Sample Collection

-------
     NOTES
                         AEROSOLS/PARTICULATES
                          Size Selection Terminology
                         • Total suspended paniculate (TSP)

                         • Particulate matter - 10jL/ (PM-10)

                         • Total

                         • Respirable
                         AEROSOL SIZE SELECTION
                               Inertial Impactor
                                              Air flow
                         Filter
                                    Pump
                         AEROSOL SIZE SELECTION
                              Cascade Impactor	
                        Collector
                              Air flow
                             \\
                                  A
                               Pump
                                     Plates
Air Sample Collection
10/93

-------
                                                   NOTES
      GASES AND VAPORS
             Examples
         Organic vapors
         - Benzene
         - Trichloroethylene
         - Ethyl alcohol

         Inorganic gases
         - Ammonia
         - Hydrogen cyanide
         - Hydrogen chloride
     SOLID SORBENT MEDIA
             Examples
 Solid Sorbent

 Activated carbon


 Tenax®


 Carbon molecular sieve


 Silica gel
Compound

Nonpolar organics (NIOSH)


Volatile, nonpolar organics (EPA)


Highly volatile, nonpolar organics (EPA)


Polar organics (NIOSH)
     SOLID SORBENT TUBE
             Example
              t       t     t
                    Dividers


      A = Solid sorbent
      B = Solid sorbent (backup or different sorbent)
10/93
                                    Air Sample Collection

-------
     NOTES
                                  SOLID SORBENT
                                 CONSIDERATIONS
                                     Breakthrough
                                     Sorption efficiency
                                     No universal media
                                     Stability/handling
                                     Desorption
                                     - Thermal
                                     - Solvent
                               LIQUID SORBENT MEDIA
                                       Examples
                           Media
                           O.INNaOH
                           Aniline

                           DNPH reagent + isooctane

                           0.1MHCI
Compound
Cresol/phenol (EPA)
Phenol (NIOSH)

Phosgene (EPA)

Aldehydes/ketones (EPA)

Hydrazine (NIOSH)
                                   LIQUID SORBENT
                                  CONSIDERATIONS
                                     Spillage
                                     Fragile holders
                                     Hazardous liquids?
                                     Stability
                                     Evaporation
Air Sample Collection
             10/93

-------
                                                        NOTES
   WHOLE AIR COLLECTION
          "Sampling Lung"
                           Sample flow
                         Air flow
 Source: 'Sampling and Analysis of Emissions from Stationary Sourcse,' Schuatzle •(
 >!., Joumfl ol tht Air Pollution Control Attodftion, Volum. 25, No. 8, S*pt 1875.
  BAG SAMPLING vs. CANISTER
              SAMPLING
  Baa
  Grab
  Need field pump
  Less stable sample
  Cannot clean
  Disposable
  Cannot pressurize
Canister
Integrated
Need lab pump
More stable sample
Clean to reuse
Reusable
Can pressurize
        COMBINATION MEDIA
   	Examples	
    Media              Compound
    Quartz filter           PCBs/pesticides (EPA)
    •f- polyurethane foam (PUF)  PAHs (EPA)

    Quartz filter + XAD-2     PAHs (EPA)

    Glass filter + Florisil®    PCBs (NIOSH)

    MCE filter + 0.1 N KOH    Cyanides (NIOSH)
4/94
                                   Air Sample Collection

-------
      NOTES
                                  SAMPLING PUMPS
                               Most collection methods require a
                               pump to pull air through medium

                               Exceptions
                               - Evacuated canister
                               - Passive dosimeter
                                PASSIVE DOSIMETER
                                        Example
                               Contaminant
                                                 Sorbent
                               Chemical permeates membrane and/or difluses into
                               sampler
                                PASSIVE DOSIMETERS
                                    Considerations
                               • No pump
                               • Sorbent limits
                                - Breakthrough
                                - Humidity
                                - Temperature
                               • Early and late exposure problems
                               • Gases and vapors only
Air Sample Collection
JO/93

-------
                                          NOTES
       SAMPLE PUMPS
       High Flow Rates
  Greater than 10 cubic feet per minute

  Ambient air sampling
       SAMPLE PUMPS
   Medium/High Flow Rates
       1 to 6 liters per minute

       Personal sampling

       Aerosol sampling
       SAMPLE PUMPS
        Low Flow Rates
    • 10 to 750 cubic centimeters
     (milliliters) per minute

    • Personal sampling

    • Gas and vapor sampling
10/93
Air Sample Collection

-------
     NOTES
                                      SUMMARY
                            • Collect sample for laboratory analysis

                            • Determine whether air sampling is
                              appropriate

                            • Identify appropriate air sampling
                              method
Air Sample Collection
10/93

-------
                            AIR SAMPLE COLLECTION
INTRODUCTION

The types of equipment discussed in this section are media (filters and sorbents), containers (gas bags
and canisters) and pumps for collecting air  samples.  Unlike direct-reading instruments that give
immediate results, these samples must be analyzed by instruments that are not usually taken onsite.
The analysis may be done in the support area of a site or at a laboratory many miles away.  This
causes a delay in receiving information.  However, there are advantages to their use.

       •     The chemicals in the atmosphere can be concentrated  so that the detection limit can
             be lower than for a direct-reading instrument, even when the same type of detector
             is used.

       •     Specialized detectors can be used.  Some detectors (e.g., PID and FID) are used in
             both direct-reading instruments and analytical instruments.  However, some detectors
             are only found in analytical instruments (e.g., electron capture detector). For specific
             analysis of aerosols (e.g., lead), there are no direct-reading  instruments. A sample
             must be collected and then analyzed by a nonportable instrument.

       •     The analytical instruments used generally allow identification and quantification  of
             the chemicals.  Instead of a total  vapor reading, it may be possible to get  an
             identification and concentration of the components.

       •     The collection devices allow long duration (hours to days) and unattended sampling.


SAMPLE COLLECTION COMPONENTS


General

The basic components of a sample collection system are:

       •     A  collection  media for separating the contaminants from the atmosphere  or a
             collection container for holding part of the atmosphere.

       •     A pump to pull air through the media to push the sample into a container.  When a
             pump is used, the method is called "active" sampling.  Some methods do not require
             a pump and are called "passive" samplers.

       •     A method to analyze the collected sample.   This part  will  not cover the analysis  of
             a sample.  A limited discussion of analyses and detector types is found in Total Vapor
             Survey Instruments and Introduction to  Gas Chromatography.
10/93                                       1                      Air Sample Collection

-------
Selection of Components

Several factors affect the selection of the components for a sample collection system.  These include
1) the chemical and physical properties of the chemical to be collected, 2) the purpose of the sample,
3) the analytical method used by  the laboratory, 4) the laboratory's  capability to do a specific
procedure and their experience with the method, and 5) equipment characteristics.  The following
elaborate on these factors:

       •      Chemical and physical properties of the chemical—The chemical/physical properties
              of the chemical to be collected affect the type of media used. Volatile chemicals pass
              readily through a filter. Therefore, some kind of sorbent is needed.  In some cases,
              a reaction, like an acid gas with an alkaline solution, may be used instead of sorption.

       •      Purpose of  the sample—Two types of samples are the  "personal" sample and the
              "area" sample:

                    Personal sample—A personal sample requires a pump that can be worn by the
                    person being sampled. This means the pump must be compact and battery
                    operated.  A personal sample is used to evaluate the  exposure level of the
                    person being sampled.   The sample results  are  usually compared to an
                    exposure limit (see Exposure Limits and Action Levels). A personal sample
                    collects  the contaminants in  the   "breathing  zone,"  a  12-inch-radius
                    hemisphere  in front of the wearer's nose.

                    Area sample—An area sample, to determine chemicals and concentrations in
                    a specific area,  can use the same type of pump.  However,  area samples
                    generally are for checking lower concentrations than personal samples. This
                    is because they are  used for identification or  evaluation of public exposure.
                    The lower concentrations  require a larger volume of air to concentrate the
                    sample.  This can be done by using a higher flow rate, by sampling longer,
                    or both. Longer sampling times are used because public exposure can be 24
                    hours each day compared  to a site worker's exposure  of 8 to 10  hours each
                    day. A long sampling time and a high flow rate require a pump that is AC
                    powered. Battery pumps are only rated for 8 to 10 hours of use.

       •      Analytical  method  used by the  laboratory—The analytical  method used by the
              laboratory  also affects  the collection devices used.   There are commonly used
              methods developed by  the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),  National
              Institute of Occupational Safety and Health  (NIOSH), and Occupational Safety and
              Health Administration (OSHA) that specify sampling and analysis procedures. These
              methods are found in EPA's Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic
              Organic  Compounds in Ambient Air, NIOSH's Manual of Analytical Methods, and
              OSHA's Analytical Methods Manual.
Air Sample Collection                      2                                       10/93

-------
              Although these methods were developed for similar chemicals, there are differences
              in the procedures. The laboratory being used may also have different requirements.
              The laboratory should be consulted prior to sampling.

              EPA's Environmental Response Team (EPA-ERT) has developed  an Air Methods
              Database so that the user can determine what methods are available for sampling a
              chemical.  The database  includes EPA, NIOSH, OSHA, and American Society for
              Testing and Materials (ASTM) methods.  Further information is found in a technical
              bulletin (Appendix A).

              Capability of the laboratory—When you choose a laboratory for analysis, make sure
              you consider its  capability to do a specific procedure and its experience with the
              desired method.   For NIOSH and  OSHA methods, use an American Industrial
              Hygiene Association (AIHA) accredited laboratory.

              Equipment characteristics—This is an important consideration. For example, some
              pumps have  timers that may be useful or even necessary.  Some collection  devices
              are fragile and may not be desirable  under certain operating conditions.
AEROSOL (NONVOLATILE CHEMICALS) SAMPLERS
Media

Airborne aerosols  include both dispersed liquids (mists  and fogs) and  solids (dusts,  fumes, and
smoke).  The most common method of sampling aerosols, especially the solids or particulates, is to
trap them on filters using active systems.  Impingers (see Liquid Sorbents in the Gas and Vapor
(Volatiles) Samplers section) have been used, but filters are more convenient.  Two types of filters
are used.

       •      Fiber filters  are composed of irregular meshes of fibers forming openings or pores
              of 20 ftm in diameter or less.  As particulate-laden air is drawn through such filters,
              it is forced to change direction.  Particulates then impinge against the filter fibers and
              are  retained.  A  number of fiber filters are available (Table 1).  The two with the
              greatest application to hazardous materials  operations are cellulose and glass.  Filters
              of these materials typically consist of thick masses of fine  fibers and have low mass-
              to-surface area ratios.  Of the two, cellulose is the least expensive, is relatively low
              in ash, has high  tensile strength, and  is available in a variety of sizes.  Its greatest
              disadvantage is its tendency to absorb water, thus  creating problems in weighing.

       •      Membrane filters are microporous plastic films formed by precipitating a resin.  Pore
              sizes of 0.01-10 /xm can be formed during manufacture.  Membrane filters act as a
              sieve with collection of most particulates on the  surface.  This can be useful for
              visual examination of the sample. This group of filters includes such materials as
              cellulose  ester, polyvinyl chloride, and polytetrafluoroethylene (Table 1).   These
              filters have an extremely low mass and ash content.  Some are completely soluble in
10/93                                       3                       Air Sample Collection

-------
              organic solvents.  This allows participates to be concentrated into a smaller volume
              for analysis.

                   TABLE 1.  FILTER MEDIA FOR AIRBORNE PARTICULATES


                  Filter Medium             Representative Application/Analysis
            Mixed cellulose ester (MCE),   Metals/atomic adsorption; asbestos/phase
            0.8-//m pore                 contrast microscopy
            Glass fiber                   Pesticides/various
            Polyvinyl  chloride (PVC)       Total particulates/gravimetric; hexavalent
                                        chromium/visible spectrophotometry
            Polycarbonate                Fibers
            Polytetrafluoroethylene        Alkaline dusts/acid-base titration

            Source:  NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods,  Third Edition, Volume 1,
            February 1984 and supplements.

Filter sizes range from  13 mm in diameter to 40 by 40 inches.  Small sizes (25 mm and 37 mm
diameter) are generally used for personal samples and the larger sizes are normally used for Hi-Vol
sampling.   Selection  of the size and type of filter depends on the user application  and analysis.
Table 1 gives examples of different filters and their applications.

The common filter holder used for personal samples  is the polystyrene plastic cassette (Figure 1).
It  consists  of two or three stacked sections,  the number depending  on the contaminant and  the
collection method.  The sections of a cassette are molded to fit tightly when stacked  and to tightly
grip the outer edge of the filter.  Each cassette has end plugs to seal the inlet and tubing connector
part once the sample collection is completed.

Other materials than polystyrene can be used.   Metal is used in large samplers with high flow rates.
Carbon-filled polypropylene is used for asbestos sampling because it prevents an accumulation of a
static charge, which would result in the attraction of the asbestos fibers to the cassette walls.
Air Sample Collection                        4                                        10/93

-------
                                                      Ring piece
                                                      Filter paper

                                                      Backup pad
                 FIGURE 1. ASSEMBLY OF A THREE-PIECE FILTER CASSETTE

          Source:  OSHA Technical Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, OSHA, 1990.
Size Selection

Unlike gases and vapors, not all aerosols reach the deeper portions of the respiratory system.  The
nose and bronchioles remove the larger sizes. Environmental or public health samples are usually
classified as total suspended particulates (TSP) or paniculate matter - 10 ^ (PM10).  PM,0 samples
collect particulates  that are 10 /* and smaller.  This represents the fraction of airborne particles that
would be inhaled.  PMi0 samples are used to assess the inhalation route of exposure.  TSP is used
to assess exposure to contaminants that may be deposited downwind and available through ingestion.

Occupational samples are classified as total or respirable.   Total samples are equivalent to TSP.
Respirable  samplers are designed  to collect particles that would reach farther into the respiratory
system. Most occupational exposure limits for particles are based on total  samples.  A few,  silicon
dust, coal dust, and nuisance dust, are based on respirable samples.

The most common  devices used for aerosol size separation are the inertial impactor, the centrifugal
separator, and the cascade impactor.
10/93
Air Sample Collection

-------
             The inertial impactors rely on a sudden change in velocity and direction to separate
             the sizes of particles. Figure 2 illustrates the principle.  The example shows that the
             larger particles (having more inertia) cannot follow the change in air direction and
             impact in the separator.  The smaller particles can make the turns and are collected
             at the filter.

             The centrifugal separator or cyclone is similar to the inertial  impactors.  Cyclones
             commonly are conical or cylindrical in  shape,  with  an opening through  which
             particulate-laden air is drawn along a concentrically curved channel. Larger particles
             impact against the interior walls of the unit due to their inertia and drop into the base
             of the separator. The lighter particles continue on through and are drawn up through
             the separator and collected on a filter.  Cyclones can be very  compact and thus are
             often used for personal sampling.
                                                                Air flow
             Filter
                                        Pump
                    FIGURE 2. ILLUSTRATION OF AN INERTIAL IMPACTOR

              Cascade impactors (Figure  3)  are composed of  a  number  of  stacked perforated
              collection beds or plates, each with openings narrower than the one before it.  The
              cascade impactor separates particulates in an airstream by  directing them toward a
              dry or coated flat surface.   As  the particulate-laden air moves through the plates,
              larger particles are deposited near the top and smaller near the bottom.
Air Sample Collection
10/93

-------
              One major difference between the cascade impactor and other separators is that it can
              be used to collect each separate fraction for analysis. The other separators are used
              to separate the "respirable" fraction for analysis from the "total" mass of particulates.

With all preselectors, the separation efficiency is dependent on flow rate control.  A  specific flow
rate is needed for the device to do proper separation.
                            Air flow
            Collector
                                              Plates
                              Pump
                             FIGURE 3.  CASCADE IMPACTOR
GAS AND VAPOR (VOLATILES) SAMPLERS

Gases and  vapors have different physical properties than aerosols and thus would pass through
untreated filters without being collected.  For gas and vapor collection, a sorbent is needed to
separate the contaminant from the atmosphere or a container is needed to collect a whole air sample.
The sorbents may be solid or liquid and the containers can be glass, plastic, or metal.
10/93
Air Sample Collection

-------
Solid Sorbents

Solid sorbents are a class of media widely used in hazardous materials sampling operations.  Table 2
gives some examples and their applications.  These materials collect by sorption and are often the
media of  choice  for insoluble or nonreactive  gases or vapors.  Their advantages include high
collection  efficiencies,  indefinite shelf lives  while unopened, ease of use and specific analytical
procedures.

                       TABLE 2. COMMONLY USED SOLID SORBENTS
                  Solid Sorbent         Representative Gas or Vapor Adsorbed

              Activated charcoal       Nonpolar organics (NIOSH)
              Tenax®                 Volatile, nonpolar organics (EPA)
              Carbon molecular sieve  Highly volatile, nonpolar organics (EPA)
              Silica gel               Polar organics (NIOSH)

              Sources:  NIOSH  Manual of Analytical Methods,  Third  Edition,
              Volume 1, February  1984 and Supplements; EPA's Compendium of
              Methods for  the Determination  of Toxic  Organic  Compounds in
              Ambient Air, EPA/600/4-89/017, June 1988.

There are several considerations when using solid sorbents. One of the major concerns with the use
of solid sorbents is the potential for "breakthrough."  Breakthrough occurs when the sorptive capacity
of the  media is exceeded.   There is  a limit to the  amount of chemical that  the sorbent can hold.
Most methods limit the volume of air pulled through the sorbent to prevent this problem; hence, the
use of low flow pumps for sorbent tube sampling.   A way to check for breakthrough  is to use a
double section tube (Figure 4) and analyze each section separately.  If a excessive amount of the
total sample—one agency uses 25%—is found in the "back-up"  section, then the sample  is  considered
incomplete.   Breakthrough is affected by humidity, temperature, total amount of chemicals in air,
and the type and amount of sorbent.   The problem of breakthrough can be reduced by reducing the
air sample volume, increasing the amount of sorbent (e.g., use a 750 mg tube instead of a 150 mg
tube) or using tubes in  series.  For example, the NIOSH methods  for vinyl chloride and methylene
chloride use two tubes  in series.

A sorbent may not be able to collect all  of a chemical.  The efficiency will vary with sorbent and
chemical. That is why  there is no universal collection media.  The sampling method usually selects
the sorbent that will get the highest sorption efficiency (the closer to 100% the better).

Storage and  handling  of the sorbent samples can  also  be  a problem.   They cannot be stored
indefinitely.  Analysis usually must be done within 2 weeks. Some  sorbents require special handling.
The EPA method that uses Tenax® tubes for sampling requires the  operator to wear  cotton gloves
so as not to contaminate the media with skin oils.  The method requires storage away from sunlight.
Air Sample Collection                       8                                       10/93

-------
                                                         B
                                    t
   t           t
Dividers
                   A = Solid sorbent
                   B = Solid sorbent (backup or different sorbent)
                     FIGURE 4. TYPICAL 150 MG SOLID SORBENT TUBE

When the samples are analyzed, the chemicals must be desorbed from the media. This can be done
with solvents (e.g., carbon disulfide) or with heat (thermal desorption).   Solvent desorption can
involve hazardous liquids and needs a controlled laboratory environment.  Thermal desorption can
be done with automated equipment and does not need hazardous chemicals. However, the elevated
temperatures may cause a change in some unstable chemicals.

Once the sample is desorbed, it can be analyzed by a variety of detectors.
Liquid Sorbents

Liquid sorbents are used to collect soluble or reactive gases and vapors (Table 3).  Only a relatively
few analytical methods use liquid sorbents.  Further, most of the common liquid absorbers tend to
be contaminant-specific and have limited shelf lives.

The liquid sorbents need a sampler to hold the liquid during sampling.  These samplers ensure that
contaminants in the sampled air are completely absorbed by the liquid sampling medium. There are
several varieties of samplers. Differences in design are due to the efficiency needed for absorption.

       •      Impingers, or simple gas washers (Figure 5a), are a basic liquid holding sampler.
              This device consists of an inlet tube connected to a stopper fitted into a graduated vial
              such that the inlet tube rests slightly above the vial bottom.  A measured volume of
              liquid  is placed  into the  vial, the stopper inlet is put in place, and the unit is then
              connected  to  the pump  by  flexible  tubing.   When the  pump is turned  on,  the
              contaminated air is channeled down through the liquid at a right angle to the bottom
              of the  vial. The air stream then impinges against the vial bottom, mixing the air with
              the liquid and the necessary air-to-liquid contact achieved by agitation.   The
10/93
                   Air Sample Collection

-------
                    TABLE 3.  COMMONLY USED LIQUID ABSORBERS
                   Absorbing Liquid
       Gas/Vapor Absorbed
             0.1 /VNaOH

             0.1 /WHCI

             Aniline

             DNPH reagent and isooctane
Cresol/phenol (EPA); phenol (NIOSH)

Hydrazine (NIOSH)

Phosgene (EPA)

Aldehydes/ketones (EPA)
             Sources:   NIOSH Manual of Analytical  Methods, Third Edition,
             Volume 1, February  1984 and supplements; EPA Compendium of
             Methods for the Determination  of Toxic Organic Compounds in
             Ambient Air, EPA/600/4-89/017, June 1988.

      popularity of impingers rests on such qualities as simple construction, ease of cleaning, the
      small quantity of liquid used (typically less than 25 to 30 milliliters), and a size suitable for
      use as a personal monitor.
                                                        B
                      FIGURE 5. A - IMPINGER; B - FRITTED BUBBLER

Source:  The Industrial Environment - Its Evaluation and Control, NIOSH, 1973.
Air Sample Collection
 10
10/93

-------
       •      Fritted bubblers (Figure 5b) are generally used when a high degree of air-liquid
              mixing is desired.  They are similar in construction to the impinger, but have a mass
              of porous glass, called frits, at the end of the submerged air tube.  The frits break
              the air stream into numerous small bubbles.  The frits are categorized as fine, coarse,
              or extra coarse, depending on the number of openings per unit area.  By producing
              smaller sized bubbles, a greater surface area of the air sample is in contact with the
              liquid medium.

One of the major disadvantages with liquid sorbent sampling is that the samplers are generally made
of glass and, thus, are fragile.  Other disadvantages are the need for low, controlled flow rates to
prevent overflow of liquid; spillage of liquid if the sampler is worn as  a personal sampler; extra
handling and storage of liquids; possible evaporation of liquid sorbent during sampling and thus loss
of sample; and a need for a safety device  (extra  impinger, for example) between sampler and pump
to prevent liquid contamination of the pump.
Passive Dosimeters

Passive dosimeters now available apply to gas and vapor contaminants only. These devices primarily
function as personal exposure monitors, although they have some usefulness in area monitoring.
Passive dosimeters are commonly divided into two groups, primarily on how they are designed and
operated.

       •      Diffusion samplers (Figure 6)  function by the passive movement of contaminant
              molecules through a concentration gradient created within a  stagnant layer of air
              between the contaminated atmosphere and the collection material.

       •      Permeation  dosimeters  rely on natural permeation of a contaminant  through  a
              membrane.  The efficiency of these devices depends on finding a membrane that  is
              easily  permeated by the contaminant of interest and  not by  other contaminants.
              Permeation dosimeters are therefore useful in picking out a single contaminant from
              a mixture of possibly interfering contaminants.

There are liquid and solid sorbents available for passive dosimeters.  However,  solid sorbents are
the most common.
JO/93                                       11                       Air Sample Collection

-------
                  Contaminant
                                                     Sorbent
                  Chemical permeates membrane and/or diffuses into
                  sampler
                     FIGURE 6. DIFFUSION TYPE PASSIVE DOSIMETER

Quantitative  passive dosimeters have become available only since the early  1970s,  though a
semiquantitative passive monitor for carbon monoxide was patented as  early as 1927.   The key
advantage of dosimeters is their simplicity  (Figure 6).  These small, lightweight devices do not
require a mechanical pump to move a contaminant through the  collection media.  Thus, calibration
and maintenance of sampling pumps are not needed.  However, the sampling period must still be
accurately measured.  Like active  systems, these  devices can be affected by temperature and
humidity.  Sources of error unique to passive  dosimeters arise from the need for minimum face
velocities and the determination of contaminant diffusion or permeation coefficients.
Container Sampling

Because of the problems associated with sorbent sampling (breakthrough, sorbent efficiency, etc.),
methods have been used to collect a whole air sample in a container.  Several types of containers
have been used.

Glass bonks have been used because of the relative inertness of glass.  The procedure can be done
several ways.  The glass container can be evacuated to produce a vacuum and then opened in the
sampling area.  While this technique does not use a sampling pump, some way of evacuating the
container is needed. Another method uses a pump to pull air through the container.  When the air
sample has replaced the air in the container, the container is closed. Another device uses a container
Air Sample Collection
12
10/93

-------
filled with water.  When the water is drained, the air sample fills the  space left by the departing
water. This method is undesirable if water vapor is a problem in the analysis.

The  devices have two problems.  The containers are fragile and only give a sample  at ambient
pressure. To get a sample out, a vacuum needs to be pulled on the container or air added to equalize
pressure as a sample is taken out.  As more and more samples are removed, it becomes harder and
harder to get the sample out.  This also requires a pressure correction when  calculating the
contaminant concentration.   If air is added to  equalize pressure, the sample becomes diluted.

Sample collection bags can be constructed of a  number of synthetic materials, including polyethylene,
Saran™, Mylar™, Teflon™.  They are square or rectangular with heat-sealed seams,  hose valve
fittings, inlet valves,  and septums for syringe extraction of samples.   They come in a variety  of
volumes. The selection of a bag should be based on a number of characteristics, including resistance
to adsorption and permeation, tensile strength, performance under temperature extremes, construction
features (seams, eyelets, and fittings), and intended service life.

Bag sampling can be done by connecting the bag inlet valve with flexible tubing to the exhaust outlet
of a  sampling pump.  The bag inlet valve is opened, the pump turned on, and the .sample collected.
Once sampling is  completed, the pump is turned off, the bag valve closed and the bag disconnected.
The bag contents may be analyzed by connecting the bag to a direct-reading instrument; or a portion
of the contents can be taken  from the  bag by  a syringe and injected into a gas chromatograph.

In situations where there is concern about sample contamination due to passing through a pump,  an
alternate sampling apparatus  can be constructed.  This apparatus involves using the pump  to evacuate
a chamber (a desiccator or a scalable box) in  which the sample bag is installed (Figure  7).  As the
pump creates a partial vacuum, the sample bag expands and draws the sample in through a sample
tube.

The major disadvantage of gas sample bags is sample stability.  Chemicals in the sample may sorb
to the bag material  or permeate through the  bag walls.  This would cause a decrease in sample
concentration.  The sample  can also  be affected  by contaminants outside the bag by  permeation
through the bag walls. If a  bag is reused, sorbed chemicals may desorb  into the new sample and
cause contamination.  Because of these problems, bags are seldom reused, and samples are analyzed
as quickly as possible (usually within  24 hours).

Chemicals in  the bag can degrade with exposure to sunlight.  The bags  should be stored in a
container (e.g., a cooler or garbage bag) to prevent exposure to sunlight.

Recently, metal canisters have gained popularity.  Until  recently, there have been problems with
reactions occurring with the  metal on  the insides of the container.  New polishing techniques have
greatly reduced the problem.  Metal  canisters  are used  similarly to glass  containers.   They are
evacuated to produce a vacuum.  Unlike glass  containers, metal canisters can be filled several ways.
The valve can be opened to get a instantaneous, or  grab, sample.  The canister can also be connected
to a controlled flow orifice so that the sample fills the canister at a fixed rate.  This gives a long term
sample.

A pump can also be used to pressurize the canister so that  a sample volume greater than the canister
size is obtained. This latter  capability is not available for glass containers or gas bags.


JO/93                                      13                      Air Sample Collection

-------
                                                         Sample flow
                                                      Air flow
           Source: "Sampling and Analysis of Emissions from Stationary Sources," Schuetzle et
           al., Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association, Volume 25, No. 9, Sept. 1975.
                FIGURE 7. NEGATIVE PRESSURE BAG SAMPLING APPARATUS

Metal canisters are more durable than glass containers.  They have better sample stability than gas
bags.  There are special cleaning procedures that allow the canister to be reused.

Metal canisters have a problem with recovery of polar compounds (e.g., alcohols).

Syringes can also be used to take a sample. Although  1-liter syringes are available, most are rather
small  and there may be a problem with having an adequate amount of sample.

Container sampling allows whole atmosphere sampling.  This type  of sampler eliminates  the
problems associated with sorbent media. It also allows the use of more than one analytical method
per sample.  Glass containers are fairly inert but are fragile.  They also are limited in size. Gas bags
are more durable and have a variety of sizes, but have sample stability problems.  Metal canisters
are durable, have good sample stability and can get a  larger sample than their actual size (but only
if special equipment is used).  There are systems for taking personal  samples with a gas bag.  Gas
bags and metal canisters can also obtain long term samples with  controlled flow pumps.

SEMIVOLATILE  SAMPLERS

Some chemicals, because of their physical properties,  may be present in both solid and vapor form.
There are also chemicals that are not very volatile, but will vaporize  gradually if air is passed over
them. This could happen is the chemical was captured on a filter. Because of these situations, some
methods use more  than one type of media.  Usually a filter (for the  aerosol phase) is followed by
a sorbent (for the vapor phase).  Table 4 gives examples of chemicals that are in this category and
the methods used to collect them.
Air Sample Collection
14
10/93

-------
Because two separate media are used, both will probably be analyzed by different methods. It will
also take more time and be more expensive for the analysis.

                       TABLE 4.  COMMON MULTIMEDIA SAMPLERS


                         Media Used                  Chemical Being Sampled

            Q.8-jjm MCE filter + 0.1 N KOH           Cyanides (NIOSH)

            13-mm glass fiber filter and Florisil         Polychlorinated biphenyls
                                                   (PCBs) (NIOSH)

            Quartz filter and polyurethane foam (PUF)   PCBs/pesticides (EPA)
                                                   Polycyclic aromatic
                                                   hydrocarbons - PAHs (EPA)

            Quartz filter + XAD-2	PAHs (EPA)	

            Sources:  NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, Third Edition, Volume
            1, February 1984 and supplements; EPA Compendium of Methods for the
            Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air, EPA/600/4-
            89/017, June 1988.
SAMPLING PUMPS


Pump Characteristics

Air sample collection systems, with the exception of evacuated canisters and passive dosimeters, rely
on electrically powered pumps to mechanically induce air movement.  The power source may be
batteries or an AC source. Battery-powered pumps can operate for 6-10 hours. AC-powered pumps
can operate longer, but are not usable  as personal samplers.

Generally, sampling pumps incorporate several of the following features:

       •     A diaphragm or a piston-type pumping mechanism

       •     A flow  regulator to control the sampling flow rate

       •     A rotameter or stroke counter to indicate flow rate or sample volume

       •     A pulsation dampener to maintain a set flow rate

       •     A programmable timer  to start the pump at a set time and/or to stop the pump after
             a set sampling period

       •     An inherent safety approval for gas/vapor and dust atmospheres
10/93                                      15                     Air Sample Collection

-------
       Other than differences in features mentioned above, the main difference in pumps is their
       flow rate.  Low flow pumps have a flow rate range from  10 cubic centimeters per minute
       (cc/min) to about 750 cc/min. Medium flow pumps have a flow rate of about 1-6 liters per
       minute (1pm). High volume (Hi-Vol) pumps are AC powered and can achieve up to 40 cubic
       feet per minute (cfm). That is equivalent to 1130 1pm.

       The choice of flow rate depends on the type of sampling done.   Sorbent media, like carbon
       tubes, cannot be used with a high flow rate. The capacity of the sorbent would be exceeded
       and there would be a loss of sample (breakthrough).  Also, the Hi-Vol pumps are not used
       as personal  samplers.  Some pumps have the ability to  do  both low and medium flow
       sampling, but not Hi-Vol.

Calibration

All pumps must be calibrated.  The flow rate must be known so that a sample concentration can be
calculated.  Calibration is also necessary to ensure the constant flow rate needed for some methods.
The flow rate stability of a pump should be accurate to within ±5% of its set flow rate.

An active sampling  system must be calibrated  prior to and after sampling.  The overall frequency
of calibration depends upon the general handling and use a system received and the quality control
considerations of the user.  Pump mechanisms must be recalibrated after  they have been repaired,
when newly purchased, and following any suspected abuse. The sampling system as a whole must
be calibrated to the  desired flow rate rather than the pump alone.   The sampling  system  should be
calibrated prior to  and after each use.  The  system can be adequately examined under field-like
conditions only with all components connected.

There are several devices for calibrating sampling pumps:

       •      The  soap  bubble  meter  represents a basic method of calibration  and is a primary
              standard.  This device typically consists of an  inverted  graduated burette connected
              by flexible tubing to the sampling train.  Figure 8  shows one example.

              Do the calibration as follows:

                     Start the system's pump to create airflow into the burette

                     Dip the open end of the burette  into  a soap solution to create a  soap film
                     bubble across the opening

                     Remove the solution and allow the bubble to rise up through the burette

                     Measure the travel time of the bubble  between  two graduated points on  the
                     burette; vary the flow rate by adjusting the pump flow regulator.

The general formula used for the calculation of the flow  rate  is:

                   ,,,           volumetric distance traveled by bubble (roQ
                   Flow rate  -	-—-
                                       travel time of bubble (sec)
Air Sample Collection                      \6                                       10/93

-------
   Inverted
    buret
                    250
                                                         Filter
                                                        cassette
                              Soap  bubble trap
                                                                      Pump
     Beaker
                              Soap solution
                  FIGURE 8. CALIBRATION SETUP FOR FILTER SAMPLER
                             USING A SOAP BUBBLE METER

Source:  OSHA Technical Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, OSHA, 1990.

If the desired flow rate is 1pm, then the units need to be converted  by multiplying the previous
equation by the following:
                                  60 secondslminute
                                      1000 mill

      •      There are electronic bubble meters that use sensors to detect the soap bubble and start
             and stop an electronic timer.   The calibrator then  automatically calculates  and
             displays the pump flow rate.
10/93
17
Air Sample Collection

-------
             The precision rotameter consists of a vertically mounted tapered tube with a float
             inside the tube. When attached to an operating pump, the float rises until the rate of
             flow is sufficient to hold the float stationary.  The flow rate is read from markings
             on the  tube at the  point the float  is stationary.  Figure 9 illustrates a precision
             rotameter.








«- »











•



1

	 3500
=_. 3000
~ 2500
I_ 2000
Z_ 1500
E_ 1000
5_ 500
cc/min
	 | i" !• p rump






I -4— Air Flow

                     FIGURE 9. EXAMPLE OF A PRECISION ROTAMETER
Whereas the precision rotameter usually is more compact and portable than the soap bubbler meter,
it is considered a secondary standard. This means that the rotameter must be checked occasionally
with a primary standard such as a bubble meter.

       •      A manometer is  sometimes used to calibrate Hi-Vol samplers because of the high
              flow rates.  A manometer is  a tube filled with  a liquid.  The level of the liquid
              changes due to pressure changes at the end attached to the sampling pump.  A
              calibration chart is used to  convert the change in liquid level to flow rate.
CONCLUSION

When taking air samples for laboratory analysis, several factors need to be considered. Sampling
and analytical methods have been developed for many chemicals by several agencies that have looked
at these considerations. The References section provides a list of references on air monitoring and
sampling.
Air Sample Collection
18
10/93

-------
      APPENDIX A
Air Sampling Methods Database

-------
                                United States
                                Environmental Protection
                                Agency
Office of
Solid Waste and
Emergency Response
January 1993
                                Air Sampling Methods
                                Database
      Offioa of Emergency and Remedial Response
      Emergency Response Division
                       Technical Bulletin
                       Volume 1, Number 1
What is the Air Sampling Methods

Database?
The Air Sampling Methods Database is a PC-based
software package which allows its users to access sum-
marized standard  methods for chemical analysis. The
program, which was designed to be used in conjunction
with the Representative Air Sampling Guidance for the
Removal Program document, formulate sampling plans
to give the best possible site characterization. This al-
lows users to make quick determinations about which
methods are most appropriate to use and which best
suit their  informational needs in order to plan a sam-
pling event that most aptly depicts the objectives of a
particular site investigation.

The user can search the software by method name and
number, chemical name, or Chemical Abstracts Num-
ber (CAS # ). The method summary can be viewed and
the method marked for printing. Furthermore, the soft-
ware can be tailored to its users since they have the ca-
pacity to input their own user-developed methods into
the database without affecting the  established  stand-
ardized methods.  Users can submit supporting docu-
mentation  for  their  methods  to  the United  States
Environmental Protection Agency's Environmental Re-
sponse Team (U.S. EPA/ERT) for possible permanent
inclusion to the database.

Who Are the Anticipated Users?
On-Scene Coordinators (OSC), Technical  Assistance
Team  (TAT) members, Emergency Response Contrac-
tors (ERCs), site Health and Safety air personnel, and
U.S. EPA air plan reviewers are the primary users of
the Air Sampling Methods Database. By using the pro-
gram,  these individuals gain access to the sampling ob-
jectives which best characterize a site. Then, users can
assimilate this information  into  an  acceptable  repre-
sentative sampling program. The Air Sampling Methods
Database also can aid any  U.S. EPA personnel  or
agency that performs air monitoring at hazardous waste
sites.

Why Was the Air Sampling

Methods Database Designed?
The Air Sampling Methods Database was created to ex-
pand the knowledge base during remedial emergency
response actions. It gives insight to two major criteria
for preparation of a representative air sampling plan:
selecting the appropriate air sampling  approach and
choosing the proper equipment to collect and analyze a
sample. Timely decisions regarding health and  safety
and acute health risks can be made by utilizing these
summarized methodologies:
•   National Institute  of Occupational  Safety and
    Health (NIOSH) 2nd and 3rd Edition Methods.
•   Occupational Safety and Health  Administration
    (OSHA) Methods.
•   Selected American Society of Testing  and Materi-
    als (ASTM) Methods. Volume 11.03 Atmospheric
    Analysis;  Occupational Health and Safety.
•   EPA Toxic Organic Compounds Methods.
•   Contract Laboratory Program - Statement of Work
    Methods.
•   Indoor Air Compendium Methods.
•   Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Methods.
This facilitates a greater variety of options for the users,
who then can select the appropriate air sampling objec-
tives and plans that best suit the needs  of a particular
assignment.

-------
Features of the Air Sampling
Methods Database
•  Is user friendly.
•  Requires no other software for support (self-con-
   tained).
•  Adds, deletes, and edits methods added by a user.
•  Traces information by on-line references.
•  Provides single point of update.
•  Gives semi-annually updates.
•  Allows access to update information available via
   Environmental Response Center (ERC),  Office of
   Solid Waste and Emergency Response (OSWER),
   U.S. EPA/ERT, and Dataport  bulletin boards by
   modem.
•  Generates hard copy.
Future Features:
•  Hot-Key on-line help.
•  Hot-Key on-line glossary of terms.
•   50-100 word text summaries  discussing sampling
    trains, flow rates, interferences,  detection limits,
    analysis information, etc.
•   Synonym searching of chemical names.

Requirements
To run the Air Sampling Database, you must have the
following:
•   An IBM PC or IBM-compatible computer
•   A hard drive
•   640K RAM
•   A printer (for hard copy output)


 Formore information about the Air Sampling Database,
                    contact:
     Mr. Thomas Pritchett, Phone: (908) 321-6738
         U.S. Environmental Response Team
              2890WoodbridgeAve
               Building 18, MS-J01
           Edison, New Jersey 08837-3679
                                                                                                       4

-------
   INTRODUCTION TO GAS
     CHROMATOGRAPHY
PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES


At the end of this lesson, participants will be able to:

•   List the components of a gas chromatograph

•   Define retention time

•   List the factors that affect retention time

•   Name  the  two types  of columns  and describe their
    differences.

-------
                                        NOTES
  INTRODUCTION TO GAS
    CHROMATOGRAPHY
   GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
 	Definition	


    A technique for separating
    volatile substances in a mixture
    by percolating a gas stream
    over a stationary phase


  Source: Basic Gas Chromatography
   SEPARATION OF A MIXTURE
   BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
                B
                      tol
          Camponmt A
                   Cwnpon.ntB
4194
Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
      NOTES
                                     RETENTION TIME
                                         Definition
                                   Retention time is the time
                                   from sample injection to peak
                                   maxima (signal maxima)

                                   Infection
                                    RETENTION TIME
                                        Application
                               Used for qualitative identification of
                               chemicals by comparing the retention
                               time of an unknown chemical with
                               retention times of known (standard)
                               chemicals
                                    RETENTION TIME
                                    Peak Comparisons
                               Injection
                                                        Standard
                                                        Unknown
                                              s
                                             Tim*
Introduction to Gas Chromatography
4/94

-------
                                                      NOTES
FACTORS AFFECTING
RETENTION TIME
• Column
- Type
- Temperature
- Length
• Carrier gas flow rate

EFFECT OF COLUMN TYPE
AND TEMPERATURE
Chemical

Temperature Retention Time
CO (min.)
G-8 Column T-8 Column
Benzene 0 1:19 1:43
40 0:25 0:32
Carbon tetrachloride 0 1:24 0:37
40 0:25 0:17
Source The Foxboro Company Chromatographic Column Guide lor the
Century OVA, 1966

PEAK RESOLUTION
Problems
A
I
Overlapping peaks
ri
\ fv\
V\A
4/94
Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
      NOTES
                                         PEAK AREA
                                         Application
                                    Peak area is used to quantify chemical
                                   'Sampl«N

                                  Concentration Sample

                                  Concentration Standard
Area Standard
                                   GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
                                         Components
                                     Flow
                                     control
                                         Inaction port
                                       V    I     Column
      Output
                                        CARRIER GAS
                                        Characteristics
                                  •  Suitable for detector

                                  •  High purity

                                  •  Does not interfere with sample
Introduction to Gas Chromatography
           4/94

-------
                                                  NOTES
     GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
             Columns
     Packed
           Liqud stationary phase

           coated on solid stationary

           support
Capillary
             Liquid stationary phase
             coated on wall
    COLUMN TEMPERATURE


  • Ambient
    - Variable

  • Isothermal
    - Constant temperature

  • Temperature programming
    - Temperature increases over time
       DETECTORS USED IN
          PORTABLE GCs
    Common detectors
    - Flame ionization detector (FID)
    - Photoionization detector (PID)

    Specialized detectors
    - Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)
    - Argon ionization detector (AID)
    - Electron capture detector (BCD)
4/94
                Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
      NOTES
                                SPECIALIZED DETECTORS
                                    Why Are They Used?
                                One detector may be more sensitive
                                than another for certain compounds.
                                e.g. The ECD is best detector for
                                halogenated compounds.
                                  MASS SPECTROMETER
                               Chemical exposed to electrons
                               Molecule or fragments are ionized
                               Ions separated by magnetic field
                               Separation based on speed and
                               mass-to-charge ratio
                               Only detector capable of providing
                               additional compound identification beyond
                               retention time
                                     MASS SPECTRUM
                                          Benzene
                                   1001
                                    50-
                               Relative
                              abundance
78
I
                                                  «0  M> 100 110 120
                                            Mass-to-charge ratio
Introduction to Gas Chromatography
            4/94

-------
                                                 NOTES
        MASS SPECTRUM
             Toluene
       1001
       50-
  Relative
 abundance
3,  a,  —
 I «s .   . I
 ll I I   I 70 77 Mi
lllLlll Jll  .Illll .... ul
           40  SO 80 70  BO BO 100  110 120
               Mass-to-charge ratio
    GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
        Field Applications

           • Air analysis
           • Field screening
           • Soil gas
            SUMMARY
     Gas chromatography is used to
     identify and quantity chemicals
     Qualified operators are needed
     Right tool for the job?
4/94
                            Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
              INTRODUCTION TO GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
INTRODUCTION

Gas chromatography is a separation technique wherein components of a sample are separated by
differential distribution between a gaseous mobile phase  (carrier gas)  and a solid (gas solid
chromatography) or liquid  (gas liquid chromatography) stationary phase held in a column.  The
sample is injected into the carrier gas as a sharp plug and individual components are detected as they
come  out ("elute") of the  column  at characteristic "retention times"  after injection.   Figure 1
illustrates this concept with a two component mixture.
                    A + B
           Gas
           Flow
Column
                                                              Component A
                                                               in Detector
                            Component A
         Component B
                FIGURE 1. SEPARATION OF A TWO COMPONENT MIXTURE
                              BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY

As different components elute from the column, they pass through a detector which generates a
response (or "peak") based upon the amount of each compound present and upon the sensitivity of
the detector.  The signal vs. time plot is called the "chromatogram."
10/93
     Introducrion to Gas Chromatography

-------
QUALITATIVE ANALYSIS

If the temperature of the column and the flow rate of the carrier gas are constant, compounds will
elute from the column at a characteristic time (retention time). The retention is characteristic of the
compound and the type of column used. Retention time is the time from injection of the sample to
peak response of the detector to the eluted compound (Figure 2).
                            Retention time
            Injection
                                                          8    9
                                                                   Time
               FIGURE 2. CHROMATOGRAM ILLUSTRATING RETENTION TIME

Qualitative analysis can be done by comparing the retention times of the compounds in an unknown
sample with the retention  times  of known compounds in  a standard analyzed under identical
conditions. Figure 3 shows a comparison of a sample with a standard.
Retention Time

Retention times are governed by several factors:

       1.      The type of column used.  Different packings and liquid coatings change retention
              time.

       2.      The column temperature.  As the column temperature increases, the retention time
              decreases.  This is why temperature controls are used to keep the column temperature
              constant.
Introduction to Gas Chromatography
10/93

-------
     3.    The column length.  Double the column length and double the retention time.

     4.    The carrier gas flowrate. Double the flowrate and halve the retention time.
 Injection
              Standard
                                                               Unknown
                                  Time
            FIGURE 3.  EXAMPLE OF A GC CHROMATOGRAM AND THE USE OF
                    RETENTION TIMES TO IDENTIFY COMPOUNDS
Resolution

Resolution, or relative peak width, governs the number of discrete, detectable components of a
sample that can be identified and quantified during the GC run.  Resolution is governed by:
10/93
Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
       1.     The type of column. Capillary columns have much greater resolution (narrower peak
             widths) than a packed column.

       2.     Column length. The longer the column, the narrower the peak weak width at a given
             retention time.   However, with  ambient temperature GCs,  increasing the column
             length will increase the retention times.

       3.     The carrier gas flowrate.   There exists an optimum value for peak resolution.
             Increasing  or decreasing the flowrate from this optimum will widen the peaks.

A problem with poor resolution is co-eluting and overlapping. If two chemicals elute at the same
time—co-elute—identification is  hindered.   If  peaks overlap, quantitation  of  the compounds is
difficult.  Figure 4 illustrates overlapping peaks.
                                    Overlapping  peaks
                     FIGURE 4. EXAMPLES OF OVERLAPPING PEAKS
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS
Signal Output

The size of the chromatogram peak for a specific compound is proportional to the amount of
chemical in the detector.  Quantitative analysis is done by comparing the peak size of the sample
compound with the peak size of a known amount of the compound (the standard). The peak size can
be quantified in several ways.
Introduction to Gas Chromatography
10/93

-------
Planimetering

Planimetering uses a planimeter  to  trace the peak.   A planimeter is a mechanical  device that
measures area by tracing the perimeter of the peak. The area is presented digitally on a dial.  This
method is considered tedious, time-consuming, and less precise than other methods.
Peak Height

Peak height compares the height of the sample compound with the height of the standard.  This is
a quick and simple method for quantitation.  However, peak heights and widths are dependent on
sample size and sample feed rate.
Height  x Width at Half-Height

The height x width at half-height uses the height of the peak times the width of the peak at the half-
height of the peak.  The normal peak base is not used because large deviations may be caused by
peak tailing.
Triangulation

Triangulation (Figure 5) transforms the peak into a triangle using the sides of the peak to form the
triangle and the baseline to form the base of the triangle.  The area of the peak is calculated using
Area = 1/2 Base x Height.
Integrators

Peak height,  height  x  width at half-height,  and  triangulation are  done manually  using the
chromatogram and a pencil and straight edge. Integrators calculate the peak size electronically and
record the output.  Because of ease of operation, integrators are most frequently used in portable
GCs.

When a microprocessor is used, the retention times of the compounds  in the sample are compared
to the compounds  in the standard  and the readout  identifies the compounds  in  the sample.
Quantitative analysis is done by an integrator.  If a compound has been identified, the peak size in
the sample is compared to the peak size of the compound in the standard and a sample concentration
is given.  Thus, the sample is evaluated both qualitatively and quantitatively.
10/93                                        5           Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
                                                  *\
                            Area = 1/2 x base x height
                            Area = 1/2 b h
                 FIGURE 5. MEASUREMENT OF AREA BY TRIANGULATION

Source:   An Introduction to Gas Chromatography, National  Training Center, Water Program
Operations, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH.
COMPONENTS OF A GAS CHROMATOGRAPH

A gas chromatograph (GC) consists of (Figure 6):

       •     A carrier gas
       •     A flow control for the carrier gas
       •     A sample inlet or injector
       •     A column
       •     A temperature control for the column
       •     A detector
       •     A recorder.


Carrier Gas

A high pressure gas cylinder serves as the source of the carrier gas.  The carrier gas should be:

       1.     Inert to avoid interaction with the sample or solvent
       2.     Able to provide a minimum of gaseous diffusion
       3.     Readily available and of high purity
       4.     Inexpensive
       5.     Suitable for the detector used.

Commonly used gases are  helium, nitrogen, and hydrogen.



Introduction to Gas Chromatography          5                                     10/93

-------
               Flow
             control
                         Injection port
                               I
                  Output
                                                  Detector
               Carrier gas
                  FIGURE 6. COMPONENTS OF A GAS CHROMATOGRAPH

Source:   The Industrial Environment - Its Evaluation &  Control, 1973,  National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health.

Portable gas chromatographs  (GCs) have internal cylinders  that usually have an 8- to 10-hour gas
supply.  Many of these  also have connections for external cylinders  to provide longer duration
analysis.
Flow Control

Because compounds elute at a characteristic time (retention time) based on a given temperature and
a constant flow rate, carrier gas flow control and column temperature  are important.  A flow
controller is necessary to maintain a constant flow rate.
Sample  Injection System

Samples are introduced into the column as a single sharp plug.  The sample injection system allows
introduction of the sample rapidly and in a reproducible manner. Samples can be manually injected
by a syringe.  Syringe injection allows the operator to control the sample volume.  Some GCs have
a built-in sample loop that injects a known and consistent volume by manual operation or automatic
10/93
Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
programming.  Sample volume is important in that the quantitative evaluation of a chromatogram is
affected by the sample volume.  Also, some columns are limited by the size of sample that can be
injected onto them.
Column

The column is a tube made of stainless steel, glass, aluminum, or Teflon®.  Packed columns contain
a solid adsorbent (gas-solid chromatography) or an inert solid support coated with liquid stationary
phase (gas-liquid chromatography).  Capillary columns consist of a liquid stationary phase coated to
the inside wall of a thin tube.  Gas-liquid chromatography columns and capillary columns are the
more  common types for the portable GCs.

Tube  sizes range from 0.5- to 6-mm outside diameter and from 20 cm to 50 m in length. Capillary
columns are usually longer than packed columns. Portable GC columns are typically 4 m in length.
Columns can  be coiled to fit  inside portable units.

Capillary  columns give  better  resolution  than packed columns.  However, they require  smaller
injection  volumes than packed columns and thus need sample inlets  and detectors that  can handle
small  volumes.


Temperature Control

Column temperature affects the retention time of a chemical. A constant temperature is desired to
ensure comparison of sample and standards.  Temperature control can be:

       •      Ambient temperature control—The column temperature is the same as ambient air.
              As ambient temperature changes, the retention times change. Consequently, frequent
              calibration  checks are  needed.    Ambient  temperature  limits  use  to  volatile
              compounds.  The time to run  a sample  is longer and thus limits the  number of
              samples that can be run per day.

       •      Isothermal temperature control—The column temperature is maintained  at constant
              temperature by an oven. Retention times are much more stable.  Temperatures can
              be adjusted to reduce analysis time or expand the range of compounds that can be
              analyzed.   Retention times are halved for every 30'C increase in temperature.
              Isothermal temperature  control consumes more electricity than ambient.

       •      Temperature programming—Column temperature is  slowly increased under very
              controlled conditions.  This allows simultaneous analysis of compounds with a wide
              range of boiling points.  A lower temperature is used for the volatile components.
              The temperature is raised to elute the less volatile compounds. More electrical power
              is needed for  this operation.

Temperature control can also be used on the injector and the detector.  Heating the injector prevents
condensation  of the sample (if a vapor) or can ensure vaporization of a liquid sample. The detector
may need to be heated to prevent chemical condensation.


Introduction to Gas Chromatography           g                                       10/93

-------
Detector

There are a  variety of  detectors available  for  GCs.   Flame  ionization detectors  (FID) and
photoionization detectors (PID) are frequently  used.  Characteristics of these two detectors are
discussed in the Total Vapor Survey Instruments section.   Other detectors include:

       •       Thermal conductivity detector (TCD)—This detector is based on the principle that a
              hot  object will lose heat  at a rate that  is  dependent on the composition of the
               surrounding  gas.  When a compound enters the detector, there is a change in the
              thermal conductivity of the carrier gas.  Its advantage is that it is a universal detector
              for noninert gases and all organics.  Its drawback is limited sensitivity—ppm levels.
              Preconcentration of samples has been used to offset this limitation.

       •      Electron capture detector (ECD)-A radioactive  source is used to  ionize the carrier
              gas.  Secondary electrons are produced and an electrical  current flows between the
              electrodes in the detector.  When  a separated compound which has an affinity for the
               slow electrons enters the detector, electrons are captured with a resultant decrease in
              electrical current  in the detector.   This  decrease  of current  is a function of the
               concentration of the electron capturing compound.

               The detector is especially  selective  for polyhalogenated (e.g., pesticides) and nitro
               compounds.  It has a high sensitivity—mid ppb to  high ppt.   Sensitivity is a direct
               function of halogen atoms  per molecule.

               Its main limitation is that a radioactive source (tritium or nickel-63) is needed, which
               requires a Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC)  license.

       •      Argon  ionization  detector (AID)—Argon ionization  detector depends upon two
               reactions:  the excitation of argon to its metastable state by  electron bombardment and
               the  ionization  of vapor  molecules  by the transfer of energy  from the metastable
               atoms.  When an ionization chamber contains argon and a source of free electrons,
               the addition of vapor causes an increase in current flow.  The current flow change
               is detected and used as the signal for the presence of the compound in the  sample.

               Ionization is caused by a radioactive source.  As with the ECD, an NRC license is
               required for  use of the radioactive source.

               The reaction of the metastable argon atoms with the vapor molecules applies to all
               molecules with an ionization potential equal to, or less than, the stored energy of the
               metastable atoms, which is 11.7  eV.

       •       Mass Spectrometer (MS)—In  an  MS, the  chemical is first exposed to  a source of
               electrons.  The molecules  or fragments are ionized.  The ions are passed through a
               magnetic field. The magnetic field separates the ions based on their speed and mass-
               to-charge ratio. The ions are collected and a mass spectrum is produced showing the
               relative  abundance  of each  type of ion.   Each chemical has a  distinctive mass
               spectrum.  Thus, this detector is the only one listed here that  is capable of providing
               additional  compound identification beyond retention time.


10/93                                        9           Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
Recording Devices

A device is needed to record when a signal is produced in the detector and to record the strength of
that signal.  A plot  of signal vs. time is called a chromatogram.  The chromatogram is used for
qualitative and quantitative analysis of the sample.  Integrators and microprocessors can be used to
electronically evaluate the chromatogram.
Power Supply

A power supply is needed to operate the detector, recorder, oven, and additional electronics of the
gas chromatograph.  To make them portable, field portable GCs usually have a built-in rechargeable
battery supply.  If only using the battery, time of operation is limited to 8-10 hours.  These units
are also designed to operate off AC power sources.  A few field GCs only operate on AC power.
APPLICATIONS

Portable gas chromatographs allow analysis in the field.  Although the results may not be as accurate
and precise as a laboratory GC analysis, they can be used for screening purposes.  This can reduce
the number of samples  that need to be handled  by a more sophisticated (and more expensive)
analysis.

Ambient Air Analysis

Portable GCs can analyze ambient air samples through  several methods.  Some units can be taken
to the area where the sampling is required and an analysis can be performed on the spot.  Some units
can be programmed to do periodic sampling and store the chromatograms for later retrieval. Newer
units can do continual total vapor monitoring and run a  sample if the total vapor reading exceeds a
designated level. The GC can also be set up in a more stable environment, and grab samples  (e.g.,
a Tedlar bag of ambient air) can be brought to the GC for analysis.
Sample Screening

Soil  and water  samples can be  screened  for  further analysis by  doing headspace  sampling.
Headspace  sampling involves drawing a sample from  above the surface of a  liquid or soil in  a
container. The sample is usually drawn with a small syringe which is also used to inject the sample
into the GC.
Soil Gas

Gas chromatography can be used to screen soil gas samples. Dissolved volatile organic compounds
have a tendency to partition  into the atmosphere between the soil particles.  By sampling this
atmosphere, underground contamination can be tracked.
Introduction to Gas Chromatography          \Q                                      10/93

-------
EXAMPLES OF PORTABLE GAS CHROMATOGRAPHS
The Foxboro Company

The Foxboro Century organic vapor analyzer (OVA) is the instrument described in the Total Vapor
Survey Instruments section. The OVA-128GC is equipped with a column.  The detector used is an
FID.  The column is at ambient temperature unless an optional temperature  pack is used.  The
portable isothermal pack allows column temperatures of O'C, 40'C and 100'C.   The unit can be
purchased with an external recorder/plotter.  The company does not supply an integrator, but there
are models from other suppliers that can be  used.
Photovac International, Inc.

The  Photovac  series  of GCs use photoionization  detection.  The temperature of the column is
controlled by an oven. The currently available models (10S50, 10S70, 10S Plus, Snapshot) have a
built-in microprocessor that aids in calibration and handles compound identification and quantitation.
These units can be programmed for automatic sampling.  The 10S Plus can be programmed to do
total vapor monitoring and to  do  an  analysis if an action level  is reached.   Options include  a
telephone connection  for transferring data from the instrument to a computer and for notifying the
user of unusual results during remote monitoring.
Sentex Sensing Technology, Inc.

The Sentex Scentograph is capable of using an AID or an BCD.  One of the most notable features
of the Scentograph is that a lap-top  computer is used for handling the data.  This gives a more
graphic visual display of the chromatogram and makes operator use easier because of the normal size
keyboard. The GC can do automatic functions.  It has a temperature controlled column. There is
the capability of concentrating the sample before injection.  The air sample is pulled through and
collected on a sorbent. The sample is then desorbed and injected using a smaller volume than was
pulled through the sorbent. A primary consideration with the  Scentograph is that, if an AID or an
BCD is used, a radioactive source is needed and thus an NRC license is required.  A PID and TCD
are also available.

The Sentex Scentoscreen is similar to the Scentograph except it uses a PID and can also do total
hydrocarbon analysis.  It can be switched to an AID/ECD, but  can not do total hydrocarbon readout
with those detectors.
HNU Systems, Inc.

The HNU Systems' Model 311  is available with a PID or an ECD for its dete.ctor.  The unit has a
microprocessor for data handling.  The instrument does  not have a battery supply and thus, needs
a line power or a portable generator.
10/93                                      11          Introduction to Gas Chromatography

-------
Microsensor Technology, Inc.

Microsensor Technology's M200 Microsensor Gas Analyzer uses a TCD. Although this is a more
universal detector, it suffers from poor sensitivity. A preconcentrator has been developed and used
to reduce this limitation.  The  more notable characteristic of the M200 is  that it sends a sample
through two columns at the same time.  This gives a better chance of correctly  identifying the
compounds present.
Thermo Environmental Instruments

Thermo Environmental Instruments manufactures the Model 511 Portable Gas Chromatograph. The
main features of this GC is the variety of available detectors (FID, PID, ECD, TCD) and their easy
changeability.   The  unit  does not  have  a built-in  data handler,  so an  external integrator  or
microprocessor is needed.
SUMMARY

Gas chromatography is a separation technique that can be used for identification of the components
of a mixture. Portable GCs can be used in the field for a variety of applications.  This process of
identification can be affected by many factors that must be considered to ensure quality of data.
Because the  equipment  is more complicated to operate  than  most direct-reading  instruments,
operators require more training and experience.
Introduction to Gas Chromatography           \i                                       10/93

-------
DISPERSION MODELING
      DURING
EMERGENCY RESPONSE

-------
        Dispersion  Modeling During Emergency Response
     Objectives:  .  \_\s^ fjve major atmospheric dispersion considerations
                   •  Describe the concept of stability as it applies to air
                     modeling
                     Given a set of environmental conditions, choose the
                     relevant stability class
        Dispersion Modeling  During  Emergency  Response
     Objectives:  •  Describe the concept of Gaussian plume distribution

                   •  Define near-field meandering and its effects to onsite
                     receptors

                   •  Given an air dispersion model, list the data inputs needed
                     to run the model for an emergency response

                   •  Given an emergency response scenario, list the elements
                     of the modeling plan
Notes:
                                                                        AMFHM
                                                                         10/93
                                                                         P*0< 2

-------
Collect site data
^
r
Collect source data


Collect contamination data


Collect meteorological data
^
r
Choose appropriate accidental release model
i
r
Input collected data to model and run model
i
T
Compare output to air action limits
i
>XDo the
<^ require «
\. proce
^
r
results ^^ M0 ,

?vcicuci uo n ? r iNt) ctoiioii ne6u6u
dures /"
Yes
r
Evacuate affected onsite/offsite populations as necessary
Figure ~\.  Dispersion modeling during emergency removal.
                                                                         AMFHM
                                                                           10/93
                                                                          P»fle 3

-------
Dispersion Model Classes
Physical Models
Small-scale, laboratory
representations of the overall
process (e.g., wind tunnel, water
tank)

Mathematical Models
A set of analytical or mathematical
algorithms that describe the
physical and chemical aspects of
the problem (e.g., ALOHA, ISC,
and PAL)
Dispersion Model Classes
Mathematical models are primarily used because physical models (especially in an emergency response)
are much less practical for most Superfimd applications.

Mathematical models can be:

•      Deterministic models, based on fundamental mathematical descriptions of atmosphere processes,
       in which effects (i.e., air pollution) are generated by causes (i.e., emissions).

•      Statistical models, based on semi-empirical statistical relationships among available data and
       measurements.
                                                                                           AMFHM
                                                                                            10/93
                                                                                            page 4

-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                              page 6

-------
                          Diffusion Model Footprint
               750
              250
        w

               750
                 500
500
                                         Yards
1000
1500
    Reproduced with permission from The National Safety Council
Diffusion Model
An example of a deterministic model is a diffusion model from which the output (the concentration field
or footprint) is computed from mathematical manipulations of specified  inputs (emission rates and
atmospheric parameters).

A statistical model is given by the forecast, in a certain region, of the concentration levels in the next
few hours as a statistical function of:

1.     The current available measurements
2.     The past correlation between these measurements and the concentration trends.
                                                                                     AMFHM
                                                                                      10/93
                                                                                      page 6

-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                              page 7

-------
                       Source-Receptor  Relationship
                               Wind Direction
 Receptor Location
Transport Medium
    (Air)
                                                                            Release
                                                                            Mechanism
                                                                            (Volatilization)
                                                                             Waste Pile
                                                                             (Source)
Source-Receptor Relationship
The source-receptor relationship is the goal of studies aimed either at improving ambient air quality
(usually the Superfund site goal) or preserving the existing concentration levels from future urban and
industrial development. Only a deterministic model can provide an unambiguous assessment of the
fraction of the responsibility of each pollutant source to each receptor area. This information then allows
the definition and implementation of appropriate emission control strategies.
                                                                                     AMFHM
                                                                                      10/83
                                                                                     page 8

-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                              03fle 9

-------
                     Dispersion  Modeling Applications
            The two major dispersion modeling applications for Superfund are:



            •  To design an air monitoring program


            •  To estimate concentrations at receptors of interest
Dispersion Modeling Applications
Dispersion models can be used when designing an air monitoring program to see how offsite areas of
high concentration relate to actual receptor locations. Places where high concentration areas correspond
to actual receptors are priority locations for air monitoring stations.

Dispersion models can also be used to provide  seasonal dispersion concentration patterns  based on
available representative historical meteorological data (either onsite or offsite). These dispersion patterns
can be  used to evaluate the  representativeness  of any air monitoring data collection period. Data
representativeness is determined  by  comparing the dispersion concentration  patterns for the air
monitoring period with historical seasonal dispersion  concentration patterns.

It is often  not practical to place air monitoring stations at actual offsite receptor locations of interest.
It will be necessary, however, to characterize concentrations at these locations to conduct a health and
environmental assessment. In these cases, dispersion patterns based on modeling results can be used to
extrapolate concentrations monitored at the site to offsite receptor locations.
                                                                                        AMFHM
                                                                                          10/93
                                                                                        p«ge 10

-------
Notes:
                                                                       AMFHM
                                                                        10/93

-------
                  Atmospheric  Dispersion  Considerations
                                 Stability
                                 Inversions
                                 Wind speed and direction
                                 Air temperature
                                 Terrain effects
Atmospheric Dispersion  Considerations
There are many different types of dispersion models, ranging from simple models that only require a
few basic calculations to three-dimensional models that require massive amounts of input data and
intense computational platforms to handle the complexity. Choosing the model to use depends on the
scale of the problem,  the level of detail available for input, the required output, the background of the
user, and the turnaround time needed for an answer.

The five atmospheric dispersion considerations (i.e., stability, inversions, wind speed and direction, air
temperature, and terrain effects) must all be considered throughout the modeling process.
                                                                                 AMFHM
                                                                                  10/93
                                                                                 page 12

-------
Notes:
                                                                              AMFHM
                                                                               10/93
                                                                              page 13

-------
                                Stability Class
                   B
               \  \
    Weak Winds
Sunshine
Strong Heating
                                 Strong Winds
 E
\  \
                                                                     \  \
   Weak Winds

   Night Cooling
   (Ground
   Trapping)
         The Relationship Between Stability Class, Heating, and Wind Speed
Stability Class
Atmospheric stability is the extent of physical stirring and mixing on the vertical plane.  When an
atmosphere is stable, there will be little mixing, which results in a persistent concentration.  Stable
conditions will also generally result in longer, narrower plume shapes.
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               p«ge 14
                                                                                   i

-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                             page 16

-------
                                      Inversions
Inversions
Inversions limit upward movement of air masses due to temperature differentials.  The inversion height
a modeler is concerned with is generally less than 100 feet.  Inversions are generally an evening/night-
time phenomenon and their presence results in  increased stability.
                                                                                       AMFHM
                                                                                        10/93
                                                                                       ptfle 16

-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                             page 17

-------
             Effects of Wind Speed and Direction
          CD
   c^S _*>
   Weak Winds
                    CD
                              High Winds
        CD

 Moderate Winds



CD  CD
                                   CD
           CD
                o    
-------
Notes:
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/93
                                                                             page 19

-------
              Ground Roughness - Terrain Steering Effects
Ground Roughness - Terrain Steering Effects
Areas with hills or valleys may experience wind shifts where the wind actually flows between hills or
down into the valleys, turning where these features turn.
                                                                           AMFHM
                                                                            10/93
                                                                           page 20

-------
Notes:
                                                                                AMFHM
                                                                                 10/93
                                                                                page 21

-------
                             Gaussian  Dispersion
           Source of Spill
                                                          Crosswind
Gaussian Dispersion
In a Gaussian dispersion model, a curve is used to describe how a contaminant will be dispersed in the
air after it leaves the source.  At the source, the concentration of the contaminant is very high and the
Gaussian distribution looks like a spike or a tall column.  As the contaminant drifts farther downwind,
it spreads out and the "bell shape" gets continually wider and flatter.
                                                                                     AMFHM
                                                                                      10/93
                                                                                     page 22

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 23

-------
                           Near-Field  Meandering
Near-Field Meandering
Near-field meandering is caused by individual drifting eddies in the wind that push the plume from side
to side. These eddies, or small gusts, are also responsible for much of the mixing that makes the plume
spread out.  As the plume drifts downward from the spill source,  these eddies shift and spread the
plume until it takes on the form of a Gaussian distribution.
                                                                                  AMFHM
                                                                                   10/93
                                                                                  p«fl> 24

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 25

-------
    Emission Rates
    APA Guidelines
    Volumes II & III
     EPA  Modeling
       Guidelines
                     Yes
 COLLECT AND  REVIEW INFORMATION

 •  Source data
 •  Urban/rural classification data and
    receptor data
 •  Environmental characteristics
  Available
Monitoring Data
                                SELECT MODEL CLASS AND
                                  SOPHISTICATION LEVEL

                                • Screened
                                • Refined
    DEVELOP  MODELING PLAN

Select model
Select constituents to be modeled
Define model input requirements (emissions,
meteorology, receptors)
Select receptors
Select modeling period
Evaluate modeling uncertainty
    EPA
Review/Approval
                                   CONDUCT  MODELING

                           Develop emission inventory
                           Process meteorological data
                           Develop receptor grid
                           Run model test cases
                           Verify input files
                           Perform  calculation for averaging times under
                           consideration
                             SUMMARIZE/EVALUATE RESULTS

                             •   Determine  concentrations
                             •   Prepare meteorological  summaries
                             •   Consider modeling uncertainty
                                                                  No
                             ADDITIONAL ANALYSES NEEDED?
Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
                                                 Input to EPA
                                               Remedial/Removal
                                               Decision-Making
     Figure 2.  Superfund air  impact  assessment dispersion modeling protocol.
                                                                                          AMFHM
                                                                                            10/93
                                                                                          page 26

-------
Superfund Air Impact Assessment Dispersion Modeling Protocol


Associated guidance documents:

•    National Technical Guidance Study (NTGS) Volumes II and III
•    Air quality modeling at Superfund sites factsheet
•    Guidelines on air quality models (revised).
 Notes:
                                                                         AMFHM
                                                                          10/93
                                                                         page 27

-------
                        Dispersion Modeling  Protocol
    Emission Rates
    APA Guidelines
    Volumes II & III
    COLLECT AND REVIEW
        INFORMATION

• Source data
• Urban/rural classification
  data and receptor data
• Environmental characteristics
   Available
Monitoring Data
 Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
Step 1:
Step 1 involves collecting and compiling existing information pertinent to air dispersion modeling. This
information is obtained during a literature survey. Information that should be collected and compiled
includes source data, receptor data, and environmental data (e.g., land use classification, demography,
topography, and  meteorology).  Once the existing data have been collected and compiled, a thorough
evaluation will define the data gaps. A coherent dispersion modeling plan can then be developed using
site-specific parameters and requirements.
                                                                                    AMFHM
                                                                                     10/93
                                                                                    P«ge28

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 29

-------
                         Dispersion Modeling Protocol
                             SELECT MODEL CLASS AND
                              SOPHISTICATION LEVEL


                             •  Screened
                             •  Refined
  Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
Step 2:
Step 2 involves the selection of the dispersion modeling sophistication level and screening and refined
modeling techniques.  The selection process depends on program objectives as well as available resource
and technical constraints.  Screening models generally use limited and simplified input information to
produce a conservative estimate of exposure.  Screening models assist in the initial determination of
whether the Superfund site, or site activity, will present an air impact problem. The emission source(s)
should then be evaluated with either a more sophisticated screening technique or a refined model. When
selecting a more  sophisticated modeling  technique or approach, the  following  aspects should be
considered:  availability of appropriate modeling techniques for the Superfund list of toxic constituents;
site-specific  factors,  including source configuration and characteristics; applicability; limitations;
performance for similar applications; and  comparison of advantages and disadvantages  of alternative
modeling techniques and approaches.
                                                                                       AMFHM
                                                                                         10/93
                                                                                       page 30

-------
Notes:
                                                                              AMFHM
                                                                               10/93
                                                                              pa«e 31

-------
                        Dispersion Modeling Protocol
   EPA Modeling
    Guidelines
    DEVELOP MODELING  PLAN

• Select model
• Select constituents to be modeled
• Define model input requirements
  (emissions, meteorology,  receptors)
• Select receptors
• Select modeling period
• Evaluate modeling uncertainty
EPA Review/
 Approval
 Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
Step 3:
Step 3 involves preparing a dispersion modeling plan. Elements that should be addressed in the plan
include overview  of  the Superfund  site  area, selection of constituents to  be  modeled,  modeling
methodology (emission inventory, meteorology, receptor grid, rural/urban classification, models to be
used, concentration averaging time, and special situations such as wake effects), and documentation of
the air modeling plan.
                                                                                 AMFHM
                                                                                   10/83
                                                                                 p«S« 32

-------
Notes:
                                                                                AMFHM
                                                                                 10/93
                                                                                page 33

-------
                        Dispersion Modeling Protocol
                               CONDUCT MODELING

                            Develop emission inventory
                            Process meteorological data
                            Develop receptor grid
                            Run model test cases
                            Verify input files
                            Perform calculation for averaging
                            times under consideration
  Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
Step 4:
Step 4 specifies the actual activities involved in conducting air dispersion modeling for a Superfund site.
Activities that are performed include developing an emission inventory, preprocessing and verifying
modeling, setting model switches, running model test cases, performing dispersion calculations, and
obtaining a printout of modeling input and output.
                                                                                   AMFHM
                                                                                    10/93
                                                                                   page 34

-------
Notes:
                                                                                AMFHM
                                                                                 50/93
                                                                                -.fO? 35

-------
                      Dispersion Modeling Protocol
             SUMMARIZE/EVALUATE RESULTS

            • Determine concentrations
            • Prepare meteorological summaries
            • Consider modeling uncertainty
     Yes
                                                No
            ADDITIONAL ANALYSES NEEDED?
Input to EPA
Remedial/Removal
Decision Making
     •	> Return to Select Model Class and Sophistication Level

  Reproduced from NTGS Volume IV
Step 5:
Step 5 involves the review and assessment of the dispersion modeling results.

Additional components of this step include preparation of data summaries, concentration mapping (i.e.,
isopleths), estimation of uncertainties, and assessment.
                                                                             AMFHM
                                                                              10/83
                                                                             page 36

-------
Notes:
                                                                                 AMFHM
                                                                                  10/93
                                                                                 page 37

-------
                      Accidental Release  Modeling
        •  Provides worst-case results

        •  Results used to determine evacuation of shelter-in-place options

        •  Cannot account for near-field patchiness

        •  Examples:   ALOHA ™ ARCHIE, CHARM ™, TRACE, and TSCREEN
Accidental Release Modeling
Accidental release modeling is performed when results are needed immediately.  Accidental release
models that assist in making source-term calculations, or provide probability warnings, are best when
real-time solutions are essential.

ALOHA™, ARCHIE, CHARM™, TRACE, and TSCREEN are examples of accidental release models.

Each model is a relatively simple estimation technique that provides conservative estimates of air quality
impact(s).
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 38

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 39

-------
                          Accidental  Release Models
                          ALOHA™   (NOAA/EPA)
                                     Areal

                                     Locations

                                     Of

                                     Hazardous

                                     Atmospheres
ALOHA
          TM
The Areal Locations of Hazardous Atmospheres (ALOHA) model was developed through a joint venture
between the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) and EPA. It is an emission
estimation and air quality dispersion model for estimating the emission rate, movement, and dispersion
of gases released into the atmosphere.  The model estimates pollutant concentrations downwind from
the source of a release, taking into account the toxicological and physical characteristics of the material.
ALOHA  considers the physical characteristics of the release site, the atmospheric conditions, and the
initial source conditions.

The model  has a built-in database of chemical names and properties that  the model uses  to calculate
emission  rates. The program performs buoyant gas dispersion based on Gaussian dispersion equations
and heavier-than-air dispersion based on algorithms in the DEnse GAs Dispersion (DEGADIS) model.

Emission estimations can be made for puddles, tanks, and pipe releases or for direct input of material
into the atmosphere.  The model uses  hourly meteorological data that can be entered by the user or
obtained  from real-time measurements.  The results of the model can be displayed as concentration
plots or in text summary screens. The concentration outputs are limited to a 1-hour (or less) exposure.
                                                                                      AMFHM
                                                                                       10/93
                                                                                      page 40

-------
Notes:
                                                                              AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                              page 41

-------
                         Accidental Release Models
                          ARCHIE    (FEMA/DOT/EPA)


                                    Automated

                                    Resource for

                                    Chemical

                                    Hazard

                                    Incident

                                    Evaluation
ARCHIE
The Automated Resource for Chemical Hazard Incident Evaluation (ARCHIE) model was developed
through a joint effort by the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), the U.S. Department
of Transportation (DOT), and EPA. It is an emission estimation and atmospheric dispersion model that
can be used to  assess the vapor  dispersion, fire,  and explosion impacts  associated with episodic
discharges of hazardous materials  into the environment.  The model can estimate the emissions and
duration of liquid/gas releases from tanks, pipelines,  and liquid pools, as well as the associated ambient
concentrations downwind of these  releases. ARCHIE can also evaluate the thermal hazards resulting
from the ignition of a flammable release and the consequences of an explosion caused by a flammable
gas, tank overpressurization, or ignition of an explosive material.  In addition, it can estimate the size
of the downwind hazard  zone that may  require evacuation or other public protection because of the
release of a toxic gas or vapor into the atmosphere.

To estimate downwind concentrations, simulated meteorological conditions are input to the model. The
user must input chemical properties of the material released from information contained in the material
safety data sheets.
                                                                                    AMFHM
                                                                                      10/93
                                                                                    p«ge 42

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 43

-------
                       Accidental  Release  Models
                              TM
                     CHARM     (Radian  Corporation))
                                   Complex

                                   HAzardous

                                   Release

                                   Model
CHARM
          TM
The Complex Hazardous Release  Model (CHARM™) is  a  proprietary Gaussian puff  model for
continuous and instantaneous releases of gases or liquids. The model is configured to handle chemicals
that are buoyant, neutrally buoyant, or heavier-than-air. CHARM™ can estimate the emission rates of
chemicals using a modification of the SHELL spill model and a multiphase pressurized gas release
model. CHARM™ contains a database of chemical information that is used in calculating emission
estimates.  The program is menu driven  and  can accept simulated meteorological  data for up to 24
hours.  The CHARM™ model  can simulate  the transport of chemicals in  spatially and  temporally
varying wind fields. The results from the program may be displayed graphically on  a screen or output
to a printer.
                                                                                   AMFHM
                                                                                    10/93
                                                                                   page 44

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 45

-------
                        Accidental Release Models
                    TRACE   (E.I. Dupont  de  Nemours)


                                   Toxic

                                   Release

                                   Analysis  of

                                   Chemical

                                   Emissions
TRACE
The SAFER System TRACE model is an engineering analysis tool for dispersion modeling.  It models
accidental toxic releases, including those caused by pipe/flange leaks, aqueous spills, hydrogen fluoride
spills, fuming acid spills, stack emissions, or elevated dense gas emissions.  The program is menu
driven and contains several modules to estimate the evaporation and dispersion of chemicals and analyze
the effect of certain parameters on downwind concentrations.  The program has a built-in database of
chemicals and their properties and various source-term modules. The model uses real-time or simulated
meteorological data for atmospheric dispersion calculations. These data can vary with time during the
release.  The results of the modeling analysis can be displayed visually on graphs or stored in tables.
                                                                                    AMFHM
                                                                                     10/93
                                                                                    page 46

-------
Notes:
                                                                              AMFHM
                                                                               10/93
                                                                              page 47

-------
                        Accidental Release  Models
                             TSCREEN   (EPA)
               •  Model for screening toxic air pollutant concentrations
TSCREEN
TSCREEN, a model for screening toxic air pollutant concentrations, is an air quality dispersion model
that implements the procedures in A Workbook of Screening Techniques for Assessing Impacts of Toxic
Air Pollutants (EPA-450-88-009). The TSCREEN model is an atmospheric dispersion model that uses
the dispersion algorithms of SCREEN,  Release Valve Discharge (RVD), and PUFF  models.  It
automatically selects the worst-case simulated meteorological conditions based on the criteria presented
in the workbook.  The model contains a data table of chemicals and their associated parameters (limited
to two  chemicals at this time) that TSCREEN can access. It can calculate the source term for dust
particles within a pile of a specified dimension. The model can also simulate the dispersion of gaseous,
liquid, and paniculate matter releases. TSCREEN outputs graphical and tabular summaries of predicted
pollutant concentrations.
                                                                                    AMFHM
                                                                                     10/93
                                                                                    page 48

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/83
                                                                               paae 49

-------
UJ
Q

O
UJ
V)

<
UJ
_l
UJ
cc
z
UJ
o

o
o
| TRACE*1'
Z
in
cc
o
to
1-
"u-
u.
a.
to
5
^
C3
LU

5
cc.

I
o

UJ
x
o
a:
z
o
«J




I CRITERIA
X


X












X





X

X






1 Model Capabilities
User friendliness
to
O
O

CO
O
Q

CO
0
Q
CO
0
O



CO
o
Q



CO
O
O
U
c/5
o
Q



|| Hardware/Equipment
XXX X


X X



X


XX XX





X





XXX X

XXX X



c
g
M -q
Emission Source Information
Constant/variable emu
Spills
Tank/pipe leaks
Fire/explosions
Stack/vents
Buoyant/dense gas/hqi
X X


XXX



X X


X X





X X





X X

XXX






Atmospheric Dispersion
Gaussian dispersion
Buoyant dispersion
Dense gas
X


X












X





X

X






|| Real-Time Computations
to
CO
cc
^
O
I
'

>





CO
cc
^
o
I

CN











|| Averaging Periods
XXX


XXX



XXX


X





XXX





X

XXX






Data Output
Store to file
Display on screen
Graphic output
X X


X



X


X





X X





X

X X






Meteorological Data
Historical
Real-time/onsite
Simulated/worst-case
X


_J












X







X






I Chemical Database
                                                                              •o
                                                                              0)
                                                                              O) c

                                                                              w. O
                                                                              O) 'P

                                                                              •*-' O
                                                                              D 03
  I


  o
  O)
to


J



.§•
                                                                                    T3
                                                                                       o ?
                                                                              — £.   E w


                                                                              iiiil
                                                                              S3 S Ell
                                                                              > to 3 5 5
       §
      a
                                                                              >$_,£
                                                                                         AMFHM

                                                                                          10/93

                                                                                         page SO

-------
Notes:
                                                                               AMFHM
                                                                                10/93
                                                                               page 51

-------
                                    REFERENCES
The following list represents a partial list of background references on the subject of air monitoring
and sampling.  Although other sources may be available, it is believed that these will provide the
reader with a good understanding of the subject.

The  references are listed alphabetically by  title  and include  author, publisher, and  place  of
publication.  The year of publication is given for governmental sources only.  For the remainder,
the reader should attempt to obtain the most recent edition.  An *  after the title indicates that a copy
of the document is part of the course library and is available for  review.
1.     Advances in Air Sampling'
       Lewis Publishers, Inc.
       121 South Main Street
       P.O. Drawer 519
       Chelsea, MI  48118
       (Also available through ACGIH. See #4.)

2.     Air Methods Database
       Available on the Cleanup Information electronic bulletin board (CLU-IN), formerly OSWER
       BBS.  For further information, call 301 589-8366.

3.     Air Monitoring For Toxic Exposures: An Integrated Approach', 1991
       Shirley A. Ness
       Van Nostrand Reinhold
       115 Fifth Avenue
       New York, NY 10003

4.     Air Monitoring Instrumentation:  A Manual for Emergency, Investigatory, and Remedial
       Responders', 1993
       C. Maslonsky and S.  Maslonsky
       Van Nostrand Reinhold
       115 Fifth Avenue
       New York, NY 10003

5.     Air Sampling Instruments'
       American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists
       6500 Glenway Avenue, Building D-E
       Cincinnati, OH 45211
       513 661-7881

6.     Air/Superfund National Technical Guidance Series:

       •      Volume IV—Guidance for Ambient Air Monitoring at Superfund Sites (revised). EPA-
              451/R-93-007, May 1993
10/93                                       1                                   References

-------
       •      Compilation of Information on Real-Time Air Monitoring for Use at Superfund Sites.
             EPA-451/R-93-008, May 1993

7.      Atmospheric Analysis: Occupational Health and Safety, ASTM Standards, Volume 11.03
       American Society for Testing and Materials
       1916 Race Street
       Philadelphia, PA 19103-1187
       215 299-5400

8.      Basic Gas Chromatography
       H.M. McNair and E.J. Bonelli
       Varian Instrument Division
       Purchase from Supelco, Inc.
       Supelco Park
       Bellefonte, PA 16823-0048

9.      Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in Ambient Air,
       EPA/600/4-89/017, June 1988
       Atmospheric Research and Exposure Assessment Laboratory
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
       Office of Research and Development
       Research  Triangle  Park, NC 27711

10.    A Compendium of Superfund Field Operations Methods*, EPA/540/P-87/001, December 1987
       U.S.Environmental Protection Agency
       Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
       Office of Waste Programs Enforcement
       Washington, DC 20460

11.    Data  Quality Objectives  for Remedial  Response  Activities:    Development Process,
       EPA/540/G-87/003, March 1987
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
       Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
       Office of Waste Programs Enforcement
       Washington, DC 20460

12.    Fundamentals of Industrial Hygiene
       National Safety Council
       444 North Michigan Avenue
       Chicago,  IL60611

13.    Guidance on Applying the Data Quality  Objectives Process for Ambient Air Monitoring
       Around Superfund Sites (Stages I & II), EPA-450/4-89-015; (Stage  III), EPA-450/4/90-005
       U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
       Office of Air Quality  Planning and Standards
       Research Triangle Park, NC 27711
References                                 2                                      10/93

-------
14.     Guide to Occupational Exposure Values'
       American Conference of Governmental Hygienists
       6500 Glenway Avenue, Building D-E
       Cincinnati, OH 45211
       513 661-7881

15.     Guide to Portable Instruments for Assessing Airborne Pollutants Arising from Hazardous
       Wastes
       International Organization of Legal Metrology
       Paris, France
       (Available through ACGIH)

16.     The Industrial Environmental - Its Evaluation and Control, 1973
       National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
       Rockville, MD
       (Available  from  the  Superintendent of Documents,  U.S. Government Printing  Office,
       Washington, DC 20402  [202 783-3238])

17.     Industrial Hygiene and Toxicology, Volumes I and III
       Frank A. Patty
       John Wiley  and Sons, Inc.
       New York,  NY

18.     Manual of Recommendation  Practice for Combustible Gas Indicators and Portable Direct
       Reading Hydrocarbon Detectors, 1980,  1st edition
       John Klinsky (ed)
       American Industrial Hygiene Association
       Akron, OH

19.     Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis'
       Lewis Publishers, Inc.
       121 South Main Street
       P.O. Drawer 519
       Chelsea, MI 48118
       (Also available through ACGIH)

20.     NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, Editions 1, 2, and 3'
       National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
       Rockville, MD
       (Available  from  the  Superintendent of Documents,  U.S. Government Printing  Office,
       Washington, DC 20402  [202 783-3238])

21.     OSHA Analytical Methods Manuaf
       Superintendent of Documents
       U.S. Government Printing Office
       Washington, DC 20402
       202 783-3238
10/93                                      3                                  References

-------
22.    OSHA Technical Manual"', 1990
       (See ACGIH)

23.    Removal Program Representative Sampling Guidance: Air
       U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency
       Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
       Emergency Response Division
       Environmental Response Branch
       Washington, DC

24.    Standard Operating Safety Guides, June 1992
       U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency
       Environmental Response Team
       2890 Woodbridge Avenue
       Building 18 (MS-101)
       Edison, NJ 08837-3697
       908 321-6740

25.    Standard Operating Guide for the Use of Air Monitoring Equipment for Emergency Response
       (See #21)

26.    Standard Operating Guide for Air Sampling and Monitoring at Emergency Responses
       (See #21)

27.    Technical Assistance Document for Sampling and Analysis of Toxic Organic Compounds in
       Ambient Air, EPA-600/4-83-027
       U.S.  Environmental Protection Agency
       Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
       Research Triangle  Park, NC 27711
References                                  4                                     10/93

-------
                  MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS  OF
                       AIR MONITORING EQUIPMENT
AIR MONITORING EQUIPMENT
Aerosol/Particulate Direct-Reading Monitors:

            Air Techniques Incorporated
            HUND Corporation
            Met One, Inc.
            MIE, Inc.
            MST Measurement Systems, Inc.
            Pacific Scientific (HIAC/ROYCO Instrument Division)
            Particle Measuring Systems, Inc.
            PPM Enterprises
            TSI Incorporated
Calibration Gases:  (most manufacturers of instruments provide calibration gases for
use with their instruments; these companies provide a variety of calibration gases)

            Airco Industrial Gases
            Alphagaz
            Bryne Specialty Gases
            Digicolor
            Environics, Inc.
            GC Industries
            Kin-Tek laboratories, Inc.
            Liquid Air Corporation
            National Specialty Gases
            Norco, Inc.
            Scott Specialty Gases
            VICI Metronics
Calibrators, Pump:

            Accura Flow Products Co., Inc.
            Air Systems International
            AMETEK
            BGI Incorporated
            BIOS  International Corp
            DuPont
            Gillian Instrument Co.
            Sensidyne


10/93                                   i                 Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
             SKC, Inc.
             Spectrex Corporation
Canister Samplers:
             Andersen Samplers Incorporated
             Nutech Corporation
             Scientific Instrumentation Specialists
             Wedding & Associates, Inc.
             Xontech, Inc.
Collection Media:
             Ace Glass Incorporated
             BGI Incorporated
             DACO Products
             Gelman Sciences
             Gilian Instrument Corporation
             Hi-Q Environmental Products Company
             LaMotte Chemical Products Company
             Micro Filtration Systems
             Millipore Corporation
             Mine Safety Appliances Company
             Nuclepore Corporation
             Omega Specialty Instruments Company
             Paliflex, Inc.
             Poretics  Corporation
             Schleicher & Schuell
             Sipin, Anatole, J., Co., Inc.
             SKC,  Inc.
             Supelco, Inc.
Colorimetric Detectors: (B = badges or dosimeters; DT = regular detector tubes; LT = long term
detector tubes)

              American Gas & Chemical Co., Ltd. (B)
              Analytical Accessories International (B)
              Bacharach, Inc.  (B)
              Chemsense (B)
              Crystal Diagnostics (B)
              Enmet Corporation (DT, LT)
              GMD Systems, Inc. (B)
              Matheson Safety Products (DT, LT)
              MDA Scientific  (B)
              Mine Safety Appliances Co.  (B, DT, LT)


Manufacturers and Suppliers                  2                                      10/93

-------
              National Draeger, Inc. (B, DT, LT)
              PPM Enterprises (B)
              Sensidyne (DT), Inc.
              SKC, Inc. (B, LT)
              VICI Metronics (B)
              Willson Safety  Products (B)
Combustible Gas Meters:
              A.I.M. Safety Company, Inc.
              Astro International Corp.
              Bacharach Instruments
              Biosystems, Inc.
              Chestec, Inc.
              Control Instruments Corp.
              Dynamation Incorporated
              Energy Efficiency Systems,Inc.
              Enmet Corporation
              Gas Tech, Inc.
              GfG America Gas Detection Ltd.
              Grace Industries, Inc.
              Heath Consultants Incorporated
              Industrial Scientific Corporation
              J and N Enterprises, Inc.
              Lumidor Safety Products e.s.p., Inc.
              Mine Safety Appliances Co.
              National Draeger, Inc.
              Neotronics N.A., Inc.
              Quatrosense Environmental Ltd.
              Scott Aviation
              Sieger Gas Detection
              Sierra Monitor Corporation
              Texas Analytical Controls, Inc.
              TIP Instruments,  Inc.
Gas Bags:

              AeroVironment, Inc.
              The Anspec Company, Inc.
              BGI Incorporated
              Calibrated Instruments, Inc.
              Digicolor
              Jensen Inert
              KVA Analytical Systems
              Norton Performance Plastics
              Nutech Corporation


10/93                                      3                  Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
             Plastic Film Enterprises
             Pollution Measurement Corporation
             Science Pump Corporation
             SKC, Inc.
Gas Chromatographs:  (types of detectors available: AID = argon ionization; ECD
electron capture;  FID  =  flame  ionization;  MS  =  mass  spectroscopy; PID
photoionization; SS = chemical specific sensor; TCD =  thermal conductivity)

             Bruker Instruments (MS)
             Canaan Scientific Products
             CMS Research Corporation (SS)
             The Foxboro Company (FID)
             GOW-MAC (FID, TCD)
             HNU Systems, Inc. (PID, FID)
             Microsensor Systems Inc.
             Microsensor Technology, Inc. (TCD)
             Photovac Incorporated (PID, FID)
             S-Cubed (ECD)
             Sensidyne (FID)
             Sentex Sensing Technology, Inc. (ECD,  PID, PID, TCD)
             Summit Interests (FID, PID, TCD)
             Thermo Environmental Instruments, Inc. (ECD, FID, PID, TCD)
             Viking Instruments (MS)
             XonTech, Inc. (AID, ECD)
Oxygen Meters:

             A.I.M. Safety Company, Inc.
             Bacharach, Inc.
             Biosystems, Inc.
             Dynamation Incorporated
             Energy Efficiency Systems, Inc.
             Enmet Corporation
             GasTech, Inc.
             GC Industries
             GfG America Gas Detection Ltd.
             Industrial Scientific Corporation
             Lumidor Safety Products e.s.p., Inc.
             MDA Scientific, Inc.
             Metrosonics, Inc.
             Mine Safety Appliances Co.
             National Draeger, Inc.
             Neotronics N.A., Inc.
             Rexnord Safety Products
             Scott Aviation


Manufacturers and Suppliers                4                                     10/93

-------
             Sensidyne
             Sieger Gas Detection
             Sierra Monitor Corporation
             Teledyne Analytical Instruments
Passive  Dosimeters:   (these devices require laboratory  analysis; for direct-reading
dosimeters see G. Colorimetric Detections)

             Advanced Chemical Sensors
             Air Technology Labs, Inc.
             Assay Technology
             EnSys, Inc.
             Gilian Instrument Corporation
             Landauer, R.S. Jr. & Company
             Mine Safety Appliances Co.
             National Draeger, Inc.
             Pro-Tek Systems, Inc.
             Sensidyne
             SKC,  Inc.
             3M
Sampling Pumps and Accessories:  (letters denote primary function of pumps and
apparatus:  P  = Personal; A = Area; B =  Bag filling)

             AeroVironment, Inc. (B)
             Air Systems International, Inc. (A)
             AMETFK (P)
             Analytical Accessories International (A,P)
             Andersen Samplers Incorporated (A)
             Arjay Equipment Corporation (A)
             Barnant Company (A)
             BGI Incorporated (P, A)
             BIOS  International Corp
             Calibrated Instruments, Inc. (B)
             California Measurements, Inc. (A)
             DuPont (P)
             Environmetrics, Inc.  (A)
             General Metal Works, Inc. (A)
             Gillian Instrument Corp. (P)
             LaMotte Chemical Products Company (A)
             Midwest Environics,  Inc.  (A)
             Mine Safety Appliances Co. (P)
             Omega Specialty Instrument Co. (A)
             Wedding & Associates, Inc. (A)
             Sensidyne (P)
             Sipin, Anatole J., Co., Inc. (P)


JO/93                                     5                  Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
             SKC, Inc. (P)
             Spectrex Corporation (P)
             Staplex Air Sampler Division (A)
             Supelco, Inc. (P)
             Thermedics, Inc. (P)
             Wedding & Associates (A)
Toxic Monitors:  (direct-reading instruments for low concentrations of contaminants;
letters denote types of detectors  available; PID  =  photoionization; FID  =  flame
ionization; IR =  infrared spectroscopy; TCD  = thermal conductivity; GS = general
sensor, e.g., MOS or super-sensitive CGI;  SS =  sensor for specific chemical, e.g.,
CO, H2S)

             A.I.M. Safety Company, Inc.(GS, SS)
             Anacon Detection Technology (SS)
             Analect Instruments (IR)
             Arizona Instrument, Jerome Division (SS)
             Astro International Corp.  (SS)
             Bacharach, Inc. (GS, SS)
             Biosystems, Inc. (SS)
             Bruel & Kjaer (IR)
             CEA Instruments, Inc. (GS, SS)
             Dynamation Incorporated  (GS, SS)
             Enmet Corporation (SS)
             Environmental Technologies Group (GS)
             The Foxboro Company (FID, IR)
             GasTech, Inc. (GS, SS)
             GfG America Gas Detection Ltd. (SS)
             GMD Systems, Inc. (colorimetric)
             GOW-MAC (TCD)
             Grace Industries, Inc.  (GS)
             Graesby Ionics Ltd. (Ion Mobility Spectrometry)
             Heath Consultants Incorporated (FID)
             HNU Systems, Inc. (PID)
             Industrial Scientific Corporation (SS)
             International Gas Detectors, Inc.
             InterScan Corporation (SS)
             J and N Enterprises, Inc.  (GS)
             MDA Scientific, Inc. (SS)
             Macurco, Inc. (GS, SS)
             Mast Development Corporation (SS)
             Matheson Safety Products (TCD)
             Metrosonics, Inc. (SS)
             Microsensor Systems, Inc. (SS)
             Mine Safety Appliances Co. (PID, FID, SS)
             National Draeger (SS)
             Neotronics N.A., Inc. (SS)


Manufacturers and Suppliers                 5                                     10/93

-------
             Nicolet Instrument Corp. (IR)
             Photovac Incorporated (PID)
             Quatrosense Environmental Ltd. (SS)
             Scott Aviation (SS)
             Sensidyne (SS, FID)
             Sentex Sensing Technology, Inc. (FID)
             Servomax Company (IR)
             Sieger Gas Detection (SS, IR)
             Sierra Monitor Corporation (SS)
             Spectrex Corporation (SS)
             Summit Interests (FID, PID, TCD)
             Tekmar Company (TCD)
             Texas Analytical Controls, Inc. (SS)
             Thermo Environmental Instruments, Inc. (FID, PID, TCD)
             TIF Instruments, Inc. (GS)
             Transducer Research, Inc. (SS)
MANUFACTURERS' AND SUPPLIERS' ADDRESSES
      AccuRa Flow Products Co., Inc.
      P.O. Drawer  100
      Warminster, PA 18974
      214 674-4782

      Ace Glass Company
      P.O. Box 688
      Vineland, NJ
      609 692-3333

      Advanced Chemical Sensors
      350 Oak Lane
      Pompano Beach, FL 33069
      305 979-0958

      Advanced Calibration Designs, Inc.
      7960 S. Kolb Rd.
      Tucson, AZ 85705
      602 574-9509

      AeroVironment, Inc.
      145 Vista Avenue
      Pasadena, CA91107
      818 357-9983
A.I.M. Safety Company, Inc.
P.O. Box 720540
Houston, TX 77272-0540
713 240-5020
1-800-ASK-4AIM

Air Systems International
814-P Greenbrier Circle
Chesapeake, VA 23320
1-800-866-8100

Air Techniques Incorporated
1801 Whitehead Road
Air Techniques Incorporated
1801 Whitehead Road
Baltimore, MD 21207
301 944-6037

Airco Industrial Gases
Division of Airco, Inc.
575 Mountain Avenue
Murry Hill, NJ 07974
201 464-8100
10/93
           Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
      Alphagaz
      Specialty Gases Division
      Liquid Air Corporation
      2121 N. California Blvd.
      Walnut Creek, CA 94596
      415 977-6506

      AMETEK
      Mansfield & Green Division
      8600 Somerset Drive
      Largo, FL 34643
      813 536-7831

      American Gas & Chemical Co., Ltd.
      220 Pegasus Avenue
      Northvale, NJ 07647
      201 767-7300
      1-800-288-3647

      Anacon Detection Technology
      117 South Street
      Hopkinton, MA 01748
      508 435-6973

      Analect Instruments
      Division of Laser Precision Corp.
      1231 Hart Street
      Utica,  NY 13502
      315 797-4449

      Analytical Accessories International
      P.O. Box 922085
      Atlanta, GA 30092
      1-800-282-0073

      Anderson Instruments, Inc.
      4801 Fulton Industrial Blvd.
      Atlanta, GA 30336
      404 691-1910

      The Anspec Company, Inc.
       122 Enterprise Drive
      Ann Arbor,  MI 48107
      313 665-9666
      1-800-521-1720
Arizonia Instrument Corp.
P.O. Box 1930
Tempe, AZ 85280
602 731-3400
1-800-528-7411

Arjay Equipment Corp.
P.O. Box 2959
Winston-Salem,  NC 27102
919 741-3582

Assay Technology
1070 E. Meadow Cir.
Palo Alto, CA 94303
1-800-833-1258

Astro International Corp.
100 Park  Avenue
League City, TX 77573
713 332-2484

BGI, Inc.
58 Guinan Street
Waltham, MA 02154
617 891-9380

BIOS International Corporation
756 Hamburg Turnpike
Pompton  Lakes, NJ 07442
201 839-6908

Bacharach, Inc.
625 Alpha Drive
Pittsburgh, PA 15238
412 963-2000

Barnant Company
28W092 Commercial Avenue
Barrington, IL 60010
312 381-7050

Biosystems, Inc.
P.O. Box 158
Rockfall, CT 06481
203 344-1079
Manufacturers and Suppliers
                                10/93

-------
       Bruel & Kjaer Instruments, Inc.
       185 Forest Street
       Marlborough, MA 01752
       508 481-7000

       Bruker Instruments, Inc.
       Manning Park
       Billerica, MA 01821
       617 667-9580

       Byrne Specialty Gases, Inc.
       118 S. Mead Street
       Seattle, WA 98108
       206 764-4633

       Calibrated Instruments, Inc.
       200 Saw Mill River Road
       Hawthorne,  NY 10502
       914 741-5700

       CEA Instruments, Inc.
       16 Chestnut Street
       Emerson, NJ 07630
       201 967-5660

       CMS Research Corporation
       100 Chase Park, Suite 100
       Birmingham, AL 35244
       205 733-6900

       California Measurements,  Inc.
       150 E. Montecito Avenue
       Sierra Madre, CA 91024
       818 355-3361

       Canaan Scientific Products
       P.O.  Box 50527
       Indianapolis, IN 46250
       317 842/1088
       1-800-842-8578

       ChemSense
       3909  Beryl Rd.
       Raleigh, NC 27607
       919 821-2929
Chestec, Inc.
P.O. Box 10362
Santa Ana, CA 92705
714 730-9405

Compur Monitors
7015 West Tidwell
Suite Gill-A
Houston, TX 77092
713939-1103

Control Instruments Corp.
25 Law Drive
Fairfield, NJ 07006
201 575-9114

Costar/Nucleopore
One Alewife Center
Cambridge, MA 02140
617 868-6200

Crystal Diagnostics, Inc.
600 West Cummings Park
Woburn, MA 01801
617933-4114

DACO Products, Inc.
12 S. Mountain Avenue
Montclair, NJ 07042
201 744-2453

Digicolor
2770 East Main Street
P.O. Box 09763
Columbus, OH 43209
614236-1213

Dynamation Incorporated
3784 Plaza Drive
Ann Arbor, MI 48104
313 769-0573

Enmet Corporation
P.O. Box 979
2308 S. Industrial Highway
Ann Arbor, MI 48106-0979
313 761-1270
10/93
           Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
      Energy Efficiency System, Inc.
      1300 Shames Drive
      Westbury, NY 11590
      516 997-2100
      1-800-645-7490

      EnSys, Inc.
      P.O. Box 14063
      Research Triangle Park, NC
      919 941-5509

      Envirometrics, Inc.
      1019 Bankton Dr.
      Charleston, SC 29406
      1-800-255-8740

      Environics, Inc.
      33 Boston Post Road West
      Marlborough, MA 01752
      617 481-3600

      Environmental Technologies Group
      1400 Taylor Avenue
      Baltimore, MD 21284-9840
      301 635-4598

      The Foxboro Company (EMO)
      P.O. Box 500
      600 N. Bedford St.
      East Bridgewater, MA 02333
      508 378-5556

      GasTech, Inc.
      8445 Central Avenue
      Newark, CA 94560
      415 745-8700

      GC Industries, Inc.
      8976 Oso Ave., Unit C
      Chatsworth, CA 91311
      818 882-7852

      GfG Gas Electronics, Inc.
      6617 Clayton Rd., Suite 209
      St. Louis, MO 63144
      314 725-9050
       GMD Systems, Inc.
       Old Route 519
       Hendersonville, PA 15339
       412 746-3600

       Gelman Sciences, Inc.
       600 South Wagner Road
       Ann Arbor, MI 48106
       313 665-0651

       General Metal Works, Inc.
       145 South Miami
       Village of Cleves, OH 45002
       513 941-2229

       Gilian Instrument Corporation
       35 Fairfield Place
       West Caldwell, NJ 07006
       201 808-3355

       GOW-MAC
       P.O. Box 32
       Bound Brook, NJ 08805
       201 560-0600

       Grace Industries, Inc.
       P.O. Box  167
       Transfer, PA 16154
       412 962-9231

       Graseby Ionics Ltd.
       Analytical Division
       Park Avenue, Bushey
       Watford Herts Wb2 2BW
       England
       0923 816166

       Heath Consultants, Inc.
       100 Tosca Drive
       P.O. Box  CS-200
       Stoughton, MA 02072-1591
       617 344-1400

       Hi-Q  Filter Environmental Products
       7386 Trade Street
       San Diego, CA 92121
       619 549-2820
Manufacturers and Suppliers
10
10/93

-------
      HNU Systems, Inc.
      160 Charlemont Street
      Newton Highlands, MA 02161
      617 964-6690
      1-800-527-4566

      HUND Corporation
      777 Passaic Ave.
      Clifton, NY 07012-1804
      202 473-5009

      Industrial Scientific Corporation
      355 Steubenville Pike
      Oakdale, PA 15071-1093
      412 788-4353
      1-800-338-3287

      International Gas Detectors, Inc.
      11221 Richmond Ave., Suite C-109
      Houston, TX 77082
      713 558-4099

      InterScan Corporation
      P.O.  Box 2496
      21700 Nordoff Street
      Chatsworth, CA 91313-2496
      1-800-458-6153

      J and N Enterprises, Inc.
      P.O.  Box 108
      Wheeler, IN 46393
      219759-1142

      Jensen Inert
      P.O.  Box 660824
      Miami, FL 33266-0824
      305 871-8839
      1-800-446-3781

      Kin-Tele Laboratories
      2395  Palmer Highway
      Texas City, TX 77590
      409 945-3627
       KVA Analytical Systems
       281 Main St.
       P.O. Box 574
       Galmouth, MA 02541-99811
       508 540-0561

       LaMotte Chemical Products Co.
       P.O. Box 329
       Chesteitown, MD 21620
       301 778-3100
       1-800-344-3100

       Lumidor Safety Products/E.S.P., Inc.
       5364 NW 167th Street
       Miami, FL 33014
       305 625-6511

       Macurco, Inc.
       3946 S. Mariposa Street
       Englewood, CO 80110
       303 781-4062

       Mast Development Company
       Air Monitoring Division
       2212 East 12th Street
       Davenport, IA 52803
       319 326-1041

       Mateson Chemical Corporation
       1025 E. Montgomery Avenue
       Philadelphia, PA 19125
       215 423-3200

       Matheson Gas Products, Inc.
       30 Seaview Drive
       Secaucus, NJ 07096-1587
       215 641-2700

       MDA Scientific,  Inc.
       405 Barclay Blvd.
       Lincolnshire, IL 60069
       312 634-2800
       1-800-323-2000
                                                 MG Industries
                                                 175 Meister Avenue
                                                 North Branch, NJ  08876
                                                 201/231-9595
10/93
11
Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
      MIE, Inc.
      213 Burlington Road
      Bedford,  MA 01730
      617 275-5444

      MST Measurement Systems, Inc.
      327 Messner Drive
      Wheeling, IL 60090
      708 808-2500

      Met One, Inc.
      481 California Avenue
      Grants  Pass, OR 97526
      503 479-1248

      Metrosonics, Inc.
      P.O. Box 23075
      Rochester, NY 14692-3075
      716 334-7300

      Micro Filtration Systems
      6800 Sierra Court
      Dublin, CA 94568
      415 828-6010

      Microsensor Systems, Inc.
      6800 Versar Center
      Springfield, VA 22151
      703 642-6919

      Microsensor Technology, Inc.
      47747 Warm Springs Blvd.
      Fremont, CA 94539
      415 490-0900

      Midwest  Environics, Inc.
      10 Oak Glen Court
      Madison, WI 53717
      608 833-0158

      Millipore Corporation
      Lab Products Division
      80 Ashby Road
      Bedford,  MA 01730
      617 275-9200
       Mine Safety Appliances
       P.O. Box 427
       Pittsburgh, PA 15230
       412 967-3000
       1-800-MSA-INST

       National Draeger, Inc.
       P.O. Box 120
       101 Technology Drive
       Pittsburgh, PA 15230-0120
       412 787-8383

       National Specialty Gases
       630 United Drive
       Durham, NC 27713-9985

       Neotronics N.A., Inc.
       P.O. Box 370
       411 North Bradford Street
       Gainesville, GA 30503
       404 535-0600
       1-800-535-0606

       Nicolet Instrument Corp.
       5225 Verona Rd.
       Madison, WI 53711
       608 271-3333

       Norco, Inc.
       1121 W. Amity
       Boise, ID 83705
       208 336-1643

       North Performance Plastics
       150 Dey Road
       Wayne,  NJ 07470-4699
       1-800-526-7844

       Nutech Corporation
       2806 Cheek Road
       Durham, NC 27704
       919 682-0402

       Omega Specialty Instruments Company
       4 Kidder Road, Unit 5
       Chelmsford, MA 01842
       508 256-5450
Manufacturers and Suppliers
12
10/93

-------
       Pacific Scientific
       HAIC-ROYCO Instruments Division
       141 Jefferson Drive
       Menlo Park, CA 94025

       Paliflex, Inc.
       125 Kennedy Drive
       Putnam, CT 06260
       203 929-7761

       Particle Measuring Systems
       1855  South 57th Court
       Boulder, CO 80301-2886
       303 443-7100

       Photovac International, Inc.
       25-B  Jefryn Blvd. W.
       Deer  Park, NY 11729
       516 254-4199

       Plastic Film Enterprises
       2011  Bellaire Avenue
       Royal Oak, MI 48067
       313 399-0450

       Pollution Measurement Corporation
       P.O.  Box 6182
       Chicago, IL 60680
       708 383-7794

       Poretics  Corporation
       151 I Lindbergh Avenue
       Livermore, CA 94550-9412
       415 373-0500
       1-800-922-6090

       PPM  Enterprises
       11428 Kingston Pike
       Knoxville, TN 37922
       615 966-8796

       Pro-Tek Systems, Inc.
       64 Genung Street
       Middletown, NY 10940
       914344-4711
Quatrosense Environmental Ltd.
5935 Ottawa Street
P.O. Box 749
Richmond, Ontario, Canada KOA 2ZO
613/838-4005

S-Cubed
P.O. Box 1620
La Jolla, CA  92038-1620
619/453-0060

Schleicher & Schuell, Inc.
10 Optical Street
Kenne, NH 03431
603/352-3810
800/245-4024

Scientific Instrumentation Specialists
P.O. Box 8941
Moscow, ID  83843
208/882-3860

Science Pump Corporation
1431 Ferry Avenue
Camden, NJ 08104
609/963-7700
Scott Aviation
225 Erie Street
Lancaster, NY 14086
716/683-5100

Scott Specialty Gases
Route 161 North
Plumsteadville, PA 18949
215/766-8861

Sensidyne, Inc.
16333 Bay Vista Dr.
Clearwater, FL  34620
813/530-3602
800/451-9444

Sentex Sensing Technology, Inc.
553 Broad Avenue
Ridgefield, NJ  07657
201/945-3694
10/93
                                          13
           Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
      Servomax Company
      90 Kerry Place
      Norwood, MA 02062
      617 769-7710

      Sieger Gas Detection
      405 Barclay Blvd.
      P.O. Box 1405
      Lincolnshire, IL 60069-1405
      1-800-221-1039

      Sierra Monitor Corporation
      1991 Tarob Court
      Milipitas, CA 95035
      408262-6611

      Anatole J. Sipin Co., Inc.
      505 Eighth Avenue
      New York,  NY 10018
      212 695-5706

      SKC, Inc.
      334 Valley View Road
      Eighty Four, PA 15330-9614
      412 941-9701
      1-800-752-8472

      Spectrex Corporation
      3580 Haven Avenue
      Redwood City, CA 94063
      415 365-6567

      Staplex Company
      Air Sampler Division
      777 Fifth Avenue
      Brooklyn, NY 11232-1695
      212 768-3333
      1-800-221-0822

      Summit Interests
      P.O. Box 1128
      Lyons,  CO 80540
      303 444-8009

      Supelco, Inc.
      Supelco Park
      Bellefonte, PA 16823-0048
      814 359-3441
       3M OH & ESD
       3M Center
       Building 220-3E-04
       St. Paul, MN 55144-1000
       612 733-5608

       TIF Instruments Inc.
       9101  NW 7th Avenue
       Miami, FL 33150
       305757-8811

       TSI Incorporated
       500 Cardigan Road
       P.O.  Box 43394
       St. Paul, MN 55164
       612 483-0900

       Tekmar Company
       P.O.  Box 371856
       Cincinnati, OH 45222
       1-800-543-4461

       Teledyne Analytical Instruments
       16830 Chestnut Street
       City  of Industry, CA 91749
       213 283-7181

       Texas Analytical Controls, Inc.
       P.O.  Box 42520
       Houston, TX 77242
       713 240-4160

       Thermedics, Inc.
       470 Wildwood Street
       Woburn, MA  01888
       617 938-3786

       Thermo Environmental Instruments, Inc.
       8 West Forge  Parkway
       Franklin, MA 02038
       508 520-0430

       Transducer Research, Inc.
       999 Chicago Ave.
       Naperville, IL 60540
       708 357-0004
Manufacturers and Suppliers
14
10/93

-------
       VICI Metronics
       2991 Corvin Drive
       Santa Clara, CA 95051
       408 737-0550

       Viking Instruments Corp.
       12007 Sunrise Valley Drive
       Reston, VA 22091-3406
       703 758-9339

       Wedding & Associates, Inc.
       P.O. Box 1756
       Fort Collins, CO 80522
       303 221-0678

       Whatman Paper Division
       9 Bridewell Place
       Clifton, NJ 07014
       201 773-5800
Wheaton Scientific
1000 North 10th Street
Millville, NJ 08332
609 825-1400

Willson Safety Products
P.O. Box 622
Reading, PA 19603-0622
215 376-6161

Xetex, Inc.
600 National Avenue
Mountain View, CA 94043
415 964-3261

XonTech Inc.
6862 Hayvenhurst Avenue
Van Nuys, CA 91406  .
818 787-7380
10/93
                                          15
           Manufacturers and Suppliers

-------
            AIR MONITORING FOR HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
                                WORKBOOK

                                 CONTENTS
Exercise                                                                  Page

1           Oxygen Monitor, Combustible Gas Indicators,
            and Specific Chemical Monitors	1

2           Photoionization Detectors - Survey	 13

3           Flame lonization Detectors - Survey  . . .	21

4           Gas Chromatography - Organic Vapor Analyzer	29

5           Detector Tubes 	'.	39

6           Direct-Reading Aerosol Monitors	53

7           Gas Chromatography - Photoionization Detector	63

8           Sampling Pumps and Collection Media	71

9           Field  Exercise	87
10/93                                  \                                Contents

-------
                                   EXERCISE  1

               Oxygen Monitors, Combustible  Gas Indicators,
                        and Specific Chemical Monitors
OBJECTIVE
In this exercise, students will calibrate or check the calibration of a variety of combustible gas
indicators (CGIs),  combination CGI/O2 monitors,  and combination CGI/O2/toxic monitors.  The
instruments will then be used to  sample a variety of test atmospheres  and the results will be
interpreted.
PROCEDURE

The exercise is divided into three different stations. Each station is equipped with an air monitoring
instrument or group of instruments.

       Station 1:     MSA Model 260/261 combination CGI/02 monitor

       Station 2:     MSA Model 360 combination CGI/O2/carbon monoxide monitor

       Station 3:     GasTech Model 1314 combination CGI/O2/toxic monitor

There may be more than one of each numbered station to reduce crowding.  Follow the instructions
given for each instrument.  Sample the indicated gas bags and record your results. At the end of
the exercise, answer the  questions. The instructor will then hold a brief discussion.

The  instructions given for each instrument are based on the manufacturers' operating  manuals.
However,  some steps may  have  been added for illustration purposes  and some may have been
shortened for purposes of time or space.  As with any instrument, consult the operator's manual
before using in the field.
10/93                                     1                                 Exercise 1

-------
                                    STATION 1

             MSA Model  260/261  Combination  CGI/O, Monitor
The MSA Model 260/261 is a combination combustible gas and oxygen monitor.  There are meter
displays for both indicators.  Visual and audible alarms for a % LEL reading and a low oxygen
reading are included. The Model 261 also has a high oxygen reading alarm.  The audible alarm can
be deactivated. Air is drawn into the instrument by a battery-operated pump.
SETUP

1.      Record the instrument serial number or ID number on the data sheet.

2.      Attach the sampling hose to the instrument.  Make sure that the connection is hand tight.


STARTUP

3.      Turn the center "ON-OFF" control clockwise to the "HORN-OFF" position.  Both meter
       pointers will move, both alarm lights will light, and the center green lamp will blink on and
       off. (Note:  On the Model 261, the light will  not turn  on until after the reset button is
       pushed.) The green light indicates alarms status.  When  it glows continuously, the audible
       alarm is operable.  When it blinks on and off, it indicates that the audible alarm has been
       deactivated.

4.      Adjust the meter  pointer  on the  % oxygen monitor  by pulling and turning the  "O2
       CALIBRATE KNOB."  The  knob  is supplied with a clutch to  prevent  accidental field
       decalibration.  Adjust the  pointer to read 20.8%,  which  is the hatch mark below the 21%
       mark.

5.      Adjust the meter  pointer  on the %LEL meter by pulling and turning the "LEL ZERO
       KNOB."  Adjust the pointer to read  0%.

6.      Press the red alarm "RESET" button to reset the  alarms.   Both red lights should  stop
       flashing. (Note:  The "RESET" button will not reset the alarms if the meter pointers exceed
       the alarm levels.)

7.      Press the black "CHECK" button and observe the pointer on the %LEL meter.  The pointer
       should move  above 80% LEL into the BATTERY zone of the meter. This  indicates that the
       battery is okay. If it does  not reach the BATTERY  zone, inform an instructor/technician.


LEAK TEST

8.      Momentarily  hold a finger over the sample inlet or end of sample probe.  Observe that the
       flow indicator float (lower right hand corner of instrument face) drops out of sight, indicating

Exercise 1                                 1                                      10/93

-------
       no flow.  If the float does not drop out of sight, check the system for leaks.   If the
       instrument does not pass the leak test, inform an instructor/technician.
ALARM CHECK

The purpose of these steps is to check the meter readings at which the alarms will sound.

9.     Turn the O2 CALIBRATE knob counterclockwise (decreasing the % oxygen reading) while
       watching the % oxygen meter and the oxygen alarm light.  Note the reading at which the
       alarm sounds and the light starts flashing.  Adjust the reading back to 20.8% and press the
       reset button.  Record the reading on the data sheet.  The lower alarm reading should be
       19.5%.

10.    (MSA 261 only)   Turn the  O2  CALIBRATE knob clockwise (increasing the  % oxygen
       reading) while watching the  % oxygen meter and the oxygen alarm light.  Note the reading
       at which the alarm sounds and the light starts flashing.  Adjust the reading back to 20.8%
       and press the reset button.  Record the alarm reading on the data sheet. . The upper alarm
       reading should be  25%.

11.    Turn the zero LEL knob clockwise until the alarm is activated.  Record this reading.  Return
       the meter pointer to zero and press the reset button.  The alarm should have activated at 25 %
       LEL.

12.    If any of the alarm points are not what they should  be, inform an instructor/technician.

13.    The instrument is ready for calibration.


CALIBRATION

14.    Open the clamp to the gas bag labeled "PENTANE 0.75%" and attach the sample line to the
       bag.  Draw a sample into the instrument until a constant reading is obtained.

15.    Record your reading on the data sheet.  The instrument should give a reading of 50% LEL.
       Inform the instructor if it does not.

16.    Disconnect the sample line  and  clamp the bag.   Allow fresh air to flow through the
       instrument until the reading returns to  zero.  Rezero the instrument, if needed.


SAMPLING

17.    Please note that the Model  261  has a latching mechanism that engages the %LEL meter
       pointer if it reaches or exceeds 100. To disengage  the lock, the instrument must be turned
10/93                                       3                                  Exercise 1

-------
       off and then turned back on in an area where the LEL readings are less than 100%.  Room
       air will do.

18.     For field monitoring, the alarm should be in the operable mode. For this exercise, you may
       keep the audible alarm deactivated to  reduce noise levels.

19.     Sample each of the gas bags listed on the data  sheet.  Record the readings.
SHUTDOWN

20.    When sampling is complete, flush fresh air through the instrument.  Turn the instrument
       OFF.
Exercise 1                                  4                                       10/93      '

-------
                                    STATION 2

             MSA Model 360 Combination  CGI/CL/CO Monitor
The MSA Model 360 is a combination combustible, oxygen, and carbon monoxide (CO) monitor.
It has a digital display that shows only one reading.  It has alarms for a specific % LEL reading, low
and high oxygen, and a specific carbon monoxide reading. If the alarm levels are reached for any
of these responses, there will be a visual and audible indication. This will occur no matter what
function is being displayed at the time.  The audible alarm can be deactivated.  Air is drawn into the
instrument by a battery-powered pump.
SETUP

1.     Record the instrument serial number or ID number on the data sheet.

2.     Attach the sampling hose to the instrument.  Make sure the connection is- hand tight.


STARTUP

3.     Turn the FUNCTION control to the "HORN-OFF" position. Alarm signals will flash for
       all three chemicals, the "HORN OFF" green/yellow lamp will be off and % LEL will show
       in the readout.

4.     A low battery condition is indicated by a BATT  sign in the readout or by a steady horn.
       Inform an instructor/technician if this occurs.

5.     Set the readout to zero (00) by lifting and turning the LEL ZERO knob.  This must be done
       within 30 seconds of turning ON to prevent the possibility of activating the off-scale, LEL
       latching alarm.

6.     Press the SELECT button firmly to obtain % OXY on the readout.  Then set the readout to
       20.8% by adjusting the OXY CALIBRATE knob.

7.     Press the SELECT button  firmly to obtain PPM TOX on the readout.  Then set the readout
       to zero (00) by adjusting the TOX ZERO knob.

8.     Press the  RESET button.   (Note:  The "RESET" button will not reset the alarms if the
       exceed the alarm levels.)  The "HORN OFF"  green/yellow lamp will start flashing.  The
       light  indicates alarm  status.  When it  glows continuously, the  audible alarm is operable.
       When it blinks on and off, as  it does  now, it indicates  that the audible alarm has been
       deactivated.
10/93                                     5                                 Exercise 1

-------
LEAK TEST

9.     Momentarily hold a finger over the sample inlet or end of sample probe.  Observe that the
      flow indicator float (lower right hand corner of instrument face) drops out of sight, indicating
      no flow.   If the  float  does not drop out of sight,  check  the system for leaks.  If the
      instrument does not pass the leak test, inform an instructor/technician.
ALARM CHECK

The purpose of these steps is to check the meter readings at which the alarms will sound.

10.    Press the SELECT button until % LEL is displayed.  Adjust the LEL ZERO knob until the
       alarm sounds.  Record the  % LEL reading.  Set the reading back to zero and press the
       RESET button. The alarm should activate  at 25%.

11.    Press  the SELECT button until OXY  is displayed.   Turn the OXY CALIBRATE knob
       counterclockwise (decreasing the % oxygen reading) until the alarm sounds. Record the %
       OXY reading.  Adjust the reading back to  20.8% and press the RESET button. The lower
       alarm reading should be 19.5%.

12.    Turn the OXY CALIBRATE knob clockwise (increasing the % oxygen reading) until the
       alarm sounds. Record the % OXY. Adjust the reading back to 20.8% and press the RESET
       button. The upper alarm  reading should be 25%.

13.    Press the SELECT button until TOX is displayed.  Turn the TOX ZERO knob clockwise
       until the alarm is activated.  Record this reading.  Adjust the reading back to zero and press
       the RESET button.  The alarm should have activated at 35 ppm.

14.    If any of the alarm points are not what they should be, inform an instructor/technician.

15.    Turn the FUNCTION control to MANUAL for continuous readout of any one gas or to
       SCAN for  automatic scanning of the three gas readings.  Note:  All alarm functions  operate
       in either position.

16.    The instrument is ready for sampling.
CALIBRATION

17.    Open the clamp to the gas bag labeled "PENTANE 0.75%" and attach the sample line to the
       bag.  Draw a sample into the instrument until a constant reading is obtained.

18.    Record your readings on the data sheet. The instrument should give a reading of 50% LEL.
       Consult the instructor for proper oxygen and carbon monoxide readings.

19.    Disconnect the sample  line  and  clamp the bag.  Allow  fresh air to  flow through the
       instrument until the reading returns to zero.  Rezero the instrument,  if needed.


Exercise 1                                  6                                      10/93

-------
SAMPLING

20.    For field monitoring, the  alarm should be in the operable mode  (SCAN or MANUAL
       setting).   For this exercise, you may keep the audible alarm deactivated  to reduce noise
       levels.

21.    Note:  The Model 360 has a latching mechanism that engages if the % LEL exceeds 100.
       To disengage the lock, the instrument must be turned off and then turned back on in an area
       where the LEL readings are less than 100%. Room air will do.

22.    Sample each of the gas bags listed on the data sheet.  Record the readings.
SHUTDOWN

23.    When done sampling, flush fresh air through the instrument.  Turn the instrument OFF.
10/93                                     7                                  Exercise 1

-------
                                     STATION 3

                        Gastech  Model 1314 Gastechtor
The GasTech Model 1314 is a combination combustible, oxygen, and toxic monitor.  There is no
separate toxic sensor.  The "toxic"  response is provided by an amplification of the combustible
sensor (supersensitive CGI). Thus the toxic response is actually ppm combustible.  The readout is
an analog meter that only displays one reading.  The readout being displayed depends on the position
of the buttons on the side of the instrument.  It has a specific % LEL, low and high oxygen, and
toxic level alarms. The oxygen alarm will sound even if % LEL is being displayed and vice versa.
The toxic alarm, however, will only  sound if in the "PPM" mode.  The unit has a battery-powered
pump for drawing air.
STARTUP

1.     Attach the hose to instrument by means of the quick release fitting.

2.     Put the PPM/LEL switch in  the LEL (out) position, with the black indicator showing, and
       OXY/LEL switch also in the LEL (out) position.

3.     Press the POWER switch to turn the instrument on, with orange indicator dot showing. The
       meter will normally rise upscale and a pulsing or steady alarm signal may sound.  Audible
       hum of pump will be noticed.  The cause of the alarm condition (combustibles, oxygen, or
       both) can be identified by the blinking lights.

4.     Press the  BATT CK button and note the meter reading. If reading is close to or below the
       BATT CHECK mark on the  meter, consult an instructor/technician.

5.     Allow the instrument to warm up until the meter stabilizes (about a minute).  If a pulsed
       oxygen alarm continues to sound, turn the OXY CAL potentiometer clockwise to stop it.
       If the sound is steady, turn the potentiometer counterclockwise.

6.     With the hose inlet in a clean air location, turn the ZERO LEL potentiometer to bring the
       meter to "0" indication.  If this is  not possible, consult an instructor/technician.

7.     Put the OXY/LEL switch in the OXY (in) position, so that the orange indicator shows. Turn
       the OXY  CAL potentiometer to bring the meter to the 02 CAL mark (21 %).

8.     As a quick check, gently breathe into hose inlet and allow instrument to sample exhaled air.
       Reading should come down to  about 16%, and alarm should  sound at 19.5%.  Allow it to
       return to 21%, then put switch back in LEL position.

9.     These particular units have a high oxygen  alarm that  will sound  in a steady tone and the
       amber alarm lights will blink when reading reaches or exceeds 25%.
Exercise 1                                  8                                       10/93

-------
 10.    The instrument will automatically test for oxygen whenever it is used, and will give a pulsed
       audible and an amber light alarm if oxygen content drops to 19.5%.  It is not necessary to
       use the instrument with the switch in the OXY position unless  oxygen measurements  are of
       primary interest.  If both abnormal gas conditions exist simultaneously, both lights will blink
       in their normal pattern, but alarm will sound continuously.

 11.    For readings in the 0-100% LEL range, hold inlet at point to  be tested. Watch meter and
       observe maximum reading as taken from the upper set of graduations, 0-100% scale.  If
       reading rises above the alarm setting (20% LEL), a pulsed red light and an audible alarm will
       commence, and will continue as long  as reading remains above alarm point.

 12.    If the reading on the 0-100% range is imperceptible or very small, use  the sensitive range,
       0-500 ppm.  First allow to warm up  in the LEL range, and then push  range switch  to put
       circuit in PPM range (colored indicator showing).  Rezero  carefully with the ZERO LEL
       potentiometer.

       Because of the very high sensitivity of this range, the meter will tend to drift until instrument
       is thoroughly warmed up.  Always let  it run  for 5 minutes or  more,  whenever possible,
       before  operating  on the  PPM range.   Take the reading immediately  after zeroing,  and
       observe maximum deflection as taken from the middle set of graduations, 0-500 PPM  scale.
       The alarm will sound whenever the reading rises above the preset alarm level - 100 ppm.
CALIBRATION

13.    Put the PPM/LEL switch in the LEL (out) position.

14.    Unclamp the bag labeled "HEXANE 0.55%" and attach it to the sample inlet.  Record the
       reading  when it has stabilized.  The reading should be 50%.  If not, please inform the
       instructor.


SAMPLING

15.    Sample each of the gas bags listed on the data sheet. Record the readings.  DO NOT USE
       THE PPM SETTING UNLESS THE LEL RESPONSE IS VERY LOW.


SHUTDOWN

16.    When sampling  is complete, flush fresh air through the instrument.   Turn the instrument
       OFF.
JO/93
                                                                              Exercise 1

-------
  Ul
  LU

  I
  <
  O
                                                VI
                                                cs
                                                E
                                                T3
                                                (0
                                                au
                                                                                                           ro
                                                                                                          "re
                                                                                                          £.
                                                                                                           O>
                                                                                                          IE

                                                                                                          -o

                                                                                                           as


                                                                                                          _O

                                                                                                           0)
                                                                                                           w
                                                                                                           to
                                                                                                           O)
                                                                                                          •o

                                                                                                           3
                                                                                                           tn
                                                                                                           a>
                                                                                                           u
                                                                                                           (0
                                                                                                           a
                                                                                                           o
Exercise 1
10

-------
                                    QUESTIONS





1.     Did the alarms activate at the appropriate readings? Which instruments did not?
2.      Why do the different instruments give different responses to similar combustible gases?
3.      What are the hazards (if any) associated with each unknown bag?
10/93                                     11                                 Exercise 1

-------
4.      List the limitations  and advantages  of each instrument  for  monitoring  an unknown
       atmosphere.
       MSA 260/261:
       MSA 360:
       GasTech 1314:
Exercise 1                                 12                                     10/93      ™

-------
                                  EXERCISE #2

                      Photoionization  Detectors -  Survey


OBJECTIVE

Participants will learn how to calibrate and operate the HNU Model PI-101 Photoionization Detector.


PROCEDURE

Students will divide into groups as directed by the laboratory instructor. Each group will have an
HNU PI-101 Photoionization Detector with either a 10.2 eV or 11.7 eV lamp, and eight gas bags.
Also, five containers with unknown chemicals will be placed around the room.

       STATION 1:        Bag A        100 parts per million (ppm) toluene
                          Bag B        100 ppm acetone
oag B        luu ppm acetone
Bag C        100 ppm toluene/100 ppm acetone
Bag D        800 ppm acetone
Bag E        250 ppm acetone
Bag F        50 ppm acetone
Bag G        50 ppm hexane
Bag CH4      100 ppm methane
       STATION 2:        Five containers with unknowns
By following the instructions, sample each station and record your results.  A discussion of your
findings will be held at the end of the exercise.
10/93                                    13                                Exercise 2

-------
SETUP

1.      Record the instrument serial number or ID number on the data sheet.

2.      Record the lamp energy.


STARTUP

Refer to Figure 1 for location of instrument controls.

3.      Connect the probe.

4.      Turn the FUNCTION SWITCH to the BATTERY CHECK position.  The needle should
       deflect within or above the green arc.  If not, inform the instructor. If the red indicator light
       (low battery)  comes on, do not use the instrument.

5.      To ensure that the lamp will light, turn the FUNCTION switch to any RANGE setting and
       place a solvent based marker near the sample intake on the probe.  A  needle deflection
       should occur, thus indicating that the lamp is on.

6.      There are two methods of zeroing an instrument. For this lab, use METHOD 1.

       •     METHOD 1  - Turn the FUNCTION SWITCH to the STANDBY
             position and  zero  the  instrument  using the ZERO knob.   This
             procedure is used to zero the instrument electronically. If the SPAN
             setting is altered, the zero should be rechecked and adjusted.  Wait
             fifteen to twenty seconds to ensure that the zero reading is stable.  If
             necessary, readjust  the zero.

       •     METHOD 2  - Turn the FUNCTION SWITCH to  the range being
             used and rotate the ZERO knob until the meter reads zero. Now you
             have zeroed out background. If the SPAN setting is changed after the
             zero is set, the zero should be rechecked and adjusted.

       You are now  ready to calibrate  your instrument.


CALIBRATION

7.      The instructor will assist  the students in the calibration  procedure.   A compressed gas
       cylinder containing isobutylene will be used to calibrate the instrument. Set the FUNCTION
       SWITCH to the 0-200 RANGE setting.

8.      Connect the probe to the tubing from the ISOBUTYLENE cyclinder.  Unlock the SPAN
       knob by moving the black  lock  handle counter clockwise.   By adjusting  the SPAN setting
       between 0-100, obtain the  appropriate instrument reading.  The instructor will tell you the
Exercise 2                                 14                                     10/93

-------
      appropriate reading. Do not lock the SPAN knob at all during this lab exercise.  Record the
      SPAN setting at calibration on the data sheet.
SAMPLING

9.     When taking readings, adjust the FUNCTION SWITCH to get the maximum on scale needle
      deflection.  If the reading exceeds the meter range, adjust the FUNCTION SWITCH.

10.   Measure for contaminants in BAGS A, B, C, G, and CH4 and record the results.

11.   Take readings over the openings of each of the unknown containers.  Record the readings.


CALIBRATION CHANGE

12.   By  adjusting  the SPAN, calibrate the instrument to BAG B (acetone).   Measure the
      concentration of BAGS C, D, E, and F and record your results.  Then plot the instrument
      readings vs. actual concentration from BAGS B, D, E, and F on Graph 1.


SHUTDOWN

13.   Turn the FUNCTION SWITCH to the OFF position.
10/93                                   15                                Exercise 2

-------
    Low Battery Indicator
    Light (LED)
             Power Off
            Sensitivity
            Adjustment
            Hi-Vbltage
              Interlock
                                      Battery Check
                                      Position
                                                                         Ranges (ppm)
                                                                              Function
                                                                              Switch
                                                   12 Pin Interface Connector
                                                   between readout unit and
                                                   seosor.
                                                                              Zero Adjustment
                                Recorder Output
                                 (-5V DC)
                              FIGURE 1.  HNU PI 101  CONTROLS

Source:  Instruction Manual for Model PI 101 Photoionization Analyzer, 1975, HNU Systems, Inc.
Used with permission of HNU Systems,  Inc.
Exercise 2
16
10/93

-------
                                DATA SHEET
                                   TABLE 1
       INSTRUMENT MODEL
       I.D. NUMBER
       LAMP ENERGY
       GAS
       CONCENTRATION
       INSTRUMENT READING
       SPAN SETTING
                                   TABLE 2
        BAG
CONCENTRATION
INSTRUMENT
  READING
 RELATIVE
RESPONSE*
  A - TOLUENE
    100 ppm
  B - ACETONE
  C - TOLUENE/
    ACETONE
  G-HEXANE
    100 ppm
    100/100
    50 ppm
  CH, - METHANE
    100 ppm
* Relative Response = Instrument Reading -r Actual Concentration.  Multiply by 100% to get
% Relative Response.
10/93
               17
                         Exercise 2

-------
                                DATA SHEET
TABLE 3
SAMPLE LOCATION*
1
2
3
4
5
READING





*Add information about location of probe when taking the reading.
                                   TABLE 4
                             ACETONE CALIBRATION
        BAG
    ACTUAL
CONCENTRATION
INSTRUMENT
  READING
                          100 ppm
                          100/100
                         800 ppm
                         250 ppm
                          50 ppm
Exercise 2
                18
                              10/93

-------
     GRAPH 1. INSTRUMENT READING VS. TRUE CONCENTRATION
yuu
800
700
O)
	 600
05
0
rr 500
|400
D
"oo 30°
_c
200
100
n
















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































10/93
      0   100   200  300  400   500  600  700   800  900



         True  Concentration  (ppm)
19
Exercise 2

-------
                                    QUESTIONS


1.      Calculate and record the relative response for each of the chemicals in Table 2.



2.      Why is the reading for Bag C in Table 2 different from the reading in Table 4?
3.     From Graph 1, does the instrument accurately measure all four concentrations?  If you were
       going to measure acetone vapors at concentrations of 0-10 ppm, would this calibration curve
       be of value to you?
4.     Unknown 2 is found to be acetone.  Develop a method(s) using the HNU to determine the
       concentration of acetone at the location.
5.     You are using an HNU to survey a site and obtain a reading of 200. How do you report
       your findings and what additional information would you like recorded?
Exercise 2                                  20                                      10/93

-------
                                  EXERCISE #3

                     Flame lonization Detectors - Survey
OBJECTIVE
Participants will learn how to calibrate and operate the Foxboro Organic Vapor Analyzer OVA-128
in the survey mode.
PROCEDURE

Students will divide into groups as directed by the laboratory instructor. Each group will have an
Foxboro OVA-128 plus eight gas bags. Also, five containers with unknown chemicals will be placed
around the room.

       Station 1:     Bag A         100 parts per million (ppm) toluene
                    Bag B         100 ppm acetone
                    Bag C         100 ppm acetone/100 ppm toluene
                    Bag D         800 ppm acetone
                    Bag E         250 ppm acetone
                    Bag F         50 ppm acetone
                    Bag G         50 ppm hexane
                    Bag CH4       100 ppm methane
       Station 2:     Five sampling containers
By following the instructions, sample each station and record your results. A discussion of your
findings will be held at the end of the exercise.
10/93                                    21                                ExerdseS

-------
Please read each paragraph completely before following the directions and proceeding to the next
paragraph.
SETUP

1.      Record the instrument serial number or ID number on the data sheet.


STARTUP

2.      Turn off the charger and disconnect the charger cable from the instrument.

3.      Unlock the GAS SELECT dial and adjust it to 300 (i.e., a 3 in the window and 00 on the
       dial).

4.      Turn the VOLUME knob fully counter clockwise.

5.      Ensure that the SAMPLE INJECT VALVE and BACK FLUSH VALVE are in the full syl
       position.

6.      The toggle switches on this instrument have a lock to prevent accidental changes.  To move
       the toggle switch, lift and then move the lever.

7.      Move the INSTRUMENT switch to ON and allow 5 minutes for warm-up.

8.      Move the PUMP switch to ON.  You should hear the pump running.  Place the instrument
       in a vertical position and look at the SAMPLE FLOW RATE (rotameter at lower left of
       panel).   The flow rate (read at center of ball) should be 2.0 (liters/minute).  A reading
       between  1.5 and 2.5 is considered adequate.

9.      Set the CALIBRATE switch to XI0.  Adjust the CALIBRATE knob until the meter reads
       0.

10.    Open the H2 TANK  VALVE and H2 SUPPLY  VALVE  one and one-half turns counter
       clockwise. The TANK gauge should be 500 psi or higher.  The SUPPLY gauge should read
       between  10 and 12 psi.   If they do not, inform the instructor.

11.    Wait about 1 minute. Depress the red IGNITER BUTTON  (on the side of the pack) until
       the flame ignites or until 6  seconds have passed.  Flame  ignition  is  indicated by a sharp
       meter needle deflection towards 10 along with a small "pop" sound. Also, the meter needle
       should return to a reading above 0 instead of 0.  Do not depress the  button longer than 6
       seconds.  If the  flame does not ignite on the first try, wait a minute, and try again.  If it does
       not ignite on a second try, check that steps 1 through 10 have been completed. Then consult
       an instructor or technician for assistance.

12.    Use the  CALIBRATE knob to adjust the meter reading to zero.   Move the CALIBRATE
       switch to XI and rezero.


Exercise 3                                22                                     10193

-------
CALIBRATION

13.    Set the CALIBRATE switch to X10.

14.    Locate the METHANE calibration gas bag.  Methane is the normal calibration gas for the
      OVA.

15.    Open the bag clamp and attach the methane bag to the probe inlet.  It is important that the
      bag be open before attaching it so that a "flame out" does not occur from oxygen starvation.

16.    Unlock and adjust the GAS SELECT knob  so that the meter reading is equal to the bag
      concentration divided by  the CALIBRATE switch  setting.    For  example,  if the bag
      concentration is 90 ppm, then the reading should be 9 (90 divided by 10).

17.    Disconnect the gas bag and close the clamp.

18.    The GAS SELECT setting  should be about 300.   300 is the  "ideal" setting,  but your
      instrument may have a different reading. If the setting must  be adjusted above 400 or below
      200, internal calibration may be advisable.

19.    The instrument is now calibrated to methane and ready for survey purposes.
SAMPLING

20.    During the next two steps, change the CALIBRATE switch setting as necessary to get the
       maximum on-scale reading. If the meter reads above 10 on the X100 setting, report the
       reading as greater than 1000.

21.    Take readings of bags A, B, C and G. Record the data.

22.    Take readings at the five containers.  Record the readings and locations.


CALIBRATION

23.    Change the CALIBRATE switch to X10.

24.    Open and connect Bag B to the probe inlet.   Adjust the GAS SELECT knob until the
       instrument reads 10 on the XI0 range.

25.    Disconnect and  close the bag.  Use the CALIBRATE ADJUST knob to rezero, if needed.

26.    Take readings of bags C, D, E, and F.  Record the readings. Plot the readings from bags
       B, D, E, and F on GRAPH  1.
10/93                                     23                                 Exercise 3

-------
SHUTDOWN




27.    Close the H2 SUPPLY valve, then the H2 TANK valve.




28.    Move the INSTRUMENT switch to OFF.




29.    When the SUPPLY pressure gauge falls to zero, move the PUMP switch to OFF.
Exercise 3                              24                                  10/93

-------
                                DATA SHEET
                                  TABLE 1
       INSTRUMENT MODEL
       I.D. NUMBER
       CALIBRATION
       GAS
       CONCENTRATION
       INSTRUMENT READING
       GAS SELECT SETTING
                                   TABLE 2
        BAG
CONCENTRATION
INSTRUMENT
  READING
 RELATIVE
RESPONSE*
  A - TOLUENE
    100 ppm
  B - ACETONE
  C - TOLUENE/
    ACETONE
  G-HEXANE
    100 ppm
    100/100
    50 ppm
*Relative Response = Instrument Reading  -*• Actual Concentration.  Multiply by 100% to get
% Relative Response.
10/93
               25
                         Exercise 3

-------
                                DATA SHEET
TABLE 3
SAMPLE LOCATION*
1
2
3
4
5
READING





* Add information about location of probe when taking the reading.
                                   TABLE 4
                             ACETONE CALIBRATION
        BAG
    ACTUAL
CONCENTRATION
INSTRUMENT
  READING
GAS SELECT
  SETTING
        D
                         100 ppm
                          100/100
    800 ppm
                         250 ppm
                          50 ppm
Exercise 3
                26
                              10/93

-------
GRAPH 1. INSTRUMENT READING VS. ACTUAL CONCENTRATION (from Table 4)
auu
800
700
O)
	 600
05
0
rr 500
•+-»
c
92 400
"GO 30°
_c
200
100
n
















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































      0   100  200   300  400   500  600   700  800   900



         True Concentration  (ppm)
10/93
27
Exercise 3

-------
                                      QUESTIONS


1.      Calculate the relative response for each of the chemicals in Table 2.
2.      Why is the reading for Bag C in Table 2 different from the reading in Table 4?
3.     From Graph 1, does the instrument accurately measure all four concentrations? If you were
       going to measure acetone vapors at concentrations of 0-10 ppm, would this calibration curve
       be of value to you?
4.     Unknown 2 is found to be acetone.  Develop a method(s) using the OVA to determine the
       concentration of acetone at the location.
5.     You are using an OVA to survey a site and obtain a reading of 200.  How do you report
       your findings and what additional information would you like recorded?
Exercise 3                                  28                                       10/93

-------
                                  EXERCISE  #4

              Gas Chromatography - Organic Vapor Analyzer
OBJECTIVE
Participants will learn how to operate the Foxboro OVA-128 with gas chromatograph option as a
portable gas chromatograph.
PROCEDURE

The students will divide into groups as directed by the laboratory instructor.  Each group will have
a Foxboro OVA-128 with gas chromatograph option and three gas bags.

             Bag CH4:     Calibration gas
             Bag C:        Standard of 100 ppm toluene and 100 ppm acetone
             Unknown #1

By following the instructions of the  lab manual and instructor, each group will produce a gas
chromatograph for each bag. By comparing the results from the standard to the unknown, the group
will try to determine what chemicals  are present and at what concentrations. The results will be
recorded and discussed at the end of the exercise.
10/93                                    29                                Exercise 4

-------
Please read each paragraph completely before following the directions and proceeding to the next
paragraph.
SETUP

1.      Record the instrument serial number or ID number on the data sheet.


STARTUP

2.      For gas chromatograph use, the charger can remain on and connected to the OVA.

3.      Unlock the GAS SELECT dial and adjust it to 300 (i.e., a 3 in the window and 00 on the
       dial).

4.      Turn the VOLUME knob fully counter clockwise.

5.      Ensure that the SAMPLE INJECT VALVE and BACK FLUSH VALVE  are in the full out
       position.

6.      The toggle switches on this instrument have a lock to prevent accidental changes. To move
       the toggle switch, lift and then move the  lever.

7.      Move the INSTRUMENT switch to ON and allow 5 minutes for warm-up.

8.      Move the PUMP switch to  ON.  You should hear the pump running.  Place the instrument
       in a vertical position and look at the SAMPLE FLOW RATE (rotameter at  lower left of
       panel).   The flow  rate (read at center of ball) should be 2.0 (liters/minute).  A reading
       between  1.5 and 2.5 is considered adequate.

9.      Set the CALIBRATE switch to X10.   Adjust the CALIBRATE knob  until the meter reads
       0.

10.    Open the H2 TANK VALVE and  H2 SUPPLY VALVE one and one-half turns counter
       clockwise. The TANK gauge should be 500 psi or higher. The SUPPLY gauge should read
       between  10 and 12 psi.  If they do not, inform the instructor.

11.    Wait about 1 minute. Depress the red IGNITER  BUTTON (on the side  of the pack) until
       the flame ignites or until 6 seconds have passed.  Flame ignition  is  indicated by a sharp
       meter needle deflection toward 10 along with  a small "pop" sound.  Also, the meter needle
       should return to  a reading above 0 instead of 0.  Do not depress the button longer than 6
       seconds.  If the flame does not ignite on the first try, wait a minute, and try again. If it does
       not ignite on a second try, check that steps 1 through 10 have been completed.  Then consult
       an instructor or technician for assistance.

12.    Use the  CALIBRATE knob to adjust the meter reading to zero.  Move the CALIBRATE
       switch to XI and rezero.


Exercise 4                                 30                                      10/93

-------
CALIBRATION

13.    Set the CALIBRATE switch to XI0.

14.    Locate the METHANE calibration gas bag.  Methane is the normal calibration gas for the
      OVA.

15.    Open the bag clamp and attach the methane bag to the probe inlet.  It is important that the
      bag be open before attaching it so that a "flame out" does not occur from oxygen starvation.

16.    Unlock and  adjust the GAS SELECT knob  so that the meter reading is equal to the bag
      concentration divided by the CALIBRATE switch  setting.   For example, if the bag
      concentration is 90 ppm, then the reading should be 9 (90 divided by 10).

17.    Disconnect the gas bag and close the clamp.

18.    The GAS SELECT setting  should be  about 300.  300  is the  "ideal" setting, but your
      instrument may have a different reading.  If the setting must be adjusted above 400 or below
      200, internal calibration may be advisable.


GAS CHROMATOGRAPH SETUP

19.    Connect the strip  chart recorder to the OVA.  Move the HI/LO  switch (on the side of the
      recorder)  to the LO position. The chart paper should start moving and you should hear a
      clicking sound.  If the chart does not operate, check the cable connections.  Inform the
      instructor if the chart doesn't work.

20.    Turn the ZERO knob on the recorder (next to HI/LO switch) completely clockwise.

21.    Turn the OVA CALIBRATE knob to adjust the baseline (black line produced by the pin) on
      the chart.  Do not use the ZERO knob on the recorder.  The baseline should be  about 1/4
      inch (two  thin brown lines) above the thick brown line next to the sprocket holes.
22.
Locate the stopwatch.  Practice with the stopwatch  until you can do lap counting.  The
instructor will demonstrate.  Lap counting involves stopping the readout without stopping the
stopwatch timing.  This is useful for timing more than one peak.
STANDARD CHROMATOGRAM

23.     Open and connect the STANDARD (Bag C:  Acetone/Toluene) bag to the probe inlet.
       Watch the meter needle.  When the needle has deflected to its highest point, depress the
       SAMPLE INJECT VALVE and start the stopwatch. Disconnect and close the gas bag. If
       the needle passes 10, wait 3 seconds, then depress the INJECT VALVE.

       Keep the SAMPLE INJECT VALVE depressed until the end of the chromatogram.  The
       instructor will discuss how to determine when the chromatogram is done.


10/93                                     31                                 Exercise 4

-------
24.   Strike a line across the chart with a pen or pencil to indicate the start of a chromatogram.
      Write the OVA CALIBRATE SWITCH setting (XI, X10, X100) and the recorder HI/LO
      setting on the chart paper.

25.   Watch the chart paper or meter face for an upward needle deflection.   When the needle
      reaches a maximum reading and starts to drop, note the time. This is the top of the peak and
      the time is the retention time for the peak. Do this for each peak.  Record the retention
      times for each peak.

26.   If a peak is too small or goes off scale, you will need to rerun the standard at a different
      CALIBRATE SWITCH setting and/or different HI/LO  setting.   Table 1 shows the
      relationship between peak size and instrument settings.  For example, if a peak is off scale
      on a HIX10 setting, changing the settings to LOX10 or HIX100 would make the peaks 1/2
      or  1/10 the size of the original peaks.
TABLE 1
RECORDER RANGE
FACTOR
HI
LO
HI
LO
HI
LO
OVA SCALE
X1
XI
X10
X10
X100
X100
RELATIVE
PEAK SIZE
1
1/2
1/10
1/20
1/100
1/200
27.    When a chromatogram is done (i.e, the last peak is out and the baseline is back to normal),
       lift the SAMPLE INJECT VALVE.  The instrument is ready for another run.
SAMPLE CHROMATOGRAM

28.    Repeat steps 22 through 26 using the UNKNOWN sample bag.


SHUTDOWN

29.    Close the H2 SUPPLY valve, then the H2 TANK valve.

30.    Move the INSTRUMENT switch to OFF.
Exercise 4
32
10/93

-------
31.    Move the RECORDER RANGE SETTING switch to OFF.

32.    When the SUPPLY pressure gauge falls to zero, move the PUMP switch to OFF.
CALCULATIONS FOR QUALITATIVE EVALUATION

27.    (Optional) Tear off the strip chart and measure the distance from the injection point to the
      middle of the peak in mm (see Figure 1 below).
                          Retention time
                                   i
        Injection
                                                                    Time
                 FIGURE 1.  RETENTION TIME (DISTANCE) ILLUSTRATION

28.    Compare the retention times of the known standard and the unknown. If the retention times
      are relatively close, then the unknown can possibly be identified through comparison to the
      known.  For example, if a standard of acetone released at 144 seconds and a peak on our
      unknown was at 136 seconds, then we can assume that the peak was acetone.
QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS

29.    To find the concentration of a chemical that has been identified with a standard, you will
      need a ruler, a calculator, and a pencil.

30.    Draw a triangle that approximates the area of the curve similar to the example (Figure 2)
      below.
10/93
33
Exercise 4

-------
                              Area = 1/2 x base x height
                              Area = 1/2 b h
31.
32.
33.
                    FIGURE 2.  PEAK AREA ILLUSTRATION

Calculate the  area of the triangle for the standards and unknowns by using the following
formula:

                              Area = Vi(b)(h)

To compensate for the different instrument settings a corrected area formula must be used:

Corrected Area = OVA Setting x Recorder Range Factor  x Area of Triangle
                             X100
                              X10
                               XI
                                            HI  = .5
                                            LO = 1.0
To obtain the actual concentration of the unknown, divide the corrected area of the unknown
by the corrected area of the standard and multiply by the standard concentration.
  Concentration of unknown =
Corrected Area
Corrected Area
                                                         x Standard concentration
                                                  'standard
Exercise 4
                                     34
                                               10/93

-------
TABLE 2


CONCENTRATION
RETENTION TIME
RETENTION
DISTANCE (mm)
PEAK BASE (mm)
PEAK HEIGHT (mm)
PEAK AREA (mm2)
OVA SCALE
SETTING
RECORDER
SETTING
CORRECTED AREA
(mm2)
STANDARD BAG C
ACETONE









TOLUENE









UNKNOWN #1
PEAK 1









PEAK 2









PEAKS









10/93
35
Exercise 4

-------
                        CALCULATIONS
Exercise 4                       36                           JO/93

-------
                                     QUESTIONS


1.     Identify the peaks in Unknown #1.  For the peaks  that can not be positively identified, list
       the possible candidates.
2.     What are the concentrations of the identified peaks?  Compare your numbers with the actual
       concentrations (from the instructor).  Give reasons why your results may vary from the actual
       concentrations.
10/93                                      37                                  Exercise 4

-------
                          CHROMATOGRAPHY AND SURVEY GUIDE
                       FOXBORO CENTURY ORGANIC VAPOR ANALYZERS
       COMPOUND
ACETONE
ACETONtTRILE
ACRYLONFTRILE
ALLYL ALCOHOL
ALLYL CHLORIDE
BENZENE
BROMOETHANE
BROMOMETHANE
BROMOPROPANE
BUTADIENE. 1,3-
BUTANE
BUTANOL
BUTANOL.2-
BUTANONE.2-
BUTENE
BUTYL ACETATE
BUTYL ACRYLATE
BUTYL ACRYLATE.cert-
BUTYL FORMATE
BUTYL FORMATE.teit-
BUTYL METHACRYLATE
BUTYL METHYL ETHER.tert-
CAR3ON TETRACHLORDDE
CHLOROBENZENE
CHLOROFORM
CHLOROMETHANE
CHLOROPROPANE
CHLOROPROPANE.2-
CUMENE
CYCLOHEXANE
CYCLOHEXANONE
DECANE
 DIACETONE ALCOHOL
 DIBROMOETHANE.1.2-
 DtCHLOROBENZENE, 1.2-
 DICHLOROETH ANE. 1.1-
 DICHLOROETHANE.1,2-
 DICHLOROETH YLENE. 1,1-
 DICHLOROETHYLENE.traiu-l
 DICHLOROMETHANE
 DICHLOROPROPANE.1.2-
 DtCHLOROPROPANE.1.3-
 DIOXANE.p-


TWA .

ppm

750
40
2
2
1
1
200
5
*
1000
300
100
100
200
*
150
10
*
*
*
*
*
10
75
2
50
•
*
50
300
25
*
50
20
50
100
1
1
200
100
75
*
25
T-ll COLUMN

RR

*

82
64
98
27
45
185
72
23
73
36
58
46
55
75
43
67
60
75
48
64
60
57
8
179
57
56
79
55
18
92
43
69
56
56
119
70
89
49
40
84
96
76
23
tR'

sec

118
384
252
623
36
116
23
13
51
3
12
725
340
203
5
572
1099
293
338
111
1600
21
41
713
122
4
25
13
690
16
	
225
950
1168
4060
66
239
11
37
73
258
677
760

&



2.23
7.25
4.75
11.75
0.68
2.19
0.43
0.25
0.96
0.06
0.23
13.68
6.42
3.83
0.09
10.79
20.74
5.53
6.38
2.09
30.19
0.40
0.77
13.45
2.30
0.08
0.47
0.25
13.02
0.30
0.00
4.25
17.92
22.04
76.60
1.25
5.45
0.21
0.70
1.38
4.87
12.77
14.34
G-7A COLUMN . :: .;.•'•' ' .., ;: ; ' life-.

tR'

SfC

36
39
45
98
38
142
35
14
100
7
3
243
131
93
12
782
1577
567
319
112
3950
70
143
866
91
5
48
26
1910
161
1256
	
1017
536
	
66
124
36
55
43
203
397
242
• • • ..;•• .-'•'. *•'• ••' *';-SS£:.
a.



0.29
0.32
0.37
0.80
0.31
1.15
0.28
0.11
0.81
0.06
0.02
1.98
1.07
0.76
0.10
6.36
12.82
4.61
2.59
0.91
32.11
0.57
1.16
7.04
0.74
0.04
0.39
0.21
15.53
1.31
10.21
0.00
8.27
4.36
0.00
0.54
1.01
0.29
0.45
0.35
1.65
3.23
1.97
."•••• - •:::•"••: •*!&:.
SYNONYM ..:...•;.:/..
• '-.•:-•-- .

. .. : .-..:• -
-PROPANONE

VLN'YL CYANIDE



ETHYL BROMIDE
METHYL BROMIDE
PROPYL BROMIDE
BUTADIENE

BUTYL ALCOHOL
sec-BUTYL ALCOHOL
METHYL ETHYL KETONE



2-BUTYL ACRYLATE / PROPYLENE

2-BUTYL FORMATE



MONOCHLOROBENZENE
TRICHLOROMETHANE
METHYL CHLORIDE
PROPYL CHLORIDE
ISOPROPYL CHLORIDE
ISOPROPYL BENZENE
HEXAMETHYLENE


4-HYDROXY-4-METHYL-2-PENTANON"
ETHYLENE DIBROMIDE

-------
      COMPOUND
ENFLURANE
ETHANE
ETHANETHIOL
ETHANOL
ETHENE
ETHER
ETHYL ACETATE
ETHYL ACRYLATE
ETHYL BENZENE
ETHYL BUTYRATE
ETHYL FORMATE
ETHYL METHACRYLATE
ETHYL PROPIONATE
ETHYLENE OXIDE
FREON-11
FREON-113
FREON-114
FREON-123
FREON-12
FREON-21
FREON-22
HALOTHANE
HEPTANE
HEXADECANE
HEXAFLUOROPROPENE
HEXANE
1SOBUTANE
ISOBUTENE
ISOPRENE
ISOPROPYL ACETATE
 METHANE
 METHANOL
 METHYL ACETATE
 METHYL ACRYLATE
 METHYL CYCLOHEXANE
 METHYL CYCLOPENTANE
 METHYL ISOBUTYL KETONE
 METHYL METHACRYLATE
 METHYL SULFIDE
 NITROMETHANE
 NITROPROPANE
 NITROPROPANE.2-
 NONANE
 OCTANE
 PENTANE
 PENTANOL
 PENTANONE.2-

TWA
ppm
'
*
0.5
1000
*
400
400
5
100
*
100
*
•
1
1000
1000
1000
100
1000
10
1000
*
400
•
*
50
*
*
*
250
*
200
200
10
400
*
50
100
*
100
25
10
200
300
600
•
200
T-12. COLUMN
RJR
*
146
77
28
20
47
47
67
71
111
91
44
73
83
49
7
91
110
36
13
71
67
49
80
52
31
70
70
64
59
71
100
10
46
39
67
81
82
54
20
35
60
7
8
87
6
3
7
tR'
IOC
79
1
24
178
1
13
143
263
495
398
78
375
241
31
4
8
3
19
3
20
5
53
16
1764
1
7
3
2
9
155
1
139
93
197
20
9
468
291
27
1053
1893
1030
103
44
3
1771
365
a.

1.49
0.02
0.45
3.36
0.02
0.25
2.70
4.96
9.34
7.51
1.47
7.08
4.55
0.58
0.08
0.15
0.06
0.36
0.06
0.38
0.09
1. 00
0.30
33.28
0.02
0.13
0.06
0.04
0.17
2.92
0.02
2.62
1.75
3.72
0.38
0.17
8.33
5.49
0.5
19.37
35.72
19.43
1.94
0.83
0.06
33.42
6.3
C-24 COLUMN
tR'
sec
29
1
31
45
I
38
108
254
1054
588
43
514
274
35
24
43
3
22
5
17
3
51
232
	
2
88
14
10
32
180
1
64
49
107
230
114
353
266
35
73
285
191
1939
748
29
728
227
a.

" 0.24
0.0 1
0.25
0.37
0.01
0.31
0.38
2.07
8.57
4.73
0.35
4.18
2.23
0.23
0.20
0.35
0.07
0.13
0.04
0.14
0.02
0.41
1.89
0.00
0.02
0.72
0.11
0.08
0.26
1.46
0.01
0.52
0.40
0.37
2.23
0.93
2.37
2.16
0.23
0.59
2.32
1.55
15.76
6.08
0.24
5.92
1.85


-<

ET
ET
ET
Dl







EP
FL
TR


DI
Dt
CI
1-


P£

i_
IS
2-


M




4-

D






P
b
             SYNONYM
  -CHLORO-1,1,2rTRIFLUOROETHYL-Dl
   FLUOROMETHYL ETHER/ETHRAN1
 ETHYL MERCAPTAN
 ETHYL ALCOHOL
 ETHYLENE
  IETHYL ETHER
 EPOXYETHANE
 FLUOROTRICHLOROMETHANE
  RICHLOROTRIFLUOROETHANE
  .2-DtCHLORO-l 122-TETRAFLUOROET
  .2-DICHLORO-1.1.1-TRIFLUOROETH A
 DICHLORODIFLUOROMETHANE
 DtCHLOROFLUOROMETHANE
 CHLORODtFLUOROMETHANE
 2-BROMO-2CHLORO-11ITRIFLUOROET
  ERFLUOROPROPENE

  2-BUTANE / 2-METHYL PROPANE
  SOBUTYLENE / 2-METHYL PROPENE
  2-METHYL-1,3-BUT AD fENE
  METHYL ALCOHOL
7 4-METHYL-2-PENTANONE / HEXONE
  DIMETHYL SULFIDE
  PENTYL ALCOHOL
  METHYL PROPYL KETONE

-------
       COMPOUND
PENTANONE.3-
PROPANE
PROPANOL
PROPANOL.2-
PROPYL ACETATE
PROPYL ETHER
PROPYL FORMATE
PROPYLENE
FROPYLENE OXIDE
PYRIDINE
5TYRENE
TETRACHLOROETHANE, 1.1.1,
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
TETRAHYDROFURAN
TOLUENE
TRICHLOROETH ANE, 1,1,1-
TRICHLOROETHANE, 1,1.2-
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
TRIETHYLAMINE
TRIMETHYLPENTANE.2,2.4-
VINYL ACETATE
VINYL CHLORIDE
XYLENE.m-
XYLENE.o-
XYLENE.p-

KEY:
 •   No TWA levels available.

 TWA  8 Hour Time Weighted Average for
     Maximum allowable exposure.

 RR   Relative Response to METHANE in Percent =
     (Measured Response / Prepared Concentration) x 100.

 	 tR data not available

TWA.
ppm
'200...
1000
200
400
200
•
•
•
20
5
50
•
25
200
100
350
10
50
10
•
10
1
100
100
100
T-12 COLUMN
RR
%
.61
70
35
60
60
56
S3
36
66
109
92
31
67
47
126
101
95
54
59
91
40
38
107
106
106
tR'
. sec
355
1
351
153
283
36
157
2
46
	
1334
956
141
106
262
53
1158
104
	
14
116
5
563
804
545
a.

6.70
0.02
6.62
2.S9
5.34
0.68
2.96
0.04
0.87
0.00
26.11
18.04
2.66
2.00
4.94
1. 00
21.85
1.96
0.00
0.26
2.19
0.09
10.62
15.17
10.28
G-24 COLUMN
tR'
sec
257
5
102
57
286
217
111
4
40
	
1355
810
603
125
391
123
378
222
34
221
77
9
1135
1366
1140
A

2.09
0.04
0.83
0.46
2.33
1.76
0.90
0.03
0.33
0.00
11.02
6.59
4.90
1.02
3.18
1.00
3.07
1.30
0.28
1.30
0.63
0.07
9.23
11.11
9.27
                                                                                     SYNONYM
              DIETHYL KETONE

              PROPYL ALCOHOL
              SOPROPANOL
              1.2-EPOXYPROPANE
              PERCHLOROETHYLENE

              METHYL BENZENE   '
              METHYL CHLOROFORM
              ISOOCTANE
              1.3-D1METHYL BENZENE
              1.2-DIMETHYL BENZENE
              1,4-DIMETHYL BENZENE
tR
    Solute Retention Time from point of injection
tR'3 Adjusted Retention Time in seconds
tM = Gas Hotd-Up. or Dead Time
      tR' = tR - CM

a = Relative Retention as compared to a Reference
Reference Compound is 1,1,1-Trichloroechaae

Data collected at a chart speed - 1 cm/min. at
concentrations of 50 or 100 ppm, and at ambient
temperature

-------
HOW TO USE THIS CHART FOR IDENTIFICATION OF UNKNOWNS BY <3C
1. Calculate the Adjusted Retention time of Che Unknown solutes and of the Reference compound for Che selected
column.  This can be accomplished by either running the reference compound separately, under similar conditions
as the unknown will be run. or along with the questioned sample by introducing it into the sample scream via
direct injection, dilator accessory, or other like means. The tR' for any solute is equal to (he time elapsed
from the point of injection to the projection of the peak maximum, minus the gas hold-up time of the column.
The gas hold-up time is the time elapsed from the point of injection to the maximum deflection of the air peak.
(NOTE:  approximate hold-up times are 5 sees for a T-I2 column and 10 sees for a G-24 column.)

2. In order to minimise the effects of minor variation in operating conditions and in the stationary phase
loading of the columns, the parameter of Relative Retention (a) is used.  To calculate a. for a particular
solute on a given column, divide the tR' of the solute by the cR' of the reference compound.  If the value of a
fails within */- 10% of the chart value, Chen the chances are good that the questioned solute is one of the
compounds in this range.

3. To increase the probability of identifying an unknown solute, this chart provides the user with Che option
of Two-Column dimensional chromatography. By utilizing a second type column, one can calculate a  second a value
for the questioned solute.  If this value of a falls within •>•/- 10% of Che chart value, and the value of a for
(he previous columnn falls within +/- 10% of that chart value, Chen there is a high probability that the unknown
has been identified.       •

•i.  Laboratory GC analysis and standard preparation may be required for confirmation, depending upon the
 application.

-------
                                    EXERCISE #5

                                   Detector Tubes
OBJECTIVE

During this exercise, participants will learn how to do a leak check and a volume check of both a
Draeger and a Sensidyne detector tube pump and how to  use detector tubes quantitatively and
qualitatively.
INTRODUCTION

There are chemical indicators that use the reaction of a chemical reagent with the airborne chemical
of interest to produce a color change.  The intensity of the color change or the length of color change
is used  to determine the amount of airborne  chemical present.   The chemical reagent may be
impregnated on a piece of paper or tape and the color change read by eye or by an electronic device.
The chemical could also be placed in a glass tube called a colorimetric  indicator tube or detector
tube.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Colorimetric indicator tubes or detector tubes (Figure 1) consist of glass tube impregnated with an
indicating chemical.  A known volume of contaminated air passes through or into the tube.  The
contaminant reacts with the indicator chemical in the tube, producing a change in color whose length
or intensity is proportional to the contaminant concentration.

The tubes may have a preconditioning filter preceding the indicating chemical to:

       •      Remove  contaminants (other than the one  in question) that may interfere with the
              measurement.  Many have a prefilter for removing humidity.

       •      React with a contaminant to change it into a compound that reacts with the indicating
              chemical.
TYPES OF TUBES

Detector tubes can be classified by the way air is drawn into the tube:

       •      Short-term tubes use a hand pump to draw air through the tube for a sample duration
              of a few seconds to a few minutes.  This is used to give an instantaneous  sample.
              The hand pump may be a piston or bellows type pump. This exercise will use both
              types.  A piston pump has  a handle that is pulled to evacuate a cylinder of known
              volume.  Air is pulled through the tube to equalize the  pressure in the cylinder.


10/93                                      39                                  Exercise 5

-------
             MSA, Sensidyne, Enmet, and Matheson manufacture piston pumps.  In a bellows
             pump, the bellows is squeezed and released.  Air is pulled through the tube as the
             bellows expands.  Draeger and MSA manufacture bellows-type pumps.
                               Plug
                              Glass
                               vial
                               Plug
10


20


30


40


SO
                                        n m 5
                                                 Prefilter
                                               or reagent
 Indicating
  chemical
on silica gel
                          FIGURE 1. DETECTOR TUBE EXAMPLE


             Long-term tubes (pump) use a battery-operated pump to draw air through the tube
             over a longer period of time, usually 8 hours. These are used to determine 8-hour,
             time-weighted average exposures.

             Long-term tubes (dosimeter) do not use a pump.  Contaminants diffuse into the tube
             over a long period of time, usually 8 hours.  These also are used for 8-hour, time-
             weighted average exposure determination.  However, a pump  is not required for
             operation.
The three types of tubes are not interchangeable.  They are calibrated for their specific applications.
There are many more short-term tubes than there are long-term tubes.
Exercise 5
  40
                                   10/93

-------
Detector tubes can also be classified by the information generated the results:

       •      Chemical groups—Some tubes will react to a class of chemicals (e.g., alcohols or
              hydrocarbons).  They will only indicate that a chemical of a certain class is present.

       •      Specific chemicals—There are a few tubes  that only react to that specific chemical.
              Most  tubes have  a  specific chemical listed for  the  tube, but can react to other
              chemicals (interferences).

       •      Concentration ranges—There may also be different concentration ranges for the same
              chemical.   For example, there are tubes for carbon  monoxide with concentration
              ranges of 5-150 ppm, 10-300 ppm, 0.1-1.2% and 0.3-7%.
DETECTOR TUBE CONSIDERATIONS

There are several factors that determine the effective use of detector tubes.  These factors can be
found in the instructions issued with each box of tubes.

Chemical Group:  Some tubes are for a specific chemical and some are for a group of chemicals.

Lot #:   The instructions for the tubes may change with different model numbers or different lots.
Thus, the instructions should be matched with the proper tubes.

Expiration Date:  The chemicals used in the tubes deteriorate over time.  Because of this, the tubes
are assigned a shelf life and the expiration date is printed on the box. This varies from 1 to  3 years.

Pump Strokes/Volume/Time:  The total volume of air to be drawn through the tube varies with the
type of tube.  The volume needed is given as the number of pump strokes needed, i.e., the number
of times the piston or bellows is manipulated.  Also, the air does not instantaneously go through the
tube.  It may take 1 to 2 minutes for each volume  (stroke) to be completely drawn.   Therefore,
sampling times  can vary  from 1 to 30 minutes per tube.  This can make the use of detector tubes
time consuming.

Color Change:  The instructions will give the appropriate color change for indicating the chemical
of concern.  Other color  changes may be noted for interferences.  This information can be used to
check for the presence of other chemicals.

Interferences:  As mentioned previously, not every tube is specific.  For example,  an acetone tube
will also respond  to other ketones.  Thus, methyl ethyl ketone would be considered an interference
if one were checking for  acetone.  The instructions will give known interferences or color  changes
that are not for  the chemical  of interest.

Temperature/Humidity/Pressure:  The length of color change (stain) can be affected by temperature,
humidity and barometric  pressure.  If this is a problem, the instructions will note it and may give
correction factors. Cold  weather  slows the chemical reaction in the tube and reduces the reading.
Hot temperatures  increase the reaction and can cause a problem by discoloring the indicator even
JO/93                                       41                                   Exercise 5

-------
when a contaminant is not present. This can happen even in unopened tubes.  Therefore, the tubes
should be stored at a moderate temperature or even be refrigerated during storage.

Reusable?:  Most tubes  can only be used once, even if there is a negative result.  There are some
tubes, however, that can be reused the same day until a positive result is obtained.

Accuracy:  The accuracy of detector tubes vary.  Some studies have reported error factors of 50%
and higher for some uncertified tubes.  Some tubes  are certified to be ±25% accurate at readings
from 1 to 5 times the OSHA Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL) and ±35% at concentrations one-
half the PEL. Only a few tubes are presently certified.   Certification of detector tubes is being done
by a private organization - Safety Equipment Institute (SEI).

One factor that affects accuracy  is the interpretation of the end of the color change.  Some color
changes  are diffused and the endpoint is  not  definite;  others may have an  uneven  endpoint
(Figure 2).  When in doubt, use the highest value that would be obtained  from reading the different
aspects of the tube.
APPLICATIONS

Although there are many limitations and considerations for using detector tubes, detector tubes allow
the versatility  of being able to measure a wide range of chemicals with a single pump.  Also, there
are some chemicals for which detector tubes are the only direct-reading indicators.

They can be used to get a reading for a specific chemical in an atmosphere where a total vapor
survey instrument would  response to all  the chemicals in the atmosphere.   They also give an
immediate response.  Laboratory analysis  (see the Air Sample Collection section) that can identify
and quantify a chemical in a mixture takes time.

Manufacturers use  general tubes for identification in their HazMat kits.   These kits identify or
classify the contaminants  as a member  of a  chemical group such  as  acid gas, halogenated
hydrocarbon, etc.  This is done by sampling with certain combinations of tubes at the same time by
using a special  multiple  tube holder or  by  using  tubes in a  specific  sampling sequence.  All
manufacturers of detector tubes have  some kind of system for hazard categorization.  Detector tube
manufacturers are listed in the Manufacturers and Suppliers of Air Monitoring Equipment section of
this manual.
SAFETY

Do not directly  inhale the contents of the bags and keep the bags closed when not in use.  The
contents of the gas bags, if released into the room, will not pose a hazard to the occupants.

Breaking the tips off the detector tubes can  create a hazard.  Please  ensure that the glass tips are
discarded into the containers provided and not onto the table or floor.  The tube breakers built into
the pumps can propel bits of glass. Direct the glass into the container provided. The instructor will
demonstrate proper procedures.  The  ends  of the detector tubes  are also  sharp, so handle them
carefully.


Exercise 5                                   42                                       10/93

-------
Eating or drinking is not allowed during this exercise because it is nearly impossible to prevent small
shards of glass from being deposited on the desk, table, or floor. Also, check the work area so that
you do not pick up glass on your hands or arms.
PUMP CHECK - DRAEGER
Leak Test

The purpose of this test is to ensure that air is going through the tube and not around it or through
a leaky valve.

1.     Insert an  unopened tube into the socket of the pump. Do not use your finger to seal the
       orifice. The instructor will demonstrate why not.  .

2.     Squeeze the pump completely and release.  If the indicator  mark has not appeared in 15
       minutes, the pump passes the test.  You may want to go to the Sensidyne pump check while
       this is taking place.

3.     If the pump fails the test, inform the instructor.

4.     Remove tube from the socket.

5.     (New model pump) Press counter reset button with a ball point pen or end of unopened tube
       to set at zero.
Volume Check

The purpose of this step is make sure that the pump is drawing the specified volume (100 cubic
centimeters or milliliters).   The tubes are calibrated for this volume.  If the volume is not within
limits, the tubes can not be used quantitatively.

6.      Break off the tips of a tube or use a previously opened tube.

7.      Connect the detector tube and pump to the apparatus as shown in Figure 2.
10/93                                      43                                  Exercise 5

-------
                                                 Flexible tubing
         Buret
          Soap
        solution^
                                                           Detector tube
                                                              Detector tube
                                                              •""  pump
              FIGURE 2.  DETECTOR TUBE PUMP VOLUME CHECK APPARATUS

8.      Start a bubble at the mouth of the inverted buret by just touching the soap solution to the
       mouth of the buret.

9.      Squeeze the bellows pump in order to pull the bubble up the buret.  Continue to squeeze and
       release the pump until the bubble stops above the "0" mark on the buret.  This maneuver
       may require disconnecting the flexible tubing after the bubble passes the "0" mark.

10.    Start with the bellows  fully expanded.  Reconnect the detector tube to the tubing.  Record
       the start point (ml)  in Table 1.

11.    Squeeze and release the pump.

12.    When the bubble stops, record the stopping point (ml).

13.    The difference in the two points (the travel volume) is the volume pulled by one stroke of
       that pump.  This volume should be between 95 and 105 ml (100 ml ±_ 5%).
14.    You may repeat the test to see whether the results are consistent.

Exercise 5                                 44
10/93

-------
PUMP CHECK - SENSIDYNE


Leak Test

1.      Insert an unbroken tube into the orifice of the pump.

2.      Align the index marks on the pump handle and the pump cap.  Pull the handle straight out
       as far as it will go.  It should lock in place.

3.      Wait 1 minute.  Turn the handle 1/4 turn and release the handle.  Hold the pump barrel
       firmly as the handle will pop back rapidly if the pump does not leak.  The handle should
       return to within 1/4 inch of the cap.  If the pump is equipped with a "Flow Finish Indicator,"
       the red button will remain down if there is no leak.

4.      If the pump fails the test,  inform the instructor.


Volume Check

5.      Break off the tips of a tube or use a previously opened tube.

6.      Connect the detector tube and pump to the apparatus as shown in Figure 2. An adapter may
       be needed because of the small diameter of the tube.

7.      Start a bubble  at the mouth of the inverted buret by just touching the soap solution to the
       mouth of the buret.

8.      Pull the handle back in order to pull the bubble up the buret.  Continue to pull the handle
       until the bubble stops above  the  "0"  mark  on the  buret.  This maneuver may require
       disconnecting the flexible tubing after the bubble passes the "0" mark.

9.      Start with the piston empty (handle fully in).  Reconnect  the detector tube to the tubing.
       Record the start point (ml) in Table 1.

10.    Pull back the pump handle all  the way.

11.    When the bubble stops, stop the stopwatch.   Record the time and the stopping point (ml).

12.    The difference in the two points (the travel volume) is the  volume pulled by one stroke of
       that pump.  This volume should be between 95 and 105 ml (100 ml + 5%).

13.    You may repeat the test to see if the results are consistent.
10/93                                      45                                   Exercise 5

-------
QUANTITATIVE RESULTS - DRAEGER AND SENSIDYNE

The pumps and detector tubes will be used to determine the concentration of two chemicals. The
Draeger pump and tube will be used to determine the concentration of carbon dioxide in the gas bag.
The Sensidyne pump and tube will be used to determine the concentration of isopropyl alcohol in the
air above a beaker of liquid.

1.      Read the instructions for the detector tube.

2.      Determine the number of pump  strokes needed; the color change expected; and  any
       adjustments to the reading.

3.      Use a fresh tube.  Break off both ends of the tube.  Insert the opened tube into the pump
       orifice with the arrow on the tube pointing towards the pump.  Sample the bag (carbon
       dioxide) and the air above the liquid (isopropyl alcohol).  Do not pull liquid into the tube.
       (This  is  air, not water, monitoring.) Liquid drawn into the tube can produce a change even
       if the  chemical is not present.

4.      Record your results on Table 1.
CHEMICAL CLASSIFICATION - DRAEGER

In this step,  a series of Draeger tubes will  be  used to determine the types of chemicals in an
unknown mixture.  The flow chart on the next page will  be used to determine the mixture's
components.  The chart was provided by National Draeger, Inc.  Other manufacturers have similar
systems for chemical classification.

This sample taking schedule refers to a selection  of substances which occur frequently in practice.
Other situations may necessitate another sequence of measurements and, the case being, the use of
additional detector tubes, or measurements according to other procedures must be carried out. (from
National Draeger, Inc.)

The information on the next two pages has been reprinted with the permission of National Draeger,
Inc., Pittsburgh, PA.   This information can also be found in their Haz Mat Kit.  Similar flow
charts/decision logics have also been developed by MSA and Sensidyne for use with their detector
tubes.

1.     Read the  instructions for the tubes.

2.     Use the tubes to sample the unknown atmosphere.

3.     Record the result in the appropriate space in Table 2.

4.     Repeat process with all the tubes provided.

5.     Extra space is provided should any special tubes be used.
Exercise 5                                 46                                      10/93

-------
Safety Tips

The POLYTEST and HYDROCARBON tubes use sulftiric acid as a reagent. When the bellows is
squeezed, an aerosol (smoke-like) containing the acid will be emitted. Avoid breathing the "smoke."
If you think you may have some problems with the aerosol, please inform your instructor.  You
should not have any problems unless you are more sensitive than the average person.
10/93                                     47                                 Exercise 5

-------
         Detection of unknown substances by  means of DRAEGER detector tubes*
                            Detection of various organic and some inorganic substances:
                                                     Polytest
 e.g.. Acetone        Gasoline (engine fuels)   Liquid gases                 Perchloroethylene
    Acetylene       Benzene             (propane, butane)              Catbon disuKide
    Arsenic hydride   Ethylene             Carbon monoxide, Monoslyrene    Hydrogen sulfide
                               Municipal gas (with more tharr 2 vol. % of CO)
                               Nitrogen monoxide (NO)
                               Toluene, xylene. trichloroethylene
                     positive
     Detection of various organic substances:
               Ethyl acetate 200/a
            positive

              I
      Detection of some
  halogenated hydrocarbons:
      Methyl bromide 5/b
 e.g., esters of acetic acid, alcohols, ketones, benzene,
     toluene, benzine hydrocarbons
e.g.. methyl bromide UN N°
    1062 (chloroform, dichlo-
    roethylene, dichloroethane,
    dichloropropane), trichlo-



>.
'



>.



>,
'




Detection of important
aromatic hydrocarbons:
Benzene 0.05
e.g., benzene UN N* 1114
(ethyl benzene, toluene
and xylene in small
quantities discolor the
prelayer)
.
Detection of ketones:
Acetone 100/b
e.g.. acetone UN N° 1090
methylisobutyl ketone,
methylethyl ketone
•
Detection of alcohols:
Alcohol 100/a



Detection of
propane butane:
Hydrocarbon 0.1 %/b
e.g., propane UN N" 1978

Detection of CO:
Carbon monoxide 10/b
e.g., CO UN N° 1016


of other substances may be


4



4



4


  e.g., alcohol UN N° 1096
     butanol. methanol,
     propanol
                                                                                       Detection of amines:
       Hydrazine 0.25/a
e.g.. triethylamine UN N° 1296
    (ethylene diamine,
    hydrazine. ammonia)
                                                                                        Detection of acid-
                                                                                       reacting substances:
                                                                                         Formic acid 1 /a
                                                                                  e.g.. hydrochloric acid UN N°
                                                                                      1789, HNO,, Cl,, NO,,SO2
                                                                                         Further detection
                                                                                  e.g., methane, ethane, H2,
                                                                                      CO] and other substances
                                                                                      may be necessary
                            negative
 'Important: This sample taking schedule refers to a selection of substances which occur frequently in practice. Other situations may
            necessitate another sequence of measurements and, the case being, the use of additional detector tubes, or measurements
            according to other procedures must be carried out.
                        ©\ National  Draeger,  Inc.
                                  101 Technology Drive (Shipping) • P.O. Box 120 (Mailing) • Pittsburgh. PA 15230 • 412/787-8383 • Telex: 86-6704
Exercise 5
     48
                        10/93

-------
       Examples for the (qualitative) indication response of the DRAEGER Polytest tubes

The results were obtained under the following test conditions:
                  Temperature 20°C; Humidity 50% relative; All tests carried out with pure substances
Substance '
Acetone
Acetone
Acetylene
Acetylene

Ursine
Arsine

Benzine (Gasoline)
Benzine (Gasoline)
Benzene
Benzene
Butane
Butane

Carbon disulfide
Carbon disulfide
Carbon monoxide
Carbon monoxide

Ethylene (ethene)
Ethylene (ethene)

Nitrogen monoxide (NO)
Nitrogen monoxide (NO)

Perchloroethylene
Perchloroethylene
Propane
Propane

Styrene (monostyrene)
Styrene (monostyrene)
Toluene
Toluene
Trichloroethylene
Trichloroethylene
Xylene
Xylene
Concentration
50OO ppm
above liquid
200 ppm
high cone.
(over 1 %)
10 ppm
high cone.
(over 1 %)
50 ppm
above liquid
100 ppm
above liquid
100 ppm
high cone.
(over 1%)
10 ppm
above liquid
100 pprn
high cone.
(over 1 %)
500 ppm
high cone.
(over 1 %)
50 ppm
high cone.
(over 1 %)
50 ppm
above liquid
500 ppm
high cone.
(over 1%)
500 ppm
above liquid
200 ppm
above liquid
50 ppm
above liquid
500 ppm
above liquid
Number
of strokes
of the bel-
lows pump
5
5
5
5

5
5

5
5
5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5

5
5

5
5

5
5
5
5

5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Length of Discoloration
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
completely colored

approx. 1 0 mm
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
approx. 10 mm
Notes on the indication
brownish green
brownish
brownish green
brownish

brownish green
brownish

brownish green
brownish
brownish
brownish
faded green (spotty)
brownish green

greenish
brownish green
brownish green
brownish

brownish green
brownish

brownish green
brownish with
bleaching effect
greenish
brownish green
faded green (spotty)
brownish green

brownish
• brownish
brownish
brownish
brownish green
faded yellow
brownish
brownish
Examples for the (qualitative) indication response of the DRAEGER tubes for ethyl acetate 200/a

The results were obtained under the following test conditions:
                  Temperature 20°C; Humidity 50% relative; All tests carried out with pure substances
Substance
Acetone
Acetone
Benzene
Benzene
Ethyl alcohol
Ethyl alcohol
Octane
Octane
Toluene
Toluene
Xylene
Xylene
Concentration
3000 ppm
above liquid
500 ppm
above liquid
2000 ppm
above liquid
100 ppm
above liquid
500 ppm
above liquid
500 ppm
above liquid
Number
of strokes
of the bel-
lows pump
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Length of Discoloration
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
completely colored
completely colored
approx. 5 mm
approx. 20 mm
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
approx. 10 mm
completely colored
Notes on the indication
greenish
greenish
very pale grey
greenish grey
greenish
greenish
grey-brown-greenish
greenish
greenish grey
greenish grey
greenish brown
greenish brown
   10/93
National  Draeger,  Inc.
101 Technology Drive (Shipping) • P.O. Box 120 (Mailing) • Pittsburgh. PA 15230 • 412/787-8383 • Telex- 86-6704

               49                                  Exercise 5

-------
                                     SENSIDYNE
 ID NUMBER
                                     PASS  FAIL
LEAK CHECK
PASS   FAIL
 VOLUME CHECK
 BURET STOP POINT (ml)
 BURET START POINT (ml)
 TOTAL VOLUME
 SAMPLE TIME
 ACCEPTABLE VOLUME?
                                    PASS  FAIL
PASS   FAIL
                                 ISOPROPYL ALCOHOL
                                                         CARBON DIOXIDE
 UNADJUSTED READING
 READING ADJUSTED FOR
 TEMPERATURE
 READING ADJUSTED FOR
 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE"
a The acceptable volume for a full pump stroke is 100 ml ± 5% (i.e., between 95 and 105 ml).
b Assume the sampling conditions were 30'C and 720 mm barometric pressure.
Exercise 5
                                     50
             10/93

-------
TABLE 2
NAME OF TUBE
POLYTEST
METHYL BROMIDE
ETHYL ACETATE
BENZENE
ACETONE
ALCOHOL
HYDROCARBON
CARBON MONOXIDE
HYDRAZINE
FORMIC ACID





READING/INDICATION















What types of chemicals are present in the mixture?
10/93
51
Exercise 5

-------
                                  QUESTIONS





1.  Based on your test results, how long should you wait between pump strokes for the MSA?
2.  What factors could affect the detector tube results?
3.  Does the CO2 concentration exceed the PEL?  REL?  TLV?  IDLH?
4. Does the isopropyl alcohol concentration exceed the PEL? REL?  TLV?  IDLH?
Exercise 5                               52                                   10/93

-------
                                   EXERCISE #6

                        Direct-Reading Aerosol Monitors
OBJECTIVE
Participants will learn how to operate the MIE Real-Time Aerosol Monitor Model RAM-1 and the
MIE MINIRAM Personal Monitor Model PDM-3.
DESCRIPTION OF EQUIPMENT

The RAM-1 and the MINIRAM are portable,  self-contained aerosol monitors.  Their detection
system is based on the detection of near-forward, scattered, near-infrared radiation.

The RAM-1 uses a pump to draw air into the unit to the sensors.  It uses an air screen to prevent
contamination of the sensors.  The MINIRAM does not require a pump. Air passes through the
sensing volume by convection, circulation, ventilation and personnel motion.  The sensors are also
in direct contact with the environment.  Thus, there is a chance the sensors may get covered with
dust.  The MINIRAM sensors require cleaning on a regular basis.

Both units indicate the aerosol concentration in milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3).  Both use a
digital display. The MINIRAM's displayed reading is updated every 10 seconds.  The RAM-1 has
a variable time display.

The RAM-1 has a range of 0.000-200.0 mg/m3.  The readout range is selected by the operator. The
MINIRAM normally operates in the 0.00 to 9.99 mg/m3 range. Whenever a 10-second concentration
exceeds 9.99 mg/m3, the MINIRAM automatically switches to the 0.0 to 99.9 mg/m$ range and
remains in that range  as long as the measured  10-second concentration exceeds 9.99 mg/m3.
Otherwise the MINIRAM reverts to its lower range display.

The RAM-1 only displays real-time concentrations.  A output device can be connected to record
data. The MINIRAM can store data for later output and for TWA calculations. Thus, it can be used
as a direct-reading monitor and a dosimeter.

Both instruments can be powered by internal batteries or an external AC source.

It is important to remember that these instrument only give total or respirable quantities of aerosols.
They do not give the composition of the aerosol.  To determine the composition of the aerosol, a
sample must be taken  and analyzed.  Refer  to the Air Sample  Collection section of the course
manual.
10/93                                     53                                 Exercise 6

-------
MIE MINIRAM PERSONAL MONITOR MODEL PDM-3
Before using the instrument without the charger, charge the MINIRAM for a minimum of 8 hours.
Initial Condition

       •     Blank display—Indicates that the MINIRAM has not been in the measurement mode
             for 48 hours or more, and is in the minimum power off mode.

       •     "OFF" display—MINIRAM has been in the off mode for less than 48 hours.

       •     Concentration display  that changes or  "blinks"  once every  10 seconds:  the
             MINIRAM is in the measurement mode.
Controls (refer to Figure 1)
"MEAS'
 "ZERO"

 "TIME"
When this button is pressed, the measurement mode will start.  Once the MEAS
mode has been entered, this sequence can only be interrupted by pressing OFF.
Pressing ZERO, TWA, SA, TIME, or ID# only affects the display during the time
the keys are pressed.

The readout will first display "GO" (or "CGO" if TIME is also pressed) followed by
the last concentration reading or " .00."

Approximately 36  seconds later, the first new  10-second-averaged concentration
reading is displayed. The reading will be updated and displayed every 10 seconds.

The MINIRAM will now run in the measurement mode for 500 minutes (8 hours and
20 minutes), after which time it will stop, displaying the OFF reading.  It will retain
in storage the concentration average and elapsed time information.

If both MEAS and  TIME are pressed at the same time (press TIME first and while
depressing it actuate MEAS) the MINIRAM will display  "CGO," and will then
operate as above (i.e., pressing MEAS only), except that after the first 8.3-hour run,
it will restart automatically  and  continue to  measure for an indefinite number of
8.3-hour runs, (with the battery charger) until the OFF key is pressed, or until the
batteries are exhausted. Concentration averages and timing  information for the last
seven 8.3-hour runs will remain in storage at any give time.

When instrument displays "OFF," pressing this button initiates the  ZERO procedure.

During the measurement mode, if TIME is pressed, the display will show the elapsed
time, in minutes, from the start to the last measurement run.  The MINIRAM will
automatically return to concentration display after the TIME key is released.
Exercise 6
                             54
10/93

-------
                      1.85  -
                       OVR
                       ID
                       BAT
              \/_
              '\
  .— MIE
     _^ MINIRAM

       AEROSOL

       MONITOR

MOOEL PDM-»
                                           (CLIP)
"TWA"
"SA"
"PBK"
"OFF"
             FIGURE 1. FRONT PANEL OF MINIRAM

During the measurement mode, if the time-weighted average (TWA) is pressed, the
display will indicate the average concentration in milligrams per cubic meter (mg/m3)
up to that instant, from the start of the last run. The value of TWA is updated every
10 seconds.  After releasing the TWA key, the MINIRAM display returns to the 10-
second concentration display.

During the measurement mode, pressing SA (Shift-Average) will provide a display
of the  aerosol concentration,  up to that moment, averaged over an 8-hour shift
period.

With the MINIRAM in the off mode, the stored information can be played back by
pressing PBK (Play Back). Pressing the PBK key for more than 1 second will cause
stored data to be automatically played back through the MINIRAM display:  First,
the identification number is displayed with the ID indicator bar on; next the shift or
run number  (i.e., 7 through 1, starting with the last run) is shown (with the OVR
indicator bar on as identification); followed by the sampling time in minutes, for that
run; followed by the off-time between the last and next run (in tens of minutes:;
finally, the average in mg/m3.  This sequence is repeated seven times.  An average
reading of 9.99 indicates that  a significant overload condition occurred during that
run. The total time required for the complete automatic playback on the MINIRAM
display is approximately 70 seconds.

When  this key is pressed,  the  MINIRAM  will  discontinue whatever  mode is
underway displaying "GCA" followed by the display segments check ("8.8.8=") and
finally  "OFF."  The MINIRAM will then remain in this reduced power condition
(displaying "OFF").
10/93
                              55
                                                            Exercise 6

-------
Display

During the measurement mode, the display indicates the present concentration in mg/m3. If one of
the function buttons is pushed, the information indicated in CONTROLS is displayed.  If a bar
appears in the display, the bar's location indicates one or more of the following:

"OVR"        The concentration exceeds the range of the instrument or there is an overload due to
              reflected line (e.g., sunlight).
"ID"          This indicates that the ID number is being displayed and not a concentration.

"BAT"        This indicates a low battery.


Zero Procedure

1.     Zeroing must be performed in a clean-air environment.  This can be done by using a clean
       room or clean-bench, flowing clean air through the sensing chamber, or using an air-
       conditioned office (without smokers).

2.     Press OFF and wait until the display indicates "OFF."

3.     Depress the ZERO button. Wait until the  display again indicates  "OFF."  The average of
       four consecutive 10-second zero  level measurements will then be stored by the MINIRAM
       as the new ZERO reference value.  The ZERO reference value  will be subtracted from
       subsequent  readings.   When operating the MINIRAM is  high particle  concentration
       environments (>5 mg/m3) the zero value should be updated approximately every 8 hours.
       At aerosol concentrations below  approximately 1 mg/m3 this update may only be required
       once a week.


Start Measurement  Cycle

4.     Place the MINIRAM in the area to be monitored. The instrument should be placed vertically
       (i.e., display/control panel facing upwards) by clipping it to a belt, shoulder strap, etc.

5.     If the MINIRAM shows a blanked display, press OFF and wait until the display reads "OFF"
       (approximately 5 seconds after pressing OFF) before pressing MEAS to initiate measurement
       cycle.

6.     If the MINIRAM  shows "OFF," press MEAS directly to initiate measurement cycle (there
       is no need to press OFF first, in this case).

7.     Press MEAS.

8.     Observe the readings for 1 minute to verify that the levels change every 10 seconds and that
       the OVR bar is not displayed.
Exercise 6                                 56                                       10/93

-------
9.     Avoid objects being placed in the sensing chamber.  Also avoid direct sunlight scattering in
       the sensing chamber.

10.    At the end of the sampling period, press "TIME."  Record the sample duration in Table 1.

11.    Press the TWA button.  Record the reading in Table 1.

12.    Press OFF.
TABLE 1
INFORMATION
INSTRUMENT SERIAL #
START TIME
TWA
SHIFT AVERAGE (SA)
OFF TIME
RESULTS





MIE REAL-TIME AEROSOL MONITOR MODEL RAM-1

In the following procedure, the numbered buttons, displays, and switches refer to the illustration of
the RAM-1 in Figures 2 and 3.
Startup

1.     Lift up protective cover of control panel.

2.     Place selector switch (1) in battery (BATT) position.

3.     Place inlet valve (2) in CLEAR position (horizontal).

4.     Replace sealed cap  on inlet valve with the restrictor orifice.

5.     Switch instrument on (3) and check battery voltage. The digital readout (4) should indicate
       between 6.0 and 6.6 volts. If not, inform the instructor. The reading should be identified
       by a display of VDC (volts DC). Low battery voltage is indicated by a flashing "VDC" on
       the right-hand side of the display, whenever the selector switch is not in the BAT position.
10/93                                      57                                  Exercise 6

-------
Zeroing

6.     Check that the inlet valve is in the CLEAR position (horizontal). Place the selector switch
       in the 0-200 position.  The letter "m"  should appear to the right  of the display reading,
       indicating that the instrument is set to read concentration measurements.

7.     Place the time constant switch (5) in the 2-second position.

8.     Allow 1 minute for instrument to stabilize (warm-up). IMPORTANT!

9.     If necessary, lift the cover over the ZERO control (6) and adjust the control until a reading
       of 00.0 is obtained.

10.    Switch the selector to the 0-20 position and repeat step #9.

11.    Switch the selector to the 0-2 position and repeat step #9.  Readings may fluctuate.  Try to
       obtain an average reading of 0±0.005.
Secondary Calibration

12.    Keep inlet valve in its CLEAR position.

13.    Set the range selector to the 0-20 position.

14.    Unlock the hinged flow chamber cover and place in the horizontal position.
Exercise 6
                                 CLEAR
                                                           MIE
                                                    «VDC CHARGE
                                              8     6
                                FIGURE 2. RAM-1 TOP VIEW
58
10/93

-------
                        Filters
Desiccant
12    11
                              FIGURE 3. RAM-1 SIDE VIEW

15.    Push the reference scatterer knob (REF SCAT) (9) inward until a positive stop is detected.
       The pump will automatically shut off. The letter "K" should be flashing in the upper right
       side of the display.  Allow the reading to stabilize for 30 seconds.

16.    See if the instrument reading corresponds with the factory calibration label (10) by the (REF
       SCAT).

17.    If the indicated readings differ by more than 5%, adjust the CAL control (7) as required.
       The CAL control has a lock that must be disengaged before attempting to turn the knob.
       Allow  to stabilize and repeat if required.  Relock the CAL control.

18.    Pull the REF SCAT back out.

19.    Close the flow chamber cover and tighten thumb-screws.


Measurement Procedures

20.    Switch RAM on.

21.    Select  measurement range (usually the 0-20 position).

22.    Select  desired time constant (usually 2 seconds).

23.    Place inlet valve in SAMPLE position (vertical downwards).

24.    Check the flow meters. The TOTAL (11) should read about 2 and the PURGE (12) should
       read about 0.2 (or 10% of TOTAL). Adjust the total flow rate with the flow adjust screw
10/93
    59
                       Exercise 6

-------
      (8). Adjust the purge flow with the black valve on the rotameter. If the rotameter is pegged,
      check that the inlet valve is in the SAMPLE position.

25.    Measure the aerosol concentrations in the areas designated by the instructor.

26.    If the aerosol concentration exceeds the maximum selected range, the RAM-1 will indicate
      1 with all zeros blanked out. If this occurs, change the range selection to higher ranges as
      needed.

27.    Check and update zero periodically.

28.    BEFORE SHUTTING OFF THE RAM-1, CLOSE THE INLET VALVE (CLEAR
      POSITION) AND OPERATE FOR 3 MINUTES TO ALLOW PURGING OF THE
      DUSTS INSIDE THE OPTICAL CAVITY.

29.    When sampling and purging is complete, turn the instrument OFF.
Exercise 6                              60                                  10/93

-------
                                    QUESTIONS


1.     Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of these instruments.
2.     Analysis of the site soil or analysis of a filter sample shows the soil composition to be 5%
       lead. You obtain a reading of 1.35 mg/m3 with the RAM-1.  Determine (approximately) the
       airborne lead concentration based on your reading.
3.     The action level for lead at your site has been determined to be 1.5 jig/m3.  The soil on the
       site is 5 % lead,  a)  What instrument reading would be equivalent to your lead action level?
       b)  What reading would you be concerned about if your action level was 50 /ig/m3?

       a)
       b)
10/93                                      61                                  Exercise 6

-------

-------
                                   EXERCISE #7

                           Gas Chromatography  - PID
OBJECTIVE
The student will learn the basic operation of the Photovac 10S50 portable gas chromatograph and
analyze several air samples.
PROCEDURE

The  instructor will describe  and  illustrate the different parts of the Photovac 10S50 and  their
functions.  Since the 10S50 needs a certain amount of warm-up time, the student will not be able to
go through start-up of the instrument.  After the introduction, students will run a calibration standard
and an unknown sample. Students will also collect an air bag sample and analyze it.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE  PHOTOVAC 10S50 (CAPILLARY COLUMN
OPERATION)
Preparation for Use

Refer to the Photovac 10S50 instrument panel and Figure 1.


Recharge the Carrier Gas

1.      Connect the fill line for the Photovac 10S50 to a cylinder of "Ultra-Zero Air" (contents < 0.1
       ppm hydrocarbon).

2.      Attach the "Quick-Connect" from the fill line to the REFILL receptacle on the upper right-
       hand  corner of the Photovac 10S50.

3.      Turn on the cylinder  and rotate the valve for the fill  line  so that the pointed end points
       toward the cylinder.  Be sure not to stand directly in front of the regulator.

4.      The reservoir in the instrument will be filled to the maximum pressure of the supply cylinder.
       The pressure is indicated on the CONTENTS gauge on the upper left of the instrument panel.
       (The  maximum pressure at which the instrument  can be filled is  1750 psi.)  The delivery
       pressure is indicated on the DELIVERY gauge. This pressure should be 40 psi.  When the
       reservoir is filled, the  excess air will be expelled at the  fritted outlet on the supply cylinder
       regulator. This will be indicated by a "hissing" sound.  Turn off the supply cylinder valve
       and then turn off the valve on  the fill line.

5.      Disconnect the fill line.

10/93                                     63                                 Exercise 7

-------
                                                                                                               X)
                                                                                                               4)
                                                                                                         LU    O
                                                                                                               ZfJ
                                                                                                               c


                                                                                                         Q-    o

                                                                                                         •-    >
                                                                                                         ?.    o
                                                                                                         co
                                                                                                         o
                                                                                                         in
                                                                                                         to
                                                                                                         o
                                                                                                         r-

                                                                                                         O
                                                                                                         o
                                                                                                         o
                                                                                                         UJ
                                                                                                         cc
                                                           §


                                                           1
                                                           a-
                                                           1
                                                                                                               o
                                                                                                               §
                                                                                                               o
Exercise 7
64
6/94

-------
Set the Carrier Gas Flow Rate

6.     The pieces of tubing to the flow meter are attached to the ports on the instrument panel.

7.     Attach the line on the left side of the meter to the DETECTOR OUT port.

8.     Attach the line on the right side of the meter to the needle valve marked AUX OUT.

9.     Connections should be secured with a 7/16 inch open-ended wrench (1/4 turn past tight).

10.    Adjust the flow rates on the meter.

       a.     If the instrument is being set up to  stabilize overnight, set the DETECTOR OUT
             FLOW using  the red FLOW adjustment knob on the left side of the panel to 5
             ml/min. Note:  Turn knob clockwise to decrease the flow or counterclockwise to
             increase the flow. Set AUX OUT flow using the needle valve to 0 ml/min.  Allow
             to stabilize overnight.

       b.     If the instrument is being set up for  analysis, set the DETECTOR OUT flow using
             the red FLOW adjustment knob to 10 ml/min.  Set AUX OUT flow using the needle
             valve to 10 ml/min.


Activate the Power Source

11.    When the instrument is ready for use, attach the power cord for the instrument to the 3-prong
       socket in the upper left-hand corner of the instrument. The cord is then plugged into an AC
       outlet.

12.    Press the ON key.   The instrument will respond with "LAMP NOT READY,  PLEASE
       WAIT."

13.    Wait until the display reads "READY ENTER COMMAND."


Set Instrument Parameters

14.    Locate the LIBRARY block and press the  USE key.  The instrument will respond with
       "LIBRARY IN USE?" There are four libraries numbered 1 to 4.  Library #1 is the default.
       We will use  #1 for this exercise. Press the  1 key and then the ENTER key.

15.    The instrument will prompt for "DAY" (1-31). Press the appropriate value for the day of
       the month and then press the ENTER key.
10/93                                    65                                Exercise 7

-------
16.    The following information is entered in the same manner:

      a.     MONTH (1-12), then press ENTER

      b.     YEAR (e.g., 1993), then press ENTER

      c.     HOUR (0-23), then press ENTER

      d.     MINUTE (0-59), then press ENTER.

17.    The instrument will read:  "READY ENTER COMMAND."


Obtain a Status Report

18.    Locate the STATUS block and press the TEST key.  The instrument will respond with
      "FUNCTION, USE < >, STATUS REPORT." Respond by pressing the ENTER key.

19.    The instrument will print a status report containing the following information:

      a.     Current field date and time.

      b.     Field:  The # represents the detector field in volts/10.

      c.     Power:  The # indicates the current lamp consumption at mA/10.

      d.     EVENT  settings show the ON  and  OFF  times of the  10S50  sample pump and
             solenoid valves. The instructors will have set the following EVENT values:
SAMPLE
CAL
EVENT #3
EVENT #4
EVENT #5
EVENT #6
EVENT #7
EVENT #8
(EVENT #1)
(EVENT #2)






0
0
10
0
13
0
0
0
10
0
60*
10
60*
0
0
0
             * Some units may have a longer time (e.g., 80) instead.

20.   Allow the instrument to stabilize for approximately 45 minutes.  The instrument has been
      stabilizing prior to the exercise so we may continue.
Select the Analytical Parameters

21.   Locate the SETUP block on the instrument panel.



Exercise 7                                66                                    10/93

-------
22.    Press the GAIN key.  The gain controls the amplification from the detector. The default
       value is "2"  For higher values, press the UP ARROW key until the desire value appears.
       For this exercise, choose a gain setting of "5" and then press ENTER.

23.    Press the CHART key.  The instrument will respond with  "CHART ON" or some other
       readout.  "CHART ON"  means the chromatogram will be displayed along with identification
       information and some instrument settings (e.g., GAIN).  "CHART OFF" means that the
       chromatogram will  not be displayed, but identification  information and some instrument
       settings will be displayed. "CHART ON WITH BASELINE" prints out the same information
       as "CHART ON," but also shows the baseline the instrument uses to calculate peak area.
       "CHART ON WITH  SETUP"  prints out the same  information as "CHART ON WITH
       BASELINE" but also  includes the setup information  (e.g., SENS, WINDO). Use the UP
       ARROW or DOWN ARROW key until "CHART ON WITH SETUP" is displayed.  Press
       ENTER. The next display is the chart speed. The  default is 0.1  cm/min.  Press the UP
       ARROW key until 0.5 appears. Press ENTER.

24.    Press the SENS key.  The key  controls the instrument integrator.  The following settings
       specify the minimum response that will  be recognized as a peak on the chromatogram.

             SLOPE UP; Use the arrow keys to display 18 mv.  Then ENTER.
             SLOPE DOWN;  Use the arrow keys to display 16 mv. Then ENTER.
             PW (Peak Width)  at  4  minutes;  Use the arrow keys to  display 6 (sec).  Then
             ENTER.

25.    Press the WINDO key.  This key adjusts the 10S50's tolerance to  retention time drift.  A
       peak, must be within a specified percentage of a stored retention to be  identified as that
       chemical by the  instrument. Choose a value of "10"  (i.e., 10%) and press ENTER.

26.    Press the AREA key.  This key sets a peak size threshold.  All peaks smaller than the AREA
       setting are deleted from the "PEAK INFORMATION"  listing at the end of the analysis.
       (However, these peaks will still be numbered on the chromatogram.) Set the minimum area
       at "50" and ENTER.

27.    Locate the PROGRAM block and press the CYCLE  key. The instrument will prompt for
       the following information:

       a.     "TIMER DELAY."  This  setting determines the delay in time from when  the
             START/STOP key  is pressed and when the instrument will  start looking for peaks.
             Choose "10" seconds and ENTER.

       b.     "ANALYSIS TIME." The duration of the analysis is dependent upon the types of
             compounds that are being considered for  analysis. Select an analysis time of 600
             seconds for this exercise. Press ENTER.

       c.     "CYCLE TIME."  These times refer to the mode for continuous monitoring. This
             mode will  not be  used in  this exercise.  Choose "0"  min and ENTER.   The
             instrument will respond with  "CYCLING  DISABLED, COUNTERS RESET."
JO/93                                    67                                Exercise 7

-------
Establish a Baseline for the Chromatogram

28.    The baseline will be established by analyzing a bag of ultrazero air (a BLANK sample).
       Connect the "zero" bag to the PROBE IN CONNECTION. Open the bag. To initiate the
       analysis, locate the ANALYSIS block and press the START/STOP key. The instrument will
       respond:  "PROBE IN?"  Press ENTER.

29.    As soon as the ENTER key is pressed,  the pump should start and run 10 seconds.  If the
       pump does not start, inform the instructor.

30.    Allow the chromatogram to be  generated.   Examine the baseline for significant drift or
       extraneous peaks.  The baseline should  be flat and smooth.  Repeat this procedure until a
       stable (zero slope) baseline is obtained or until the instructor informs you to stop.
Analyze the Standard Gas Bag

31.    For this exercise, we will use the chemicals in Library 1 as the standard. The "standard gas
       bag"  will be used to check retention times and allow you to see a chromatogram.

32.    Connect the "sample bag" bag to the PROBE IN CONNECTION.  Open the bag. To initiate
       the analysis, locate the ANALYSIS block and press the START/STOP key. The instrument
       will respond:  "PROBE IN?"  Press ENTER.

33.    Allow the chromatogram to be generated.  This will take 600 seconds (the analysis time we
       selected).

34.    At the end of the chromatogram, the printout will print the peak numbers that exceed the area
       setting, the  identity of the peaks (if they match the retention times in the library) and the
       concentration of identified peaks.  Consult the instructor  for the expected results. If the
       peaks are not properly identified, a update adjustment or calibration run will be necessary.
       See Updating the Library and Creating a Library before analyzing any samples.
Updating the Library

35.    If library does not recognize all of chemicals in the standard, the library should be updated.

36.    Select a peak (one that you can identify) as a reference point.  Press the CAL key.  The
       instrument will request a plotter peak number.  Enter the peak number you have selected.
       Press ENTER.

37.    The instrument will request an ID number.  Look at the previous printout of the library.
       Enter the number for the chemical that matches the peak.  Press ENTER.

38.    The instrument will request a concentration.   Enter the concentration of the compound
       corresponding to the plotter peak used.  Press ENTER.
Exercise 7                                 68                                     10/93

-------
39.    The plotter will print out a listing of the peaks from the recent analysis and hopefully identify
      the peaks using retention times and peak areas adjusted by the reference peak.
Creating a Library

40.    Connect the "sample bag" bag to the PROBE IN CONNECTION.  Open the bag. To initiate
      the analysis, locate the ANALYSIS block and press the START/STOP key. The instrument
      will respond:  "PROBE IN?"  Press ENTER.

41.    Allow the chromatogram to be generated.

42.    The information from the chromatogram must be stored in the library IMMEDIATELY
      FOLLOWING completion of the analysis.  IF ANY OTHER KEY IS PRESSED BEFORE
      STEP #43, THE STANDARD CHROMATOGRAM WILL NEED TO BE GENERATED
      AGAIN TO UTILIZE ITS INFORMATION.

43.    Locate the LIBRARY block and press the STORE key.  The instrument will prompt for:

      a.     PLOTTER PEAK #:  Select the  number of the  first peak  of interest on the
             chromatogram and press ENTER.

      b.     CHEMICAL NAME: Select the name of the compound using the alpha-numeric
             keys on the key pad.  After the name  is complete press ENTER.  (To change to
             numbers, press the CAL (NUM) key. This key must also be pressed again to return
             to letters.)

      c.     CONCENTRATION (in ppm): Select the actual concentration of the compound in
             ppm. Press ENTER.

      d.     LIMIT VALUE:  The limit value is  the concentration, which if exceeded, causes the
             plotter to print the concentration value in red instead  of green.  This "flags" the
             compound. Press ENTER.  This will instruct the  instrument to use 0 as the limit, so
             all concentrations will be in red.

      e.     This procedure  is repeated for subsequent compounds  in the chromatogram by
             pressing the STORE key and following  steps a through d.

      f.     To check the contents of the library, press CAL.  The instrument prompts with
             "PLOTTER PEAK #?" ENTER TO RELIST. Press ENTER. The plotter will print
             out the added compounds and their  concentrations.

             Note: DO NOT enter a value here  or the instrument will prompt for recalibration.
10/93                                   69                               Exercise 7

-------
Editing the Library

44.    A compound can be added to the library after any analysis. A compound can be added to
       the library even if it is already in the library. However, the new entry will not replace the
       old entry.  There will be two listings for the compound.

45.    To remove a compound from the library, first press EDIT.

46.    The instrument will prompt with "ID NUMBER." Enter the ID number for the compound
       in the library. The instrument will list the name of the compound.

47.    Press  CLEAR, then press  ENTER.  The instrument will respond with  "COMPOUND
       REMOVED FROM LIBRARY."

48.    Repeat for any additional compounds.


Analyse the  Samples

49.    Using steps 31 through 34,  analyze the unknown samples provided.

50.    IMPORTANT!  DO NOT  USE ANY GAS  BAGS, other than those provided by the
       instructors, WITHOUT THE PERMISSION OF THE INSTRUCTORS. High concentrations
       can contaminate the column.


Exercise Shutdown

51.    When sample analysis  is complete, do not turn the instrument off.


Shutdown (Overnight)

52.    Generate a chromatogram of the baseline to ensure that there are no residual materials in the
       column.

53.    Locate the  POWER block and press the  OFF key.  The instrument will respond with
       "ENTER=OFF."  Press ENTER.

54.    Adjust the flow rate for the DETECTOR OUT to 5 ml/min.  Make sure the air supply is
       adequate for overnight operation.


Shutdown (Long Term)

55.    Follow the same steps as in Shutdown (Overnight).

56.    Disconnect the power cord  from the AC source.

57.    Before shipping, drain the carrier gas supply reservoir.

Exercise 7                               70                                    10/93

-------
                                   EXERCISE #8

                    Sampling Pumps and  Collection Media
OBJECTIVE
Participants will  assemble  a  variety of sampling trains and  calibrate them using an electronic
bubble meter.  They will also check the pump's flow compensator.  The students  will review
sample results and evaluate exposure levels.
PROCEDURE

The  class will be  divided into  teams.   Each team will be given a Gilian* HFS 113UT air
sampling pump.

The instructor will explain the operation of the Gilian* HFS 113UT sampling pump.

The  students will calibrate the Gilian* sampling pump using different media and an electronic
bubble meter.

       Demonstration:       Calibration of Gilian* pump with filter media using a bubble-meter
                           (page 82).

       Station  1:            Calibration of Gilian® pump with filter media and with sorbent tube
                           media using an electronic bubble-meter (page 85).

       Station  2:            Check flow compensator of Gilian* pump using Gilian* Calibrator
                           Pack (page 92).

       Note:   The procedures shown here apply only to this specific sampling pump.  The actual
              procedures for other pumps may vary.  Consult the manufacturer's instructions for
              the pump you use in the field.

After calibrating their sampling  pump, the students will look at sampling results and calculate
concentration levels (page 94).
10/93                                     71                                  Exercise 8

-------
   OPERATION AND  CONTROLS  OF GILIAN® HFS  113UT SAMPLER
The Gilian® HFS 113UT sampler is a lightweight, battery-powered air sampling pump.  It has a
high flow range—0.5-3.5 liters per minute (1pm) and a low flow range—1-500 cubic centimeters
per minute (cc/min).  It has a built-in timer to shut off the pump after a preset time.  The pump
is equipped with a  flow compensation control that provides for constant air flow from the pump
at any preset flow within its performance limits.

The following is a brief description of the controls for operating the pump.

1.     ON - OFF Switch.  This turns pump on and off.

2.     PRESS TO  TEST Button.  When the pump is on, pressing this button gives battery power
      indication and also gives an elapsed time indication in TIME MIN window. If the pump
      has stopped because of end of time or fault,  pressing this button before turning the pump
      off gives the pump run time.

3.     PROGRAMMABLE TIMER.  Allows operator to set sample time from 10 minutes to 990
      minutes in ten minute increments.  Note: The pump will not start if the timer  is set at
      00.  When setting  the timer, the dials should be turned  clockwise past the  zero point
      several times.

4.     BAT CK - Battery Check. Turn on pump and press the test button.  If the BAT CK
      illuminates, then the battery is fully charged.

5.     FAULT.  This  light illuminates  and the pump shuts down,  if the pump is unable  to
      maintain the preset flow rate.

6.     TIME OUT.  This illuminates when the pump stops at the programmed time.

7.     FLOW  ADJUST.   Turning  clockwise increases  flowing;  turning counterclockwise
      decreases flow.

8.     PUMP INLET.  Inlet to pump. Point where tubing and sampling media are connected.

9.     DISCHARGE AIR CAP SCREW.  Removing  this screw provides access to discharge
      port. Inserting adapter allows pump to be used to fill gas bag.

10.   REGULATOR  SHUTOFF CAP SCREW.   Removing screw provides  access to the
      regulator shutoff valve.  The valve is used to switch the pump from high to low flow.

11.   FLOW  METER.   Rotameter used to show flow.   Read center of flow meter ball.
      Reading is  ±2096 of true flow.
 Exercise 8                                72                                    10/93

-------
            DEMONSTRATION:  CALIBRATING  GILIAN® PUMP
                           USING A BUBBLE METER

During this demonstration, the Gilian® pump will be calibrated for lead paniculate sampling.
The NIOSH analytical method for lead  sampling (Method 7802) uses a 0.8-^ cellulose ester
membrane  filter.    The  appropriate  filter is provided with  the calibration  setup.   The
recommended flow rate is between 1 and 4 liters per minute.  For this exercise, calibrate the
pump  to about 2 liters per minute (between 1.8 and 2.2 is okay).  The important thing is to
know  the actual flow rate  of your pump.  Step 4 explains how to convert the pump to  the high
flow range.
BUBBLE METER PREPARATION

During this step, the Gilian0 pump will be calibrated using an inverted buret and soap bubbles
(bubble  meter).   This method is considered a primary calibration method because the buret
volume and the stopwatch time can be traced to an original standard.

1.    Check the  calibration set-up (Figure 1).   It should contain all the parts shown in the
      figure. If not, inform the  instructor.

2.    Wet the  buret by pouring a small amount  of soap solution into it, and tilting it up and
      down while rotating. Seal the outlet end to  prevent soap from getting into the tubing.

3.    Reassemble the calibration setup.
PUMP PREPARATION

4.    Remove the Pump Regulator Shutoff Protective Cap.  Turn the exposed screw clockwise
      until closed - DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.  Replace the protective cap.

5.    Using the small screwdriver provided,  set the programmable tinier to 240 minutes.  Turn
      each dial clockwise past zero several times before setting the time.

6.    Turn the pump on.

7.    Press the test button.  The BAT CK light should illuminate or flicker.
10/93                                    73                                Exercise 8

-------
         Inverted
          buret
                        250
                                                        Filter
                                                       cassette
                                 Soap bubble trap
                                                                    Pump
           Beaker
                                 Soap solution
                     FIGURE 1. BUBBLE METER CALIBRATION SETUP

8.     Connect the tubing and filter to the pump.  The filter pad should be nearest to the pump.
       Connect the filter to the tubing attached to the bubble meter.

9.     Start a bubble in the buret by briefly touching the surface of the soap solution to the open
       end of the buret.  When the bubble passes the "0" mark, start the stopwatch.  Stop the
       stopwatch when the bubble passes the "250" mark.

10.    Flow rate is calculated using the following formula:
FLOW RATE (L/min) =
             v     '
                                   VOLUME ^^LED (ml)        60 sec/min
                                 TIME (sec) BUBBLE TRAVELED     1000 ml/L
11.    Use Data Sheet 1 to record your calibration data.
Exercise 8
                                74
10/93

-------
                             DATA SHEET 1




1.    PUMP MFG. AND MODEL:     	




2.    PUMP IDENTIFICATION ti:
3.    BATTERY CHECK       	YES        	NO




4.    LOCATION/TEMP & BAROMETRIC PRESSURE:
5.    CALIBRATION METHOD:
6.    FLOW RATE CALCULATIONS





                           VOLUME
        FLOW RATE (Z/min)=
                              TIME (seconds)           1000 w//L
     VOLUME TRAVELED    TIME       FLOW RATE      AVERAGE
     (Continue calibration until three consecutive flow rates are within ± 5% of the average.)




7.    FLOW RATE:           	




8.    ROTAMETER SETTING:   	




9.    SIGNATURE:           	




10.   DATE/TIME:
10/93                              75                           Exercise 8

-------
         STATION 1:  CALIBRATING THE GILIAN® PUMP USING
                      AN ELECTRONIC BUBBLE METER

The Gilibrator™ is an example of an electronic bubble meter.  It is a primary calibration method.
A fixed volume is located in the center tube of the flow cell. A quartz-controlled timer is used to
measure the  travel time for  a bubble between two sensors.  A microprocessor calculates  the
volume per unit time.  The flow rate is displayed in cc/min for this model.

The control unit will display the actual flow for each sample and will accumulate  and  average
each successive reading.

      AVERAGE  -  To  display average and  number  of  samples,  depress  and hold  1he
      AVERAGE BUTTON. Releasing the button will display the last flow reading.  Pressing
      the button again and  the number  of reading made will be displayed.   Release  and  the
      display returns to the last flow reading.

      DELETE - To delete  obvious false readings, push the DELETE BUTTON.  This will
      delete the false information from  the average and reset the average and sample number
      back to the previous reading.

      RESET - To reinitiate the sequence, hit the RESET BUTTON.   This  will  zero out all
      sample and average registers within the Control Unit. The Reset Button is also used  if a
      malformed bubble is generated and has not been subtracted from the average by use of
      the DELETE Function.
GILIBRATOR™ PREPARATION

1.     Remove the storage tubing between the air inlet and air outlet of the Gilibrator™.  Pour a
       small amount of soap through the BOTTOM AIR INLET of the Gilibrator1* to thoroughly
       cover the bottom of the flow cell.  Skip this step if already done.

2.     Connect a pump to the UPPER AIR OUTLET using the piece of tubing provided.

3.     Turn the regulator shutoff valve on the Gilian® pump  (the screw under the brass cap on
     •, top of the pump) fully clockwise.  DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.  Turn  on the pump.
       Initiate soap film up  the flow tube by rapidly pressing the  CALIBRATOR BUTTON
       down and releasing.  Repeat this  procedure until a bubble travels the length of the tube
       without breaking.

4.     After the Flow Tube walls have been "primed" (Step 3), turn on the Power switch of the
       Control Unit.   Wait approximately 10 seconds while  the system  runs through its check
       sequence.  The RUN LED will light at this time as well  and a LO Battery  indication and
       a series  of five dashes  will be displayed on the LCD Readout.  Do not  operate the
       Gilibrator until the RUN LED signal extinguishes.  Ready operation  is indicated by a
       series of 4 dashes.

5.     Calibrate the pump using the following steps.

Exercise 8                                76                                     10/93

-------
                                                    I
                             CL
                             E
                             13
                            Q.
                                                                                         (0
                                                                                         O
                                                                                         c
                   f
i
                                   S
                                                                    «
                                                                            co
                                                   ae
                                                   8
                                                   i
                                                   o
                                                                                                a.

                                                                                                i
                                                                                                 i
                                                                                                 (9
70/95
77
        Exercise 8

-------
HIGH-FLOW CALIBRATION  (1 to 4 liters/min)

6.      Insert a filter  cassette and tubing between  the  pump  and the tubing attached  to the
       calibrator.

7.      Turn on the pump.

8.      Depress the  BUBBLE INITIATE  BUTTON  and  hold to  initiate  1  bubble up the Flow
       Tube.  Release the button to initiate a second bubble up the flow tube.  At low flow rates,
       the button can be depressed and released quickly for a single bubble.

9.      After a bubble  completes passage up the FLOW TUBE, a flow reading will appear on the
       LCD display.

10.    Adjust  the flow rate (pump adjustment) and repeat Steps 8 and 9 until you  have  a flow
       rate of about 2  litcr/min.

11.    RESET the calibrator.

12.    Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until you have three consecutive readings that are within 5% of their
       average.

13.    If the first set of 3 readings are not within  the 5% allowable range,  press the RESET
       Button.  Then  repeat step 15 for 3 more readings. The  Reset  Button is used because the
       Gilibrator™ averages all  readings and not just the  last 3.  If the first reading was outside
       the 5% limits,  you wouldn't know till readings 2 and 3 were made.  Readings 2, 3, and 4
       may  be within the  limits, but you would  not be able to check because reading 1 would
       still be in the average.

14.    If a  bubble  breaks before  completing  the timing sequence, timing will  continue until
       another bubble is  generated to trip the second sensor.   This will cause  an erroneous
       reading and should be  subtracted from the average by hitting the Delete Button.

15.    Record each run, the average, and  other pertinent information on Data Sheet 2
LOW-FLOW CALIBRATION (20-500 cc/min)

16.    Connect the pump to the Gilibrator™  with a piece of tubing.

17.    Turn on the pump.

18.    Using the steps above, adjust the pump to about 1  liter/min.

19.    Open the regulator shutoff valve (located  under  the brass cap on top of the pump)  by
       turning it counterclockwise at least 5 turns.
Exercise 8                                  78                                      10/93

-------
20.    Put a carbon tube in the sorbent tube holder.  Connect the inlet side of the holder to the
       upper outlet of the  calibrator (Figure 2).  Connect the outlet side of the holder  to the
       pump inlet.

21.    Depress the Bubble  Initiate Button to  initiate a bubble up  the Flow  Tube.  After the
       bubble completes passage up the Flow Tube, a flow  reading will appear on the LCD
       display.

22.    Remove the knurled cap from the end of the tube holder.  Repeat Step 21 and adjust the
       variable flow  controller screw  to  get the desired  flow rate.  For this exercise,  try to
       obtain about 50 cc/min.

23.    RESET the calibrator after each run if not at the desired flowrate.  Reset after each flow
       adjustment.  Do three runs at the desired flow rate.  Record your results on Data Sheet 3.
SHUTDOWN

24.    Turn off the pump.

25.    Turn off the calibrator.

26.    Remove the air sampler from the Gilibrator™.  Replace the Storage Tubing between the
       upper and lower cell chambers.

27.    Disconnect the pump from the tube holder.

28.    Replace the cap on the tube holder.
10/93                                       79                                  Exercise 8

-------
                            DATA SHEET 2

1.    PUMP MFG. AND MODEL: 	

     PUMP IDENTIFICATION #:
     BATTERY CHECK       	PASS        	FAIL


2.    CALIBRATOR MFG. AND MODEL: 	

     CALIBRATOR IDENTIFICATION #:
3.    COLLECTION MEDIA:
4.    LOCATION/TEMP & BAROMETRIC PRESSURE:
5.    FLOW RATES: (Continue calibration until three consecutive flow rates are within ±5%
     of average.)
     FLOW RATE      AVERAGE             FLOW RATE      AVERAGE
6.    ROTAMETER SETTING:

7.    FLOW RATE: 	

8.    SIGNATURE: 	

9.    DATE/TIME:
Exercises                          80                             10/93

-------
                            DATA SHEET 3
1.    PUMP MFG. AND MODEL:

     PUMP IDENTIFICATION #:

     BATTERY CHECK
         PASS
     FAIL
2.    CALIBRATOR MFG. AND MODEL:

     CALIBRATOR IDENTIFICATION #:


3.    COLLECTION MEDIA:
4.    LOCATION/TEMP & BAROMETRIC PRESSURE:
5.    FLOW RATES: (Continue calibration until three consecutive flow rates are within ±5%
     of average.)
     FLOW RATE
AVERAGE
FLOW RATE
AVERAGE
6.    FLOW RATE:

7.    SIGNATURE:

8.    DATE/TIME:
JO/93
            81
                   Exercise 8

-------
  STATION 2:  CHECKING GILIAN® PUMP WITH  CALIBRATOR PACK

The Gilian* Calibrator Pack has precision rotameters that can be  used to calibrate a pump.  A      t
rotameter is considered a secondary calibration standard since it needs to be calibrated or checked
with  a primary calibration method periodically.  The pack also has a magnehelic to produce a
pressure drop along the flow of a pump.  This, in combination with the rotameters, can be used
to check the constant flow compensator on the Gilian* pump.

In this step, the precision rotameter will be used to check the constant flow compensator.
COMPENSATOR CHECK

1.    Remove the Regulator Shutoff Protective  Cap on the  pump.  Turn the exposed screw
      clockwise until closed - DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN. Replace the protective cap.

2.    On the Calibrator pack, move the BYPASS/CAL switch to the BYPASS position.

3.    Move the CAL SELECT (V2) switch to the upward position (3 liters/minute).

4.    Connect the pump to the PUMP SUCTION (Bl) outlet on the calibrator pack.

5.    Turn on the pump.

6.    Adjust (on the pump) the flow rate so that precision rotameter on the calibrator (not the
      pump rotameter) reads "3.0" (3  liters/min  or 3000 cc/min).  The flow rate  is read at the
      center of the rotameter ball.

7.    Move the CAL/BYPASS switch to the CAL position.

8.    Turn the V3 knob until the magnehelic dial reads 10 inches of back pressure.

9.    Read the flow rate on the rotameter.  If the difference in flow rates with and without back
      pressure is more  than ±5% (i.e., if the flow rate is not between 2850 and 3150), the
      pump needs adjustment. Consult the instructor.

10.   Move the BYPASS/CAL switch to the BYPASS position.

11.   Move the CAL SELECT (V2) switch to the downward position (1 liter/minute).

12.   Adjust the flow  rate  to  "1.0"  (1  liter/min  or 1000 cc/min) - reading  the precision
      rotameter on the calibrator.

13.   Move the BYPASS/CAL switch to the CAL position.

14.   Turn the V4 knob until the magnehelic dial reads 20 inches of back pressure.
Exercise 8                                82                                    10/93

-------
15.    Read the flow rate on the rotameter.  If the difference in flow rates with and without the
      back pressure is more than ±5% (i.e., if the flow rate is not between 950 and 1050), the
      pump needs adjustment.  Consult the instructor.
SHUTDOWN

16.    When completed with the compensator check, turn off the pump and disconnect the pump
      from the pack.
10/93                                     83                                 Exercise 8

-------
                     QUESTIONS AND CALCULATIONS

1.     Calculate  the  concentrations in the  sampled  atmospheres  based  on  the  following
      information.

             Units:        1000 liter  = 1 m3
                          1000 ml = 1000 cc = 1 liter
                          1 mg  = 1000 micrograms
(A)   Lead samples.  Pump flow rate = 2.0 liters per minute.
SAMPLE DURATION
4HR
2HR
2HR
LAB ANALYSIS
0.041 mg
0.029 mg
0.008 mg
AVERAGE
CONCENTRATION

      To calculate the Average Concentration (for each sample):


                                      m   chemical
                               C
                                   sample volume (m3)
      where:
                                                                           1 m3
  sample volume (/»3) = pump flow rate (liters/minute) x sample time (minutes) x	
                                                                        1000 liters
       To calculate an 8-hour TWA:
                        8 hour TWA
                                             8 hours
       where T is sample time  in hours.  Minutes can be used for T if 480 minutes is used
       instead of 8 hours in equation.
Exercise 8                                84                                   10/93

-------
(B)    Solvent vapor sampling.  Flow rate = 50.0 cc/min.
SAMPLE
TIME
1 HR
2 HR
1 HR
15 MIN
15 MIN
15 MIN
30 MIN
15 MIN
30 MIN
2HR
CONCENTRATION (ppm)
TOLUENE
10
32
21
175
140
100
93
85
54
10
XYLENE
5
11
8
70
50
67
40
30
10
NO
ACETONE
ND
ND
100
300
1000
820
1000
50
45
30
              Calculate an 8-hour TWA exposure for the three chemicals.
              Calculate an 8-hour TWA exposure for the mixture. Is this calculation valid?
10/93
85
Exercise 8

-------
(C)    Do any of the concentrations in (A) and (B) exceed an exposure limit?
2,     Calibration of a pump prior to sampling gave a flow rate of 2.0 liters/minute.  Calibration
       after sampling gives a flow rate of 1.8 liters/minute.  What do you do?
Exercise 8                                  86                                       JO/93

-------
                                     EXERCISE #9

                                     Field Exercise


OBJECTIVE

Using the instruments and information provided, participants will:

1.     Perform a survey of the zones on the "hazardous waste site."

2.     Characterize the "hazards" present at each "zone" on the site.

3.     Identify as completely as possible the materials present on the site.

4.     Quantify the airborne concentrations in each "zone" and evaluate the risk associated with
       these concentrations.


PROCEDURE

The class will be divided into teams.  Each team will select a leader/spokesperson. Each team will
receive the same equipment.  The equipment available  is the same equipment used earlier in the
week.  Before each entry, the team must submit plan of action for that entry to an instructor.

The "site" simulates a much larger site.  It is divided into six zones. A description of each zone is
on the next page. A "map" of the site also follows. Treat the readings obtained with the instruments
taken inside the containers as representing the average airborne concentrations in the "zone."
10/93                                       87                                  Exercise 9

-------
                     DESCRIPTION OF EXERCISE AREA


ZONE 1:

100 to 200 drums. Some with "FLAMMABLE"  labels.


ZONE 2:

About 100 drums. Some with "CORROSIVE" labels.


ZONE 3:

Box trailer containing drums.  Records indicate that the following chemicals were in the load. (Note:
This zone can be treated as a transportation incident separate from the site.)

       Acetone
       Methyl ethyl ketone
       Methyl isobutyl ketone
       Ethyl alcohol
       Butyl alcohol
       Toluene
       Benzene
       Xylenes
       1,1,1 -Trichloroethane
       Trichloroethylene
       Tetrachloroethylene

Readings taken in the drum represent readings at the trailer.


ZONE 4:

About 50 drums with "Waste Cleaner" labels.


ZONE 5:

Opening to underground vault. The vault could contain many drums.  Readings inside container are
equivalent to readings taken inside vault (using extended probes).


ZONE 6:

50 to 100 drums.  Some with hand-painted labels reading "Paint Waste."


Exercise 9                                88                                     10/93

-------
                              "SITE" MAP
              o:
              LLJ
              z
              <
              LU
              _l
              O

              LU

              CO

              I
                       CO
                              LU
                              I-
                              co

                              I
                              h-
                              z
           -®
            D

           h®
            ©
             i
            ©
          CO
CM
LU
>
CO
o
cc
oc
o
o
                            LU
                            _l
                            CD
                                                                  Q
                                                       LJ_
10/93
        89
                              Exercise 9

-------
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
Region 5, Library (PL-12J)
77 West Jackson Boulevard, 12th Floor
Chicago,  IL  60604-3590

-------
                          United States
                          Environmental Protection
                          Agency
Office of
Solid Waste and
Emergency Response
Publication 9360.B-17FS

August 1993
                          Personal Air  Sampling  and
                          Air Monitoring  Requirements
                          Under  29 CFR  1910.120
        Office of Emergency and Remedial Response
        Emergency Response Division MS-101
                         Quick Reference Fact Sheet
 Background and Purpose
                 Under the authority of Section 126
                 of the Superfund Amendments and
                 Reauthorization   Act  of   1986
                 (SARA Title I), the U.S. Environ-
                 mental Proteciion Agency (EPA)
                 and the U.S.  Occupational Safety
                 and   Health  Administration
 (OSHA) issued identical health and safety standards to
 protect workers engaged in hazardous waste operations
 and  emergency response.  The  OSHA regulations,
 codified at 29 CFR  1910.120, became  effective on
 March 6,  1990  (54 FR 9294).   On  April 13, 1990,
 corrections to these regulations were published (55 FR
 14072)  to  clarify  certain  medical   surveillance
 requirements  and to  identify which employers must
 comply  with  29  CFR  19l0.120(p).    The EPA
 regulations, published on June 23, 1989,  at  54  FR
 26654, incorporate the OSHA standards  by reference
 and are  codified ai 40 CFR Part 311.

    Although  the two  sets  of  standards  contain
 identical substantive provisions, the EPA and OSHA
 standards address different audiences.  In states that do
 no_i have an OSHA-approved program, federal OSHA
 standards  protect all  private and federal employees
 engaged in hazardous waste operations and emergency
 response; EPA worker protection standards protect all
 state and local government  employees. In states that
 do  have  an  OSHA-approved  program,  the state
 program covers all private, state, and local government
 employees; OSHA covers  federal  employees.  The
 OSWER Fact Sheet, Hazardous Waste Operations and
Emergency  Response  (HAZWOPER):    Uncontrolled
Hazardous Waste  Sites and RCRA Corrective Action
 (OSWER  Publication 9285.2-08FS, 1991), provides a
general overview of the worker protection standards as
they apply to operations conducted at   uncontrolled
 hazardous  waste sites.

    OSHA requirements for monitoring at   uncon-
 trolled hazardous waste sites are codified at 29 CFR
 1910.120(h).  While the provisions  outlined in this
section may be interpreted to include the collection c
samples (i.e., surface wipes in  the support area on
lead-contaminated site), the purpose of this Fact Shee
is to summarize the HAZWOPER air monitoring am
sampling aspects  of  these requirements.  The Fac
Sheet is composed of five parts:  (1) Introduction  K
Air Monitoring and Air Sampling; (2) Air Monitoring
Requirements Upon Initial Entry; (3) Air Monitoring
Requirements After  Initial Entry; (4) Conducting Air
Monitoring and Sampling; and (5) Information Sources
and Contacts.

Introduction  to  Air  Monitoring and  Air
Sampling
                 The presence of hazardous mater-
                 ials at a site, as  well as actions
                 taken to address  these materials,
                 can result in the release of hazar-
                 dous  substances  into  the  air.
                 Chemical   fires,   transportation
                 accidents,  open or  leaking con-
                 tainers, wind-blown dust, and site
                 cleanup   activities  all  produce
                 emissions  that can rapidly affect
                 the health and safety of  response
                 personnel   (site   workers   or
emergency  response) and  the public.   Hazardous
atmospheres may be:

•   Explosive (characterized by the presence of
    ignitable or explosive vapors, gases, aerosols, and
    dusts);

•   Toxic/hazardous (characterized by the presence
    of vapors, gases, particulars, and  aerosols);

    Oxygen-deficient (characterized by the
    consumption or displacement of oxygen in
    ambient air); or

•   Radioactive (Characterized by the  presence of
    radioactive materials).
                                                                            Recycled/Recyclable
                                                                            Printed with Soy/duiola Ink on pecwr fhai
                                                                            contains at toast 50* racyctod Itow

-------
The presence of one or more of these hazards is an
important factor  in determining subsequent  actions
that   should  be   taken   to   protect  workers,  the
community, and the environment. Their presence may
dictate operations that arc necessary to mitigate the
likelihood  of an  incident, and will  dictate safety
considerations for response personnel.

    OSHA requirements  for air monitoring  are set
forth  in the  HAZWOPER standards at 29 CFR
1910.120(h). Specifically, §1910.120(h)(l)(i) states thai
monitoring must be performed "where there may be a
question  of  employee   exposure  to  hazardous
concentrations of hazardous substances  in order to
assure proper selection of engineering  controls, work
practices and personal protective equipment [PPEj so
that employees are not exposed to levels which exceed
permissible exposure limits fPELs], or other published
exposure levels...."  The regulations also  require air
monitoring for use in identifying health  hazards in
order to determine appropriate level of PPE. Once the
appropriate PPE is selected, personal air sampling
should be continued in order to ensure  that personnel
exposures are not exceeding these limitations.
   «3P  NOTE:  OSHA does  not  define the term
   "air monitoring."  Rather, OSHA uses this term
   to refer 10 both monitoring using direct reading
   instrumentation  and  to  air  sampling  using
   personal sampling pumps or. other quantitative
   methods. However, in this Fact Sheet, the term
   "air  monitoring"  refers  to the  use  of  direct
   reading instruments producing instantaneous
   data, while the term "air sampling" refers to the
   use of a sampling  pump and collection  media
   that produce samples thai must  be  sent to a
   laboratory for analysis. The specific distinctive
   features of each are:

      Air monitoring:
         •  Provides "real-time" ijesults;    ,  ,
         •  Provides rapid response;
            Has limited detection levels; and-
            May not- detect  certain  classes of
            compounds.
      Air sampling:
            Can be compound- or ciass-sp^cifit-;
            Provides greater accuracy of detection;
            Requires more time for results; and
            Requires  additional  pumps,  medw*
            analytical support.
    One  example of the difference between air moni-
toring and air sampling is thai air monitoring can  be
performed  to identify  the exisiencc of a  hazardous
atmosphere during initial site entry, while air sampling
is  performed to identify and quantify an  employee's
personal  exposure to a hazardous chemical or range of
hazardous chemicals. Further, air monitoring data arc
instantaneous and are useful in comparing conservative
action guidelines to determine an appropnale level of
protection relative to the work activity   Air sampling
data are  information used  to compare  an  employee's
exposure to OSHA 1971 time-weighted average PELs
(PEL-TWA),  PEL-ceilmg  (PEL-C), the  American
Conference  of Governmental  Industrial   Hygiemsts
time-weighted  average   Threshold  Limit  Values
(TLV-TWA), and associated values (STEL.C).

    In  addition  to the  requirements  at  29   CFR
]910.120(h), OSHA mandates air sampling for specific
chemical contaminants under 29 CFR 1910.] 000, which
lists approximately 428  substances  in  Tables Z-l-A,
Z-2, and Z-3.  OSHA also has comprehensive health
standards  that  have  additional  PELs  and  other
requirements  (see  Highlight I).   Consult individual
standards for specifics.
   «S" NOTE: The U.S. Court  of Appeals. Eleventh
   Circuit, issued a decision on July 7, 1992, vacating the
   "Final Rule" of the Air Contaminants Standard.  A
   decision was made on March 22, 1993, not to appeal
   to the Supreme Court, and  the  Eleventh  Circuit
   Court's decision stands.  Employers and Employees
   can find the 1971 permissible exposure limits  thai are
   now in effect listed in the Air Comaminams Standard,
   in the columns headed "Transitional Limits" in Table
   Z-l-A  and  in  Tables  Z-2 and  Z-3 in 29  CFR
   1910.1000 (1989 or later).
Air, Monitoring Requirements Upon InitiaJ
Entry
                  During  the  initial  "Site  entry, •
                  information is gathered to evaluate
                  site-specific risks and hazards. This •
                  information is used to  select and
                  develop  site-specific  engineering/
                  administrative- controls,   PRE,  '
                  medical   monitoring,   and   air
 sampling requirements. Highlight 2 identifies some'of  •
 the  contaminant  and  hazard  risks  that  may  'be
 encountered during initial site  entry.        , .   • 
-------
                     Highlight 1
       SUBPART Z, TOXIC AND HAZARDOUS
                    SUBSTANCES
      29 CFR 1910.1001

      29 CFR 1910.1002

      29 CFR 1910.1003
      29 CFR 19)0.1004
      29 CFR 1910.1006
      29 CFR 1910.1007
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR.
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
      29 CFR
1910 1008
1910.1009
1910 1010
1910 1011
1910.1012
19)0.1013
1910.1014
1910.1015
1910.1016
1910.1017
1910.1018
1910.1025
1910.1027
1910.102S
1910.1029
1910.1043
1910.1044
1910.1045
1910.1047
1910.1048
1910.1101
Asbestos, tremolne,
anthophyllne, and actmoliie
Coal tar pitch volatiles
(interpretation of term)
4-Nitrobipheriyl
alpha-Naphtnylamine
Methyl chloromethyl ether
3,3'-Dichlorobenzidme (and
its salts)
bis-Chloromethy! ether
beta-Naphthylarnine
Benzidme
4-Ammodiphenyl
Ethyleneimme
beta-Propiolactone
2-Acetylaminafluorene
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene
N-Nitrosodimethylamine
Vinyl chloride
Inorganic arsenic
Lead
Cadmium
Benzene
Coke oven emissions
Cotton dust
1,2-dibromo-3-chioropropane
Acrylonitnle
Ethylene oxide
Formaldehyde
Asbestos (Applies in lieu of
revised standards governing
occupational exposure to
asbestos, tremohte,
anthophyllne, and actmolite)
    Air monitoring techniques are used  to assess  the
risks that may be present during initial site entry.  As
specified  at 29  CFR  I910.120(h)(2), air monitoring
mtetfte  fifa&ietetf Iftfing* Winhia'Psite'' e"mW' to^
identify:                                             -
          . conditions;  .  •'    .-        .»    ,'7I_r  '~
            !-     ••    -    -r   •"   1   '.: "~.t
  -rSxposwre over  permissible exposure /limit*.- -or
              exposure, levels;-                      *
  /..Exposure, over.radioaciive marerials
• ;,;EjXposure to  other 'idangerousi conditions (fe;g. --
  ^presence of  na.mmable' atmospheres  o* -oxygtn-  '
    deficient environrnenis). .  ,      ,! :    •
                  Highlight 2
CONTAMINANT AND HAZARD RISKS DURING
             INITIAL SITE ENTRY

•    Exposure exceeding the OSHA PELs or other
    published exposure levels:

•    Exposure to immediately dangerous to life and
    health (JDLH) concentrations,

•    Exposure through skin absorption and irritation
    (chemical or biological),

•    Eye irritation;

•    Explosions resulting from shock-sensitive
    substances and flammable atmospheres-

•    Confined space-entry,

•    Injury from physical hazards, and

    Exposure to radioactive (ionizing radiation)
    materials,

I3r  NOTE:  While required in 29 CFR  1910.120
(h)(2), monitoring for radioactive materials under
initial entry conditions is not an "air" monitoring
technique. If the main  concern is  to identify
exposure over radioactive material dose limns, the
contaminant of interesi  is gammy radiation. Gamma
radiation is not air-matrix dependent.
                                                  Air sampling is not  usually performed during the
                                              initial entry. Instead, information about the potential
                                              chemical hazards is gathered during the initial  entry
                                              and used to make decisions about air sampling needs.
                                              For  any contaminants discovered during  the initial
                                              entry that  are  regulated  by 29  CFR  1910.1000  or
                                              Subpart  Z  (see   Highlight  1)  or  that  could   be
                                              considered hazardous, the  air sampling needs must  be
                                              assessed according  i-cr-She requirements.
                                                                   .-"c (       **'
                                              Air  Monitoring Requirements After  Initial
                                              Entry - Periodic Monitoring
                                                                Site  conditions  and  atmospheric
                                                                chemical  conditions  may  change
                                                               ^.following  .the "  initial   site
                                                                "characterization.' f/vs  stated at 29
                                                                CF&   1910.'l'2\)(;V)(3),    periodic
                                                                monitoring  mustT (he  conducted
                                                                when "the pps,sibiUi/,af an  IDLH
                                                           con-dition or flammable atmosphere has developed or
                                                           wh$n there is yidicay^n th^j exposuresHRiajfebavfoiEiseB-
                                                           over permissible exposure limits or published exposure
                                                     - 3 •

-------
levels since  prior monitoring."  Highlight 3 identifies
situations that call for periodic monitoring required at
29 CFR 1910.120(h)(3)(i-iv).
                    Highlight 3
           SITUATIONS THAT REQUIRE
             PERIODIC MONITORING

       When work begins on a different portion of the
       site;

       When contaminants other than those previously
       identified are being handled,

       When a different type of operation is initiated
       (e.g., drum opening as opposed to exploratory
       well drilling); or

       When employees are handling leaking drums or
       containers, or working in areas with obvious
       liquid contamination (e.g., a spill or a lagoon).
    Once cleanup  activities begin on-site, 29  CFR
19J0.120(h)(4) requires employers  to "monitor those
employees likely to  have the highest  exposures to
hazardous substances and health hazards  likely to be
present above permissible exposure limits or published
exposure levels by using personal sampling frequently
enough to  characterize employee exposures."   Air
sampling  for high-risk  employees is performed to
identify the  "worst-case exposure." If the worst-case
exposure is above the PEL, then monitoring should be
conducted to identify all employees likely to be above
those limits.  (Note:  It  is not required to  monitor
employees engaged in site characterization operations
covered under 29 CFR 1910.120(c). Appropriate PPE
based upon  the preliminary evaluation is required.)

    Post-initial entry situations that require  periodic
monitoring   also  should  be  characierized   by  air
sampling, as appropriate, and should be determined by
a  competent health and safety  professional.   Air
sampling  information can  be compared  to  the  air
monitoring data for the same period of time  to:  (1)
illustrate trends in  the accuracy of the air monitoring
data; (2) develop a correlation to the air monitoring
readings; and (3) develop better air monitoring action
guidelines.  Air monitoring data may also be  used to
determine when further sampling is needed (i.e., if site
conditions have changed).
    Personal .sampling  generally  is  not  used   to
characterize overall  sue  air quality.   However,  air
sampling conducted in areas of high concentration may
assist in determining  whether personal sampling is
necessan   Air  sampling  may also  assist On-Scenc
Coordinators  (OSCs),  Remedial  Project  Managers
(RPMs), or other site managers in determining whether
chemical  contaminants  covered   under  29  CFR
1930.1000, Subpart Z,  need to be monitored.

    An   air   sampling  strategy  outlined   in   the
site-specific  health  and  safety  plan  must   address
frequency  and  type  of  air  monitoring,  personal
monitoring,  and environmental  sampling (29  CFR
1910.120(b)(4)(ii)(E)). Highlight 4 identifies additional
information that  should  be  provided in area  and
personnel air sampling strategies.
                    Highlight 4
     EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO INCLUDE IN
        AN AREA AIR SAMPLING STRATEGY

       The locations where air sampling will be
       performed;

       The hazardous substances that will be sampled
       during the task;

       The duration of the sample;

       The equipment that will be used to sample for
       the different hazardous substances;  and

       Collection of meteorological data.

     EXAMPLES OF ELEMENTS TO INCLUDE IN
     A PERSONNEL AIR SAMPLING STRATEGY

       Employee sampled;

       Tasks performed,

       Duration;

       Hazardous substances; and

       Equipment to be used.
                                                      4 •

-------
 Conducting Air Monitoring
                  Table ]  at the end of this  Faci
                  Sheet,   "Summary   of   Direct-
                  Reading  Air  Monitoring Instru-
                  ments,"  lists   the  direct-reading
                  instruments (DRIs) used during air
                  monitoring   to   characterize
                  hazardous atmospheres. DRIs may
 he  used to  rapidly  detect  flammable or explosive
 atmospheres,  oxygen  deficiency,  certain gases   and
 vapors, and ionizing radiation. DRIs are the primary
 tools of initial site characterization  The information
 provided by DRIs can be used to:  select appropriate
 protective  measures  such  as  personal  protective
 equipment,  evacuation,  and other similar measures;
 determine the most appropriate equipment for further
 monitoring; and assist in developing optimum sampling
 and analytical protocols.

    DRIs have limitations.   For  example, the Flame
 ionization   Detector  (FID)  and  Photoionization
 Detector (PID) are commonly used at hazardous waste
 sites  to monitor for a broad  range of organics  and
 some inorganics.  However, they do not  detect some
 particularly toxic agents such as hydrogen cyanide  and
 hydrogen  sulfide.    Thus,   these  devices must  be
 supplemented with other methods  of detection (e.g.,
 electrochemical  sensors  or  colorometric indicator
 tubes).  Many DRIs designed to detect one particular
 substance  may also detect other (cross sensitive)
 substances, thus rendering a "false positive."  All DRI
 information should be interpreted with a certain degree
 of caution.

    To characterize personal exposure, air monitoring
 should  be  performed in  the breathing zone of  the
 individual.   Emission sources may be characterized
 through head-space monitoring (e.g. drums) or close-
 range monitoring, if this can be done safely. Emission
 source  measurements   are not  representative  of
 personal exposure.
1

ca
an
pe
B
CO
Ca

Air monitoring
brated on a daily
„
instruments should be field-
basis prior to the initial entry
I/or any field activity. Calibration must be
formed according
10 manuf^cturer'S'-.instructions.
Id calibration should take place in field atmospheric
ditions in a "clean"
irjraTion8<*rnust be'
a/^?w«l£& as tne c°JBPiancU?'fifiI-
documented, either in a site
logbook, or  a logbook  designated  for  instrument
calibration records as required  in the site safety plan
(29 CFR 19l0.120(b)(4)(ii)(E)).

    Air monitoring data should be documented in  the
individual's field or the  site logbook.   Observations
pertaining  to the  monitoring data  (i.e.,  weather
conditions, drum label information, activity performed
during monitoring, number/names of individuals bei
monitored,  etc.)  should  be  recorded  with  t,
monitoring data.
Conducting Air Sampling
                  Table 2 at the end  of  this  Fat
                  Sheet,  "Common  Air   Samplmj
                  Methods and Media  Used by tht
                  EPA/ERT,"   summarizes   some
                  sampling methods commonly used
                  on hazardous waste sues. Personal
                  air sampling is generally performed
using a personal sampling  pump capable of both low-
flow  (20-750  cc/min)  and   high-flow  (1-4  L/min)
operation.   Low-flow operation with various media-
packed tubes  is  used  to sample  volatile organic
materials and acid gas mists. High-flow operation with
various filter media  or  bubbler/impinger solutions is
generally used  to sample panicles, paniculate aerosols,
and   inorganic  gases.    Personal  air  sampling  is
performed   for  the duration  of  the  workshifi.
Employees with  the  highest  exposure potential wear
the sampling pumps with the sample  media positioned
on their shoulders and  the inlet of the filter or tube
facing down toward  the chest. (Applying  protective
"covers" often  eases'decontamination of the pumps.)
Personal air sampling results are generally compared to
the 8-hour PEL-TWA.

    Sampling for comparison  to the  PEL-Short-Term
Exposure   (PEL-STEL)  will  require   collecting   a
15-minute sample at higher flow rates. PEL-STEL and
PEL-C sampling may be run throughout the workshift
alongside  the  PEL-TWA sampling.   PEL-STEL and
PEL-C sampling may be performed  once every hour
throughout  the  workshift, at the times of highest
potential exposure.  Judgment should be used when
identifying  times of  highest  potential exposure and
performing a PEL-STEL and/or PEL-C sampling event
simultaneously during this  high-risk exposure period.

    There are a number'of references that list standard
methods for performing personal air sampling. OSHA
and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH) publish two "sets  of the most widely
used personal air sampling methods. Both NIOSH and
OSHA methods  are "recipe's""for.performing both air
sampling and "chemical analysis. The methods outline
the sampling device, collection meaia, and flow rate at
which to set the sampling device. OSHA and NIOSH
usually include in the methods any interferences that
may  bias  the  sampling.  The EPA/Environmental
Response Team  (EPA/ERT)  has developed standard
sampling methods that incorporate existing NIOSH and
OSHA methods.  The "Information Sources" section  of
                                                   5 --

-------
this  Fact Sheet  identifies sources to  obtain  more
information on these methods.

    Before a sampling method is chosen, the laboratory
should  be contacted to  determine whether  ji can
perform  the   desired  analysis.    The  EPA/ERT
recommends  using  laboratories  accredited  by the
American Industrial Hygiene  Association (AIHA) for
performing analysis on personal air samples.  A list of
AJHA-accredited  laboratories  may be  obtained  by
contacting the AIHA (see the "Contacts" section of this
Fact Sheet for AIHA's address and phone number).
                      As with DRIs, sampling pumps must be calibrated
                  prior to use.  The goal  of calibrating  the  personal
                  sampling pump is to set, and ensure that the pump can
                  maintain,  a known flow  rate.  Calibration requires a
                  pump,  a sampling train (including the sample media
                  and all connecting tubing), and a primary standard-flow
                  indicator,  such as a bubble  meter  (Buck calibrator/
                  Gillibrator), or an inverted buret with  bubble mixture.
                  A secondary  standard  flow  indicator, such  as  a
                  rotameter, may be used to calibrate  the pump as long
                  as  the secondary  standard  has  been  previously
                  calibrated to a primary standard. Highlight 5 illustrates
                  several different methods of calibration.
                                                Highlight 5
                                EXAMPLES OF CALIBRATION METHODS
     Calibrating a Rotametef with a
            Bubble Meter
              Sampttng
                Pump
Calibrating a Personal Sampling
  Pump with a Bubble Meter
Calibrating a Personal Sampling
    Pump with a Rotameter

•CD
* •*
• • •
°l
D1
                                                      Pump
                          1-UMr
                          Bur*}
                                            Calibration Apparatus

                                         TUWng
                                                             WMV
                                     S<**on
                                        • NOM: uMd tor Sttndwri TwmM^ir*
                       Sourta:  U**u* rt Amtyteal »«nodi (Volum> 1.3rd EdMon)
                              (NOSH, 1M4, PU> NO. 64-100)

-------
               Highlight 6
EXAMPLES OF PERTINENT INFORMATION
  FOR AIR SAMPLING DOCUMENTATION

  Name of employee sampled

  Task  performed during sampling period

  Suspected hazardous substances.

  Level of PPL

  Type of collection media.

  Flow rate of the calibrated pump (pre- and
  post-sampling event),

  Duration of the sample;

  Date of sampling event,

  Location of sampling event,

  Environmental conditions during sampling event
  (e.g., temperature, Rh, wind speed, etc.);

  Unique sample number,

  Volume of air sampled during event;

  Any special handling requirements; and

  Analytical holding times
    Documentation of all  aspects  of  the  sam
monitoring event is critical for hoth air momionn
air sampling.  Documentation provides informane
data interpretation and, in the case of air sample.
tracking  the  sample from  the  sample  taker  to
laboratory.   Ajr  sampling  documentation  is  i
formalized than documentation for air moniio
Highlight 6 identifies pertinent  information thai i
he documented for air sampling.

    If sampling media  (tubes or filters)  are chan
throughout the  da\  to  prevent overloading, sarr
duration  for that media must he  noted  Judgment IT
be used in deciding how to document such a sampl
event.  Each  tube/filter may be designated  a  unu
number and treated as a  single  sample,  or each tu
filter may be  designated the sample number  wiir
different  consecutive letter  of the  alphabet attacln
The tubes or filters are  unique,  but  together  iri
represent one complete workshilt sample. Setting
and  performing   personal  air sampling   genera
requires  more preparation  time than air momtonn
however,  in  both  cases, the correct instrument  <
sampling  tram must  be chosen, the instrument  c
sampling train must be calibrated, and the momionn
or sampling event  must be observed.

-------
                                                                TABLE 1
                          SUMMARY OF DIRECT-READING  AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
   Principle of
    Detection
 and Monitoring
      Need
                      Instrument
                                                          Features
                                                                                        Limitation!.
Wheatsione
Bridge Filament
    Monitoring
    Need:
    Combustible
    Gas
Combustible
Gas.
Indicator
*   Calibrated to pentane, hexane. or methane

*   Nonspecific deiecior (or combustible gasej,
    measures gas concentrations as a  percentage of
    lower explosive limit (LEL)

*   Lighlweighi, portable, and easy to use

4   Visual and audible alarms
    (some models)

4   Probe provides remote sensing capabilities

4   8- to 12-hour batlery operating life (or roost
    models

*   Accuracy vanes depending upon the model,
    accuracies of t 2 lo 3 percent are attainable*
*   Potential interference* or filament damage from
    leaded gasoline, silicones  and silicates, which
    are more strongly adsorbed on catalyst than
    oxygen or gas in question  Membranes are
    available to minimize these eftects

*   Most models do not measure specific gases

*   May not function properly in oxygen-deficient
    atmospheres (< 10 percent)
Chemical Cell
    Monitoring
    Need.
    Oxygen
    Deficiency
Oxygen
Meter
*   Direct readout in percent oxygen
4   Visual and audible alarms
4   Lightweight, portable, and easy to use
4   Probe provides remote sensing capabilities
*   Accuracies of i 1 percent are attainable, but
    depend on the particular model
4   Generally 8- to 10-hour battery life
4   High humidity may cause interference
4   Strong oxidanls may cause artificially high
    readout
4   Oxygen calibrations are dependent on altitude
    and barometric pressure
4   CO2 "poisons" detector cell
Chemical Sensor
Wheatstone
Bridge Filament
    Moniiomg
    Need:
    Combustible
    Gas/Oxygen
    Deficiency
Combination
Oxygen
Meter and
Combustible
Gas
Indicator
4   Calibrated to pentane, hexane, or methane

4   Measure percent oxygen and gas concentration as
    a percentage of LEL

4   Both visual and audible alarms (some models)

4   Remote sensing capabilities

4   Lightweight, portable, and easy lo use

4   Accuracies of i 2 percent are attainable'
4   Same limitation as oxygen meters and
    combustible gas detectors

4   In certain units, acid gases and high CO,
    concentrations shorten the life of oxygen
    sensor/cells

4   Certain units require a conversion factor for
    true specific compound response readings

4   In certain units, oxygen calibration is altitude
    dependent
Optical, Electrical,
Piezoelectric
    Monitoring
    Need.
    Aerosol/
    Particulate
Aerosol/
Paniculate
Monitor
4  Selectable ranges

4  Panicle size differentiation available

4  Certain units have data logging capabilities
4   Factory recalibration required on certain units
4   Values represent total paniculalcs: dust. mist.
    aerosols are all inclusive with no differentiation
4   Cold weather may have adverse effect on
    detector

4   High humidity and  precipitation negatively
    affect meter response
   Manufacturer specifications.  Actual field use may yield greater variations.

                                                                     8

-------
                                                           TABLE 1 (CONTD)
                           SUMMARY OF DIRECT-READING AIR MONITORING  INSTRUMENTS
     Principle of
      Detection
    and Monitoring
        Need
                        instrument
                                                           Features
                                                                                                              Limitations
  Phoioiontzation
  Ultraviolet Light
      Monitoring
      Need
      Toxic Gas/
      Vapors
Photo-
lonization
Detector
(FID)"
4   Nonspecific gas and vapor detection for orgamcs
    and some inorganics
4   Noi recommended for permanent pase.-.
4   Lightweight (4 to 9 Ibs) and portable
4   Sensitive to 0.1 ppm benzene  Sensitivity is
    related to lonization potential of compound
4   Remote sensing capabilities
4   Response time of 90 percent in less than  3
    seconds
4   More sensitive to aromatics and  unsaturated
    compounds that the (lame iontzation detector
    (FID)
4   8-hour battery operating life; certain units with
    external interchangeable battery  packs
4   Audible alarm is available
4   Certain units have data  logging/computer interface
    capabilities
4   Certain units available with calibration libraries
4   Certain units available with interchangeable lamps
4  Does not monitor for specific gases or vapon-
4  Cannot detect hydrogen cyanide or methane
4  Cannot detect some chlorinated orgamcs
4  High humidity and precipitation negatively
   affect meter response
4  Readings relative to calibration standard
   Hydrogen Flame
   ionization
      Monitoring
      Need:
      Toxic Gas/
      Vapors
Flame
lonization
Detector
(FID)
4   In the survey mode, it functions as a nonspecific
    total hydrocarbon analyzer, in the gas
    chromalograph mode, it provides tentative
    qualitative/quantitative identification (OVA-
    specific)
4   Mosi sensitive to saturated hydrocarbons, alkanes,
    and unsaturated hydrocarbon alkanes
4   Lightweight (12 Ibs) and portable
4   Remote sensing probe is available
4   Response time is 90 percent in
    2 seconds
4   8-hour battery operating life
4   Sounds audible alarm when predetermined levels
    are exceeded
4   Not suitable for inorganic gases (e.g , Ci,, HCN,
    NH3)
4   Less sensitive to aromatics and unsaturated
    compounds than PID
4   Requires skilled technicians to operate the
    equipment m the GC mode and to analyze the
    results (OVA-specific)
4   Requires changes of columns and gas supply
    when operated in the GC (gas chromatography)
    mode in certain units (OVA-specific)
4   Because specific chemical standards and
    calibration columns are needed, the operator
    must have some idea of the identification of the
    gas/vapor (OVA-specific)
4   Substances that contain substituted functional
    groups (e.g., hydroxide (OH-) or (CI-) chloride
    groups) reduce the detector's sensitivity
    'UV sources vary in strength among available units (10.2cv, I0.6ev, 11.7ev). Each source has a range of compounds it cannot detect based upon
ionizaiion potentials. See manufacturer's literature for specifics.

-------
                                                         TABLE 1 (CONPD)
                         SUMMARY OF DIRECT-READING AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
    Principle of
    Detection
  and Monitoring
      Need
                      Instrument
                                                         Feature.*.
                                                                                        Limitations
infrared Radiation
    Monnonrig
    Need
    Toxic Gas/
    Vapors
                     Infrared
                     Analvzer
                   Overcomes the limns of mosi infrared
                   analyzers by use of a variable filler, can be used to
                   scan through a portion of the spectrum lo
                   measure concentration of several gases or can he
                   set at a particular wavelength to measure a
                   specific fas
                   Detects both organic and inorganic gases
                   Portable but not as  lightweight
                   (32 Ibs ) as the PIDs or FIDs
                                                        Less portable than other methods of ga
                                                        detection
                                                     4  Requires skilled technicians to operate and •
                                                        analyze results when positive identification i'
                                                        needed
                                                     *  Interference by water vapor and carbon dioxide
                                                     4  Most require AC power source
                                                     *  Positive identification requires comparison of
                                                        spectrum from stnp chart recorder with
                                                        published adsorption spectrum, infrared
                                                        spectrum not available for all compounds

                                                     4  Intrinsic safety is unit dependent,  set      ' :
                                                        manufacturer's literature
Chemical
Reaction
Producing a Color
Change
    Monitoring
    Need
    Toxic Gas./
    Vapors
Indicator
Tubes
4   Quantitative accuracies are variable

4   Simple to use, and relatively inexpensive
4   Real ume/semi-real lime results
4   Low accuracy                           .:•

4   Subject to leakage during pumping
4   Requires previous knowledge of gases/vaporS'm
    order lo select the appropriate detector tube
4   Some chemicals interfere with color reaction lo
    read false positive

4   Temperature and humidity may affect readings
Electrochemical
Cell
   Monitoring
   Need:
   Toxic Gas/
   Vapors
   Specific
   Atmospheres
Toxic
Atmosphere
Monitor
4   Ease of operation
4   Small, compact, lightweight

4   Audible alarm upon exceeding pre-set action level
    or Threshold Limit Value (TLV)
4   Certain units have digital readout
4   Generally compound-specific
4   Certain units interface with data logger
4   Cross sensitivity                        ,
4   Slow response/recover,' after exposure to high
    contamination levels
4   Limited number of chemicals detected
Metal-Oxide
Semiconductor
    Monitoring
    Need:
    Toxic Gas/
    Vapors
Toxic
Atmosphere
Monitor
4   Ease of operation
4   Small, compact, lightweight
4   Audible alarm upon exceeding present action level
    or TLV
4   Certain umis have digital readout
4   Certain units interface with data logger
4   Nonspecific gas and vapor detection [or some
    organics and inorganics
4   Cross sensitivity
4   Slow response/recovery after exposure 10 high
    contamination levels
                                                                 - 10

-------
                                                        TABLE 1  (CONTD)
                          SUMMARY OF DIRECT-READING  AIR MONITORING INSTRUMENTS
     Principle of
      Detection
   and Jvlomlonng
        Need
 Instrument
                                                         Features
                                                                                                          Limitations
  Scintillation
  Detector
     Moniiormg
     Need-
     Radiation
Radiation
Meters
*  Measures radiation in R/tir or fractions thereof
   (gamma)
   (battery operated)
*  Probe provides remote sensing capabilities
*  Accuracy and sensitivity vanes considerably with
   manufacturer and type of meter
*  A variety of meters are available.  Some measure
   total ionizing radiation; others are specific for
   gamma, alpha, or a combination of two or more
   types
Some meters do not determine type of radiation
                                                                  NOTE:  Initial entry surveys should focus on the
                                                                           presence of gamma radiation  If alpha or
                                                                           beta are suspected, consult your health
                                                                           physicist.
  Gold Film Sensor
     Monitoring
     Need-
     Mercury
     Vapor,,
                      Mercury
                      Vapor
                      Analyzer
4  Compound specific; has survey and sample modes

4  0.001 mg/nr1 detection limit

*  Provides sensor saturation  readout; saturated
   sensor cleaning capabilities

4  Can be used with dosimeters for on-site dosimctry

4  Microprocessor serves reading; automatically re-
   zeros

4  Certain units have data logging capabilities

4  5-hour batterv life
                                                                   *  Requires yearly factory recahbration

                                                                   *  Short batiery life

                                                                   *  Requires AC power for Heat Cleaning Cycle
Sources: Mathamel,  1981; Spittler, 1980; McEnery, 1982; National Mine Service Company, 1980; Gas-Tech, 1980; Enmet Corporation,
1979; Foxboro Analytical, 1982; HNU Systems,  1982,  1991;  Photovac International, Inc., 1989; Jerome, 1990; MIE, 1990.
                                                                   11

-------
                                                          TABLE 2
                     COMMON AIR  SAMPLING  METHODS AND MEDIA USED BY EPA/EKT'
CONTAMINANT
i Hydrocarbons.
BP 36-126 Deg C
| Aromatic
Halogenaied
Inorganic Acids
Alcohols
Acetic Acid
Acetaldehyde
Aliphatic Amines
Aromalic Amines
Volatile Organic
Compounds
Volatile Organic
Compounds
Polynuclear Aromatic
Hydrocarbons (PAH)
PAH
Pesticide/PCBs
Dioxin-
Meials
Formaldehyde
Formaldehyde
AIR SAMPLING
METHODS
NIOSH 1500
NIOSH 1501
NIOSH 100?
NIOSH 7903
NIOSH 1402
NIOSH 1603
NiOSH 2538
NIOSH 2010
NIOSH 2002
EPA TO1 and TO2
EPA TO 14
NIOSH 5515
NIOSH 5506
Lewis and McCleod,
Modified v
EPA TO4
EPA TO9
NIOSH 7300
NIOSH 3500
NIOSH 2541
FLOW RATE
1 L/m
1 L/m
1 L/m
1 L/m
0.5 L/m
1 L/m
1 L/m
1 L/m
1 L/m
20 cc/m
Grab 10-50 cc/m
2.5 L/m or 5 L/m
260 L/m
- 3.5 L/m
260 L/m
3 L/m
1 L/m
0.] L/m
COLLECTION MEDIA
Charcoal
Silica Gel
Charcoal
Charcoal
2-Hydroxymelhyl (2-HMP)
Pipendmc on XAD-2 Resin
Silica Gel
Silica Gel
Tenax/Carbon Molecular Sieve
(CMS)
Summa Canister
Summa Canister with Critical
Onficc
XAD-2 Resin Tube with 37 mm
2 um TeflonR Filter with
Polytetranuoroethylene (PTFE) O-
Rmg Support
2" x 1" Polyurethane Foam (PUP;
with 50 grams XAD Resin
2" x 3" PUF wuh Glass Fiber Filter
2" x 3" PUF and Glass Fiber Filter
0.8 um Mixed Cellulose Ester
Filler (MCEF)
1 um PTFE Filler and 2 Impingers.,
Each wuh 20 ml of 1 percent
Sodium Bisulfite Solution
10 percent 2-HMP on XAD-2
Resin
SAMPLE
DURATION
(HOURS) _..
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
8
if :-•
1-2
Grab. 4-12
2-R . •.,.,
8-12 ' - '
2-8
72 .., ".
2-8 " J
2-8
(\i-~,t
4-8 • .., :
1  This table is to be considered a guideline only   NIOSH methods were developed for indoor industrial use.  Most NIOSH me,t!)od.s cited Jiere
  have modified flow rates for use m outdoor ambient conditions  Sample duration should reflect extent of work shifi when iised in personaf,
  monitoring.  If area sampling is being conducted for sue characterization, sample durations may need to be modified 10 achieve desired
  detection Iimils

•  For dioxin, method is for area sampling only

  Nole: OSHA analytical methods should also be evaluated for appropriate, applicable use  Most are available on OSHA's Camp\A-efize& •?'_'.'-
  Information System (OC1S)
                                                              12

-------
                      , '  ' n\
Information Sources

Federal Regulations

  The OSHA HAZWOPER regulations are codified at 29 CFR 1910.120 (54 FR 9294 and 55 FR 14072).  Subpan
  Z, Toxic and Hazardous Substances, can be found at 29 CFR 1910.1000.

  The EPA HAZWOPER regulations are codified at 40 CFR 311 (54 FR 26654).

Computer Software

  Air Methods Database (EPA/Environmental Response Team, Edison, NJ).

  ',.  Available on the Cleanup Information electronic bulletin board (CLU-IN), formerly OSWER BBS. For
     further information, call (301) 589-8366.  Communications:  No Parity, 8 Databits, I Stopbit, F Duplex.
  I
  EPA  Heaith and Safety Planner: Software and User's Guide (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.8-01, 1990).

Fact Sheets

  Hazardous Waste  Operations and Emergency Response:  General Information  and Comparison (EPA, OSWER
  PuWieation 9285.2-09FS, 1991).

  ;   Explains the scope and purpose of the HAZWOPER standards, and distinguishes the SARA Title 1 standards
  ',  __from regulations and consensus  standards covering the same or similar subject matter.

  Hazardous Waste  Operations and Emergency Response: Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites and RCRA
  Corrective Action  (EPA, OSWER Publication  9285.2-08FS, 1991).
  i
  __Explains the principle HAZWOPER requirements as they apply to employees engaged in hazardous waste
     operations and  emergency response at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites, including employees who perform
  >  corrective actions at RCRA TSD facilities.                   _ ,
  I                                                              '-                            -
  Hazardous Waste  Operations and Emergency Response:  RCRA TSD and Emergency Response Without Regard
  to_Location (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.2-07FS, 1991).         ____

    ^Describes the HAZWOPER planning, training, and medical-surveillance -requirements as they apply to
     emergency responders regardless of location, and employees who perform routine hazardous waste operations
     at RCRA TSD facilities.                                          ______
   i
  Establishing Work Zones at Uncontrolled Hazardous Waste Sites (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.2-06FS,
  1&91).
     Defines the different work zones usually found at a hazardous waste site (i.e., Exclusion, Contamination
   _Rjeductipn, and Support) and. provides, information on selecting and maintaining-w&cfc-zones.

  Hazardous Waste  Operations and Emergency Response: Available Guidance (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.2-
       '       '
     Provides a list and description of computer software, fact sheets, guidance documents, and ERT training
     programs that pertain to the worker protection standards.

General Hearth and Safety Guidance Documents

  Standard Operating Safety Guides (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.1-03, 1992).
     Provide guidelines for use by any organization in developing specific operation safety procedures. These
     Guides should be adapted to address the safety criteria required for protection of response personnel from
     the hazards created by a specific operation or incident.
                                                  13

-------
  Standard Operating Procedures for Air Sampling and Monitoring at Emergency Responses (EPA, OSWER
  Publication 9285.2-03A, draft).
     Describes the types and methods of air surveillance, procedures and equipment for air monitoring, and'a-t.. »IC
     method for analyzing organic solvents  by gas chromatography.

  Standard Operating Procedures for Site Safety Planning (EPA, OSWER Publication 9285.2-05, being updated).

     Describes the general requirements for a site safety plan, discusses development and implementation of a site
     safety plan, and provides sample plans and a checklist.

  Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities (N1OSH/OSHA/
  USCG/EPA, N1OSH Publication 85-115,  GPO No. 017-033-00419-6, 1985).

  Draft International Document on Guide to Portable Instruments for Assessing Airborne Pollutants Arising from
  Hazardous Wastes (U.S. .National Working Group (NWG-4 OIML) Pilot Secretariat PS-17: "Measuremeni of
  Pollution."  Reporting Secretariat RS-5:  "Measuremeni of Hazardous Waste Pollution."  ISBN: 0-936712-75-9).
     Provides guidance for using portable instruments  to assess airborne pollutants arising from hazardous waste.

  Procedures for Conducting Air Pathway Analyses for Superfund Applications addresses a variety of issues
  relevant to the air impacts at Superfund siies in four volumes entitled:

     Volume 1:  Application  of Air Pathway Analyses for Superfund Applications (EPA, EPA-450/1-89-001, NT1S  ,  -
     PB90 113374/AS, 1989).                                                                         ,     '
     Volume II:  Estimation of Baseline Air Emissions at Superfund Sites (EPA, EPA-450/1-89-002, NTIS PB89     ;
     18053/AS, 1989).
                                                                                                       ' i;
     Volume HI: Estimation of Air Emissions from Clcan-up Activities at Superfund Sites (EPA, EPA-450/1-89-003,
     NTIS PB89 180061/AS, 1989).                                                   .                ,    5r

    "Volume TV: Procedures for Dispersion Modeling and Air Monitoring for Superfund Air Pathway Analysis (EPA^ -''
    fEPA-450/l-89-004, NTIS PB90 113382/AS,'1989).                     -                         '      ''"'":

Standard Air Sampling Method Documentation                                                '      '•' '-''-' l
                                                                                                  ~     V
  OSHA Analytical Methods.  The OSHA Technical Center maintains an  updated data base of analytical testing
  methods. Printouts of analytical methods for individual chemicals are available by request. For more     ; '  "  :
  information about the data base, contact:                                                       ''   -'-.--
                                                                                                    " i ' * }
                                                                                                      l r-'
     OSHA Technical Center                                                                       •   ,; ,c
     1781 South 300 West    •                                                                      ':~"v;
     Sal! Lake City, UT 84115
     (801)487-0521                                                                            ,,;  .,  ,v;

  Occupational Exposure Sampling Strategy Manual (Leidel, N.A., K.A. Busch, and J.R. Lynch.  U.S: Department-'
  of Health, Education, and Welfare, Publ.(NIOSH) pp. 77-173, 1979).                                  , -.~  -;:

  Manual of Analytical Methods (Volumes  1-3, 3rd Ed., with supplements) (NIOSH Publication  89-127, 1989). ;• '•

Recommended Exposure Limit Documentation                                                     ..-•, :- '.

  1991-1992 Threshold Limit Values for Chemical Substances and Physical Agents and Biological Exposure ••:•-'•
  Indices (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,  1991).                         ,.  ,'•;.::

  Guide to Occupational Exposure Values-1992 (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,
  1QQ1\                                                                             , .   *»-.»>... . •;:tf-u
  J ""* )•  , ,;«•«,"<»s.

  NIOSH Pocket Guide to  Chemical Hazards (NIOSH Publication 90-117, updated annually).

                                                  • 14

-------
Contacts
The following contacts can provide additional information on air monitoring and air sampling at uncontrolled
hazardous waste sites:
American Industrial Hygiene
Association (AIHA)
Washington. D.C.
2700 Prosperity Avenue
Suite 250
Fairfax, Virginia 22031
(703,) 8,49-88S8.    %   , .
U.S. EPA      -    '     -,   .
Environmental Response Team
2890 Woodbridge Avenue,
Building-18 (MS-101)
Edison, NJ 08837-3679
(908) 321-6740
,24,Hour Hotline: (908) 321-6660
OSHA
U.S Department of Labor
200 Constitution Avenue, NW
Room N-3647
Washington DC  20210
(202) 219-8036

OSHA ratification Service
(Complaint Hotline) fof'Emergency
Situations:  1-800-321-6*742
                                       EPA REGIONAL OFFICES
   EPA Region' 1                '      ''
   Emergency Planning and Response Branch
   60 Westview Street     ,,   <,'.-.
   Lexington, MA 02173
   (617) 860-4367

   EPA Region 2
   Response and Prevention Branch,  ,.
   2890 Woodbridge Avenue, Raritan Depot
   Building 209
   Edison, NJ  08837
   (908) 321-6656

   EPA Region 3
   Superfund Removal Branch
   841 Chestnut Street, 9th Floor
   Philadelphia, PA  19107
   (215) 597-0992

   EPA Region 4
   Emergency Response and Removal Branch
   345-iCotmiand Street, NE -  '  - -
   1st Floor
   Atlanta, GA 30365
   (404) 347-3931     '                   <;

   EPA Region 5
   Emergency and Enforcement Response Branch
   77 West Jackson Boulevard
   Chicago, IL  60604
   (312) 353-9295
                  lvEPA Region 6
                    Emergency Response Branch
                    1145 Ross-Avenue, 9th Floor
                    Dallas, TX 75202-2733
                    (214) 655-2270

                    EPA Region 7
                    Emergency^Planning and Response Branch
                    25 Funston Road, 2nd Floor
                    Kansas City, KS  66115
                    (913) 55
                    EPA Region .$•
                    Emergency Response Branch
                    999 18th Street, Suite 500
                    Denver, CO 80202-2405
                    (303) 924-7129

                    EPA Region 9
                    Field  Operations Branch
                    75 Hawthorne Street
                    San Francisco, CA 94105'"'™
                   "(415)744-2353

                    EPA Region 10
                    Superfund Branch
                    1200 6th Avenue,  llth Floor
                    Seattle, WA 98101
                    (206) 553-1677
                                                  15

-------
                                          OSHA REGIONAL OFFICES
        Region 1 (CT, MA, ME, NH, Rl, VT)
        133 Portland Street, 1st Floor
        Boston, MA  12114
        (617) 565-7164

        Region 2  (NJ, NY, PR, VI)
        201 Vanck Street, Room 670
        New York, NY  10014
        (212) 337-2378

        Region 3  (DC, DE, MD, PA, VA, WV)
        Gateway building. Suite 2100
        3535 Market Street
        Philadelphia, PA 19104
        (215) 596-1201

        Region 4  (AL, FL, GA, KY, MS, NC, SC, TN)
        1375 Peachtree Street, N.E.
        Suite 587
        Atlanta, GA  30367
        (404) 347-3573

        Region 5  (IL, IN, MI, MN, OH, WI)
        230 South Dearborn Street, Room 3244
        Chicago, IL 60604
        (312) 353-2220
Region 6  (AR, LA, NM, OK, TX)
525 Griffin Street, Room 602
Dallas, TX  75202
(214) 767-4731

Region 7   (IA, KS, MO, NE)
911 Walnut Street, Room 406
Kansas City, MO 64106
(816) 426-5861

Region 8   (CO, MT, ND, SD, UT, WY)
Federal Building, Room 1576
1961 Stout Street
Denver, CO 80294
(303) 844-3061

Region 9  (American Samoa,  AZ, CA, Guam,
HI, NV, Trust Territories of the Pacific)
71 Stevenson Street, Room 415
San Francisco, CA  94105
(415) 744-6670

Region 10(AK, ID,  OR, WA)
1111 Third Avenue, Suite  715
Seattle, WA 98101-3212
(206) 553-5930
&EPA
     United States
     Environmental Protection
     Agency
     Washington. DC 20460
     Official Business
     Penalty for Private Use
     S300

-------